JP2024055981A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means may at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that they have won a lottery depending on the content of the variable presentation that is being executed.

JP 2006-345901 A

In gaming machines like the one above, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and has a means capable of generating a specific gaming state based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, a second entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter and which is different from the first entry means, a displacement means capable of displacing the second entry means between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the second entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second entry means than the first position, The gaming machine has a displacement control means capable of at least performing a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the first position to the second position, and the displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific gaming state, and execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control, and the gaming machine is configured to provide a player with a predetermined value when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entry into the second ball entry means can occur.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is provided a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and a means capable of generating a specific gaming state based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, a second ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter and which is different from the first ball entry means, a displacement means capable of displacing the second ball entry means between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first position, and a displacement means capable of displacing the second ball entry means between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine has a displacement control means capable of at least a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at a position to the first position, and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the first position to the second position, the displacement control means being configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific gaming state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control, the gaming machine being configured to award a predetermined value to a player when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, and being configured so that at least a first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entry into the second ball entry means can occur.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. 6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as seen in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6 . 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as seen in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7 . FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. 14(a). FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17A is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A. FIG. FIG. 18A is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 18B is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in FIG. 4A and 4B are front views of the release member and the rotating claw member. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). A partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in Figure 38. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 13A is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, FIG. 13B is a side view of a rotating plate member, and FIG. 13C is a side view of a release member. 4A and 4B are side views of the release member, the rotating plate member, and the slide claw member. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). FIG. 13 is a side view of the tilting device according to the third embodiment. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. FIG. 13 is a side view of the tilting device according to the fourth embodiment. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the lower frame member and the vibration device. 59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is a partial top view of the lower frame member taken in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a transmission device 5410 and a housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 4A is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a second transmission member of the left disk cam. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 13A is a front view of a right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 74(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). 76(a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in Figure 78(a), (c) is a front view of the right disc cam, (d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in Figure 78(c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Figure 78(e). 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the state (deployed) in which the inner frame is open relative to the outer frame and the back pack is open relative to the inner frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame closed against the outer frame and the front frame open (deployed). This is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. 1 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, showing components arranged below the window portion of the front frame in exploded view; FIG. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, showing the components arranged below the window portion of the front frame in an exploded view; FIG. 1A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member, showing the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member side by side. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 96(a) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(a), (c) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member and the harness, and (d) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(c). 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the front frame, inner frame, binding movable member and harness, which diagrammatically illustrate the binding movable member and harness. FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region. FIG. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a). 1A is a side view of the right panel unit, FIG. 1B is a rear view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 1C is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light-guiding member taken along line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a). FIG. 4 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. 1A is a rear view of the front assembly, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in Figure 124(a), (c) is a top view of the speaker assembly taken along the direction of arrow CXXIVc in Figure 124(a), and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly taken along the direction of arrow CXXIVd in Figure 124(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame and upper edge plate member taken along line CXXVa-CXXVa in Figure 124(a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame and upper edge plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb in Figure 124(a). FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the game board and inner frame. (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). 1A and 1B are side views of a board support device and a game board, each of which is a schematic diagram showing the board support device and the game board. 4A is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. 4A is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. FIG. FIG. 4A and 4B are side views of the board surface support device. 4A and 4B are side views of the board surface support device. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. FIG. FIG. 1A is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. 1A and 1B are exploded front perspective views of a ball launching unit. 1A to 1C are front views of the ball launching unit showing the ball delivery status by the ball delivery device in chronological order. FIG. (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in Figure 146 (a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state shown in FIG. 147(a). A partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after the ball is launched. FIG. This is an exploded front oblique view of the performance operation unit. This is an exploded front oblique view of the performance operation unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the performance operation unit. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the petal movement device taken along line CLIV-CLIV in Figure 153. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal movement device. FIG. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member, and the slide member, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member, and the slide member. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. 4A and 4B are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotation device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device, the driving arm member, and the driven arm member. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the back panel, side base material, and second performance member. An exploded front oblique view of the drive side arm member, slide plate, and second performance member. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a ninth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. A front view of the inner frame and dish passage forming member in the 11th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13A and 13B are partial enlarged front views of the foul ball passage. A partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage. FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device according to the twelfth embodiment. 1A and 1B are front views of a petal movement device. 4A and 4B are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. FIG. 1A and 1B are front views of a petal movement device. FIG. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in a modification of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. FIG. 23 is a front oblique view of the operating device according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. 1A and 1B are front perspective views of an operating device. (a) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in Figure 203(a), (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in Figure 203(a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in Figure 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. 15A is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 15B and 15C are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of a right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents an upwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVIb of Figure 206(a), (c) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents a downwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVIc of Figure 206(a), (d) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents a downwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVId of Figure 206(a), and (e) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents an upwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVIe of Figure 206(a). A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing and character J0 appears from display area C. (a) is a figure showing the display mode when four reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third pattern and the no-empty recommended value does not increase, and (b) is a figure showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls increases further from the state shown in Figure 6(a) and exceeds the recommended value. (a) is a diagram showing the display state when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) is a diagram showing the display state when character J0 in display area C indicates the optimal number of reserved balls according to the situation. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when character J1 is displayed in display area C while the third pattern is changing, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when there is a change in the reserved ball while the third pattern is changing and character J2 is displayed in display area C. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C changes when an over-winning event occurs. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player is allowed to accumulate the number of reserved balls up to six during a reach, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls has accumulated to six and the pattern arrangement has changed. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode of the lucky display for the previous jackpot pending, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player presses the button after the number of pending balls has accumulated to six. 13A is a diagram showing the display mode of the performance during the long opening, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display mode of the variable performance when the long opening is won. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the special pattern jackpot random number table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable pattern selection table in the first control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the normal jackpot random number table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing an example of a time-saving fluctuation pattern selection table, which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a winning command table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a hold change selection table in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a hold presentation mode selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the normal reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the predicted A mode reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a reserve lid range selection table at the time of short-term winning in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a reserve lid range selection table during a reach performance in the first control example. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a reserved lid command selection table in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a reserved lid color change selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a lucky reserved command table in the first control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a reserved character selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a reserved character change table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the speech bubble selection table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the normal speech bubble selection table in the first control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the preview A speech bubble selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the preview B speech bubble selection table in the first control example. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a speech bubble table at the time of short-term winning in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a speech bubble table during reach performance in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a lucky reserved bubble selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a reach-in-progress performance lottery table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a reach start time calculation table in the first control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern reception processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a lucky display determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the reach-in-hold performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the reservation lid setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the reserved character setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the bubble lid setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the short-term winning determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the lucky hold storage process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the short-term winning management processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the reach-in-hold performance management processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the sensor input processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the preview display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the mode switching processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the reserved lid command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the reserved character display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a balloon display process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a second control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow of special pattern changes and continuous performances in the second control example. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between continuous performance and background display in the second control example. 13A is a display mode showing the display screen during a continuous performance in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a display mode showing the display screen during a special performance in the second control example. A display mode showing background changes during continuous performance in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. This is a flowchart showing the start winning processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a second read-ahead process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the stop command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the continuous performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the performance return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the performance setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the continuous performance return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing special effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A front view of a pachinko machine in a fourth control example. 13A is a diagram showing the display screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example. 13A is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power is turned on in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a variable game screen for the first spin after power is turned on in the fourth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a volume table in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing start-up process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the initial volume setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A flowchart showing the volume setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing volume-related processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13A is a diagram showing a storage error A screen when the power is turned on in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a storage error B screen during game operation in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. 13 is a timing chart showing a retry operation in the tilting device. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing an operation performance selection table in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a tilting action scenario table in the fifth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a tilting operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a tilting operation scenario B table in the fifth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the origin detection operation table A in the fifth control example, FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the origin detection operation table B in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram showing the tilt initial operation table in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the start-up processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing sensor input processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a retry process during touch input executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a tilt device control process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing the operation performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the tilt initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the processing during operation performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the performance return operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the retry operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 346(a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the reserved balls change to the jackpot A and the third pattern is changing, and FIG. 346(b) is a diagram showing the display mode when one more reserved ball is consumed from the state of FIG. 346(a) to become the jackpot A. 346(b) is a diagram showing the display state during super time when one more reserved ball is consumed from the state of FIG. 346(b), and FIG. 347(b) is a diagram showing the display state when one more reserved ball is consumed from the state of FIG. 347(a) and a jackpot is obtained with this change. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode during a chance period, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode during a chance period. 13A is a diagram showing the display mode when a big win starts, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display mode of the presentation of the first round of the big win. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when notifying the player that there is a button effect during a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when notifying the player that a special jackpot has been awarded by pressing the button from the state shown in Figure 350(a). 13A is a diagram showing the display state when the jackpot ends, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display state when the jackpot ends and a probability mode is entered. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing command judgment processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the stopped pattern switching process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the stopped pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related command reception processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the opening processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the big prize ball winning processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the round processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the ending processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/performance process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the stopping pattern replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the game status setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the big prize processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a figure showing the display mode during the performance when a long opening is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing the display mode during the long opening performance in the seventh control example. A figure showing the display mode during long opening effect restriction in the seventh control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a seventh control example. A flowchart showing the long opening performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing long release related processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventh control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in an eighth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display screen and BGM when the power is turned off in the eighth control example. 13A is a diagram showing the display mode when the power is turned on, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the return fluctuation after the initial setting is completed. This is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of background change according to the timing of the background change operation during special chart change. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode when a background change operation is performed during slow fluctuation of a special chart, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode when the background is changed in the next fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when an 8-item reserved effect is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode for the first change after an 8-item reserved effect is executed. FIG. 1 shows an example of the display mode when a new winning occurs after the eight-piece reserved presentation has been executed, and (a) shows an example of the display mode for the first change after the eight-piece reserved presentation has been executed and a new winning occurs. A figure showing an example of the display mode for the end of the 8-item reserved presentation. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special effect selection table in the eighth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the vibration pattern data in the eighth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the 8-item reserve lottery table in the eighth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the eighth control example. A schematic diagram showing an eight-stage performance scenario selection table in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the start-up processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the pending number control process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the pending number display update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the SW performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the background change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the sensor input processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing a mode identification process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an eighth control example. A flowchart showing the lamp setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 8 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an eight-item display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold display process executed by an MPU in a display control device in an eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process 8 executed by an MPU in a display control device in an eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a background preview selection table in the 9th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a silhouette effect is executed in sea mode, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a silhouette effect is executed in mountain mode. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing background change processing 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. A flowchart showing a customer waiting setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A flowchart showing customer waiting performance processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. A schematic diagram showing a crack effect selection table in the tenth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a tenth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A flowchart showing the crack effect end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A flowchart showing the SW performance processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process 10 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a tenth control example.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIG. 1 to FIG.
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine").
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell of which is formed by combining wooden frames into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side on which the opening and closing is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is detachably attached from the back side to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided.
(See Figure 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side, and the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top that protrudes to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, connected to a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the screen (see page 13) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
(See reference) At the upper left, there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29 to 33 to create a more brilliant appearance.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball 10, there are provided an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 which are operated by a player to hit a ball into the front of the game board 13. The operating device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The handle 51 is fitted with a touch sensor 51a and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is provided with a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67,
The display unit 80 is assembled to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.
0 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through a window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
The structure of the game board 13 will be described below with reference mainly to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning slots and the like are located,
The area into which the launched ball flows.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the top of the outer rail 62 (upper left of FIG. 2 ) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 2 ) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area as viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 2), first symbol display devices 37A, 37B equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display are disposed. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information whether a ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 65.
The system is configured to be used depending on whether a prize is won at the prize slot 640.
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated.
When the ball enters the second winning port 640, the first pattern display device 37B is configured to be activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors.
The ED is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light emission colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot 64 and the second prize slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it judges there is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be judged here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only will the stopping pattern after the change indicate whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. Also, a "15R normal jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state and also results in a time-saving state for a specified number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 fluctuations).

Moreover, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during the probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The high probability state (during the probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described later is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than in the probability change. Furthermore, the time-saving state (during the time-saving state) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a hit of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change state nor a time-saving state (
Neither the probability of winning the jackpot nor the probability of winning the second symbol has increased.

During the probability of winning or the time limit, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the second winning slot 64
The time for which the electric role 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and is set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric role 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than when the electric role 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big win lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability variation or time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second winning port 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times that the electric role 640a opens per win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the second winning port 640
At least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 640a is opened per one win may be changed. Also, during the probability variation or the time reduction, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 640a is opened per one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be higher than during the normal period.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, into which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winning the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 (initial winning), and displays the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.
The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the through gate 67, and a second pattern display device (not shown) made up of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric device 640a attached to the second winning hole 640.
is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability variable or time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variable or time-saving mode, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal game state.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and the player is given more chances to open the electric device 640a of the second winning port 640. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning port 640.

In addition, if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning slot 640 during the probability variation or time reduction by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for one win, etc., the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed is set shorter during the probability variation or time reduction than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gates 67, a lottery for a second symbol is held. After the lottery for a second symbol is held, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a miss, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is also displayed by turning on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reserved lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.
The lighting of the symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
The number of the first pattern display device 37A is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. The position where the through gate 67 is attached is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example.
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the second symbol reserved lamp does not need to be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can win is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball wins into this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 as viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first winning hole 640.
Shown by the pattern display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640; however, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 640a is in an open state (expanded state) so that the ball cannot enter the second winning opening 640.
This makes it easier to get into the 40.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The pattern becomes easier to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric role 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time reduction, the time that the electric role 640a is open becomes longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability variation and time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than during normal times.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a jackpot.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric device associated with the second winning port 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the first winning port 64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot").
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by winning through the first winning slot 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the probability variation or time reduction, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the second winning port 64
Since the electric device 640a associated with number 0 is likely to be in an open state and it is easy to win at the second winning port 640, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port 640, resulting in a 15R guaranteed jackpot.

In addition, since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting from the right" and for the second winning hole 640 by "hitting from the left". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment does not require the player to change the way of shooting the ball between "hitting from the left" and "hitting from the right" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way of shooting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in its approximate center. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery held due to a winning entry into the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit up to show the jackpot stopping pattern, and the stopping pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which it is easier for the ball to win. In this special game state,
The specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

An attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the stamps, etc. affixed to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

A large number of nails are set on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in Fig. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (Fig. 255) when the power supply is cut off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up processing (Fig. 254) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (Fig. 253) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern hold lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close to the front side using the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric gimmick are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is the same as the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352 .

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 11 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the game.
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby
1 can be coordinated with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown).
A voltage of 4 volts is input to the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
The inverter generates a 12-volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., with these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG.
00 is positioned in the left-right center of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (i.e., the left-right center of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed in by a player, and is disposed in an area defined by a storage recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the storage recess 17a, a gap is provided that is at least large enough for the player's fingers to comfortably fit in. This allows the player to prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by positioning his/her fingertips on the inner side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

In addition, since the player holds the operating handle 51 with his/her right hand, the tilt device 310 is often operated with his/her left hand. Therefore, the following explanation will be given on the assumption that the player operates the tilt device 310 with his/her left hand.

FIG. 6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a partial front view of the VI of FIG.
7A is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line VIb-VIb.
7(b) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a). FIG.

6 and 7 partially illustrate the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. Note that Fig. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilt device 310 is disposed in a first state (initial state in this embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the up-down direction, and Fig. 7 illustrates a state in which the tilt device 310 is disposed in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and backward by rising from the first state around the shaft portion 314. Note that Fig. 7 illustrates an example of a player's hand operating the tilt device 310 with an imaginary line.

The tilt device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press the button") is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
This is what the player does when appears.

Here, for example, when the tilt device 310 is pressed by dropping the hand forcefully downward, as in the case of pressing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 shifts toward the front depending on the degree of tilt, and the palm of the hand and the operation surface 312a1 are likely to rub against each other. This gives the player a sense of discomfort, and makes it possible to inhibit the player from performing the pressing operation by dropping the hand forcefully downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertips near the axis 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm of the hand downward using the fingertips as a fulcrum, the user can comfortably press and operate the tilting device 310 while keeping the palm integrated with the operating surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate the device by lowering the palm downward using the fingertips as a fulcrum, rather than dropping the hand forcefully downward. This reduces the degree of impact applied to the tilt device 310 by the player's operation, and reduces the possibility of damaging the tilt device 310.

The difference in appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's viewpoint will be described with reference to Fig. 8 and Fig. 9. Fig. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in Fig. 6, and Fig. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in Fig. 7. Note that in Fig. 8 and Fig. 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. Also, in Fig. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing in the tilting device 310 to operate it is illustrated by imaginary lines.

8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilt device 310 is visible from the player's viewpoint in the first state, but is reduced in area to the extent that it is not visible in the second state (the operation surface 312a1 is directed outward from the player's viewpoint).
This allows the tilting device 310 to look significantly different between the first and second states.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
1i is configured in such a manner that the area of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 gradually increases, and accordingly, the amount of light of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 is visually recognized as gradually increasing.
The difference in the amount of light (degree of brightness) visible to the player becomes greater between the first and second states, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first and second states.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the axis 314 of the tilting device 310 (see Figure 7) and lowering the palm of the hand downward using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pressed and operated while keeping the palm integrated with the operating surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward using the outer side part of the little finger as a fulcrum, rather than dropping the hand downward with force.
This reduces the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation, and reduces the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and Fig. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in Fig. 10, the operation device 300 is supported so as to be rotatable about a shaft portion 314 on which a tilting device 310 is disposed at a rear end portion.

As shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies a straight impact to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324L that detect a push-in operation from the first state are provided.
4R is disposed outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that provides the driving force, etc., on the outside of the lower frame member 320, it is possible to use a large area inside the lower frame member 320 and accommodate the tilting device 310 in the lower frame member 320.
A large amount of movement of the tilting device 310 can be ensured.

FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG.
12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having ring members BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear end (the end at the back side of the paper in FIG. 12), a lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below and that determines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a member having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and that is disposed opposite the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner that the tilting member 310 is disposed between the lower frame member 320 and the tilting device 310.
The tilting device 310 includes an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, a drive unit 340 that is fastened to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and transmits a drive force to the tilting device 310 via an arm member 345 that constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310, and a protective cover device 340 that is fastened to the drive unit 340 and protects the drive unit 340 by covering it from three sides, i.e., the left and right directions and the rear.
50 and mainly.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the front side, and the horizontal portion 322 is configured from a plate-shaped member that is horizontally disposed at the upper end of the back side of the bottom plate portion 321.
22, a lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion that is open upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R which are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides below the bottom plate portion 321.
and an opening 325 which is an opening formed by removing a portion of the bottom plate portion 321 located below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321 .

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the movement end of the tilting device 310 by abutting against the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 is inserted into the bottom plate portion 321.
21 can pass therethrough.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a formed in the center of the front side, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
and insertion holes 321c formed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the support 321.

The transmission hole 321a is disposed in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed with a size that allows the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 with the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 protruding below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is provided with detection pieces 311gL and 311gL projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
gR can be inserted through the detection hole 321b.
The position of the tilt device 310 can be detected by arranging the detection sensors 324L and 324R in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 311gL and 311gR.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to be large enough to insert the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive unit 340, and a through hole is formed to a position where interference with the arm member 345 can be avoided when the drive unit 340 is operated.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive unit 340, and is provided with a locking portion 322a extending upward from its upper surface and having a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move rearward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction that moves the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310.
1 so that the distance (position of the detection groove) from the left and right is equal.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor refers to a sensor that has a light-projecting section that projects light and a light-receiving section that receives light from the light-projecting section, and is arranged in an approximately U-shape with a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotating claw members 347, and the like to enter into the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width of the opening 325 is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, in terms of the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to dispose the LED device 341f so as to protrude upward and forward (see FIG. 17B), the LED device 341f is located in the opening 325.
3, the driving device 340 is pushed upward after passing through the LED device 341.
f can be disposed above the opening 325, and the LED device 341 f can be rotated from the rotating claw member 34
The vertical width of the opening 325 can be made shorter than the vertical width including the first and second openings 11 to 7.

The upper frame member 330 mainly comprises an opening 331 which is an opening large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and an upper bearing portion 332 which is arranged opposite the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320, is configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom, and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 mainly comprises a main body cover 351 which is configured to be separable in the vertical direction so as to cover three directions except the front side and which is fastened and fixed to the lower end of the drive device 340, a voice coil motor 352 which is supported on the bottom plate of the main body cover 351 and is arranged on the front side with its vibration surface facing diagonally upward toward the front, and a left side detection sensor 353L and a right side detection sensor 353R which are detection sensors having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351.

In addition, FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make visible the right detection sensor 353R, which is disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the center.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibration surface that faces the lower frame member 3.
20. In this way, when the tilting device 310 extends downward through the transmission hole 321 a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340.
44R is disposed inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are connected to the detection sensors 353L, 353R.
It is possible to detect whether the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in a specific phase by detecting whether the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in the detection grooves of the detection grooves 53R or not.

In this embodiment, the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive unit 340 have the detection holes 344eL, 344eR at different phases.
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS.
14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVc in FIG.
15 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along line -XIVc. Fig. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting device 310, and Fig. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 , tilting device 310 comprises case body 311 configured as a box-like body with a sector-shaped side and openings at the top and bottom, lid 312 fastened and fixed to case body 311 in a manner that covers the upper opening of case body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of lid 312 and hanging down, shaft portion 314 disposed in a manner that it is sandwiched between rear end portions of case body 311 and lid 312, torsion spring 315 wound around shaft portion 314, and case body 312 fastened and fixed to the rear end portions of case body 311 and lid 312.
11 and the lid 312 inseparably fixed to each other, and a ring member BR1 having a ring shape.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b that is opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, a cylindrical shaft portion 311c that is extended toward the center in the left-right direction from flanges that protrude downward along the left and right edges of the opening 311b, a recessed portion 311d that is a recess with a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end, insertion grooves 311e that are grooves that are positioned so that both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped groove 311f that supports the torsion spring 315. 15), a pair of left and right detection pieces 311gL and 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a, an extension portion 311h extending a predetermined amount forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, a protective lens member 311i disposed above the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, shaped along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and made of a light-transmitting material, and a protruding protrusion portion 311j protruding downward from the left-right center of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by a player, the bottom plate portion 311a is pushed by the lower frame member 3
This is the portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the housing 20 .

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is inserted into a guide hole 3 of an arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340.
45b and serves as a part for transmitting driving force between the drive unit 340 and the drive unit 340.

The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are respectively inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see Figure 15) of the lower frame member 320, and the left side detection piece 311gL has a longer protruding length than the right side detection piece 311gR.

In this embodiment, the left detection piece 311gL protrudes compared to the right detection piece 311gR so that the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL, centered on the shaft 314, is approximately 3° (the rotation angle by which the tilting device 310 rotates from the first state (see Figure 22) to the end of push-in (see Figure 23)).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that protrudes forward from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i and is configured to protrude to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).

The protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14(a)).
14(c) ) and is configured in a curved shape when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 14(c) ). This configuration makes it easy for the load generated when the player presses the tilting device 310 to escape (flow easily).
This can improve the durability of the tilting device 310.

The protruding portion 311j is provided at a right angle protruding from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
When it is pushed in (see FIG. 29 ), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a and its tip projects downward from the lower frame member 320 .

As shown in FIG. 16, the cover 312 is made up of a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b.
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a and the LED device 34 is fixed to the top plate member 312a in the first state (see FIG. 6).
and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape large enough to surround the nozzle 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 through its axial rigidity, and is arranged in such a manner that in the first state (see Figure 6), due to its positional relationship, the light irradiated from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is confined inside the cylindrical member 312c, while in the second state (see Figure 7), such limitation is lifted and light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide area.

The lens member 313 is formed from a light-transmitting material, with the upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange-like shape, the extended ends being configured in a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i, and having a spherical shell portion 313a formed in the center in a spherical shell shape.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft 314 with a pair of left and right torsional portions, and includes two arms 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsional portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsional portions.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18.
17(b) is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a); and FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 340.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 , the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a framework by bending a plate-shaped metal member, a drive motor 342 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a drive force, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (
A left disc cam 344L, a right disc cam 344R, and a connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344
a release member 346 that is supported on the shaft 341c of the main body member 341 and that abuts against the first overhang 344c1 and the second overhang 344c3 of the disc cam 344 in the rotational direction; a rotating claw member 347 that is supported on the same axis as the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates; a first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction that tilts the rotating claw member 347 downward;
and a second spring SP2 which is a torsion spring member that generates a biasing force between the rotary claw member 347 and the rotary claw member 347 in a direction in which the rotary claw member 347 moves away from the first spring SP2.

The main body member 341 is bent backwards at the left and right sides to form a motor housing portion 3 having a U-shape when viewed from above.
41a, a shaft support hole 341b that is drilled at the same position of the plate portion that is arranged opposite to the motor housing portion 341a and that supports the disk cam 344, a shaft portion 341c that is protruding in the left-right direction at a position shifted toward the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a manner that the shaft portion 341c has an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d that is extended from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a lighting support portion 341 that is extended in the front upper direction from the motor housing portion 341a.
and an LED device 341f that is disposed on the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and has an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface that refracts light (
This allows the light from the LED device 341f to be emitted evenly both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is disposed inside the motor housing portion 341 a in the U-shape.
1a。 1a is fastened to a fixing member 342a.

The fixed member 342a axially supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 mainly comprises a support hole 345a which is bored in a circular shape at one end and is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a guide hole 345b which is bored in a rectangular shape at the other end and through which the shaft portion 311c (see Figure 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end opposite the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is formed at a position sufficient to allow the disc cam 344 to rotate one or more revolutions.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 comprises a cylindrical member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see Fig. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a drive motor 342 which is supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
The cylindrical member 343a is provided with a transmission gear 343b that meshes with the rotating gear, a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section, which fix the disk cam 344 to both ends.
The right fixed portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixed portion 343a1.
The length of the spring 43c is such that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
and a clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at circumferential positions about the axial center from a surface arranged opposite the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (freely rotate) relative to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c is provided with an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 and that has projections and recesses along the axial direction at circumferential positions about the axial center from a surface that is disposed opposite the transmission gear 343b.

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have a top angle of about 100.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion of 90°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 is D-shaped in cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
3a. By rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

The movable clutch 343c is normally biased by the force of the coil spring 343d.
On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed part 343b is engaged with the movable clutch 343b2.
43a2 and is configured to be movable away from the transmission gear 343b along the axis 43a2.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. The left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other, and the only difference is that the detection hole 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other.
Since only the positions 44eL and 344eR are shown, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

Fig. 20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa in Fig. 18, and Fig. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in Fig. 18. Note that Figs. 20(a) and 20(b) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in Fig. 18.

As shown in FIG. 20(a) and FIG. 20(b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a circular disk. The left disk cam 344L has a central shaft portion 344a projecting inward in a cylindrical shape at the center position of the disk, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a rib projecting inward from the outside of the circular rib 344b as a rib having a lower height than the circular rib 344b.
The engagement rib 344c has a portion that protrudes radially outward at a certain point, and the circular rib 344b
and the engaging rib 344c, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding outwardly between the arm member 3
18, and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position that forms an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that is a mirror image of the left disc cam 344L.

The central shaft portion 344a has an inner periphery that engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
The disk cam 344 is configured in a U-shape and its outer periphery is configured to be fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is provided in a protruding manner to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disk cam 344 is journaled in the journal hole 341b. This makes it possible to prevent the disk cam 344 from being misaligned.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c includes a first protruding portion 344c1 that protrudes outward in the radial direction at a position shifted by 80° in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed, a first retracted portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position shifted by an angle θ1 (angle θ1=50° in this embodiment) from the first protruding portion 344c1, a second protruding portion 344c3 that protrudes outward in the radial direction again at a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment) from the first protruding portion 344c1, and the second protruding portion 344c3.
and a second recessed portion 344c4 recessed radially inward at a position shifted from the recessed portion 344 by an angle θ3 (in this embodiment, the angle θ3=20°).

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is disposed at a position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the central shaft portion 344a to the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to Fig. 21. The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are disposed in a left-right pair and have the same configuration on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that Fig. 21(a) illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 346, and Fig. 21(b) illustrates a small angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 346.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates upon contact with the disc cam 344 is between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is positioned at the middle position of the long guide hole 347b) (see Figure 35).

As shown in Figures 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed from a roughly rectangular plate member, and mainly comprises an axle support hole 346a supported on the axle portion 341c (see Figure 18), a protruding pin 346b that is protruding in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the axle support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and an engagement portion 346d that is configured as a portion that protrudes with the maximum diameter from the axle support hole 346a.

The engaging portion 346d is engaged with the engaging rib 34 of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
4c (see FIG. 20).
By forming the outer periphery of d to be curved, it is possible to smoothly abut against the engaging rib 344.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape, and includes a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), a guide elongated hole 347b that is drilled so as to be able to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 along an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a (drilled with a size that includes the movement path of the protruding pin 346b on the inside), and a second spring SP2.
The shaft support hole 347a mainly comprises an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the shaft support hole 347a is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d that protrudes downward in a hook-like shape at the end opposite the shaft support hole 347a, and a pull-down hole 347e that is drilled so that the end of the first spring (see Figure 18) can be inserted.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in Fig. 21(a), the release member 346 is disposed at an end position in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Fig. 21(a)) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the pushing down direction to the engaging portion 346d, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate together in the rearward rotation direction, whereas in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the pushing up direction to the engaging portion 346d, only the release member 346 rotates, and the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained until the small angle state shown in Fig. 21(b) is reached.

Next, an example of the operation of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to Fig. 22 to Fig. 24, an example of the operation when a player performs a pushing operation with the tilting device 310 in the first state will be described. In the following explanation of the example of the operation, the illustration of the lid 312 will be simplified to facilitate understanding.

22 to 24 are diagrams showing the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
22 shows a state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the end position, and FIG. 24 shows a state where the tilting device 310 returns from the state shown in FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an example of the player's hand repeatedly tapping the tilting device 310 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 is biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is rotated in such a manner that the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).
As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 32
It is disposed in front of the detection groove of 4R (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes in the tilt device 310, the tilt device 31
23. In this state, the left detection piece 3
The detection piece 11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed in from the first state by the player.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is operated by repeatedly hitting the button, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. Depending on the time interval of the player's successive hits, the torsion spring 31
If the tilting device 310 is not returned to its original position by the tilting mechanism 5 in time, the player may end up performing the pushing operation at an incomplete position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in this embodiment, increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 requires increasing the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18 ) that presses down the tilting device 310 against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, which requires increasing the size of the drive motor 342. This causes problems such as increased product costs and failure to save space.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pressed in, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects through vibration motion is disposed in a position facing the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the expanding direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 31 can be expanded without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.
The return operation to 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 were to always be driven when the tilting device 310 was pressed, for example, when a player pressed and held down the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 would be driven, placing an unnecessary burden on the player, which could make the player feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when that number is equal to or greater than a threshold value, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, thereby improving the load for returning the tilt device 310 only when the player performs a continuous tap operation.
The player can operate the tilt device 310 comfortably.

Next, a case where the tilting device 310 starts a vertical reciprocating motion (tilting motion) from the first state (first operation mode) will be described with reference to Figs. 25 to 30.
XXII-XXII is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG.

In addition, FIG. 25 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG.
FIG. 25 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25, and the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 has changed. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26, and the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 has returned to its original state. FIG. 28 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26, and the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 has returned to its original state.
The tilt device 310 is shown rotating back and forth. FIG. 29 shows the state where the player pushes the tilt device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end position. FIG. 30 shows the state where the disc cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29, and the engagement rib 34
27. In FIG. 28, the tilting device 344 is in the state shown in FIG. 27. The second protruding portion 344c3 of the tilting device 344 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
29, an example of a player's hand pressing in and manipulating the tilt device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is restricted by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light irradiated in the axial direction can be secured to be large. This allows the cylindrical member 312c to have the effect of improving the strength as a rib of the cover 312 and to adjust the irradiation intensity of the light of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in Figure 26, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Figure 26) from the state shown in Figure 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the first protrusion portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, causing the release member 346 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Figure 26), and accordingly the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

The change in the position of the release member 346 is caused by the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34
6d. During this time, the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in Figures 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is positioned at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344), and the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is regulated by the arm member 345, so that the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is an operating mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27).
When the first retraction portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the biasing force of the first spring SP1 causes the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 to rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 returns to a state (the state shown in FIG. 25) in which it can engage with the tilting device 310. At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG. 26.

In this state, the cover 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's viewpoint is reduced to the area in which the tilting device 311 is in the first state.
Since this value is increased compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (toward the player).
Therefore, by changing the position of the tilt device 310, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, thereby improving the light presentation effect.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, making it possible to detect the starting point of the up and down reciprocating movement.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by the same amount.
8 clockwise) is repeated until the angle D1 shown in FIG.
The tilt device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within a range of 100 mm to 150 mm. This makes it possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300.

Also, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that protrudes above the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the repeated up and down movement of the tilting device 310 within the range of angle D1. Therefore, the amount of light that can be seen through the protective lens member 313 out of the light irradiated from the LED device 341f can be changed in response to the movement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since the LED device 341f is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the range of light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-back and up-down directions, but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 28).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313.

That is, according to this embodiment, not only the direction of light irradiation but also the range of light irradiation can be changed simultaneously in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the tilting device 310.

As shown in Fig. 29, in the state in which the tilting device 310 moves up and down in Fig. 28, a player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state in Fig. 28, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is lowered (even if the arm member 345 moves in the direction in which the arm member 345 moves up, the shaft portion 311c simply moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of Fig. 28, it is possible to prevent the load caused by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see Fig. 18) from being applied to the player. At this time, the player is only subjected to the load caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. This prevents a large load from being applied to the player when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of the pushing, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, so that the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29). Then, by pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a pushes the hook portion 347d.
, the rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilt device 310 up and down as shown in FIG.
If the player releases the button after pressing down 0, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (repeats movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). This allows an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps his/her hand on the tilt device 310 after pushing the tilt device 310 to the end.

In other words, the voice coil motor 352 can be used to generate a driving force that assists in lifting the tilting device 310 (see Figure 24) and to create a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 that is positioned at the end of the push-in position.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 contacts the lower frame member 320.
3, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is only effective when the player has pushed the tilt device 310 to the end.

Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilt device 310 is pressed, whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pressed the tilt device 310 can be made aware of this.

Here, whether or not the lottery results in a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, in which case the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is reduced.

In contrast to this, this embodiment is configured in such a way that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only by pushing in the tilting device 310 .

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when a jackpot is confirmed, the sense of anticipation when the player presses the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the value of the tilting device 310 as a means of reading ahead can be improved.
This makes it easier for the player to operate the tilt device 310, thereby increasing the value of the tilt device 310 as an operating means.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG.
The drive unit 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) a predetermined amount until the disk cam 344 abuts against the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 abut in the rotational direction, similarly to the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first protrusion 344c1 abuts against the engagement rib 344c, whereas in the second initial state, the second protrusion 344c3 abuts against the engagement rib 344c.

29, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 29) so that the first protruding portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes the engaging portion 346d, and then rotated in the reverse direction. In this case, a load is applied to the releasing member 346 in a direction pushing up the releasing member 346, and only the releasing member 346 is rotated forward (clockwise in FIG. 29) while maintaining the position of the rotating claw member 347.
The rotation can be done in a clockwise direction (counterclockwise).

31 to 34, a case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting operation) from a state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (tilting operation) up and down via the second state.

31 to 34 are diagrams showing the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG.
31, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31) to rotate the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31).
33 shows a state where the tilting device 310 has rotated a predetermined amount and reached the second state.
34 shows the state in which the disk cam 344 rotates back and forth from the state shown in FIG.
3 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position.
33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is shown by imaginary lines.
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing in the tilt device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in Figure 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in Figure 31) from the state shown in Figure 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 is not pulled by the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345, and the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short period of time.

As shown in FIG. 32 , by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged), the attitude of the disc cam 344 is changed to a position in which the tilting device 310 can be placed in the second state (the disc cam 344 is rotated 180° from the first initial state).
Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the disc cam 344 from interfering with the state change (the disc cam 344 rotates slowly through the specified angle, and it takes a long time for the tilting device 310 to reach the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by the same amount.
2 clockwise) is repeated to obtain an angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilt device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within a range of 100 mm to 150 mm. This makes it possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that protrudes above the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the repeated up and down movement of the tilting device 310 within the range of angle D2. Therefore, the amount of light that can be seen through the protective lens member 313 out of the light irradiated from the LED device 341f can be changed in response to the movement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since the LED device 341f is disposed on the front side (left side of Figure 33) of the LED device 341f, the range of light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-back and up-down directions, but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of Figure 33).

That is, according to this embodiment, not only the direction of light irradiation but also the range of light irradiation can be changed simultaneously in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the tilting device 310.

The range of the angle D2 shown in Fig. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in Fig. 28. That is, in this embodiment, the up-down movement of the tilting device 310 is performed in the up-down movement shown in Fig. 28 and
33 can be performed immediately after the restriction on the upward movement of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be created.

This allows the operating member 310 to have a different meaning (for example, a different sense of expectation of a big win) in its operating mode compared to when the operating member 310 performs the same operation every time, and the tilting device 310
This can increase the player's attention to the game.

As shown in Fig. 33, in the state in which the tilting device 310 moves up and down in Fig. 32, a player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state in Fig. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves through guide hole 345 b of arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift shaft portion 311 c from arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of Fig. 33, it is possible to prevent the load caused by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see Fig. 18) from being applied to the player. At this time, the player is only subjected to the load caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. This prevents a large load from being applied to the player when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in Figure 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 to the pushed-in state, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Figure 34), and then the tilting device 310 is pushed in so that the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook portion 347d. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilt device 310 up and down as shown in FIG.
After pressing down the number 0 (see FIG. 34), if the player releases his/her hand, the tilt device 310
can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
The following describes an operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the tilting device 310 control lever 47. This method makes it possible to alternate between two types of up and down movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310 or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 are diagrams showing the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
In FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG.
35 )。 FIG. 36 shows a state in which the rotating cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35 ) beyond the state shown in FIG. 35 , and then rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35 ) to a position where the disc cam 344 abuts against the engagement portion 346 d of the release member 346. FIG. 37 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36 ) from the state shown in FIG. 36 , and the protective cover device 3
35 shows a state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of the tilt device 310 is turned on. In addition, in Figures 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above over the tilt device 310 is shown by imaginary lines.

35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c comes into contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346, changing the position of the release member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 only moves through the space of the long guide hole 347b of the rotary claw member 347, and the rotary claw member 347 moves in the same direction as shown in FIG.
The position shown in FIG.

In other words, by further rotating the disc cam 344 in the rearward direction (clockwise in Figure 35) from the state shown in Figure 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the restriction of the ascent of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained.

From the state shown in Figure 35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 35) and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in Figure 35), thereby bringing the drive unit 340 into the second initial state as shown in Figure 36.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in Fig. 36, but it is possible to pass through the second initial state shown in Fig. 36. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in Fig. 36, it is possible to perform up and down movement (tilting movement) from the second initial state within the range of angle D2, as described above.

Here, a player who presses the tilting device 310 may keep his/her hand on the tilting device 310 after performing the pressing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press."

This is an action that occurs, for example, when a person is so focused on the performance that they forget to release the hand that has been pressing down on the tilting device 310. In this case, the tilting device 310 will not rise even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) to move the tilting device 310 up and down (tilt motion) within the range of angle D2,
It is not possible to change the attitude of the tilting device 310. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if this rotation could be eliminated, the life of the drive motor 342 could be extended.

In this embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left detection sensor 324L (FIG. 1) of the lower frame member 320
5) is maintained in the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted to the first state or below), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in reverse, and is controlled in a manner such that the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) of the protective cover device 350 is set to the ON state, as shown in FIG. 37.

In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, the tilt device 310 does not move upward because the player's hand is placed above the tilt device 310. In this case, the tilt device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG.
The change to the state shown in FIG. 7 is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in Figures 35 to 37, it is possible to avoid having the drive motor 342 perform reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) even when the player's hand remains placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up or down, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 342 and extending the motor's lifespan.

If the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state when the disc cam 344 is rotated a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the disc cam 344 may not be rotated as it is, but may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. This allows the drive unit 340 to be quickly returned to the second initial state, and unnecessary load is not applied to the drive unit 340, thereby extending the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18).

With reference to Figures 38 and 39, a method for preventing damage to the driving device 340 will be described. Figure 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 6(a), and Figure 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in Figure 38. Note that Figure 38 shows the tilting device 310 in the second state.
The player's hands grabbing and holding the device are shown in imaginary lines, and in Figure 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 38, when a player grasps and fixes the tilt device 310, the arm member 34
38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, the drive motor 342
If a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely relative to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portion 343b
The power is transmitted via the drive motor 343c2 and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. This disengages the transmission gear 343b from the movable clutch 343c, allowing the transmission gear 343b to rotate freely.
This can prevent the sensor 42 from breaking down.

In addition, when the player is not holding the tilt device 310, the tilt device 310 passes through the first state when the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3
If the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 does not become ON (if the tilting device 310 does not become the first state), it is determined that the player is intentionally performing the unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while a message is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to notify the player to stop the gripping action, for example.

This makes it possible to select the case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation, and only at that time, to notify the player to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 early,
Failures can be prevented.

In addition, when the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disk cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled (by the number of steps, etc.) continuously from the state before the phase shift occurred, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting this state, it is possible to identify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state, and by resuming control of the drive motor 352 with that state as the initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), control can be performed in a state in which the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are once again aligned, even after a phase shift has occurred between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c.

In this way, when the tilt device 310 is operated to perform a performance, the drive motor 342
This prevents a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 through the rotation control and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be operated appropriately to perform a performance.

39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to have a shape that allows it to rotate freely relative to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity for this will be explained below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
41 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (in the CCW direction of the arrow) from the state shown in FIG. 40. Also, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the CCW direction from the state shown in FIG.
42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been further rotated in the direction of the arrow CW from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the CCW direction, the tilting device 31
40, and moves to the second state.
As shown in FIG. 3, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured in a manner to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engaging rib 344c moves away from the releasing member 346 as the state shown in FIG. 42 moves to the state shown in FIG. 43, but also because the disc cam 344
This is because, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, even if the engaging rib 344c abuts against the release member 346, the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c abuts against the release member 346 from below. In this case, the release member 346 is lifted up by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotary claw member 347 is not released.
Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, FIG.
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 41, the two appear to operate in the same way, but once the first state is reached, the behavior differs between FIG. 41 and FIG.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is
(see FIG. 39), but the player may notice the type of control being performed due to the difference in the change in the drive sound caused by the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342, and may understand the performance that is about to be performed, which may reduce the player's interest.
If the operation of suddenly stopping the drive motor 342 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load placed on the drive motor 342 will be large, and there is a risk that the durability of the drive motor 342 will decrease.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, the driving motor 342
Since the rotation of the tilt device 310 differs only in its direction, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation by the driving manner (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the performance changes depending on whether the tilt device 310 rises from the first state or the tilt device 310 is maintained in the first state, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in expectation while the tilt device 310 is moving toward the first state. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the movement of the tilt device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 rises up or maintains the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the expectation level of the presentation, the player can be encouraged to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 as it enters the second state (see Figure 38) and is moved by the drive motor 342 toward the first state.

In other words, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, the player can be prevented from gripping the tilting device 310, thereby preventing the tilting device 310 and the drive device 340 from being overloaded due to the player operating the drive motor 342 incorrectly when the drive motor 342 is being driven.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilt device 310, when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped,
This can eliminate the burden on the drive motor 342 and improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, referring to Figure 44, we will explain a case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player presses down on the tilting device 310 (third operating mode).

44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A. In FIG. 44, the driving device 340 is in the first initial state (see FIG. 25) and the disk cam 3
44 is shown rotated a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44), and the first
The disc cam 344 is rotated at an angle such that the protruding portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outline of the tilting device 310 after it has been rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in Figure 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first protrusion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the disc cam 344 can be rotated back and forth while maintaining a positional relationship in which the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 do not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, thereby causing the tilting device 310 to reciprocate up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward (
44) clockwise, the tilting device 31 is maintained in the state shown in FIG.
When the tilt device 310 moves up and down, even if the player pushes in the tilt device 310, the tilt device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilt device 310 moves up and down when the player releases his/her hand.
can implement an operating mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state (a position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues to move up and down.

Therefore, for example, by providing a difference in presentation between the first and second operation modes described above and the third operation mode shown in Fig. 44 as the operation modes of the tilting device 310, it is possible to give a different meaning to the operation of the operating device 300 than in the past. That is, according to this embodiment, the player presses in the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310, and only then can the player know whether the tilting device 310 has moved up and down in the first or second operation mode, or in the third operation mode.

As a difference in presentation, if a difference is provided in which the expectation of a big win is higher when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pressed and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state) than when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after the tilting device 310 is pressed and released), the player can have an opportunity to recognize the expectation of whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pressed, but also when the player releases the hand from the tilting device 310, so that more timing can be provided for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. This can improve the attention to the operation device 300.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 45 to Fig. 49. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up. However, in the operating device 2300 in the second embodiment, the driving device 2340 includes a sliding claw member 2348, and when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the sliding claw member 2348 is rotated in the same direction as the rotating claw member 347.
The second embodiment is configured such that the second member 48 slides. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 45 and 46.

FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment.
45(b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348, showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348. FIG.

In FIG. 46A, the rotating plate member 2347 is connected to the second spring S
46(b) shows a large angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 has rotated to the end position of the biasing direction of P2 against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 2346, and FIG. 46(c) shows a small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 has rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 2346. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates by contacting the disk cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 3
46b is disposed at the center position of the elongated guide hole 347b (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (
The tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) mainly comprises a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a sliding claw member 2348 that is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the rotating plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arcuate track centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) as functional members pivotally supported on the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). Note that in the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 45 (a), the sliding claw member 2348 mainly comprises a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape in a manner to be slidably fitted into the rail portion 2347f, a hook-shaped portion 2348b that is hook-shaped and protrudes forward (to the left in Figure 45) from the upper end of the curved portion 2348a, a reinforcing portion 2348c that is arranged in a stacked manner in the thickness direction of the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b (perpendicular to the paper surface of Figure 47 (a)) and is formed from a curved plate shape that is wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d that is cylindrically protruded toward the release member 2346 from the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f.
When fitted inside 347f, it is configured to be slidable relative to the rotating plate member 2347.

The hook portion 2348b has a shape similar to that of the hook portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof.
a is a magnetic material that generates a magnetic force that attracts

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface opposite to the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 that faces the sliding claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see Figure 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a, thereby reinforcing the sliding claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted into and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e.
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is inserted into the functional slot 23
The slide claw member 2348 slides when pressed by the side surface of 46e.

The rotating plate member 2347 has a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, and an insertion hole 347c.
In addition to the pulling down hole 347e, it is provided with a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g through which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the opposing side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions are in contact with the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) when the rotating plate member 2347 is disposed at the end position in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46).
It is formed from a curved shape along a circular arc centered at .

The support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along a circular arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in the same manner as the rail portion 2347f.
When the sliding claw member 2348 is slid with d inserted, the sliding claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support long hole 2347g, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engagement portion 346d, and in addition, a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction.

The functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and includes a first long hole portion 2346e1 configured in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a, and a second long hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first long hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a,
Provide for the Lord.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 slides against the rail portion 234.
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346, and the moving speed of the release member 2346 is directly reflected in the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the sliding claw member 2348 will slide quickly, whereas if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operating speed of the sliding claw member 2348 will also be slowed down.

46(a), in the large angle state, even if the sliding claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a, so that the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in a linear direction passing through the pivot hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in this embodiment, the release member 2346 rotates to slide the slide claw member 2
Even if the sliding claw member 2347 slides, the sliding claw member 2347 is not pulled in the large angle state, causing the sliding claw member 2347 to not slide. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the first state, the lifting of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted by engaging the sliding claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating the change in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG.
48 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 and the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up, and FIG. 49 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG. 48 and the release member 2346 is pressed up against the second spring SP
2 shows the state in which the spring 1 is returned to its original position by the biasing force of 2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is provided with a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilt device 2310 from this state, the tilt device 23
As a result of the change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b is released, and therefore no large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348.

48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the sliding claw member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the movement of the release member 2346. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so that when the release member 2346 moves quickly, the tilting device 2310 also moves quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the sliding claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the sliding claw member 2348 can be rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48 ) to move the tilting device 2310 upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the restriction on the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released (fourth operating mode). In other words, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates rearward (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the biasing force of the second spring SP2. This causes the slide claw member 2348 to return to the first state.

47 to 49 are possible, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, including the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the operation mode with the expectation of a big win, the player can more easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of predicting the game, and the attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be improved.

According to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by the lifting of the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348 is pulled upward as shown in FIG.
8b and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310.
Therefore, by ensuring a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to when the tilting device 2310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when a player places his/her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), but if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, then as shown in FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 2, the tilt device 2310 can be raised by lifting the player's hand.

This makes it possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force that tries to maintain the position of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load) when lifting the tilting device 2310. Therefore, a player who plays the game by placing his/her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by correlating the difference in load with the expectation of a jackpot, the player can more easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of predicting the next move, thereby increasing the attention that the operation device 2300 attracts from the player.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 50 to Fig. 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is capable of detecting whether it is in the first state or in a state pressed by the player by the detection sensors 324L, 324R has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L, 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and a state pressed by the player or in a state pressed by the player. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Fig. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311, and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 3310 and located at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
The extension length is shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300.
In FIG. 51(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG.
51(a) and 51(b) show a state in which the number 0 is being pressed.
In order to facilitate understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown with imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown with solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are shown diagrammatically.

As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is in contact with the left detection sensor 324L.
while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).
.

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L, 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state where it is pushed to the end of its pushing, it can be detected whether it is in the middle of being pushed in or in the middle of returning.

That is, if the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing.
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilt device 3310 is in the middle of a pressing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300.
2(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing motion, and FIG.
2(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the push-in end to the first state. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in Fig. 51(a) and Fig. 51(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are shown diagrammatically.

As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed in to the end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L.
11gR is inserted through the right-side detection sensor 324R (the left-side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right-side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in Figure 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state where it is positioned at the end of the push-in, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing.
By detecting that the state has changed from the previous state, it can be determined that the tilt device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to
When applying an auxiliary load to raise the tilting device 3310, it is possible to apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310 more effectively by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is ascending, rather than colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each detection sensor 324L, 324R, and the voice coil motor 352 is driven when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of ascending and has not yet reached the first state, so that the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, thereby improving the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3310 after being pushed in from the first state is
In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 3310 repeatedly, the rising action of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the player cannot comfortably perform the repeated operation.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the speed at which the tilt device 3310 rises can be improved compared to when the tilt device 3310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.
This allows for comfortable rapid-fire operations.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 53 to Fig. 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilt device 310 is in the first state or in a state where it is pushed in by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment detects the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is provided in a plate-like protrusion shape from the front side of the protruding protruding portion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see Figure 54) arranged on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of each detection sensor 4321d, 4321e.

54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the time series of the pressing operation of the operation device 4300. Note that in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 431
54(b), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state from the state shown in FIG.
54(a) and 54(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e, and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are disposed in a position in which the detection groove faces a direction in which the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are disposed at 20° intervals on an arcuate orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player pushes in the tilt device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 54(a) to the state shown in FIG. 54(b), the front detection piece 4311k is in contact with the upper detection sensor 4
The tilt device 4310 passes through the lower detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in that order. By detecting the interval between the timing of the passing of the tilt device 4310, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 is large or small, and based on this determination, it is determined whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pressed from the second position, the pressing length becomes longer (the period during which acceleration can be applied is longer), and therefore the upper limit of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 becomes higher compared to an operation button with a short pressing length. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for when the player presses it with all his strength, which creates the problem that the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy.

Also, an elastic spring may be built in to apply a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the end of the push-in period, and the biasing force of the elastic spring may be used to decelerate the tilting device 4310. However, in this case, for players with weak strength or players who choose to perform the push-in operation gently, the reaction force that is always large near the push-in position places a burden on the push-in operation, making them more likely to feel tired, and there is a risk that they will not be able to comfortably push in the tilting device 4310.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval at which the ON and OFF states are switched between, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, if the timing interval between when the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is not driven, whereas if the timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is driven.

As a result, when the operating speed of pushing the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily pushed in and operated even with a weak force.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the tilt device 4310 is fast, the tilt device 4310
As a reaction force against the tilt device 4310, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of the pushing. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the protruding protrusion 3 of the tilting device 4310
Before 11j protrudes downward from the lower frame member 4320, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance toward the side adjacent to the tilting device 4310.

As a result, the tilting device 4310
In comparison with the case where the tilting device 4310 collides with the voice coil motor 352 , the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300.
FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 55(a) and FIG. 55(b), the lower frame member 4
320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines.
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 35
2 is shown in solid lines.

As shown in Figure 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the end of the push-in period from the first state.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding protruding portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving the voice coil motor 352 in the contraction direction. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 is not structured to apply a load by friction like a disc brake, but is structured to apply a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to components is suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in Figure 55 (a), the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact, so by gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in Figure 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the reaction force felt by the player at the time when the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the voice coil motor 352 can be suppressed, while the deceleration effect of the tilting device 4310 as it moves from the first state toward the end of the push-in can be improved.

55B, when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push-in end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts against the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (repeats movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction).
After the tilting device 4310 is pushed all the way in, a vibration can be transmitted to the player who has his/her hand still on the tilting device 4310.

In other words, the voice coil motor 352 can be used to reduce the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and to create a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 located at the end of the pushing operation.

Next, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is driven by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
In the above description, a case has been described in which vibration is transmitted to a player who operates the device by pressing the button 0. However, in the fifth embodiment, the operation device 5300 has a weight member 5320 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric to the lower frame member 5320.
The present embodiment is equipped with a drive motor 5411 that rotates the lower frame member 5320, and is configured to transmit vibrations to a player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted. First, the differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 , the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is a
The voice coil motor 35 is connected to the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

A vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411 is disposed on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 that is fixed to a transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is disposed on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to Figures 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5412 that rotates a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 that houses a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and a bottomed dish-shaped member that is open at the top and houses the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate compartments and is a lower frame member 53.
and a storage member 5430 fastened to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the storage unit 20.

The transmission device 5410 mainly comprises a drive motor 5411 formed from a rotary-driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and a portion corresponding to the axis of the fan supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 .

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of fixing parts 5411a arranged on the left and right sides on the side from which the shaft projects and formed from a metal material in a flange shape.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is driven to rotate, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the weight member 5412 is configured in such a manner that the entire drive motor 5411 can vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and which is formed in the shape of a cylindrical container having a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted, rib-like leg portions 5422 which, in an assembled state, are provided on the left and right radially outward and downward sides of the main body 5421 in a pair of rib-like protruding configurations, and a posture maintaining portion 5423 which connects between the rib-like leg portions 5422 which are provided on the left and right radially outward and downward sides of the open portion side of the main body 5421 and into which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded.
and a pair of columnar protruding leg portions 5424 protruding upward from the top surface of the main body portion 5421.

The depth of the container shape of the main body 5421 is configured to be the same as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the main body 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-like legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, but since the posture maintaining portions 5423 are arranged on the left and right sides, the rib-like legs 5422 on the left and right sides have a greater resistance to deformation than the rib-like legs 5422 on the lower side.

Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding column shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load at one point when the flexible member 5420 comes into contact with the tilting device 310 described later.
The resolution of the deformation degree 20 can be finer.

The housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion 5432 adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and which houses the weight member 5434.
The second storage section 5432 in which the first storage section 5431 and the second storage section 5432 are stored.
and a groove 5433 recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the connector 432.

The depth of the first storage section 5431 is set so that the lower rib-like leg section 5422 touches the bottom of the flexible member 54
20 is inserted and the load applied during insertion is released (assembly load released state), the depth at which the protruding leg portion 5424 projects from the top surface is determined.

The depth of the second storage section 5432 is such that it is recessed further outward than the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load-released state, while it is deep enough to interfere with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the player applies load to the protruding leg section 5424 and the flexible member 5420 is deformed (assembly load state).

The groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extending slightly downward beyond the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled loaded state.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and FIG.
FIG. 59( a ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. 59( a ). In FIG. 59( a ), a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section.
In Figure 59 (a), a first area S51 which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and a terminal area S52 which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when it is pushed three degrees by the player from the first state and placed at the terminal position of the push are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59A, the protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis.
This allows the amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 in response to a change in angle (see Figure 56) to be maximized.

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), in an assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424 , the weight member 5412 is separated from the second receiving portion 5432 .

As shown in Fig. 59(c), when viewed in the extension direction, the protruding legs 5424 are disposed symmetrically with respect to the left-right center line of the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in evenly on the left and right sides by the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right when pushed in (tilting left and right on the paper surface of Fig. 59(b)), and the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of Fig. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59C, the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 is provided with a protruding leg portion 5424.
The through holes 5321d have a width dimension in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the protruding leg portions 5424. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a player and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the protruding leg portions 5424, deformation of the protruding leg portions 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the protruding leg portion 5424 and the main body portion 5421 are
can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). Note that FIG. 60(a) illustrates an assembled load-released state, and FIG.
59B shows an assembled load state after the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed into the first housing portion 5431 with the tilting device 310 occupying the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59A). The outlines of the second housing portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 60(a) and FIG. 60(b), from the assembled load-released state, the vibration device 540
When a load is applied to the lower rib-shaped leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg 5425, the load is applied to the lower rib-shaped leg 5425.
As the spring 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in Fig. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see Fig. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force becomes larger as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420, so that it is possible to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see Fig. 57) when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position.
In addition, since the load is generated by elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without any time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the upper end, see FIG. 38) becomes slow. In this case, even if the player performs a continuous tap operation on the tilting device 310, the rising operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the player cannot perform the continuous tap operation comfortably.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the speed at which the tilting device 310 rises can be improved compared to when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, thereby making it possible to perform repeated tapping operations of the tilting device 310 more comfortably.

60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the driving motor 5411 starts to drive in the assembly load released state, vibration due to the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 coming into contact with each other does not occur.

In addition, vibrations of the driving motor 5411 itself and minute vibrations caused in the driving motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and are absorbed by the housing member 543.
This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the drive motor 5411 starts to drive.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420
1 is configured in such a manner that deformation of the upper protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 allows for vertical displacement.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the ribbed legs 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body 5421 changes to a state in which it is more compressed vertically, and the ribbed legs 5422 become slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the ribbed legs 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

The main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 54
Since the flexible member 5420 extends along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and is arranged in a pair on the left and right at uniform intervals from the central axis, when the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the radially outer end of the rib-like leg 5422 deforms in such a manner that it moves outward to the left or right (to the side with less resistance at the connection point between the main body 5421 and the rib-like leg 5422) (see Figure 60 (b)).
In this case, the protruding direction of the rib-like leg 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body 5421 has a left-right component, so that the elastic force of the rib-like leg 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the left-right load that may be generated when the weight member 5421 and the second housing portion 5432 collide can be borne by the rib-like leg 5422 on the lower side of the main body 5421.
The elastic force of the drive motor 5411 can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of the drive motor 5411. This makes it possible to suppress the positional deviation in the left-right direction of the drive motor 5411.

61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a).

61(a) and 61(b) show an assembled load state, in which FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft, and FIG. 61(b) shows a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation shaft.
In FIG. 61(a) and FIG. 61(b), the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and reaches the terminal area S52.
5 shows the vibration device 5400 in an occupying state.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in this embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located on the upper side in an assembled loaded state, the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 is located at a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second housing portion 5432 is a distance Q1. Note that in this embodiment, the distance Q1 is set to a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 comes into contact with the second receiving portion 543.
2. Therefore, compared to the assembled load-released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and a different type of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

When the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 come into contact with each other, a repulsive force is generated between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432.
Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 approach and move away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force can be easily directed in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). This repulsive force moves the flexible member 5412 together with the driving motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412.
420 moves upward, and the force of the flexible member 5420 pushing the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 57) back upward (in the direction along the movement direction of the tilt device 310) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force pushing the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is generated by the flexible member 542.
By combining separately generated forces, that is, the force generated as an elastic recovery force of 0 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, the tilting device 310 starts to abut against the protruding leg portion 5424 until the end region S52 (FIG. 59)
5A), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 acts as a force pushing back the tilt device 310. After the tilt device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the weight member 5412
and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. This makes it possible to particularly increase the force pushing back the tilting device 310 near the terminal region S52, thereby making it possible to satisfactorily achieve ease of operation of the tilting device 310 and mitigation of impact during pushing operation. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for complex control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see Figure 57), and the difference in detection timing is used to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 310 (see Figure 57) is greater than a specific speed (e.g., 40 km/h), and the position of the weight member 5412 is changed based on this determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 is moved in a direction away from the tilting device 310 in order to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desirable to increase the load applied to the tilting device 310. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance to assume a downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the end of the downward movement of the drive motor 5411 is reached when its rotation shaft reaches the second storage section 543.
61(a) ) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a) )), the movable area of the flexible member 5420 above the drive motor 5411 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, it is possible to increase the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 that is above the drive motor 5411 when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to increase the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310, and to increase the load for braking the tilting device 310.

Although not explained in this embodiment, by leaving the drive motor 5411 stopped facing upward (see Figure 61 (a)), the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, and no force is generated due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage section 5432.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the player's hand who presses the tilting device 310, and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. In other words, it is possible to transmit the vibration to a part other than the part touching the tilting device 310, for example, a part touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the vibrations can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, and the vibrations can be transmitted to the player via the palm of the hand or a part of the side of the hand that is placed as a fulcrum for pushing on the lower frame member 5320. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where the vibrations are not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIG. 61(a) and FIG. 61(b), a player tilts the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 56)
Only when the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state by pressing the weight member 5
412 comes into contact with the housing member 5430, generating vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, making it easier to transmit the vibration to the player compared to when vibration is generated after the player's pushing operation is detected.

That is, when a player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the player releases the hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse-like pushing), if vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed in, it is possible that vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (vibration does not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effects of vibration. In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are complete, so that vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. This allows the player to experience the effects of vibration.

In addition, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the driving motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431.
Even if the tilting device 310 is driven, it is possible to prevent vibrations from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, the state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be achieved by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Next, a description will be given of the driving device 5340. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. As the rest are the same as the driving device 340 in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are used and the description will be omitted.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 5340. As shown in Figure 62, an elongated recess C1 is formed in the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R.
Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L are configured in a symmetrical shape, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The right disc cam 5344R differs from the right disc cam 344R in the first embodiment in that a pair of clamping arms A1 that clamp the transmission shaft rod 5343 are disposed at the connection portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is provided with a circular rib 344 extending from the disk portion at its center position.
The support tube portion P1 mainly comprises a support tube portion P1 extending cylindrically toward the side where b is arranged, a long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetrical long hole shape along the axial direction of the support tube portion P1 to a position approximately half the extension distance, and a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the axial end of the support tube portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 along the axial direction toward the disk portion.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by having an inner diameter that is equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that has the same axial arrangement as the region recessed into the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed into the elongated hole recess C1.

The deformation portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged on either side of the long hole recess C1, and is configured as a portion that elastically deforms when the right disc cam 5344R undergoes axial tilt deformation relative to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see Figure 62).

The elongated recess C1 is formed such that the cross-sectional shape of the recess is slightly longer than the width of the clamping arm A1. Therefore, the clamping arm A1 is axially inclined in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the cross-sectional shape of the elongated recess C1 (
The movable member is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction).

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape that follows the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a.
343 a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344 .

The clamping arm A1 is formed in a pair of arms, and the arms are arranged such that, from the surface facing the other arm,
The engaging protrusion A1a is provided so as to protrude in a direction approaching the arm of the other side.
When connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343 , this engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343 a and prevents the cylindrical member 5343 a from coming off the disc cam 5344 .

The shape of the tip of the engaging protrusion A1a is the same as that of the engaging groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
65B)。 As a result, the engaging protrusion A1a has a shape that matches the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4.

The engaging protrusion A1a is positioned in the axial direction at a position where the side surface adjacent to the connecting pin 344d is flush with the side surface of the right disc cam 5344R and the recessed surface portion C2 (the side surface on the opening side of the long hole recess C1) which is recessed along the axis near the axis.

This allows the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement protrusion A1a to be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) rather than the recessed surface C2 (see FIG. 65(b)). Therefore, the length of the cylindrical member 5343a that protrudes from the recessed surface C2 on the outside (upper side in FIG. 63(b)) of the recessed surface C2 is set to be longer than the length of the e-ring that is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a.
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, since there is no need to secure space for fitting the e-ring (space required to place the e-ring against a surface and slide it) in the extension direction of the right disc cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface), the recessed width (radial width) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced.
This improves the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG.
The transmission shaft rod 5343 differs from the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment in that it has a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has fixing portions 5343a1 formed at both ends and having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344. The fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side as viewed from the front forms a fitting groove 5343a3.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 has a D-shaped cross section and is formed with the same cross section as the fixed portion 5343a1. The clutch operating portion 5343a2 has a groove for fitting an e-ring and is connected to the disk cam 534
The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and in the assembled state, causes the movable clutch 343c to slide due to the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

A mechanism is adopted in which an e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a where the diameter is partially larger, so that the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a can be made uniform before the e-ring is fitted.

With this diameter being uniform, a specified amount of cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into pivot hole 341b (see Figure 62) and then the E-ring is fitted in, whereby the E-ring prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from shifting axially relative to pivot hole 341b, and furthermore, the E-ring prevents the disc cam 5344 from shifting axially.

Due to the above-mentioned configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344
That is, when assembling the disk cam 5344 to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the engagement groove 5343 from the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disk cam 5344 opposite to the side where the engagement protrusion A1a is disposed.
343a4 until the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4.
Before the engaging protrusions A1a are inserted into the disc cam 5344, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engaging protrusions A1a, and the clamping arm A1 elastically deforms in such a manner that the pair of engaging protrusions A1a are pushed apart from each other. After that, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes the engaging protrusions A1a, the engaging protrusions A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are disposed opposite each other, and as the engaging protrusions A1a fit into the engaging groove 5343a4, the clamping arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 not only allows for one-touch assembly, but also functions as a structure for preventing breakage in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to Figs. 65 and 66.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb-LXVb in FIG.
65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). Also, FIG. 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62. FIG. 66(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a).
13 is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line XVIb-LXVIb.

FIG. 66 shows the right disc cam 5344R after deformation when the player applies an overload to the right disc cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG.

65 and 66, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and the engaging protrusion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4 near the disk portion. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is in a state in which it can be tilted about the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in Fig. 65(b) , since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance to the axial tilt displacement of the columnar member 5343a is reduced.
As shown in FIG. 65C, in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R are in contact with each other throughout the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R, the resistance to the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large.

Therefore, if an excessive load is applied to the right disc cam 5344R (if a load that regulates the displacement of the connecting pin 344d is applied via the arm member 345 (see Figure 62)) by, for example, forcibly holding down (pulling up) the tilting device 310, the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms relative to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 66(a) and FIG. 66(b), when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R,
The disk portion is deformed by axial inclination around the support axis r1 that connects the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R in comparison with the position shown in FIG.
Displacement.

Fig. 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Fig. 6(a), and Fig. 67(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in Fig. 67(a). In Fig. 67(b), the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. In Fig. 67(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is inserted and fixed perpendicularly to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown in solid lines, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is overloaded and the shaft is tilted is shown in imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) illustrates the second state of the tilt device 310, illustrates the player's hand holding the tilt device 310, and also illustrates an enlarged view of the area around the connecting pin 344d.

In the state shown in Figure 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see Figure 62) starts to operate, the left disc cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but since the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310, a load is generated between the arm member 345, which tries to stay in place, and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L, which tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned axial tilt deformation, so the load can be alleviated.

67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the axial tilt deformation is shown by imaginary lines. The change in the connection state with the arm member 345 due to the axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to operate and the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned,
In order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R is deformed by axial inclination.

Due to the shaft inclination deformation, the connecting pin 344d is inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67(a), so that the center Pb of the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt of the protruding tip side are misaligned along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R.
Since the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 caused by the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the driving motor 342 (
62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

67(b), the disk cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination, so that the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other on their faces. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that when the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilt device 310, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilt device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in Figure 67 (a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the elastic force of the second spring SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 in a repulsive direction. In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is prevented from moving by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts in a repulsive direction to push the disc cam 5344 downward via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347.
In this case, the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, so the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 moves in the direction of movement of the disc cam 5344, the first
The elastic force of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disk cam 5344
This increases the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344.
This allows the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 to be increased.
Since the consumption of the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
The load applied to the disk cam 5344 can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation of the disk cam 5344.

In this embodiment, the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is linearly symmetrical with respect to a line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the long hole recess C1 extends in a direction perpendicular to the line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point), so regardless of the rotation direction of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction of positional deviation of the connecting pin 344d relative to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in an axial tilt direction with similar deformation resistance.

Fig. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Fig. 6(a), and Fig. 68(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in Fig. 68(a). Note that the protective cover device 350 is omitted from Fig. 68(b). Also, in Fig. 68(a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R when it is inserted perpendicularly into the transmission shaft rod 5343 and fixed thereto is shown by a solid line, and the outer shape when an overload is applied and the shaft is tilted is shown by an imaginary line.

Figure 68 (a) shows the tilting device 310 being driven by the drive motor 342 (see Figure 62) from the second state and tilted downward by an angle D2, and also shows the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 while the drive motor 342 is operating.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when a player holds the tilt device 310 during the operation of the tilt device 310, the right disk cam 5344 is rotated regardless of whether the tilt device 310 is in the second state or not.
By tilting the axis of R, the tip of the connecting pin 344d can be shifted circumferentially around the right disc cam 5344R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R, and therefore the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the matters described with respect to the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIG. 67(b) and FIG. 68(b), according to this embodiment, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player is holding the tilt device 310, and an overload occurs,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting in the axial direction, the occurrence of an overload can be noticed at an early stage.
2 is driven for a period during which the right disc cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 3
Although 44eR passes through the right detection sensor 353R, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right-side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right-side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 is rotated in a state where no overload occurs until the occurrence of the overload is detected.
However, since a period of time is required for rotating 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem in that the detection of an overload is delayed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when an overload occurs in the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the occurrence of the overload can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of the overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, the engagement rib 344c is engaged with the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
4c (shown in phantom lines in FIG. 66(a)).
.

The alarm device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input part, and is arranged in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of clamping arms A1 and an engagement rib 344c intersect, and the input part is arranged in a manner that protrudes toward the support tube part P1. In a no-load state, the alarm device E1 and the support tube part P1 are separated (see FIG. 65(b)), and in an overload state, the alarm device E1 and the support tube part P1 are formed in a contacting relationship (see FIG. 66(b)). This makes it possible to quickly determine whether an overload is occurring in the disc cam 5344 by determining the output from the alarm device E1.

Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed, but in the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment, the disk cam 344 and the engagement rib 344c are separate members and are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 69 and 70.

Fig. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and Fig. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. Note that the right disc cam 6344R also differs from the configuration in the first embodiment, but since the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image shape with respect to the left disc cam 6344L, only the left disc cam 6344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of a left disc cam 6344L and the shape of a fixed member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and
A detection hole 344eL is provided in the disk member 6344L1, which is supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
and a ring member 6344L2 that is supported coaxially with the disk member 6344L1 and rotates relatively to the disk member 6344L1.

The disc member 6344L1 has a central shaft portion 344a in the first embodiment that is arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is provided with a circular ring rib 6344f that is protruded in the axial direction and has a circular ring shape at a position spaced radially outward from the outer periphery of the circular rib 344b.

The ring member 6344L2 comprises a circular ring body 6344g having an outer circumferential diameter equal to that of the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner circumferential diameter slightly larger than that of the circular rib 344b, a cover plate portion 6344h disposed at the axial end of the circular ring body 6344g and covering the ring-shaped opening of the circular ring body 6344g, and a receiving gear tooth 6344i formed with an increased thickness from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the circular ring body 6344g and disposed radially outward in the thickened portion.

The inner diameter of the circular ring body 6344g is formed larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, so that in the assembled state, the circular ring body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby supporting the ring member 6344L2 so as to be capable of relative rotation around the central shaft portion 344a.

In addition, the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63
As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the surface of the disk member 634
In comparison with the case where the disk member 6344L1 comes into contact with the ring member 6344L2, the contact area can be reduced, and the frictional resistance can be reduced, so that the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. Note that, in this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is equal to the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1.
(The number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times that of the disk member 63
The numbers of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set so that the rotor 44L1 rotates once.

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a in parallel with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 that is arranged in a position parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a, and a second gear 6348 fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and is a ring member 63
and a reduction transmission gear 6348c that meshes with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

71 to 73, there will be described a plurality of types of lifting operations of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is released from the first state by the rotation claw member 347.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 71 illustrates a state similar to that shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 is rotated once in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (more precisely, a state in which the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of rotation after rotating more than one rotation), and the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 times in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Also, FIG. 73 illustrates a state similar to that shown in FIG. 72.
13 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated in the forward rotation direction (the CCW direction of the arrow) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 13, and the tilting device 310 has ascended.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (in the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in Figure 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 and reaches the second state (see Figure 34).

In the first embodiment of the operating device 300, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released and the tilting device 310 instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) moves upward, the reached position is limited to the position in the second state (see Figure 34).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, so that the relative relationship between the connecting pin 344d, which is the support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c can be changed.
It is possible to increase the number of types of positions where 0 can be reached.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 is instantly raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state in which it is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this way, when the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 and when the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344)
The position it reaches can be changed.

This makes it possible to improve the attention-grabbing power of the tilting device 310, for example, when a gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the presentation is changed depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower rising position.

However, by keeping the elevated position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see Figure 73) and making it reach the second state (see Figure 34) when the degree of expectation is at its maximum, it is possible to correlate the degree of expectation with the amount of displacement by which the player pushes in the tilting device 310, making it easier for the player to understand the difference in degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilt device 310 will rise, and the player can be made to watch the movement of the tilt device 310 until the timing of operating the tilt device 310.
Regardless of the presentation mode of 10, a gaming method in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner can be prevented.

Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the operating device 7300 is configured such that the disc cam 7344 is configured such that the disc member 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are disposed as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other, and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. Note that the same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and
First, the features of a disk cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disk cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 and 75.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 75(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 75(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line XVa-LXXVa.
74(a) in the direction of the arrow LXXVb. Note that the right disc cam 7344L is configured to have a mirror symmetrical shape to the right disc cam 7344R, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted in the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1.
and an engaging member 7344R2, which is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and has an engaging portion 7630 which fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3 and mainly.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center.
A detection hole 344eR is provided in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape.
and the engaging rib 344c is partially omitted (the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first
The portion between the retracted portion 344c1 and the retracted portion 344c2 is omitted.

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 with a surface thereof when assembled, and has a first circular recess 7344R which is a circular recess having a center on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recess 7420 which is a circular recess smaller in diameter and deeper in the axial direction than the first circular recess 7410, an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 drilled radially between the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retraction 344c2, and a fixing protrusion 7440 protruding radially outward from the back side surface of the second circular recess 7420 (the outer circumferential side of the disc member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430.

The insertion hole 7430 is formed from a middle position between the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first recessed portion 344c2.
A first long hole 7431 is a rectangular long hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a shifted position, and a second long hole 7432 is a rectangular long hole portion that extends from the end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second long hole 7432 is supported by the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
and a return portion 7433 extending out toward the side 32.

The dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the second elongated hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the first elongated hole 7431, and the dimension in the width direction (
The dimension in the short direction is made smaller than that.

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75B ) of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
2 so as to be movable outwardly.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 76(b) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.
76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a).

As shown in FIG. 76(a) to FIG. 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 is connected to the connecting pin 3
44d is provided in a protruding manner, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
and a thick-walled portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner circumferential surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equivalent to the recess depth of the first circular recess portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recess portion 7410. This makes it possible to prevent the resistance to relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has an extension length from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)), and has an outer circumferential diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This makes it possible to prevent the resistance to the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive, while allowing the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 mainly comprises an irregular through hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and equal recess portions 7522 recessed radially outwardly into the irregular through hole 7521 at equal circumferential intervals (in this embodiment, five equal parts).

The irregular through hole 7521 has an inner circumferential shape that is positioned radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pressed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1.

FIG. 77(a) is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG.
7 is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG.

As shown in Figures 77(a) and 77(b), in the assembled state (see Figure 74(b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is made up of an arc-shaped plate portion 7610 disposed radially outward of the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracted portion 344c2, and a rear end portion (see Figure 77(a) and Figure 77(b)) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610.
77(b) right end portion), an engaging portion 7630 extending from the extended tip of the extending portion 7620 along the front-to-rear direction (left-to-right direction in FIG. 77(b)), and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring arranged on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 opposite the engaging portion 7630.

The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip of the engagement portion 7630 on the inner circumferential side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in an assembled state,
When pressed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip is configured with an extension length that protrudes inward beyond the inner circumferential surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engagement portion 7630 has a width dimension that is slightly shorter than the width dimension of the first long hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the irregular through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state (see Figure 75 (a)).

As described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function of being displaced by receiving a load from the releasing member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 relative to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced.

With reference to Figure 78, a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described.
FIG. 78(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 78(c) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(c), FIG. 78(d) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG.
FIG. 78( e ) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the d direction.
FIG. 78( f ) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78( e ).

In addition, in Figs. 78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d), the disk member 7
78(e) and 78(f) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1.
In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which R1 and R2 are inserted.
78(d) and 78(f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are omitted.

The right disc cam 7344R is assembled as follows: first, insert the engaging member 734 into the first long hole 7431.
4R3 engaging portion 7630 is inserted (see FIG. 78(a) and FIG. 78(b)). As described above, the width dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the width dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Therefore, it is possible to prevent assembly errors.

Next, the engaging portion 7 is inserted in the depth direction of FIG. 78( d ) along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432 .
The engaging member 7344R3 is slid to a position where the position of the fixing protrusion 7440 coincides with that of the fixing protrusion 7440.

At this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from shifting in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in Figure 78 (d)) of the disc member 7344R1, and also preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from moving in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

Moreover, the circumferential movement of the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is pushed outward of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extension direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the abutment between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the up-down direction is released, and the return portion 7433 moves inward of the second elongated hole 7432 due to elastic recovery force (see FIG. 78(d)).

When inserted into the second elongated hole 7432, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts against the extension portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but since the abutment direction is configured to be along the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the direction in which the deformation resistance becomes large) (see FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed.
Since the circumferential movement of 44R3 can be limited, the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734
4R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1,
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move in the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be accommodated in the equally divided recessed portions 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned steps, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled.
The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror symmetrical shape to the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to Figures 79 to 81, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. Figures 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 6. Note that in Figures 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347
The disk cam 7344 is illustrated as the center, and other unnecessary parts are omitted from the illustration.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in this embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in Fig. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the movement end point at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts against and passes from below.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body (upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is cut obliquely to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 chronologically show the rotation of the disc cam 7344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)).

In FIG. 79(a), the release member 7346 is engaged with the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 79(b) shows a state in which the right disc cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79(a). FIG.
80(a) shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end, and in M6-2(b) shows a state in which the disk member 73
80(b), the right disc cam 7344R rotates in the rearward direction, and the engagement member 7344R3 is engaged with the release member 7344R1.
79(a), 79(b), and 80 show the state after the nozzle 346 is separated from the nozzle 346.
80A and 80B show a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relatively to the rotatable claw member 7347 (small angle state).

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start to come into contact with each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be greater than the elastic force of the second spring SP2, so that the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward.
The outward protruding state is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79B, the release member 734 is attached to the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3.
When the sixth engaging portion 346d is in contact with the rotating claw member 7347, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In this embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state, the inner circumferential surface of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c are in contact with each other.
The disc cam 7344 is disposed in a positional relationship such that the outer circumferential surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 in a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 346 abut against each other (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state and reach a state where it cannot rotate any further (small angle state), a load is applied from the release member 7346 to the engagement member 7344R3, pushing the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward of the disc cam 7344.

79(b), since the engaging member 7344R3 cannot continue to rotate in the reverse direction while it is protruding radially outward, the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344 (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is disposed radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the irregular through-hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is no longer transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engagement portion 7630, and as shown in FIG. 80(b), the state of the disk member 734
Even if ring member 734R1 is rotated, ring member 734R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its position.

Due to this difference in the amount of rotation, the engagement portion 7630 is moved to the original equally divided recessed portion 75
22 to another different equally divided recessed portion 7522, the phase between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotates relatively by the amount of one recessed portion (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disc cam 7344R rotates further, the engagement member 73
Since the abutment between 44R3 and the release member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, and the engaging portion 7630 is once again accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

In other words, by going through the process shown in Figure 79 (a) to Figure 81, the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively shifted by an amount equivalent to the arrangement spacing of the recesses of the equal recesses 7522 (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward direction, the engaging member 73
The operation of 44R3 will be described with reference to Figs. 82(a), 82(b), 83(a) and 8
3(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Fig. 6. In Fig. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are illustrated as the center, and other unnecessary parts are omitted from the illustration.

82(a) to 83(b) chronologically show the rotation of the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)).
82(b) shows the state immediately before the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R comes into contact with the release member 7346, and FIG. 82(b) shows the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has begun to descend as a result of coming into contact with the release member 7346 from above. FIG. 83(a) shows the state in which the disc cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 82(b). FIG. 83(b) shows the state after the release member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R have separated from each other.

As shown in FIG. 82(a) to FIG. 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, causing the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are moved by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 is only subjected to a load in the forward rotation direction.

Therefore, no load is generated that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward, and the engaging member 7344R3 is in a state in which ...
R3 maintains its radially outwardly protruding state. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented from rotating relative to each other.

With this configuration, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, the disk member 7
Therefore, in a rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see Figs. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the performance of tilting the tilt device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, while in a rotation direction in which relative rotation occurs (see Figs. 79, 80, and 81), it is possible to change the tilt width of the tilt device 310, unlike the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 relative to each other coincides with the opposite direction (the direction in which the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 is not released) to the direction in which the fixation is released, so that the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84
While the rotational position of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is maintained constant (i.e., the attitude of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is maintained constant), the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can rotate relative to each other.

This allows the state where the player does not notice (the state where the tilting device 310 is stopped) to be
This can be utilized as a state for changing the relative position between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 without being seen by the player.

84 and 85, it will be described how, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of modes for lifting the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. FIGS. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 can be instantly moved (disc cam 7344) from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7(b) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347.
85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship in which the ring member 7344R2 can be displaced (without rotating the disk member 7344R1).
79, the ring member 7344R2 is shown rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by the amount of one of the equally-divided recesses 7522.
In both cases, the second protruding portion 344c3 is shown in contact with the engaging portion 346d.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the rotary claw member 347
By releasing the lock, the range of movement of the tilting device 310 can be instantly changed (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2).

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in Figure 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of its moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixation is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in Figure 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and downward from the position shown in Figure 84, and therefore moves to a state where it is sunk lower than the second state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be moved from the first state to the second state.
It is possible to change the position that the tilt device 310 reaches instantly (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the upward movement. This makes it possible to increase the variety of effects that can be produced by the operation of the tilt device 310, and to improve the attention-grabbing effect of the operation device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, with reference to Figures 86 to 179, a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment is provided with a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the following description, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (back) side with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in Fig. 86. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in Fig. 86, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Fig. 86, for example) indicate the directions of the pachinko machine 8010.
The vertical, horizontal, and front-rear directions are shown in FIG.
The same applies to the explanations referring to drawings 6 and earlier.

First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to Fig. 86 to Fig. 90. Fig. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and Fig. 87 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 shows a state in which the back pack 92 is inserted into the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened relative to the outer frame 11.
FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing an open (deployed) state with respect to the front side of the pachinko machine 8010.
Fig. 90 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. For convenience, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board 13 are omitted in Fig. 90.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape with four fixed sides, with wooden boards at the top and bottom and aluminum boards at the left and right. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game center by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 8010, and the game center may be configured so that the outer frame 11 or a member having the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 and having a support structure (hinges 18, etc.) and a locking structure for the inner frame 12 of the outer frame 11 is installed therein.

As shown in Figure 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip side) so that it can be rotated forward.

In addition, as shown in Figure 88, the rear pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip side), so that it can be rotated rearward.

As shown in Fig. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its pivot tip, which has the function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened, and the function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that they cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in Fig. 86, and performing an unlocking operation.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. Front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 as shown in Figure 86, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion, and bracket 58 is a metal plate with an axial hole) engage with the inner frame 12, thereby supporting the front frame 14 rotatably relative to the inner frame 12.

In detail, the front door mounting bracket 57 is journaled on a journal plate 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side below the upper hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 and is recessed from the tip to the rear side with a size that allows the front door mounting bracket 57 to be inserted therein. Also, the front door mounting bracket 58 is journaled by being externally fitted onto a support pin 19a that is stepped and cylindrical (a shape in which cylinders of different diameters are connected vertically and consecutively) protruding upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12.

As shown in Fig. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape with an outer shape almost identical to that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 is provided with a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. Various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front and back sides of the main body frame 14a.
The front frame 14 is formed by fastening and fixing the operation unit (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c formed to be smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86).
4c is covered from the rear side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12.
The front central portion of 3 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 89).

As shown in Fig. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of transparent glass panels 16a and 16b, which are larger in outer shape than the window portion 14c and have transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glass panels 16a and 16b.
The transparent glass units 16a, 16b are formed in an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glass units 16a, 16b, and the outer peripheries of the transparent glass units 16a, 16b are bonded to a fixed frame, thereby forming the glass unit 16 into an integrated double-glazed unit.

The glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent using transparent glass 16a, 16b, but is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent using synthetic resin, and may be formed colored and transparent rather than colorless and transparent as long as the playing area can be seen through the glass unit 16 from the front of the pachinko machine 8010.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illumination units 8029 to 8033 each having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14.
In the case of 033, lighting or blinking is performed according to changes in the game state when a jackpot is hit, when a predetermined reach is reached, etc. Also, the illumination unit 8030 above the window 14c has built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and light emitting means that lights up while prize balls are being paid out.

In addition, on the upper right and upper left sides of the window portion 14c, there are provided speaker covers 27 (thin plate members formed from punching metal) that cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects according to the game state. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in Fig. 86, the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 are arranged side by side, bulging out towards the front.

The upper tray 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed by the dispenser 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a while arranging them in a line.
has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides balls to the lower tray 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower tray 50.

Furthermore, there is no need to provide multiple locations on the upper tray 17 and lower tray 50 for storing game balls; it is also possible to eliminate the lower tray 50 and have only one storage area consisting of the upper tray 17.

An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the player is provided in front of the upper tray 17 (the storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device that is used when a performance corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This operation device 300 may be provided in another location, such as around the lower tray 50, other than the upper tray 17, or
The input device may be provided in a plurality of locations, and the operation method may be a push button switch, or the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in Fig. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is molded from synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper tray passage section 141 that leads to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage section 142 that leads to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage section 145 (see Fig. 92).

A ball receiving portion 143 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner toward the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14), and this ball receiving portion 143 is divided into left and right parts by a partition wall 144 to form a passage entrance to the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance to the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage section 145 (see Figure 92) is a section that forms a passage through which game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that do not reach the playing area are discharged as foul balls into the lower tray 50.

As shown in Fig. 89, the foul ball passage 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving port 146 that is open upward. A foul ball received in this foul ball receiving port 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage 145 (see Fig. 92) and is then discharged into the lower tray 50. Note that the foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper tray 17 instead of the lower tray 50, and the foul ball may be discharged into the upper tray 17.

In addition, the foul ball passage section 145 is formed to merge with a ball removal passage 147 (see Figure 92), which is a passage through which unfired balls that flow down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 are guided when the player performs the ball removal operation.

Multifunctional cover members 171, 172, which are resin cover members fastened to the upper left and right corners and bulge out toward the rear side, are attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, connectors for wiring that conduct electricity to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and electronic boards to which one end of a connector that is connected to the internal board of the illumination units 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14 is connected are arranged, and these electronic boards and connectors are covered by the multifunctional cover members 171, 172.

The areas covered by the multi-function cover members 171, 172 of the front frame 14 are formed with wiring grooves 14h that communicate with the left and right illuminated sections 8031, 8032, and an electronic board 14i to which the wiring that passes through the wiring grooves 14h and is pulled out from the illuminated sections 8031, 8032 is connected (see Figure 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out to the rear through these wiring grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side.

Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171, 172 are removed (see Figure 103), the connectors of the wiring that conducts electricity to the illuminated section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the connectors whose one ends are connected to the internal boards of the illuminated sections 8031, 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i from the rear side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in Figure 89).

The multi-function cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in a pair above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
126 (see FIG. 126), and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but details will be described later.

A long cover member 173 is attached from the rear side to the rear side of the front frame 14. The long cover member 173 is a container-shaped member made of a resin material with an open front side, and is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at a lower corner and accommodates wiring in a space formed between the front frame 14 and the long cover member 173. The long cover member 173 is configured so that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and a lower wall portion 173a that constitutes the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring is disposed parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, and an upper wall portion 173b that is disposed opposite the upper part of the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring is configured in a shape that matches the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 in surface agreement.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14, similar to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and has an upwardly extending wall portion 173c that extends upwardly from the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14.

The upward extension wall portion 173c has an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b that is curved in a semicircular shape protruding toward the pivot base end side of the front frame 14, and is configured so that space is secured from the upper end of the curved portion to be further bent into a semicircular shape in the opposite direction, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring housed in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one period of a sine wave) and projects from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the position change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load, and to reduce the risk of the wiring being broken.

The front frame 14 has an upper extended wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (
An inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion made of a resin material and has an inverted cup shape that opens downward, is disposed between the front frame 14 (the portion closest to the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a that is a long plate portion extending vertically on the base end side of the rotation of the front frame 14.

The inverted cup portion 178 is a portion that acts as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts, such as, for example, illegally pushing apart the base end side of the rotation of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire near the lower hinge 18, and letting it enter the play area. That is, even if a piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 near the lower hinge 18, if the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below, the progress of the piano wire can be impeded, and therefore the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the play area.

In addition, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material,
This can be used as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire with a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat of the wire causes the inverted cup portion 178 to break.
The long cover member 173 can be melted and pass through the inverted cup portion 178.
In addition, when the heated end of the piano wire passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned off, and by detecting that the wiring has been broken, it becomes easier to discover fraudulent activity.

In particular, in this embodiment, wall 178a of inverted cup portion 178 on the long cover 173 side is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of long cover member 173, and they abut (are close to each other) with their faces. Also, since the normal line of the lower surface of inverted cup portion 178 at wall 178a is shaped to face downward, when a piano wire enters inverted cup portion 178 from below, it is possible to increase the possibility that it will be pressed against the lower surface of wall 178a, and if inverted cup portion 178 is melted, there is a high probability that long cover 173 will also be melted, making it easier to discover fraudulent activity.

When the tip of the piano wire is not heated, the wall 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction. In other words, when the piano wire is inserted through a gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 and reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is inserted further, its tip will be pressed against the wall 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a is shaped to match the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a and is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is inserted further, the tip of the piano wire advances in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip of the front frame 14 (
This prevents the piano wire from reaching the play area.

Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the play area while preventing the reaction force applied to a cheater via the piano wire from becoming too large, for example, by placing a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below lower wall portion 173a, it is possible to discover the cheating before the cheater escapes, making it easier to apprehend the cheater.

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person committing the fraudulent act cannot tell this, and will assume that the piano wire is on its way to the play area.
This allows the cheater to naturally (without making the cheater suspect that the wire was not inserted properly) insert the wire deeper (until the tip of the wire is visible from the front side through the wire) and thus increases the time it takes for the cheater to realize that his cheating has been discovered and to try to escape.

The detection device may be a device formed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. The location of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various locations are allowed. For example, the detection device may be disposed in the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operating handle 51. If the detection device is disposed in the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed in the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine the entry of a piano wire.

As shown in Fig. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right part of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in Fig. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a launching rail 730 that guides the game ball so that the game ball shot out by the launching solenoid 701 is launched toward the area between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62.
and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball delivery device 720 delivers game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) to a launch rail 730.
In this case, the game balls are placed on the projection path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching part in the launch solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 is caused to contact the launch rail 7
30, and the game ball is shot into the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launching unit 112a is not limited to the launching solenoid 701, and a launching motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12, to the left of the launch rail 730, there is disposed a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1-CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1-HN3 are connected, as shown in Fig. 90. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that passes through the area where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side.

As shown in Figure 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 are
One end of the passage is open toward the rear side so as to be able to communicate with the through hole that penetrates the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end of the passage is open toward the bottom, forming a curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changing from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction).
The balls dispensed from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through holes in the inner frame 12, enter the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 14 is attached to the lower part of the plate passage forming member 160.
The ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided on the machine 10 is inserted into the upper tray passage 161 on the main body side. The upper tray passage 141 on the front door side is disposed below the upper tray passage 161 on the main body side, and the lower tray passage 142 on the front door side is disposed below the lower tray passage 162 on the main body side.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the plate passage forming member 160 is provided with a main body side upper plate passage portion 161.
A shutter 163 is provided to restrict the outflow of game balls from the lower tray passage 162 on the main body side. The shutter 163 has a blocking position where it narrows the outlet portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of game balls, and
It is provided so as to be switchable between an allowable position which allows the game balls to flow out and an allowable position which allows the game balls to flow out.

In addition, a biasing member (such as a coil spring) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the shutter 163 remains in the blocking position due to the biasing force of the biasing member when the front frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 12. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162.

In contrast, when the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pushed back to the allowable position against the above-mentioned biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, allowing the game balls to flow down.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. Note that the board 167 includes a portion where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and a portion where the connector CN3 is provided, which are separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided on the main control device 1.
10, while connector CN3 is used for transmission with voice lamp control device 113. Since the transmission targets are different, the purpose of using separate boards is to prevent malfunctions in advance.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to Figures 91 and 92. Figure 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded, and Figure 92 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded.

As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14,
On the front side of the front frame 14, the operation device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above the right of the lower tray 50, and at the center in the left-right direction of the front frame 14.
A covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side, and is configured with a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. In other words, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the illumination parts 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and is configured in a curved shape with the left and right central portion projecting toward the front side, hanging portions 372 that extend downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at a midpoint between the left and right central portion and the left and right ends of the main body curved portion 371 toward the sides that are close to each other in the width direction and join at the extended lower ends to form a V shape when viewed from the front, and hanging portions 372 that are fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at at least the left and right ends.
72, a light-transmitting portion 373 which is formed from a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372, a left side planar support portion 374 which is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, a right side planar support portion 375 which is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a support groove 376 which is recessed from the rear side in the right side planar support portion 375 and has a width which increases as it approaches the rear side (tapered).

The curved portion 371 of the main body is configured with a rounded curved shape at the front edge and a curved shape at the back edge that matches the front edge of the upper tray 17.
a rear left edge 371a that abuts against the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300 in the front-rear direction; a rear middle edge 371b that is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300 and abuts against the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction in an assembled state;
1b, and a rear right edge portion 371c which is connected to the opposite side of the rear left edge portion 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball lending operation unit 40 and abuts the ball lending operation unit 40 in the front-to-back direction when assembled.

The hanging portion 372, together with the curved main body portion 371, covers the operating device 300 from the front side, and is a plate portion on which the operating handle 51 is supported, and is disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14.
The hanging portion 372 is shaped so as not to create a gap between the right corner cover 380 and the operating device 300 (so that the contact position with the right corner cover 380 coincides with each other), thereby preventing access to the operating device 300 from the front side.
A screw is inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed, whereby the bottom plate is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The light-transmitting section 373 is a part that allows light irradiated from the operating device 300 to pass through to the front side, enabling the creation of optical effects. The light-transmitting section 373 is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300, and is positioned in close proximity to the lower frame member 320 when in the assembled state (see Figure 86).

In the first embodiment, the LED device 341f is disposed so as to irradiate light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an item that can be determined arbitrarily, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is disposed so as to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, it irradiates light upward (is disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e).
Six LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the underside of the lighting support portion 341e)
Two of them are placed on each side.

Of the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LEDs that emit light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilt device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LEDs that emit light downward passes through the tilt device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light-transmitting portion 373.
When the lamp 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32 ), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then through the light-transmitting portion 373 .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light irradiated from the LED that irradiates light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 is changed in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310, while eliminating the need to change the amount of light irradiated from the LED that irradiates light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control for changing the amount of light).

As another performance control method, it is also possible to control the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, by controlling the amount of light to be changed stronger (in stages) as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), and the amount of light to be changed weaker (in stages) as the tilting device 310 changes from the first state to the second state, the degree of change in the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the settings).

In the assembled state ( FIG. 86 ), the left side flat support portion 374 abuts against the lower end of the decorative illumination portion 8031 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the decorative illumination portion 8031 and the decorative illumination portion 8031 shifts downward in position, an upward reaction force is generated from the left side flat support portion 374 toward the decorative illumination portion 8031. This makes it possible to suppress the decorative illumination portion 8031 from shifting downward in position.

In the assembled state ( FIG. 86 ), the right side flat support portion 375 abuts against the lower end of the decorative illumination portion 8032 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the decorative illumination portion 8032 and the decorative illumination portion 8032 shifts downward in position, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support portion 375 toward the decorative illumination portion 8032. This makes it possible to suppress the decorative illumination portion 8032 from shifting downward in position.

Although details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 are provided on the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 803
An upward reaction force is generated from the 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400.
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the illuminated parts 8031, 8032 and covering cover 370 which are fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a, so that the force required to support the upper panel unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end of the illumination part 8032 entering from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86 ), the illumination part 8032 is inserted to the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the position of the front lower corner end of the illumination part 8032 and the front side end of the right flat support part 375 coincide with each other.

The details of the engagement between the support groove 376 and the illumination part 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 can be fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state, and a separate fastening part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)) on the back side of the main body frame 14a, and the passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or plate member 14d on the back side of the plate member 14d (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)), and a metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or plate member 14d (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)) in a manner covering the passage forming unit 140 from the back side.

The sheet metal member 150 functions as an intrusion prevention member that makes it impossible to intrude into the inner frame 12 from the front side of the front frame 14, even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, if a wire with a heated tip or a piano wire is pressed against it and melts), In other words, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal will not be penetrated even if a wire with a heated tip is pressed against it, and can prevent the exemplified wire from intruding into the back side of the front frame 14.

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in a manner that covers the top, bottom, left and right of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 on the left side when viewed from the front, and mainly comprises a fitting box section 151 whose open front side is fitted into the passage forming unit 140, and a flat plate-like section 152 which covers the back surface of the lower part of the foul ball passage section 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

The fitting box portion 151 covers the top, bottom, left and right of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145, and therefore is not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-to-rear direction at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145.
Even if the wire is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the wire shown in the example is a passage forming unit 1
It is possible to prevent entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, even if a wire as exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower tray 50 to open a through hole, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140. An example of a case in which such a situation occurs is when the operating device 300 is removed and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion where the front and rear thickness has become thinner as a result (a portion diagonally above and behind the recessed portion 15a) to open a through hole through which the exemplified wire can enter.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating unit back member 155 that is fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating unit back member 155 is fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a at the upper or lower position where the cylinder lock 20 is positioned in the assembled state (see Figure 86).

As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a left-right long plate member.
56, and through holes 157 through which screws are inserted to fasten the operating unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a, a pair of connecting through holes 158 drilled side by side above and below in the portion (left end) that is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140, and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 that protrudes toward the rear side on the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
58 and a screw-in portion 148b that is drilled at a position that coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the fore-and-aft direction as a hole into which a screw can be screwed in.

With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is stacked on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear member 155 are aligned by passing the protruding portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158, and then the screw that has passed through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 is screwed into the screw-in portion 148b, so that the operation unit rear member 155 can be easily assembled.
55 can be fastened to the passage forming unit 140.

The left edge of the left end of the operation unit back surface member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge are formed at a right angle to form an L-shaped wall portion 158a. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has an extension wall portion 148c that extends from the plate that forms the framework of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area, and the extension wall portion 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed into an L-shape that can come into surface contact with the wall portion 158a in all directions.

Therefore, in order to align the operating unit back member 155 when assembling it to the passage formation unit 140, in addition to passing the protrusion portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is brought into surface contact with the extended wall portion 148c from above, below, left and right, thereby enabling the position and attitude of the operating unit back member 155 relative to the passage formation unit 140 to be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is disposed in front and rear facing relation to the panel surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed in the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The details will be described later.
Under certain conditions, the front frame 1 comes into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.
4 from being closed.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the rear side of the operation unit rear member 155 and is formed from synthetic resin, and is formed with a U-shaped cross section as viewed in the extending direction in order to ensure rigidity. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required can be reduced while ensuring rigidity compared to when it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Therefore, by being formed with the same plate thickness as the thickness of other portions of the operation unit rear member 155 (for example, the plate thickness of a portion that does not matter if its strength is low because the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a and is formed as thin as possible), the strength of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to a U-shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, compared to a flat plate-like cross section, the cross section may be curved (wave-shaped), stepped, rectangular wave-shaped, or cylindrical.

In addition, the opening/closing restriction portion 159 is not a part of the operation portion back member 155 but is a part of the main body frame 14.
Alternatively, the cover 14 may be formed of a metal part that is bent and extended from the cover 14a to the rear side, or that is extended from a separate member that is fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a to the rear side.
Forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 from synthetic resin can prevent the board surface support device 600 from chipping or denting when it comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) made of a metal member. This reduces the risk of injury to an operator who changes the state of the board surface support device 600 to attach or detach the game board 13 by touching a chip or dent in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is disposed closer to the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, it is possible to ensure a longer distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location of the cylinder lock 20 disposed on the tip end side of the rotation. Therefore, when the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 or the locking mechanism 20RK disposed on the tip end side of the rotation will be erroneously locked.

A possible route for a foreign object such as a wire to enter is, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely detachable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, even if a foreign object follows a gap in the operation device 300, it is difficult for the foreign object to enter the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operating device 300 is inserted through a wiring hole 14 formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is inserted through the protective cover device 350 (
It is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the housing (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the interior of the operating device 300 through a gap in the operating device 300, it is difficult for the wire to reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operating device 300, which is configured roughly in a case shape, making it easier to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

It should be noted that a liquid may be considered as a foreign object that may enter the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick after playing a game may splash drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10.
The operation device 300 located in a convenient position is likely to become a victim of splashing drinking water on it. If no measures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 1) may be damaged.
(see 3) may malfunction.

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water penetrates to the rear of the main body frame 14a, it may cause damage to electronic boards, etc., but as described above, in this embodiment, the operating device 300 is configured to be detachable and independent on the front side of the main body frame 14a, so that liquid such as drinking water sprayed on the operating device 300 can be prevented from penetrating to the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

A recess 15a is provided in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess.
It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed here and there (see, for example, FIG. 13 ).
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance (passage gap) pass through the inside of the operation device 300,
The recessed portion 15 a serves to temporarily store liquid that falls below the operating device 300 .

In the operating device 300, the driving motor 342 is disposed toward the rear side of the opening 325, so that the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)). Furthermore, the connection portion with the wiring is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor housing portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18). Therefore, liquids such as drinking water may fall on the driving motor 342.
42, thereby preventing it from breaking down.

Furthermore, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk that liquids such as drinking water may get on it, but since the other parts are covered by the bottom plate part 321, liquids such as drinking water only adhere to the vibration surface (upper surface) and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibration surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see Figures 13 and 22). Therefore, breakdown of the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player splashes liquid such as drinking water on the player as he or she is leaving, the next player can play as normal as long as he or she wipes the top surface of the operation device 300 that the player touches, thereby preventing the maintenance time for the operation device 300 from affecting business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d at the pivot base end side of the front frame 14 on the rear side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to Figs. 93 to 96.
6, a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14, similar to FIG.

Fig. 93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and Fig. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180, in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are illustrated side by side. Note that in Fig. 93(b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is illustrated on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is illustrated on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and is a member that binds together the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are stretched leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
The harness HN2 connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see Figure 92) is guided to the binding movable member 180 without an intermediate board and is each bound to the binding movable member 180.

On the other hand, the illumination units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86
The harnesses connected to the respective long-length cover members 173 are first connected (gathered) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long-length cover member 173, and then are connected to a bundle of extension harnesses HN.
3 is directed toward the bundling movable member 180, and its extension harness HN3 is bundled to the bundling movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed from a synthetic resin material, and includes a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side, a movable arm 182 rotatably supported by a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction, a pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the rotation direction (the side surface opposite to the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93( a )) along the lower edge of the movable arm 182, and
A pair of locking portions 184 that are U-shaped when viewed from above and can lock the binding arm portion 183 are provided on the other side surface in the rotation direction of the binding arm portion 183 (the side surface facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)).
and a temporary fastening portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (middle position) between the pair of binding arms 183 and having an opening.

In addition, the binding movable member 180 is formed such that the binding arm portion 183 has high flexibility, while the other portions are formed to have at least lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The main body 181 includes a fixed portion 181a having a cross section with an upper side formed in a substantially horseshoe shape and a through hole in the center for passing a screw through, a pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b respectively protruding from the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d, an intermediate stopper 181c extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d, and a plate-shaped support plate 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96(a) ), and a cylindrical fastening portion 181e that is disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d and has a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.
Provide for the Lord.

The plate member 14d has a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, the hole group 14d1 being composed of through holes arranged in the same manner as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b fit into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1, thereby preventing the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a during fastening.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains each of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between itself and the plate member 14d.
In this embodiment, by narrowing the gap between the extended end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping down, and by using a shape curved along a circle whose center is located on the plate member 14d side, it is possible to suppress stress concentration due to deformation while accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 in the area (between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18).
1c) can have a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer circumferential surface of e is fitted into the base end side portion of the movable arm 182 and supports the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm 182 mainly comprises a base end 182a which is shaped to smoothly connect to a plane OS1 offset from the support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the base end being the portion which is externally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long, thin plate shape which is connected to the opposite side of the support position of the base end 182a.

The base end 182a has side walls extending in the direction of rotation from the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, the left and right ends (parts where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back end (part closest to the plane OS1). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape with the center of the radius of curvature located on the same side, and the distance between them gradually decreases as they approach the plane OS1, and becomes equal to the thickness of the thin plate portion 182b when they reach the plane OS1.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains a higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation.

The pair of binding arms 183 are configured with the same shape, so one will be described and the other will be omitted. The binding arm 183 has narrow sections 183a formed with a width equal to that of the base near the tip and wide sections 183b formed wider than the narrow sections 183a, which are alternately formed at equal intervals. In the fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking section 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer periphery side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), so that space can be secured on the inner periphery side of the binding arm 183.

The locking portion 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 1
and a small opening 184b that is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with the large opening 184a in between and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b is sized to allow the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through, but not the large width portion 183b to pass through (become locked).

According to this embodiment, when it is desired to move the binding arm portion 183 relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm portion 183 is disposed on the large opening portion 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 is smaller).
When it is desired to engage binding arm portion 183 with engaging portion 184, by arranging binding arm portion 183 on the side of small opening 184b, the size of the inner area surrounded by binding arm portion 183 (degree of tightness) can be easily adjusted.

The temporary fastening portion 185 has a through hole in the center thereof through which a cable tie can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and it becomes impossible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3 by inserting a commercially available cable tie into the through hole of the temporary fastening portion 185 and fixing it.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. Fig. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and Fig. 94(b ... shown in Fig. 94(a).
95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14 along the line XCVb in FIG.
A partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along line b-XCVb.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and in FIG. 95(a) and FIG. 95(b),
The figure shows a state in which the movable arm 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and abuts against a vertically long metal portion that constitutes the left portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range).

As shown in FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, the movable arm 182 is rotatable along an axis (
This angle is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing in normal use, considering the installation conditions of the pachinko machines 8010 in game parlors (the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side on the left and right, and if the pachinko machine 8010 is rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of it colliding with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010).

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in Figure 94 and the state shown in Figure 95), thereby reducing the risk of the movable arm 182 deteriorating and breaking due to elastic deformation.

Next, the supporting manner of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described.
Since the position of the wire 3 is determined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent the wire 3 from being accidentally caught between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and breaking, for example.

Figure 96(a) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, Figure 96(b) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(a), Figure 96(c) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and Figure 96(d) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 96(c) and FIG. 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. That is, since the horizontal lines of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are the same, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the upper extended wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the movable arm 18 of the binding movable member 180 is
2. This allows the shape of the casing 1 to be adjusted to match that of FIG. 96(b) and FIG.
), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation.

In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d across the movable arm portion 182. Therefore, particularly when the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. This makes it possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being broken due to bending.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic diagrams of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the bundling movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
97(a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG 97(b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

97(a) and 97(b) show a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86), as well as showing the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 typically with imaginary lines and members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12, respectively, and supported at the rotation center point P57 typically with solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and like the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates relative to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b),
The base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby
Since the front frame 14 is opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (FIG. 9
6(b), see also Figure 96(d).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is open or closed relative to the inner frame 12.
The vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 96(d) )
The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are routed along a path passing near the portion where the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 abuts. That is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are routed so as to forcibly make a detour, so that the harnesses HN
This prevents the curved portions of HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the tip end of the front frame 14 when it is rotated.

This makes it possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the worker when opening and closing the front frame 14, and also makes it possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the worker when the front frame 14 is closed.
The fit of N1 to HN3 (fitting by bending only once on the rotation base end side) can be improved (see FIG. 96(b) and FIG. 97(a)).

In this embodiment, intermediate stopper 181c is disposed vertically above inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Due to the manner in which intermediate stopper 181c disposed vertically above inverted cup portion 178 supports harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as, for example, heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature to melt and penetrate inverted cup portion 178, thereby allowing the wire to enter between front frame 14 and inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the underside of the inverted cup portion 178, melted to penetrate the wire, and advanced toward the play area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the tip of the wire heated to a high temperature is supported by the intermediate stopper portion 181c of the harness H.
As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned off, making electrical continuity impossible.

When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), so that fraud can be quickly discovered. Therefore, a person committing fraud can be prevented from obtaining fraudulent benefits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 burns out, it becomes impossible to launch the ball even by rotating the operating handle 51. Therefore, the period from when a cheating act is committed until the cheating act is discovered can be shortened (the cheating act can be discovered early).

In this case, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts of illegally obtaining a prize ball by inserting a wire into the play area, tampering with the play area (for example, bending the nails to make it easier to illegally win a prize), and then having the ball enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like, from being able to shoot balls, thereby preventing the person from receiving an illegal advantage. In other words, it is possible to make it impossible to perform certain fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN2 burns out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) cannot be operated. Therefore, a person who commits fraudulent acts will be
This can act as a deterrent to fraudulent behavior, as there is a risk that fraudulent behavior may result in the inability to collect the bills inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the remaining balls on the card.

Furthermore, when committing fraudulent acts to eliminate the risk of not being able to collect the bills inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the balls equivalent to the remaining balance on the card, the fraudulent acts are committed without leaving the seat even though the balance on the card unit (ball lending unit) is 0 yen, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent acts.

In the first place, if the harness HN2 is disconnected, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
In the game machine store where the disconnection error (CR error) of
By checking the error code (R error), it is easy to identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
The outline of the ball guide opening 53 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is disposed at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145.
The lower end of the foul ball passage 145 is arranged on the left side of the ball guide opening 53 to occupy an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145 is arranged on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 to occupy the remaining area (an area of about 1/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53).
It is divided by.

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 are passages that extend from the payout ball receiving port section 143 and the foul ball receiving port section 146, respectively, so that balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. The S-shaped paths SL1 and S2 are arranged so that the extension direction faces (switches) at least once on both the left and right sides.
L2.

The S-shaped path SL1 allows the flow path length of the front door side lower tray path section 142 to be increased while maintaining the vertical dimension of the path forming unit 140 short, so that the number of balls that can be retained inside the front door side lower tray path section 142 can be increased. This allows the window section 14c (see FIG. 86)
Since it is possible to increase the number of balls that can be retained upstream of the lower tray 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension, it is possible to configure a pachinko machine 8010 that can ensure large vertical dimensions of the game area and performance area, and by having a large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side), it is possible to reduce the stress caused to the player when refilling the balls (stress caused by being required to refill balls from the 1000 ryo box when 50 balls in the lower tray are used up).

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 each have bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, which are regions where the extension direction is bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, and they have a common feature. That is, the front door side lower tray passage section 142 has a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEa2 arranged upstream of the first bending region NEa1 with the characteristic portion reversed left and right.

In addition, the foul ball passage portion 145 is formed on the downstream side of the first bending area NEb1, and the second bending area NEb2 is disposed on the upstream side of the first bending area NEb1 with the left and right of the characteristic portion reversed.
In the description of the characteristic portion, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, the first bending region NEa1 mainly includes a side wall Na arranged on the opposite side of the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage section 142, a ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extension direction of the side wall Na, and an adjacent wall Nc extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extension end.
Nb and Nc are provided to extend from the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc has a surface Nc1 on the opposite side to the ceiling wall Nb curved along an S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the ball. Meanwhile, the surface Nc2 on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) functions as a surface for regulating the direction of travel of an improperly inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or a piano wire), and this will be described in detail later. Note that the distance of the gap Nin between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is set to be equal to or larger than the distance between the wire HM and the side wall Na.
It is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 prevents the wire HM from being inserted improperly.
That is, as shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that is illegally inserted can be prevented from entering the lower tray passage portion 14 on the front door side with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance.
In this case, the person committing the fraudulent act may have been able to move upstream of wire H2.
M is advanced while being pressed against the side wall of the front door side lower tray passage section 142.

When a fraudster presses the wire HM against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM enters the gap Nin. On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM advances to the right due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage section 142, and is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. That is, a pair of bending areas NEa1,
By arranging NEa2 in a left-right inverted manner, the wire HM can be inserted into the gap Nin without omission.

An example of the progression path of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin is shown in Figure 99. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the progression direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in Figure 99, the wire HM that enters the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM gets caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from progressing further, and also to prevent the wire HM from being held, so that fraudulent activity can be quickly discovered.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to move forward, when the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes with its tip pointing downward.
Even if the wire HM is advanced, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward.
The payout device 133 is disposed upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143, and the foul ball receiving portion 146
This can prevent the water from reaching the play area located upstream of the water.

As a result, the wire HM may reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, resulting in the player obtaining an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM may reach the game area and cause the electric device 64 to be played.
This can prevent a cheater from obtaining an illegal advantage by forcibly opening a movable device such as the reel 0a (see FIG. 2) to make it easier to win illegally and obtain illegally dispensed balls.

Returning to FIG. 98, the foul ball passage 145 is formed with a vertical width of about twice the diameter of the ball (more than twice in this embodiment) downstream from the merging area CE where it merges with the ball removal passage 147. This makes it possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the balls will be sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and interlock with each other, even if the balls flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enter the merging flow path CE (the two balls enter the merging area CE at the same time) and two balls are lined up vertically when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are placed in the merging area CE. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the balls from being impeded downstream from the merging area CE.

The foul ball passage 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage 145a that vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and the passage 145a is formed by the passage forming unit 1.
The rear bottom plate portion of the housing 40 is formed so as to protrude toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage section 145a, the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage section 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage section 145a, the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the downstream end portion of the passage section 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage 145, the upstream region of the passage 145a is closer to the passage 14
In this embodiment, the front-to-rear width of the foul ball passage section 145 downstream of the passage section 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 is set so that the front-to-rear width upstream of the passage 145a is slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball.
When balls are retained in the passage 145a, multiple balls can be positioned with their positions shifted forward and backward upstream of the passage 145, which increases the number of balls that can be retained. At the same time, the centers of the balls are prevented from being lined up in the forward and backward directions (they will be slightly shifted left and right and up and down), which prevents two balls from entering the passage 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage 145a can be restricted to one at a time. This makes it possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the junction area CE at the same time, even if two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage 145 in succession, thereby reducing the possibility of the balls getting caught between the upper and lower walls and interlocking in the junction area CE.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 is provided in a plate-like shape extending from the bottom plate portion on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, and has a left end portion connected to the left wall portion. The foul ball receiving portion 146 is provided with an inclined plate portion 146a whose downward slope of the ball flows downward toward the right, and a foul ball receiving portion 146b vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
46, and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
and a curved guide plate portion 146c extending in a plate shape from the rear bottom plate portion of the support member 40 toward the rear side, the curved guide plate portion 146c being curved in such a manner that the extending direction becomes more upward as it approaches the rear side.

The ball is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c toward the foul ball passage portion 145 (front side), while the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b act to guide the ball toward the foul ball receiving portion 145 (front side).
The position of the ball passing through the inclined plate portion 146 toward the front side can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball rolling down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can be caused to flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b can prevent the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

This makes it possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. In other words, because the ball can finish bouncing up and down before it reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (the variation in the ball's up and down position can be reduced), the width of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the S-shaped path SL2 can be set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) while allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage 145 is formed in a range that forms the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage 145a
) the passage width is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), so that illegal tools with a larger outer diameter can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, a description will be given of the structure of the front side of the front frame 14. Fig. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and Fig. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Figs. 100 and 101 show a state in which the components of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination section 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long in the left-right direction, and the left and right ends are supported from below by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illumination parts 8031 and 8032. In this support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) is formed at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similar to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, and is recessed from the back side to the front side. The left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 are fitted into fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500, thereby allowing the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 to be supported from below by the right panel unit 500.
0 is concatenated.

This makes it unnecessary to directly fasten the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500, and allows them to be connected and fixed to each other by fastening them to the main body frame 14a. Due to the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a is regulated to the order of fastening the right panel unit 500 first, and then fastening the upper panel unit 400. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 are configured to sandwich and fit into the fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see Figures 108 and 109) provided in the overlapping plate units 500R, 500L of the right panel unit 500, which is divided into left and right parts.
Therefore, in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 can be prevented from being disassembled.

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the front side of the main body frame 14a is
89, and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89), and the multi-function cover members 171, 172 are shown disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through hole through which a screw is inserted from its rear side, and is a part for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e by fastening the screw that passes through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see Figure 101) of the upper frame member 410.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500 is shown disassembled from the main frame 14a. The right panel unit 500 is fastened to the main frame 14a by screws that are inserted from the rear side into insertion holes drilled in the right panel unit 500. The upper panel unit 400, upper edge plate member 14e, and multi-function cover members 171, 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

In addition, in the actual assembly procedure, the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a, and then the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall portion that forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

FIG. 105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the weight plate units 500L and 500R. Note that Fig. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and Fig. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109 , the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking board unit 500L and a right stacking board unit 500R that are stacked in the left-right direction, and the stacking board units 50
and a vertically long support plate portion 510 to which the 0L and 500R are fastened and which is fastened to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The weight plate unit 500 is secured to the support plate portion 510 by a screw inserted from the rear side to the front side.
The L and R are fastened to the support plate portion 510, and in this state, the support plate portion 510 is
The plate 4 is fastened to a main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw that is inserted from the rear side to the front side of the plate 4a.

The support plate 510 is formed with an L-shaped cross section by extending an extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side.
The fixing member 511 mainly comprises a fixed plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of main body frame 14a at a position corresponding to the fixing member 512 (see FIG. 1), a base member 512 which is fastened to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, a plurality of cover side through holes 513 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the base member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the base member 512, and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixing plate 511 to the right of the lens side through holes 514.

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps with the base member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion of the fixing plate 511 facing the base member 512 protrudes toward the front in a platform shape, and the base member 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 in a state where it is in face-to-face contact with the front of the base portion 511b.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b is
In the width direction, the weight plate units 500L and 500B can abut against each other (see FIG. 115(b)).
In other words, the posture of the weight plate units 500L, 500R relative to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extension portion 51
1a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511
On the front side of the a, the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the fixing plate 5
On the left side surface of 11, a surface is formed up to the rear end as a surface that is almost flush with the side surface of the base portion 511b, so that the rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be positioned in the same plane as the rear end of the support plate portion 510, and in the assembled state (see Figure 86), the inner surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 abuts against the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a curved row that matches the curved shape of the light-guiding member 540, with a predetermined interval (11 mm interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape of the light-guiding member 540 projected from the front, and irradiate light from directly behind the light-guiding member 540 toward the light-guiding member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other (see FIG. 107).

The width of the end face of light-guiding member 540 facing LED 512a is made longer than the width of LED 512a (the left-right width of the light-emitting portion) (see imaginary line in Figure 107), so that the light irradiated from LED 512a enters light-guiding member 540 without any leakage and exits from either side of light-guiding member 540; the entry and exit of light and the path of that light will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 disposed on the inner cover member 520, and through which a screw to be fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 is inserted from the rear side.
Fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning a rear fastening portion 556 disposed on the outer lens member 550, and through which a screw to be fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 is inserted from the rear side.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be approximately twice the length of the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, while strictly defining the left-right position of the outer cover member 560, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the stacking plate units 500L, 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, even if the plate units 500L, 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (if they are misaligned vertically by approximately the diameter of the protrusion 566), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515.
After inserting the pin support hole 515, the weight plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount of misalignment, the misalignment can be eliminated and fastening can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking plate unit 500L has a window portion 14c (FIG. 86
5. An inner cover member 520 which constitutes the right edge of the inner cover 520 (see FIG. 5) and is made of a light-impermeable resin material.
and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and made of a light-transmitting, colorless resin material.

The right stacking plate unit 500R includes a light guide member 540 disposed opposite the left stacking plate unit 500L.
An outer lens member 550 is disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and is made of a light-opaque resin material. The outer lens member 550 is disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and is made of a light-opaque resin material. The outer lens member 550 faces the light-guiding member 540 in the left-right direction and faces the light-guiding member 540 in the front-rear direction.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described.
110 is an exploded front perspective view of the load plate units 500L and 500R. Note that Fig. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front, and Fig. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front, and the five plate members constituting the load plate units 500L and 500R are exploded and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 5
30, and a plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws are screwed to fix the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520; and a cylindrical portion formed longer than the short fastening portions 525 and inserted into the inner lens member 530, and a cylindrical portion formed longer than the short fastening portions 525 and inserted into the inner lens member 530, and
and a plurality of rear fastening portions 527 protruding from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 from the rear side are screwed.
And, mainly prepare.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front end portion 521a formed in a wave shape, and includes a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the rear base portion 521b at a short width portion (portion closer to the rear side) of the wave shape.

The rear base portion 521b is attached to the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
It has an inner surface 521b1 that comes into face contact with (has the same shape as) the left side surface 521b.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is disposed in an attitude that inclines more leftward as it approaches the rear surface side, and an opening portion 524 is defined by this connecting plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate parts 521c are not arranged at equal intervals up and down, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the multiple openings 524 are made different, and the lighting effect is created by the openings 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and includes a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-to-rear direction, and an engaging groove 522b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface.

The fitting grooves 522b are formed as grooves into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two points at the upper end and one point at the lower end.

The fitting grooves 523b are formed as grooves into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in four positions above and below, and are arranged in the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
Each of the outer portions of the openings 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as its end (left end). That is, each of the openings 524 is disposed recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the rear base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110).
The surface (left side surface) of the rear base portion 52 corresponds to the portion that protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111).
The surface of 1b is curved concavely to the right between the above-mentioned boundary portions in a design manner.
That is, the surface of the rear base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates from side to side as it progresses in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed on the back side of the portion that protrudes toward the front side in the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that is likely to become dead space is formed on the back side of the portion that protrudes in the design. In contrast, in this embodiment, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed in the recess of the inner cover member 520, so that the dead space can be effectively utilized and the space efficiency on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (the inner lens member 530 side) can be improved.

The inner lens member 530 is formed such that the front and rear end shapes are similar to the front and rear end shapes of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed in a vertically long plate shape by the main body plate portion 5
A front end 531 a of the inner cover member 520 is formed into a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end 521 a of the inner cover member 520 .

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front edge of the main plate portion 531, and a support hole 531 is formed in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction, and a protruding portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted through the support hole 531.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the front part of the wave-shaped front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 is formed on the rear side thereof, through which a screw passes to fasten the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520. That is, since the screw is fastened behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b is
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a rear portion of the wave-shaped front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 is disposed on the rear side thereof, which extends to a position where the support hole 531c can come into contact with the light guide member 540. That is, the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, so that the support hole 531c can be supported by the inclined rib portion 532.
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of support hole 531c, deformation or displacement of support hole 531c can be prevented.

The main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d drilled in the left-right direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the up-down direction and large enough to insert the long fastening portion 526. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is disposed between the pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.
b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended to fill the gap between the light guide member 540 and the upper and lower plate portions 532a.
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it approaches the rear side, and therefore has a shape that becomes longer in left-right width as it approaches the rear side (a triangle shape with the front end at its tip when viewed from above).

Inner lens member 530 has protruding portion 533 formed protruding leftward from main body plate portion 531 in a manner passing through opening 524. Protruding portion 533 has light scattering portion 533a, on the side opposite to the protruding side, which is provided in a wavy convex shape and has a wavy curved surface that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is a so-called light guide plate made of thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions formed on both left and right sides as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern, which redirect the traveling direction of light irradiated from the LEDs 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions. That is, at least a part of the light irradiated from the LEDs 512a to the back side end of the light guide member 540 is redirected to the left and right directions via the light guide member 540, and is irradiated to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The light guide member 540 is heat-bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see Figures 105 and 107), and is formed into a shape in which the width dimension in the thickness direction gradually tapers from the end face on the back side (the LEDs 512a side) to the end face on the front side.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
The concave portion is a notched recess recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 5
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by pressing (thermally pressing) a template having a pattern in which cone-shaped portions with an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of about 1 mm at the bottom circle are distributed in a lattice shape at intervals of about 3 mm against the thermoplastic resin. Of the light irradiated from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted in a substantially perpendicular direction from the left and right side surfaces of the light-guiding member 540.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably transparent, and examples thereof include acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (
Among these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness to a range from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see Figure 86), the light-guiding member 540 has a wave-like shape in which the front end is slightly shifted toward the rear side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and also has a wave-like shape that undulates left and right.

The left and right wave shapes are not strictly defined in the present invention.
There are no particular restrictions, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved surface is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less.
By setting the radius of curvature (R) in this range, it is possible to provide a design that has little distortion after hot bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and allows for three-dimensional freedom.

The details of the wavy shape will be described later (see FIG. 114).
The corrugated shape is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the connecting plate 521a and located to the right (away from the inner cover member 520) between the positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c.

The corrugated shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending the base material having the concave portions formed therein, as described above. The hot bending method of the present invention is to form a curved concave surface (female mold) and a curved convex surface (female mold) in a state where the base material is heated to a heating temperature of the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin of the base material + 10 to 40°C.
The substrate is pressed against a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. More specifically, the heating temperature is preferably 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the substrate at this time is set to the melting point of the thermoplastic resin or lower. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the load deflection temperature + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the reflection angle of the light from the light source before and after the thermal bending process can be suppressed from fluctuating. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in brightness in the light guide plate and unevenness in the brightness distribution. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion of the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved main body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and the main body plate portion 5
and fastening portions 542 extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 560 and through which screws are inserted to fasten the outer cover member 560.

The light guide member 540 has a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, light guiding member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, light guiding member 540 is composed of a single plate without holes at least inside the projection surface onto which opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, so that the presentation effect of the light passing through opening 524 can be improved. The rear end of light guiding member 540 is positioned approximately flush with the rear end of inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and inner fitting portions 551 disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and into which fastening portions 542 of the light guide member 540 are fitted and supported.
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, a protrusion portion 554 that protrudes to the right in the area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 and is visible through the outer cover member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 that protrude from the rear side of the main body plate portion 551 and into which screws that fix the support plate portion 510 from the rear side are screwed in.

The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shapes of the front and rear end portions follow the shapes of the front and rear end portions of the light guiding member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and constituting a curved surface, which is wavy in shape substantially matching the shape of the front end portion of the light guiding member 540, and is disposed slightly shifted toward the front side with respect to the front end portion of the light guiding member 540. In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guiding member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed such that they are disposed at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the up-down direction.

The front end 551a is at a transition point in the front-rear direction of the curves that form the wave shape.
The support member 551 has a plurality of protruding portions 551b which are protruding from the front side and which are fitted into the support holes 531b, 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The surface of the front end 551 a opposite to the surface facing the light guide member 540 is provided with the following:
Countless bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a) ) that bulge out in a semicircular shape when viewed from the side are formed vertically. These bulging portions 551a1 function to scatter the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540 can be in a vertically continuous band-like light emission mode.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep recess having a shape recessed inward (inner of the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the protruding portion 554. This makes it possible to firmly fasten the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560, and prevents the outer lens member 550 from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right weight plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is disposed on the outer lens member 550, but not on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be disposed as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). This allows the area disposed facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) to be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540.
40 and the main body plate portion 551 come into surface contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the light guiding member 540 from being misaligned in the direction in which it is disposed opposite the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guiding member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a is disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
This makes it possible to prevent misalignment with the light-guiding member 540, and allows light to be incident from the LEDs 512a to the light-guiding member 540 with high precision.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561, which has a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520, the upper fastened portion 562 having an elongated hole portion having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and having a plurality of screw receiving portions 562a through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and a receiving surface at the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 which is capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520,
The lower fastening portion 563 has a screw receiving portion 563a formed in a long hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side.
26, and mainly comprises a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 formed in the shape of a long hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, an opening 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the protrusion portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a plurality of protrusions 566 protruding from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed in the covering cover 3.
The left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the support member 70 (see FIG. 92) are formed as grooves into which they fit.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b, 563b. Here, the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 with their surfaces in the up-down direction (see FIG. 86), so that the covering cover 370 can stably support the right panel unit 500 even if it has a shape that protrudes toward the front side, and the stably supported right panel unit 500 can support the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (
(The opening 565 is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion 554.) Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 can be narrowed, so that the fraudulent act of peeling off the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

112 and 113, the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500
We will now explain the assembly method of R. Figure 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, Figure 112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in Figure 112(a), Figure 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and Figure 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in Figure 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) show a state in which the protruding portion 551b is disposed on the rear side of the support hole 531b, and in FIG. 113(a) and 113(b) show a state in which the protruding portion 55
1b is shown inserted into the support hole 531b.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled by abutting the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front end portion 551a of the right stacking plate unit 500R in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2(b)), the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought close to the front side of the right stacking plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this manner, the protruding portions 551b, 551c are provided at the front end of the right panel unit 500.
By adopting a configuration in which the left stacking board unit 500L and the right stacking board unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support hole 531b, the design freedom of the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above-mentioned configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit (
The number of screws that are located (located closer to the front side of the light-guiding member 540) and fasten the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R can be reduced, thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws, making it easier to view the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540 in a band-like shape extending in the vertical direction.

In addition, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten the left stacking board unit 500L and the right stacking board unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that a load may be applied to the light guide member 540 by mistake during fastening.
Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded up to the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

In addition, when the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought close to the right stacking plate unit 500R from the front side and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left stacking plate unit 500L and the light guide member 540 of the right stacking plate unit 500R are
The inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 are in contact with each other. That is, the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 are in contact with each other.
This functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right weight plate unit 500R in the forward/backward direction, making it easy to assemble the right panel unit 500.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 is made by mounting the left stacking plate unit 5
The right and left weight plate units 500L and 500R are assembled by fastening, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures.

The first procedure is a method in which the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R are fastened to each other and then fastened to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right stacking plate unit 500R is fastened to the support plate portion 510 alone, and then the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right stacking plate unit 500R, and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b,
These are methods for fastening and fixing the left stacking plate unit 500L to the right stacking plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510. These two procedures can also be used when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, since the right panel unit 50 can be assembled and disassembled in two different procedures, a worker performing maintenance or the like can select which procedure to use depending on the part that needs to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble or assemble the 0, thereby shortening the work time.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, in order to disassemble the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R,
The protrusions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b must slide relative to each other in the planar direction.
In order to slide the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R relative to each other in the planar direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this manner, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c are fitted into the support hole 531b helps to prevent fraudulent activity of prying open (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see Figure 86) and entering the interior of the pachinko machine 8010 by climbing inside the right panel unit 500.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. On the other hand, when the left stacking board unit 5
The left and right weight plate units 500L and 500R are fastened to the support plate unit 510 with screws inserted from the rear side of the support plate unit 510, and the left and right weight plate units 500L and 500R are configured to be difficult to disassemble unless the screws are removed from the rear side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), making it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activity of entering the interior of the pachinko machine 8010 by climbing inside the right panel unit 500.

The shape of the light-guiding member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and its effect on the presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 114. Fig. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, Fig. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and Fig. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in Figs. 114(a) to 114(c),
The support plate portion 510 is omitted in the illustration.

Light emitted from LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is irradiated onto the light-guiding member 540 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light-guiding member 540 is redirected to the left and right by the action of the light-guiding member 540. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light-guiding member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), the side that forms the concave shape focuses light, and the side that forms the convex shape diffuses light. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side), so that the light emitted from the light guide member 540 to the opening 524 side can be focused to produce an effect. This can improve the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) is made convex, the light emitted from the light-guiding member 540 toward the outer lens member 550 can be diffused at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524 and used for presentation purposes.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the top and bottom positions are the same, it is possible to create a difference in the manner in which the light is produced (whether the light is concentrated or diffused) on the left and right sides of the light-guiding member 540, thereby improving the production effect.

The difference in the manner of light presentation is not only caused by the curved shape of the light-guiding member 540, but various other manners are exemplified. For example, the manner of light presentation on both the left and right sides can be made different by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut into the light-guiding member 540 into different regions or by dividing the thickness of the light-guiding member 540 into different regions.

The light guide member 540 is always formed with a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the top three openings 524, the vertical width increases as the opening 524 approaches the upper side, and accordingly, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 at the position corresponding to the second opening 524 from the top is set shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at a position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1 >R2 >R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit light to be concentrated for each opening 524 is different, so that the amount of light visually recognized through the openings 524 can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to this embodiment, the amount of light visually recognized can be made greater for the upper openings 524 than for the lower openings 524.

In addition, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, i.e., the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4 ≒ R1), and the normal line from the center of the concave surface is shaped to face slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the top and bottom ends can be intensified, the light presentation can be made more vivid, and the light emitted through the bottom opening 524 can be emitted upward toward the player's line of sight.

114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as the length connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of opening 524 in a side view. The width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R1 is vertical width W1, the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R2 is vertical width W2, the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R3 is vertical width W3, and the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R4 is vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 of the openings 524 are smaller toward the bottom (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the radii of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the radii of curvature R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the openings 524. This allows the light to be focused more easily in the portions where the degree of light concentration is weak (for example, the portions of the radii of curvature R
In a portion where the degree of light concentration is high (e.g., a portion of radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent too much light from being incident on the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114(b) correspond to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light-guiding member 540, and are located at approximately the middle positions of the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction.

The light guide member 540 has a leftward convex shape in an area KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the area KE is defined as a strip-shaped area extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the area K
The upper end of the region E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent thereto above, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent thereto below.
The light irradiated from a in the front-rear direction is the light irradiated from the right panel unit 500 as viewed from the left side (FIG. 114(c)
521c) proceeds while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is reflected by the inner cover member 520.
Since the light is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c, even if the light collecting effect is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player is small.

On the other hand, by making the region KE not flat but convex to the left, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed in a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming the region KE in a convex shape toward the left side, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is concentrated can be formed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. This can improve the effect of the light presentation visually recognized through the opening 565.

In other words, depending on whether or not light is incident on area KE from LED 512a, it is possible to suppress any change in the light viewed through opening 524 while causing a change in the light viewed through opening 565.

For example, the LED 512a that emits light into the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning on 12a, it is also possible to irradiate light without gaps to the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565. At this time, by making the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE have a concave shape, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the area KE intersects with the right side of the outer cover member 560, so that it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually perceived as dark in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is concentrated and emitted in an edge shape, and the amount of light visible to the player at the edge can be increased.
This can add some contrast to the lighting pattern of the LED (see reference).

The light-guiding member 540 may be configured to have a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding area (the area corresponding to the area KE) of the protruding portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be made to emit light in a band shape.

The area KE is shorter in the front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter) than the areas above and below it. Therefore, even if the light incident on the area KE is weak, it is likely to reach the front end. The light that reaches the front end may be used to create a visual effect.

That is, although it cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5
By providing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 105) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and setting the probability of a big win for that effect high, the player's eye position can be shifted away from the game board 13 from the front end of the right panel unit 500. This reduces the degree to which the player's eyes get tired, allowing the player to play for long periods of time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is visible to the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, a notification can be given by light that is not visible to the player sitting to the left of the right panel unit 500 and playing the pachinko machine 8010, but is visible to the store clerk viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side.

This allows an error notification to be executed that is not noticed by the player committing fraud but can be easily noticed by a store clerk, thereby preventing the player committing fraud from trying to escape.

Furthermore, by inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effects in area KE may be visible only to the player and not to store clerks.

FIG. 115( a ) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member 540 , and FIG. 115( b ) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member 540 .
5A is a cross-sectional view of the light-guiding member 540 taken along line CXVb-CXVb in FIG.

The light guide member 540 is gradually tapered from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side.
The width of the inner wall ...

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion arranged to face the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) of the inner lens member 530 is larger than the end surface of the portion arranged to face the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111) of the LED 5
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes longer, the taper becomes even thinner and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. This makes it possible to reduce the difference between the light emission pattern seen near the support hole 531b and the light emission pattern seen near the support hole 531c.

In this embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the upper and lower parts and disposed at a recessed position on the rear side.
Due to the shadow cast by the surrounding areas, the area near the support hole 531c tends to be visually perceived as darker than the area near the support hole 531b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion of the light guide member 54 that faces the support hole 531b
Since the end face of the light-guiding member 540 located opposite the support hole 531c is formed with a larger width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light-guiding member 540 located opposite the support hole 531c, a larger area of the surface that receives and emits light from the light irradiated from the LED 512a can be ensured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from each of the LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is different from the amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.
The amount of light that is visible in the area near the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530 can be increased, and the degree of darkness due to differences in distance in the front-rear direction and shadows can be mitigated.
With a being the foremost surface, the degree of light emission visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be made uniform across the top and bottom (the difference in intensity can be made smaller).

Fig. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in Fig. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guiding member 540 is visible. Also, in Fig. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guiding member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, light emitted from light-guiding member 540 toward inner lens member 530 is concentrated as a result of light-guiding member 540 being curved, and is slightly diffused as it passes through inner lens member 530 before proceeding to the outside.

On the other hand, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused due to the effect of the light guide member 540 being curved.
While the arrangement of the LEDs 521a is constant, the light emission pattern (denseness, brightness) can be made different on both sides of the light-guiding member 540. In other words, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize light in a light emission pattern different from the light emission pattern expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (the player side) is
115(b) is curved, so that the light is not directed straight to the side, but is deflected toward the player (see the imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b)). The imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates that
(An example of the direction of travel of light passing through the light-guiding member 540 is shown.) This makes it easier for the player to see the light, and improves the effect of the light-emitting presentation.

Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the upper panel unit 400 is made of an upper side plate member 14.
e, and the right panel unit 500 is fastened to the main body frame 14a through the fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see Figures 108 and 109) disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at its lower right end.
It is a unit that is fitted into and supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

Fig. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and Fig. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in Figs. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 (see Fig. 100) fastened to an upper edge plate member 14e with a speaker assembly 450 sandwiched therebetween, an illumination unit 401 disposed on the front side of the upper frame member 410 and fastened to the upper frame member 410, a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the rear side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e,
117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit that displays the model name, etc. on the front side.
The LEDs emit light, and the LEDs emit light.
The show will be performed using light.

The illuminated unit 401 mainly comprises a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a corrugated wall portion 403 formed in a corrugated shape on the rear outer wall portion of the main body 402, a plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge of the corrugated wall portion 403 to the rear side, a tubular portion 405 above the plate-like portion 404 which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the rear side and has a cylindrical inner shape formed by penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the rear side of the main body 402 and into which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened.

The main body 402 is formed in a box shape with the open sides of the front and rear dish-shaped members overlapping each other, forming a space inside. The LEDs contained therein are mounted on an electronic board.
The electronic board is fixed to the main body 402 .

The corrugated wall portion 403 is engaged with a corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, so that the installation position in the left-right direction can be easily determined, and the illumination unit 4 is easily attached to the upper frame member 410.
This part improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical positional deviation of the illumination unit 401 relative to the upper frame member 410. Note that a horizontally elongated groove shape is recessed and formed in the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to sandwich the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 functions as a through hole for passing wiring from an electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the main body portion 402 are arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the multiple fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space that contains the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e, and is formed so that access to the inside is difficult. In other words, the upper frame member 410 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e and the main frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG.
119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
The illumination unit 8033 mainly comprises a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened, a lower edge plate member 420 which is formed in a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and which is fastened from the rear side along the lower edge of the main body member 411, a right corner support member 430R which is fastened to the main body member 411 from the rear side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, a left corner support member 430L which is fastened to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a lens member 440 which is fitted into the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position where it protrudes from the opening 414 to the front side and is pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R to prevent it from falling off to the rear side and which constitutes the illumination section 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long member on both sides, with openings formed on both the left and right sides to allow the vibration waves (sound) generated by the speaker assembly 450 to pass through, and with the speaker cover 27 disposed to cover the openings. On the front side, the main body member 411 has a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a support through hole 413 formed in a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that faces the cylindrical portion 405 of the illumination unit 401, the support through hole 413 having an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405,
and an opening 414 formed in the upper right corner and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wave shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. This makes it easy to align the illumination unit 401 in the left-right direction when fitting it into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 .
This allows the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 to pass through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411. Therefore, one end of the wiring connected to the electronic board contained in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the other end of the wiring with a terminal on the rear side of the main body member 411, so that the other end of the wiring can be prevented from being detached when the front frame 14 is closed.

The support through-hole 413 determines the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted therethrough.
This allows the support through-holes 413 to be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 relative to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be seen in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
The light emitted from the LED 14 e 2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414 .

The main body member 411 mainly comprises, on the rear side, a wavy edge portion 416 which is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 which is recessed from the rear side at the lower end face of the right corner, a supported groove 418 which is recessed from the rear side at the lower end face of the left corner, fastening portions 419 which are arranged at symmetrical positions near the upper end and are formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and second fastening portions 419b which are formed at positions closer to the top and bottom so that a screw can be screwed in.

The wavy side portion 416 is shaped to match the shape of the opposing portion of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower front end portion). This makes it easy to position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening it to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 is shaped so that the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500.
4, a load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface in which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 is shaped so as to be able to fit into the upper end of the illumination part 8031.
86), the upper panel unit 40 is supported by the surface on which the support groove 418 is formed.
It is configured so that a load (weight, etc.) starting from 0 can be applied to the illumination section 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is provided with an enlarged rib 419a that protrudes in a rib-like manner from the base to a position that does not reach the tip.

As described below, the expanded rib 419a is a part that clamps the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper edge plate member 14e between the main body frame 14a and the expanded rib 419a by screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a being fastened to the fastening portion 419 (see Figure 125 (a)), and details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the expanded ribs 419 a are arranged in three locations around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120° in the direction in which the screws are fastened to the fastening portion 419 . The expanded ribs 419 a have the same shape.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e at a lower position of the main body member 411 and to the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450.
122) of the speaker assembly 450, and are formed at an upper position of the main body member 411 at positions that coincide with the recessed portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450, the details of which will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by curving a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a corrugated shape in a bottom view at the lower front side edge of the main body member 421, and a cross-sectional L
The main components include an L-shaped extension portion 423 formed in an L-shape, and an opening 424 arranged at an equal distance to the left and right from the left-right center position of the main body plate portion 421 (the upper end position of the curved shape) and composed of multiple small-diameter through holes that penetrate in the vertical direction.

When the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy edge portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other at the front and rear, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts against the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy edge portion 416 on its back surface, and a part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-to-rear direction.

Therefore, the effective plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the point where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut from above and below can be increased, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 is provided for the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L have circular openings 430R1, 430L1 that are circular openings that pass vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R has a horizontally elongated rectangular through hole 430R2 formed in a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction.
The light irradiated onto the lens member 440 through the opening 414 is visible to the player.

Fig. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and Fig. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that in Figs. 121 and 122, speaker connection wires 453 are shown by imaginary lines for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469, and are fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e at the left and right ends and the lower end.
0L, so we will first explain speaker assembly 450R and then speaker assembly 4
The explanation of 50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R is formed of a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave and makes the sound audible, a front assembly 460 in which the speaker 451 is inserted into a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front.
The rear assembly 48 forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
It mainly comprises 0.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to cover the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is attached to the game machine and emits sound effects related to the game.
A speaker connection wire 453 (e.g., an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a coating portion that coats the copper wire) having one end connected to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) is passed through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and a terminal connector of the speaker connection wire 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102).
4) to be connected to the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front part of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through.
The speaker 451 having the cover 54 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high quality without being muffled. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front part of the speaker 451 without causing a deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 is a body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is long from side to side and open on the rear side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and an extension plate 463 extending from the rear side edge of a recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 toward the outside of the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 in a plate-like shape,
the rear assembly 480 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 100 ); and a front recess 471 recessed from the rear end to the front side at the lower end of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided into regions in the left-right direction into a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the left-right central side of the base end side main body portion 461B (see FIG. 12 ).
121 ) and a tip side main body portion 461T connected to the left-right center side (left side in FIG. 121 ) of the intermediate main body portion 461M. Note that a space is continuously formed between the base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M and the tip side main body portion 461T and the rear assembly 480.

The main body 461 includes a rear wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding almost the entire periphery of the main body 461 in a front view. The rear wall 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned up on the inside (an edge portion that does not have a flange or the like formed on the inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see Figures 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with respect to the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the rear side.
The screw inserted into the upper plate member 14a is inserted into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper plate member 14b from the rear side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480.
It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper edge plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a and screwed into the main body member 411, and as the screw is tightened, the extension plate 463 is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to the main body frame 14a, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the main body member 411 by being tightened together.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with a resin material sandwiched therebetween), thereby improving the acoustic effect of the speaker 451.

The wire passing recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wire passing recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covering of the speaker connection wire 453. This applies pressure to the covering of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passing recess 464, and prevents a gap from being generated between the wire passing recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. This prevents the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 passes. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wire passing recess 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

In this embodiment, since the wire passing recess 464 is formed in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is attached, rather than in the rear assembly 480, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the speaker connection wire 453 to be connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wire passing recess 464. This can improve the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450.

The light passing through hole 465 is provided for the LED 14e disposed in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 toward the lens member 440.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts against the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap at the front and rear, and forms a bent passage (
123 ). This curved passage is a passage through which vibration waves (audio) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. The front end of the passage-forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from occurring on the front side of the passage-forming rib 467.

The front recess 471 is formed to a size that surrounds (protrudes slightly outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body 48 formed in a cup shape that is long from side to side and open on the front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and an extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the rear side edge of a recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 toward the outside of the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481,
a wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481; a light passing through hole 485 formed in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 481; a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib-like manner from the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body 481 toward the front side;
The front assembly 460 mainly comprises a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes through which screws can be inserted at positions corresponding to the front-to-rear direction of the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460, and a rear recessed portion 491 recessed from the front side to the rear side at a position corresponding to the front-to-rear direction of the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460.

The main body 481 is provided in a plate-like shape extending to the front side in a manner surrounding the outer periphery of the main body 481 at a position shifted inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate, and the front side wall 48 is formed from a shape that is fitted into the inner surface of the rear side wall 461H of the front assembly 460.
Equipped with 1H.

The speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H are fitted together around the entire outer periphery, so that air leakage from the outer periphery can be prevented. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer periphery.

The front side wall portion 481H is provided with a pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha that protrude beyond the wire pressing protrusion 484 toward the front side at a position that sandwiches the wire pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass through.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passing recess 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is attached to the front assembly 460. That is, the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so as to widen to the left and right as they approach the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)).
Even if the wire passing recess 464 comes off from the wire passing recess 464 and begins to shift to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

This allows the speaker connection wire 453 to be returned to the wiring passing recess 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see Figure 100), the speaker connection wire 453 can be easily accommodated in the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484.

The recessed portion 482 is configured with an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper edge plate member 14e (see Figures 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the rear side.
The screw inserted into the upper plate member 14a is inserted into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper plate member 14b from the rear side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46
0 through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted through the through hole 483a through the upper edge plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a and screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, and as the screw is tightened, the extension plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruding along the upper edge of the rear side panel of the main body 481, and is formed with a width that fits into the wiring passing recess 464, and is protruding with a protruding length that is shorter than the recessed depth of the wiring passing recess 464 and slightly shorter than the outer circumferential diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453.

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
By passing the wire 453 through the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464, the covering of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and the opening formed by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
This can suppress the occurrence of a problem in which sound leakage from the openings through which sound passes reduces the acoustic effect.

The light passing through hole 485 is provided for the LED 14e disposed in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 toward the lens member 440. The light passing through hole 485 is formed as a circular opening that is large enough to surround one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed as a tapered shape whose cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100 ), the light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is a rib that is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, abuts against each other front and rear with no gap between them, and forms a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. This curved passage is a passage through which vibration waves (audio) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H.
That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same plane as the front and rear ends of the main body 48.
This prevents a gap from being generated on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the front end of the passage forming rib 487 abuts against the passage forming rib 467, and is designed with dimensions that generate a compressive force in the front-rear direction at that time.
67, 487 elastically deform in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them (FIG. 124(b)
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and it may bend left-right, the compression force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, so the rigidity in the left-right direction can be strengthened by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (and further by the strength reinforced by the rear side wall portion 461H that is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened and the passage forming rib 487 can be prevented from bending left-right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 and the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed to a size that surrounds (protrudes slightly outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and is disposed at a position that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

FIG. 123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
123(a) and 123(b), in order to facilitate understanding,
The speaker connection wire 453 is shown by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged opposite to each other, are shown in a state in which their opposing surfaces are unfolded toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding Figures 123(a) and 123(b) about a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the center of the paper, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be aligned. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e can be brought into contact with the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e in the front-rear direction, respectively.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the base end side main body portion 46 of the front assembly 460 is provided inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the rear side of the speaker 451. An acoustic passage as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is extended from the acoustic chamber to the tip side main body 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467, 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123A and 123B, the passage forming rib 467 is formed on the inner side (left side) of the wire passing recess 464 through which the wire passes, and has rib portions 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of positions (five positions in this embodiment) alternately arranged up and down toward the left side.
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wire passing recess 464 through which the wires pass.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and the rib portions 487a,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H.
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e, in cooperation with the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480, form a curved passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, if the passage forming rib 467 is not provided and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
While vibration waves generated from the passage forming rib 467 travel in a straight line, in this embodiment, the vibration waves Ws travel while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as shown in Figure 123 (a) as an example of a propagation path, when a rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is positioned on the upper side and then the rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467b) located to the left of it (on the side of arrow L) and closest in the left-right direction is positioned on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws propagates in the upper left direction (in the direction of arrows L and U) between the ribs.

On the other hand, when a rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is positioned on the lower side and then the rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467c) located to the left of it (on the side of arrow L) and closest in the left-right direction is positioned on the upper side, the vibration wave Ws travels in a downward and leftward direction (in the direction of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d,
When 67e are arranged alternately up and down, the propagation path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that curves up and down, and the propagation path length of the vibration wave Ws can be ensured to be longer than the left and right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the length of the path that the vibration wave Ws takes to pass through the opening formed by the pair of recesses 471, 491, and makes it possible to suppress the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws.

In this embodiment, the recessed portions 462, 463b have the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
That is, the vibration wave Ws can be caused to travel in an upper left direction (the direction of the arrows L and U) between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately adjacent to the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and to the right (the side of the arrow R).

Therefore, the recesses 462, 463b have an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect achieved during assembly.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming rib 487 is a wire pressing protrusion 4 that presses the wire.
The rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d are formed on the inner side (left side) of the rib portion 484 in the left-right direction and are arranged in a plurality of positions (five positions in this embodiment) in a staggered manner up and down toward the left side.
87d, 487e.

The ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H.
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 481.

Here, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the support 60 are formed to have shapes that match each other in the front-rear direction, and are disposed opposite each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

The functions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the functions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and therefore will not be described.

In this embodiment, the recessed portions 482, 483b have the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
That is, the vibration wave Ws can be caused to travel in the upper left direction (the direction of the arrows L and U) between the recess 482 disposed immediately adjacent to the rear recess 491 and the recess 483b disposed above it on the right side (the side of the arrow R).
In addition to the effect achieved during assembly, 2,483b also achieves the effect of defining the propagation direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the space formed inside speaker assembly 450R has a vertical width that decreases the further away from speaker 451, and is once narrowed at a position where recesses 462, 482 and recesses 463b, 483b are vertically aligned, and then the vertical width suddenly expands at a position further away from speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by recesses 471, 491. This can improve the acoustic effect.

In this embodiment, the speaker 451 is
The base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is attached is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is
In search of an exit, the tip body 461T advances to the opposite side in the longitudinal direction.
The vibration wave Ws (sound) that reaches 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, and the opening 424 (see Figure 120) of the lower edge plate member 420, in that order, and is emitted outside the speaker assembly 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see Figure 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear part of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, a recessed part 47
Since the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside through the opening formed by 1, 491 and opening 424 (see Figure 120), the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being muffled.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and can emit the sound in phase with the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 from the opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491. In other words, the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 allows the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 and the sound output from the front side to be superimposed in phase with each other and emphasized, rather than being cancelled out due to being in opposite phase. In other words, it becomes possible to amplify deep bass sounds. This allows
The pachinko machine 8010 according to this embodiment is capable of producing realistic effects,
This can increase the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the low-pitched sounds output from the rear side of the speaker 451 are emitted to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (emitted downward from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)) using the internal space of the speaker assembly 450 as an enclosure. This makes it possible to appropriately provide a game presentation using low-pitched sounds emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side to a player playing on the front side of the front frame 14.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (audio) is tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
For example, in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws can be generated by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws.
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 46
By individually setting the arrangement and vertical extension length of each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e, 467d, 467e, the sound of the vibration wave Ws (audio) can be tuned.

In this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d of the front assembly 460 are
67d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487e of the rear assembly 480.
In addition to the above-mentioned purposes, the flanges 487d and 487e are disposed in portions to which load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, thereby reinforcing the speaker assembly 450.

For example, by being positioned near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can reinforce the areas near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, thereby preventing the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged due to the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when a screw is screwed into the fastening portion 468.

In addition, when the extension plates 463 and 483 are assembled, they are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 125(a)).
The extension plates 463, 483 are disposed closer to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463, 48
When a screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a of the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main frame 14a are fastened and fixed, each of the rib portions 467c, 4
87c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other, so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
That is, the deformation of each of the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482. Here, the recessed portions 462, 482 are portions to which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned in an assembled state.
The recessed portions 462 and 482 of the fastening portion 14e1 are placed on the fastening portion 14e1.
, 482 receive an upward load from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462, 482 would be easily damaged, but in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482, so that the fastening portion 14e1 can reinforce the recessed portions 462, 482 against the load applied thereto, thereby improving the durability of the recessed portions 462, 482.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large diameter through hole, it is easier to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting wire, piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424.

In this type of fraudulent act, wire, piano wire, etc. are illegally inserted into the play area to deform nails, etc., but in this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is formed in a box shape that is sealed except for the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484, and the gap of the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 is blocked by the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, piano wire, etc. is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, it is difficult for the tip of the wire, piano wire, etc. to reach the play area through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453.

In addition, the through hole formed in the upper edge plate member 14e as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 is positioned near the left and right ends of the upper edge plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, thereby making it possible to increase the distance between the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, which are the points where wire, piano wire, etc. are inserted into the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, making it easier to prevent the generation of fraudulent benefits.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a), FIG. 124(c) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R taken in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a).
124(a) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the Vd direction.
124(c), the speaker connection wire 453 is shown by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection wire 453 is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), an inner surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of a rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 is tapered inwardly as it approaches the rear side, and an outer surface 481Ho (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of a front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 is tapered inwardly as it approaches the rear side.
The upper surface (461H) is tapered inwardly toward the rear surface side, and the inner surface (461H) is
i in an assembled state. This improves the efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460.

In Fig. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c, 487c can be filled. Note that the position of each of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship such that a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124C, the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T.
In comparison with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M, thereby improving the acoustic effect.

124(d), the internal space of the tip side main body 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491 is secured to be larger than the internal space of the intermediate main body 461M in a manner that bulges out in the front-rear direction. This allows the vibration waves Ws that reach the tip side main body 461T to be temporarily retained in the tip side main body 461T and released at a low speed. This allows the vibration waves Ws to make it easier to hear deep bass sounds, thereby improving the acoustic effect.

FIG. 125(a) shows the front assembly 46 taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a).
FIG. 125(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper edge plate member 14e taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124(a).

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the expanded rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted through the fastening portion 483a is fastened to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
This is the part that sandwiches the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e between the main body frame 14a.
In other words, by positioning the enlarged rib 419a at the front surface position of the extension plate 463, the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e can be prevented from shifting in position in the front-to-rear direction, and the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper edge plate member 14e and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in Figure 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper edge plate member 14e at a lower position on the upper frame member 410, and is formed at an upper position on the upper frame member 410 at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (they pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without coming into contact with them in the fastening direction).
It is configured as a part that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14 e without using the rear assembly 480 .

In addition, the main body frame 14a and the upper edge plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b located at an upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper edge plate member 14e is fastened and fixed to the second fastening portion 419b located at a lower position of the main body member 411, while the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

In addition, at an upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is disposed inside), while at a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482.
482 (the portion extending to the front side is disposed on the inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are disposed in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
This avoids interference with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 disposed in 450L, and allows the reproduced sound to be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without being muffled.

In this embodiment, at the top of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on their faces (see FIG. 125(a)), while at the bottom of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are spaced apart, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes towards the front side at the portion positioned opposite the lower end of the rear assembly 480, and this protruding portion abuts against the lower end of the rear assembly 480 in the front-to-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to abut (stick) over the entire surface of the upper plate member 14e, but rather to make line contact, particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper edge plate member 14e and abuts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, thereby improving the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper plate member 14e and abuts against the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper edge plate member 14e, a member made of ebony may be arranged, a glass member may be arranged, a concrete member may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or other commercially available members may be arranged.

In particular, when metal members are used, it is preferable to use materials with a high specific gravity. For example, it is preferable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, etc. By using these metals, it is possible to give depth to the sound.

In addition, it is preferable that the material has high hardness, such as cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics, etc. Using these materials can improve the sound rise performance.

In addition, with regard to the shape, the upper plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 may be protruding in a long plate shape, a spike shape, or a dotted shape with rounded tips. The upper plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 may not only be fixed to each other, but may also be connected in a floating manner.

The above-mentioned portions that function as insulators are arranged in the speaker assembly 45.
For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
It can also be the side or front of 50.

For example, when disposed on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator may be cylindrical and disposed between the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e, and positioned by inserting a screw into the through hole 483a. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator is not required, and the tightness of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a allows adjustment of the contact between the rear assembly 480, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the member functioning as an insulator (the load applied to each other) and adjustment of the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is in a state where the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting hole 469 are loosened.
Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e by screws inserted into through holes of the same shape and arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction, or through holes arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right positions where the through holes are located, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper edge plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e,
0 is a screw inserted through the through hole 483a, and a fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1
125(b)). As described above, the fastening of fastening portion 14e1 to fastening portion 419 is configured so that no load is applied to speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening fastening portion 14e1 to fastening portion 419, it is possible to prevent upper frame member 410 from coming off upper edge plate member 14e by loosely fastening the screw inserted into through hole 483a (while adjusting the degree of fastening).

In addition, the same relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper plate member 14e as described above is satisfied.
The same can be said about the relationship with the main body frame 14a that is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

Fig. 126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, Fig. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and Fig. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12.
4B shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a,
As shown in Figure 126, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are disposed at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, spaced apart from each other in the front and rear direction, for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13.

The left-end front support portion 12a has an inclined surface 12a1 that slopes backward as it goes leftward from the right end of the rear end surface that faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89), and a flat surface 12a2 that extends left and right from the left end of the inclined surface. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left-end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a cup shape with an open center and a front end face formed on one surface so as to be able to abut against the rear surface of the game board 13. The left-end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside the left-end rear support portion 12b and a portion protruding from the front end face of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is disposed in such a manner that, in its natural length, it protrudes more toward the front side as it moves to the left. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1, together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a,
A tapered shape is formed that expands in the left-right direction toward the side (right side) where the game board 13 is placed. This improves the workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figures 128 and 129.

FIG. 128(a) and FIG. 128(b) show CXXVIIIa-CXXV in FIG. 127(b).
128(a) and 129(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13, which are schematic diagrams of the board support device 600 and the game board 13. In addition, in Fig. 128 and Fig. 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, Fig. 128(a) illustrates the game board 13 with its left end beginning to be pushed into the inner frame 12, Fig. 128(b) and Fig. 129(a) illustrates the game board 13 just before it is completely assembled to the inner frame 12, and Fig. 129(b) illustrates the game board 13 after it is completely assembled to the inner frame 12. In Fig. 128 and Fig. 129, for ease of understanding,
Some of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted in the illustration.

When the worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the worker first temporarily places the game board 13 on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, adjusts the vertical position of the game board 13 to a certain extent, and then places the game board 13 on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160.
At this time, the game board 13 is slid in a position rotated about an axis facing up and down with respect to the inner frame 12 as shown in FIG. 128(a), so there is a possibility that the left end front support part 12b on the near side and the game board 13 may interfere with each other. However, in this embodiment, the left end front support part 12a is provided with an inclined surface 12
a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other
This can reduce the number of steps required, thereby improving workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated around the axis of the contact point between the rear edge of the inner frame 12 and the front surface of the game board 13 so as to approach the inner frame 12. During this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is placed opposite the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. This allows the game board 13 to be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is determined by the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
The support bottom 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 90 ),
A guide rib 1 supports the game board 13 from below and has a front upper end cut into an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

128(a) to 128(b), the game board 13 climbs up onto the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 every time the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view, so that the game board 13 can be made to climb up onto the guide rib 12c1 starting from the left side, allowing the game board 13 to rotate smoothly. Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15°, which is an angle larger than the backward inclination (about 10°) of the pachinko machine 8010 when installed in the game parlor. This makes it possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-to-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 when installed.
This improves workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 regardless of the rear inclination of 013.

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed to be the same as the rear inclination angle when the game board 13 is installed in the game arcade.
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in Figure 128 (b), as shown in Figure 129 (a), the game board 13 is clamped between the board support device 600 which is arranged vertically and in the released state described below, and the rear surface of the game board 13 abuts against the front surface of the claw member 640 after rotation.

Here, in the release state, the board surface support device 600 is in such a state that the front rotation claw member 620 and the front restriction claw member 630 (portions disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are in contact with the game board 13.
Since the game board 13 is configured to retreat from the entrance path, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the rear side, a load is applied to the rotational claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12.
When the upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 are fixed, the states of the upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 change almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and its vertical position is regulated.
129(b), between the release state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the up-down position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, as the board support device 600 is changed between the release state and the fixed state, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached.

Here, when the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the rear side, the game board 13 rotates with the left end portion as a fulcrum. Therefore, due to the principle of leverage, the claw member 64 is pushed toward the rear side of the game board 13 after the rotation.
The force required to apply a load to the inner frame 12 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a worker with little strength can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a.
and the left end rear support portion 12b supports the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 126).
When the right end of the game board 13 is not sufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), even if the front frame 14 (see Figure 89) is closed against the inner frame 12, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), it is possible to reduce the degree to which the game board 13 tilts forward and backward due to the reaction force of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) into the inner frame 12 to close it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (reduce the possibility of) the state of the board support device 600 changing due to the reaction force of pushing the front frame 14 into the inner frame 12 to close it.

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end portion is fixed by a panel surface support device 600, and the lower end portion has its vertical position regulated by the support bottom portion 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)),
A floating connector 13a is arranged at the lower end on the back side of the game board 13, is connected to wiring connected to various components and devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported on the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a receiving connector 12d is arranged on the inner frame 12 near the lower board surface support device 600, and has wiring connected to a control board unit 91 (see Figure 3) etc. connected at its back side. These are connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13.

In order to reduce the resistance of the connection in the rotational direction of the game board 13, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged in an inclined position with the connection direction facing in the rotational direction of the game board 13 (see Figure 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 is equipped with a pair of upper and lower board surface support devices 600 arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board surface support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, only one of the board surface support devices 600 will be described and the description of the other board surface support device 600 will be omitted.

Fig. 130(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, Fig. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, Fig. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and Fig. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600.
130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIG. 131(a) and FIG. 131(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13.
130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133,
The rotary motion control device 60 includes a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a front rotation claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610, a front restriction claw member 630 rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 arranged on the front side of the front rotation claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620, and a rear rotation claw member 630 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 arranged on the rear side of the front rotation claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620.
40 and mainly comprise.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, a pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line penetrating a pair of plate portions 611a that are part of the main body plate portion 611 and are arranged opposite each other on the left and right, an arc hole 613 drilled in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612, and a circular hole 614 drilled in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612.
11a from below, and a plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
127(b) 。 In the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)), the inner frame 12 is fastened to the pair of fixing plates 616 by screws inserted through holes 616a.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed.
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member with an expanded diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed to form a support hole 612.
The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same as those of the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the front rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

The front rotation claw member 620, like the frame member 610, comprises a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a corner of a sheet metal member at a right angle to form a T-shape in a side view, a pair of supported holes 622 formed in a straight line through plate portions 621a which are part of the main body plate portion 621 and are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right, and which are supported by the first shaft member P61, a pair of support holes 623 formed in a straight line through the upper corners of the front side of the plate portion 621a, and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and ... plate portion 621a, and which are supported by the first shaft member P61,
a and a pair of support holes 624 formed in a straight line through the rear side portion of the third shaft member P63 and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the front restriction claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of the first shaft member P62, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted through the support hole 624 of the first shaft member P62.
At the same time, when the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 642 of the rotation claw member 640,
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion disposed opposite to the left and right and has a long length portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction.
A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by an extension portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1, a connecting plate portion 621b connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, a rear side extension plate 621c extending from the rear side end of the connecting plate portion 621b at an angle of about 45 degrees downward with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b, and
2. The panel 621 mainly comprises a hanging rear plate portion 621d extending perpendicularly to plate portion 621a toward plate portion 621a on the opposite side, and a front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of hanging rear plate portion 621d at an angle of approximately 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the surface of hanging rear plate portion 621d.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d form a right angle with each other.

The rear extension plate 621c is disposed so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, in the released state, the rear extension plate 621c comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). Meanwhile, in the process of changing to the fixed state, the torsion spring NBb is retracted upward, so that the torsion spring NBb is retracted from the main plate portion 611.
and begins to come into contact.

This prevents the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated toward the worker when the worker starts to push the game board 13 into the board support device 600, while allowing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb to be generated toward the worker just before the game board 13 is completely fixed to the board support device 600. In other words, while reducing the force required when starting to push the game board 13, just before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that contacts the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction that brings the front restriction claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that moves the lower end of the rear rotation claw member 640 away from the back side wall of the main plate portion 611.

The front-regulating claw member 630 mainly comprises a main body plate portion 631 formed in an L-shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner, a pair of supported holes 632 formed in a straight line through plate portions 631a which are part of the main body plate portion 631 and arranged opposite each other on the left and right and which are journaled by the second shaft member P62, an inclined extension plate 633 extending at an angle toward the front side from the lower end of a front connecting plate 631b which connects the plate portions 631a, and a curved surface 634 which is curved and formed as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is a part of the board surface support device 600.
When the locking member 14 is released, this is the part that is closest to the front frame 14 in the front-to-rear direction.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and this restricts the front restriction claw member 630 from freely changing its position.

The post-rotation claw member 640 mainly comprises a main body plate portion 641 formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner, a pair of supported holes 642 formed in a straight line through plate portions 641a which are part of the main body plate portion 641 and arranged opposite each other on the left and right and which are journaled by the third shaft member P63, and an inclined extension plate 643 which extends at an angle toward the rear side from the lower end of a front connecting plate 641b which connects the pair of plate portions 641a.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that abuts against the rear side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see Figure 89) and regulates the front-to-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a part that receives load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is formed at an inclination angle that makes face contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see Figure 129 (a)).

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in Fig. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), the process in which the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order.
1B, the arrangement of the multi-function cover member 171 arranged adjacent to the board support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 is shown by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134(a), the board surface support device 600 is in a released state, and in FIG. 135(b),
The fixed states of the board support device 600 are shown in the figures. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (horizontally rearward). This makes it possible to prevent the post-rotation claw member 640 from rotating too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third shaft member P63 moving upwards beyond the first shaft member P61) simply by performing the simple task of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the rearward side via the game board 13. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to a position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the front restriction claw member 630 is biased by the torsion spring NBa in a direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d. Therefore, when no other external force is acting, the front restriction claw member 630 is disposed in proximity to the hanging back plate portion 621d.
The curved surface 634 of the front restriction claw member 630 comes into contact with the restriction rod 615, thereby restricting the change in position of the front restriction claw member 630.

That is, as shown in Figures 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the front rotating claw member 6
20, the front side on which the extension portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, while the front side of the restricting front claw member 630 is raised in a manner such that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

In detail, the regulating rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
13A to 13C.
5(a)), the front end of the front restriction claw member 630 rises in accordance with the tilting movement of the front rotation claw member 620. In other words, the front restriction claw member 630 moves in the opposite direction to the movement direction of the front rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is connected to the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed opposite the regulation rod 615.
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising action of the regulating front claw member 630 is released, and the tip end of the regulating front claw member 630 on the side of the inclined extension plate 633 is disposed adjacent to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIG. 135(a) to FIG. 135(b)).
(see (b)).

The angle range in which the front restriction claw member 630 rises up (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. 135(a)) is as follows:
) when a downward load is applied to the regulating front claw member 630 in a direction that tilts the front end of the regulating front claw member 630, the change in posture of the regulating front claw member 630 when it operates due to the downward load is a change in posture in a direction opposite to the downward load (a change in posture in the rising direction), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the change in posture of the regulating front claw member 630 in response to the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the front restriction claw member 630, causing the front rotation claw member 620
Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulating front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the rotation front claw member 620 can be suppressed. Note that in this embodiment, the shape of the front connecting plate 631b and the length and tilt angle of the tilted extension plate 633 are set so that the multi-function cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the tilted extension plate 633 of the regulating front claw member 630 when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state.

In the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the rear side extension plate 621c
Friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. As a result, in the state of FIG.
Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see Figs. 136 to 139) applies a load to the game board 13,
As a result of this reaction, the upper end portion of the game board 13 can be prevented from moving (tilting) toward the front.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see Figure 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, in a structure in which the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, depending on the manner in which the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 abuts against the regulating front claw member 630, there is a possibility that the board surface support device 600 will reach a fixed state or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach a fixed state and will stabilize at an intermediate angle.

The board surface support device 600 is stabilized at an intermediate angle, and in this state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
If it were possible to close it, the distance between the back of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 86) and the front of the game board 13 would become too short, which could cause problems during play.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted that suppresses the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), thereby preventing the front frame 14 from closing when the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the restricting front claw member 630. This makes it possible to make a store clerk who is working to close the front frame 14 aware that the board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

If the store clerk notices this, he or she will push the game board 13 in until the board support device 600 is fixed in place, thereby stabilizing the distance between the back of the glass unit 16 and the front of the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see Figure 89) is closed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), just before the front-rotating claw member 620 becomes fixed, depending on the manner of contact between the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 and the regulating front claw member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach a fixed state or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach a fixed state and will stabilize at an intermediate angle (the board surface support device 600 will almost always reach a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the multi-function cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can abut against the regulating front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in Figure 135 (a), the regulating front claw member 630 is configured so that its posture is not regulated by the regulating rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in Figure 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the front restriction claw member 630 immediately before the front rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the front rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt.

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed in a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the store clerk does not push the game board 13 with enough force, 9
In this case, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing even when the front frame 14 is stably installed. In this case, the front frame 14 is provided with a multi-function cover member 171 and a board surface support device 600.
When a load is applied to the board surface support device 600, the load can change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 abut against each other (see FIG. 1).
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing it to the rear side. That is, the rear-rotation claw member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, which in turn rotates the front-rotation claw member 620, changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end of the front-regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 that faces the game board 13 come into contact in the front-rear direction.
When the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the dangling back plate portion 621d, so the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to the front-rotation claw member 620 via the rear-rotation claw member 640 acts as a resistance against the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side in the state shown in Figure 135 (a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see Figures 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the reaction force of the load on the game board 13 will cause the game board 13 to tilt.
This can prevent the vicinity of the upper end from moving (tilting) toward the front side.

135(a) to 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite the regulation rod 615 (see FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 presses the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the non-resistance portion 634b abuts against the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc centered on the first shaft member P61, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b),
This reduces the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) toward the front side. Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see Figs. 136 to 139) described later applies a load to the game board 13, it is possible to suppress the upper end portion of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the reaction force.

In addition, the non-resisting portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
A curved surface is formed in which the radius gradually increases from the portion that abuts against the second shaft member P62 toward the portion that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the rear side by the multi-function cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135(a), and the front-rotation claw member 620 rotates, so that the second shaft member P62
When the restricting bar 615 is displaced, the non-resisting portion 634b and the restricting bar 615 momentarily separate from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the restricting bar 630 by the restricting bar 615 is reduced momentarily, and the restricting bar 630 approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d vigorously due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the state changes to the state shown in FIG.

Therefore, as in this embodiment, even if the multi-function cover member 171 is in a dimensional relationship spaced apart from the regulating front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state shown in Figure 135 (b), by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position just before the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state shown in Figure 135 (a), the multi-function cover member 171 can be abutted against the regulating front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633, and then the board surface support device 600 can be set to a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be placed in the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, when the rear side surface of the rear extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 can operate while avoiding interference with the multi-function cover member 171 (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a)). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not placed (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14, thereby improving the work efficiency of the worker.

When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
The front end of the restricting bar 615 is pulled upward toward the front side, and the restricting bar 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the restricting bar 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the restricting bar 615 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction).
15 does not come into contact with each other), the front restriction claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation in this state, the board surface support device 600 can be put into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to when the front-rear position of the game board 13 does not change when the board support device 600 is released.

Also, as shown in FIG. 129(a) and FIG. 134(a), in the released state, the game board 1
The upper end surface of the rear end plate 621c of the board support device 600 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. This can eliminate the risk of the game board 13 falling to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are released.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support devices 600 changes, as in this embodiment, if the board support devices 600 are operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 may differ between the upper and lower, and the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the operation of the restricting front claw member 630, which is operated when the board surface support device 600 is put into the release state, and the operation of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 64
In other words, as shown in FIG. 135(a) and FIG. 135(b), the amount of displacement of the front rotation claw member 630 supporting the game board 13 is smaller than the amount of displacement of the front restriction claw member 630.
20 and the amount of displacement of the claw member 640 after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, when the restricting front claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that it does not return to the fixed state (to such an extent that its return is restricted by the restricting rod 615), the amount of displacement of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the deviation of the front-to-rear position of the game board 13 at the points supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

The same effect is also achieved by the rear-rotation claw member 640 being rotatably supported by the front-rotation claw member 620.
4(a)), the rear rotation claw member 640 is allowed to displace in a direction widening the angle between the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation claw members 640 can be suppressed compared to the amount of displacement of the pre-rotation claw members 620, so that the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the points supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed.
The load on 3 can be reduced.

Next, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 139.
136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI.

In addition, Figure 136 shows the release state of the board support device 600, Figure 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, Figure 138 shows the state in which the board support device 600 has rotated a predetermined angle (approximately 25°) from the release state towards the fixed state, and Figure 139 shows the state just before the board support device 600 is fixed, with the thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 being shown by imaginary lines.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel surface support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described.
The opening/closing restriction portion 159 viewed in cross section at 37 is shown by imaginary lines in FIGS.

As shown in Fig. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Fig. 136), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 does not interfere with the board support device 600, but the game board 13 interferes with the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13
When the frame 14 is removed, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed, but when the game board 13 is placed, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted.

As shown in Fig. 137, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Fig. 137), interference between the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. In addition, since the game board 13 is placed on the rear side compared to the position when the board support device 600 is in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is avoided. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (FIG. 1), the front frame 14 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the release state to the fixed state side of the front-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600.
38), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the panel surface supporting device 600.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotating claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotating claw member 620 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the restricting front claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) are different from each other due to the action of the restricting rod 615.
As mentioned above, this is difficult to achieve with a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive due to the rotation direction being opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction) (see Figure 134 (b)).

138, the front frame 14 is restricted from being closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is installed, there is a risk that the front lower end of the game board 13 and the rear extension plate 621c may come into contact in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138), so the effect of restricting the closure of the front frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in Figure 139, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Figure 139), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

In addition, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the front rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotation claw member 620 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the restriction front claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 13) are changed by the action of the restriction rod 615.
8 counterclockwise) and can be easily pushed in with a normal load, as described above (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing in the front frame 14, the restriction front claw member 630 is pushed in via the opening/closing restriction portion 159, and the board surface support device 600
Since the front frame 14 can be fixed, the front frame 14 can be allowed to be closed.

Fig. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and Fig. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Figs. 140 and 141 show a state in which the ball launching unit 112a and the cover member that closes the rear of the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to Figures 142 to 148. Figure 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and Figure 142(b) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a.
is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that Figure 143(a) illustrates the disassembled state after the cover member 721 has been opened, and Figure 143(b) illustrates the state after the ball receiving member 731 has been disassembled and turned over. That is, in Figure 143(b),
Only the back side of the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in Figures 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is configured by a base member 710 made of metal or die casting, and a resin-made foundation member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The ball launching unit 112a can be in a closed state (see Figure 142(a)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered around the right side of the base member 710, and in an open state (see Figure 23(b)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is open.
A ball sending device 721 having a cover member 721 rotatably supported between the ball sending device 721 and the ball receiving device 720 (see FIG. 1)
And, mainly prepare.

The base member 710 mainly comprises a base member 711 which is a member supporting the cover member 721 and which is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like which elastically deforms, which is arranged on the front side of the base member 710 and is formed from a synthetic resin or the like, a launch solenoid 701 which is arranged on the front side, a launch rail 730 which guides the ball P8 shot out by the launch solenoid 701 towards the playing area, a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically protrudes towards the front side at the intermediate position of a bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 towards the front side to regulate the posture of the ball receiving member 731 and into which a screw is screwed to fasten and fix the ball receiving member 731, a plurality of mounting holes 718, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719.

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corners into which the rod-shaped portions 722 are inserted, and a locking portion 713 that is formed on the left-right opposite sides of the receiving portions 712 so as to be able to lock the hook portions 723.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding on the front side adjacent to the right side of the engaging portion 713, and a malfunction determination protruding portion 715 protruding opposite the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see Figure 142 (a)).

The convex portion 714 is a portion which covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see Figure 142 (a)), and mainly comprises an opposing plane 714a which is arranged opposite the left inner surface 724c of the sphere passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state and which is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner surface 724c, and an inclined surface 714b which is the surface opposite to the opposing plane 714a on the left and right sides and which inclines to the right as it approaches the rear side.

The malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 when the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, but does come into contact when the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened (floating from the cover member 721) and is formed with a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loose, and by creating a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, it is possible to make the store clerk aware that the fastening of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, repairs can be made (fastening the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a malfunction occurs in the ball launching unit 112a.

The ball sending device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported on the base member 711,
The cover member 721 mainly comprises a switching device 740 which is controlled to change between a restricting state in which the ball P8 which has entered inside the cover member 721 is restricted from flowing down, and an allowing state in which the ball P8 (see Figure 144) is allowed to flow down onto the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed in a cup shape with an open back side (the front side of the paper in the position of FIG. 143( a )). The cover member 721 has a pair of rod-shaped parts 722 loosely fitted into receiving parts 712 of the base member 711, hook parts 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped parts 722, and a ball P
144) can pass through the ball passing opening 724, which is drilled in the front-rear direction, the cutting metal member 725 disposed in a positional relationship in which it protrudes slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passing opening 724, and the shaft rod portion 72
It mainly comprises 6.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin and includes an attractive force generating solenoid 741 fastened to the cover member 721 and one end of which is loosely fitted into the shaft rod portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its position depending on whether magnetic force is generated by the magnetic solenoid 741 or not, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member that is attached to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741, a guide inclined portion 744 that is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward as it moves away from the ball passing opening 724, and a guide inclined portion 744 that extends upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744 by a distance that is sufficient to accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is connected to the shaft rod portion 72
6 and a restricting protrusion 745 that protrudes toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the plane of the restricting protrusion 745.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 144 ), and is a flow-down plate portion 724 that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction.
a, and a rib portion 724b that is disposed above and opposite the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, and the extended tip surface is inclined downward as it approaches the back side;
The left inner surface 724 is connected to the left end of the flow-down plate portion 724a and has a surface extending in the vertical direction.
With these configurations, the ball P8 that flows into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and to the right.

When the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)), if the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b and flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the inclination of the inclined surface 714b.
Since the metal cutting member 725 flows down in a manner of moving away from the metal cutting member 725 in the left and right directions,
Even when the cutting metal member 725 is disposed so as to protrude inward from the sphere passage opening 724, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side so as to be inclined upward. A ball P8 (FIG. 14) is attached to the rail member near the lower end thereof.
The ball receiving members 731 are disposed at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball bearing member 731 (see reference 4).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is fixed to the base member 710 and is regulated to a position parallel to the extension direction of the launch rail 730 and the direction of its length. The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is fastened to the base member 710 and is formed as a long hole along the length direction and has a through hole 731a for passing a fastening screw.
and a regulating groove 731b which is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing in the direction of the long hole of the through hole 731a) similar to the bulge portion 716a, and which has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulge portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulge height of the bulge portion 716a.

When fastening the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be aligned with the fastening portion 716 for fastening, the ball receiving member 731 is aligned with the bulging portion 71
6a can be slid along the straight line along which the sphere P8 (FIG. 14) is bulged.
4) of the plunger 702. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the shooting strength of the ball P81 (see the operation handle 51
(See FIG. 86)) can be easily adjusted.
Furthermore, since the restricting groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the position of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross section by bending a metal plate, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed into a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending diagonally upward to the left, and attachment plate portions 730b, 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the rolling plate portion 730a.
The sensor 730 is attached to the base member 710 by screws inserted into a plurality of mounting holes 732 (two in this embodiment) formed in the sensor 730b and the sensor 730c.

In addition, a rail guard 733 made of synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b, 730c, thereby suppressing noise, vibrations, etc. caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is supported by a ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)).
) at two points on the circumferential surface of the ball P8 to guide the ball P8 upward.

144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the ball sending state by the ball sending device 720 in chronological order.
In (c), in order to facilitate understanding, the cover member 721 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in Figure 144 (a), when the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulating state (the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), a regulating protrusion 745 is positioned at a position corresponding to the rear open end of the ball passing opening 724, and abuts against the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, regulating the flow downward from the rear open end.

144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissive state (power is supplied to the adsorptive force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restricting protrusion 745 retracts above the balls, and the restriction on the flow of ball P8 is released, allowing ball P8 to flow above the inclined guide portion 744. In this state, ball P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711, restricting it from flowing further downward, and the ball remains on the upper surface of the inclined guide portion 744.

144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, whereby the ball P8 on the inclined guide portion 744 is lowered to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the inclined guide portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in Fig. 144(c) is the same as that shown in Fig. 144(a), the flow of balls that have entered the ball passing opening 724 is restricted even in the state shown in Fig. 144(c). Therefore, the balls can be supplied one by one to the launch rail 730. The ball P8 that enters the ball passing opening 724 is supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see Fig. 86) and is a ball that has been stored in the upper tray 17.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, a lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially aligned with the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, and an upper blade portion 725b extending from the same plate as the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b, and a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted.
5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that its tip is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and its lower side projects upward more than the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c inclines downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b inclines upward toward the base end side (left side). In other words, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a string fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, the ball P
The following describes how the yarn Y8 is treated when it is fixed to the yarn feed roller 8 and enters the yarn feed roller 8.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a.
146(a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 147(a), FIG. 147(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a), and FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a after the launch of the ball P8.
12a is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62.
In FIG. 7, in order to facilitate understanding, some of the components of the ball launching unit 112a are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 146(a) and FIG. 146(b), a ball P is guided to a launch rail 730.
Ball P8 remains in contact with the lower left edge of ball receiving member 731 (see Figure 146 (a)), and from this state, when current is passed through the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 extends forcefully, imparting a launch force to ball P8, causing ball P8 to be launched along the launch rail 730 (see Figure 147 (a)).

Here, a known fraudulent practice is to shoot out ball P8 with one end of a thread Y8 fixed to it, and while ball P8 is in the play area, move the other end of the thread Y8 that has been left at hand, pulling and loosening the thread Y8, thereby causing ball P8 to be repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by utilizing the momentum of the launch of the ball P8. In detail, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 is placed on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a position shifted to the right as it approaches the back side (see FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is shot out in this state, it passes under the flow-down plate portion 724a and enters the launch rail 730.
As the thread Y8 moves, it is pulled by the rolling ball P8, and the middle portion of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, so that the thread Y8 enters the underside of the upper blade portion 725c that protrudes above the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

The player holds the front end (other end) of the string Y8, and the load caused by the launch of the ball P8 is applied to the end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, so that a large tensile force is applied to the string Y8. As a result, the string Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the winning hole.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a risk that the string Y8 will not be pulled sufficiently and the string Y8 will not be cut, but in that case the ball P8 will not reach the play area, but will flow back between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, pass through the foul ball receiving port 146, flow down the foul ball passage 145 (see FIG. 98), and be discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the string Y8, the ball P8 will not pass through the winning hole, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected by the winning hole.

Next, the performance operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to Fig. 149 to Fig. 179. Fig. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, Fig. 150 and Fig. 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and Fig. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. The game board 13 shown in Fig. 149 is mainly different from the game board 13 shown in Fig. 2 in that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame part of the center frame 86, and the other configurations are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in Figures 150 to 152 is disposed on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The performance operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance/retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The advance/retract operation unit 900 is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in raising and lowering the petal operation device 800 up and down (advance/retract operation, i.e., operation including at least one of an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and an operation of retreating toward the outside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81) by the driving force of the drive motor 921, and the petal operation device 800 is connected to one end, and the other end is supported by the back plate 1100 and is connected to the arm gear 9
24, a driving side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the driving force of a driving motor 921, and a driving motor 92 that generates a driving force for driving the driving side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 consisting of a plurality of gears that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, a thin slide plate 930 that slides left and right in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910, a thin plate-shaped second performance member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding movement of the slide plate 930, and a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operation device 800 on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910.

Next, the structure of the petal movement device 800 will be described.
153. Fig. 154 is a front view of petal operation device 800 taken along line CLIV-CLIV in Fig. 153. In Fig. 154, support substrate 801 is diagrammatically shown by imaginary lines.

Petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting components such as petals 802 on a supporting base material 801. As shown in Fig. 152, supporting base material 801 is disposed on the rear side of petals 802, etc., and although its overall shape is hidden by other components and not shown in the drawing, it is formed from a resin material and includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position toward the right of the upper end of the central main body of the supporting base 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 protrudes to the front through a small gap formed in the supporting base 801, and a first gear 804G (see Figure 156), which will be described later, is fixed to its tip.

An opening 8 is provided at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, and disposed to the right of the opening 801P, extending rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed.
A doughnut-shaped recess 801D recessed from the front side to the rear side in a doughnut shape through which 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

The central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed to the lower part from the front side (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is disposed and fixed to the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral region from the front while leaving open a vertically long, roughly elliptical region in the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper part constituting the upper end region and a roughly U-shaped lower part constituting the region below the upper part.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that is somewhat elongated in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operating device 800 is arranged to be movable up and down as described later,
The operating space can be reduced when the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically elongated shape rather than a horizontally elongated shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively arranged concentrically with the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as described later.
Since they are linked to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, they can be positioned at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G so long as they do not interfere with each other, but in this embodiment, they are positioned to the right of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G (see Figure 156).

As a result, as shown in Fig. 154, weight is concentrated on the right half of the petal operating device 800, which is supported in a slightly tilted position toward the front, and the left half on the opposite side can be prevented from sagging downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the driving side arm member 910 (see Fig. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from widening, and the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801 via the driving side arm member 910.

Fig. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, and Fig. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800. Note that in Fig. 155 and Fig. 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in Figures 155 and 156, the petals 802 are formed as resin members molded to resemble the shape of one of the five separate petals that as a whole make up a hibiscus flower in a bloomed state, and are provided with a plate-like flat member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a front shape of a substantially circular arc extending in the radial direction when arranged, and is curved so as to bulge gently forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
See 4).

The surface of the petal 802 is irregularly uneven, including many wrinkles, and the periphery is also irregularly uneven when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical to each other, and although there are slight differences in the unevenness, they are molded into roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are nearly transparent, and the outer periphery is colored so that the specific color (red) is darker, without forming any particular boundary between it and the inner region.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S, which extends cylindrically rearward and has a screw hole therein, at two locations on the rear side of each petal 802: near the outer periphery and at the radial center.

The petals 802 are arranged closer to the rear side 802 a than the rear side 802 a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise in front view, right side of the paper in FIG. 157 ( a )) from the position where they are fastened to the flat plate member 803.
The front portion 802b, which is disposed on the sharp tip side (clockwise side when viewed from the front, left side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) from the front portion 802a, is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front portion 802b is disposed closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose-fitting device 880 than the rear portion 802a.

The front portion 802b of each petal 802 is overlapped on the front side of the rear portion 802a of the adjacent petal 802, and the rear portion 802a is overlapped on the rear side of the front portion 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus arranging the five petals 802 so that their inner tips converge toward the same center.

The petals 802 are shaped such that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are misaligned from each other in the front-rear direction.
b can be positioned so that they overlap front to back, making the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully open position (see Figures 178 and 179) more pronounced.

When arranged, the five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (donut-shaped) rear side with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 is
02, and are separate, long, plate-like resin members fixed to the respective mounting holes 101 and 102.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape that extends from the center to the outer periphery in a generally rectangular shape when arranged, and further has an outer periphery that extends forward.

In addition, the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state (the vicinity of the inner periphery)
A pair of screw-in portions 803S extending cylindrically rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction (the short side direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed in an arrangement that is approximately flush with both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, in the portion along both side walls of the flat plate member 803, a slide rib 803a that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of screw-in portions 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward beyond the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S so as to extend to both sides along a surface direction that circumscribes the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes therein, each of which corresponds to the screw-in portion 802S of the petal 802.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw-insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 is connected to the screw insertion portion 803H of the corresponding petal 802.
02S is abutted from the front and a screw is screwed in from the rear, thereby fixing each flat plate member 803 to the corresponding petal 802.

Fig. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and Fig. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In addition, in the explanation of Fig. 158 and Fig. 159, Fig. 155 and Fig. 156 will be referred to as appropriate. As shown in Fig. 155 and Fig. 156, the slit member 810 is disposed on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-like resin member having a front shape in which five similarly shaped parts are connected in a circular ring shape, with a circular opening 811 formed in the center, and as shown in FIG. 159, a front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) that are roughly cylindrical extend in both the front and rear directions from the periphery of the circular opening 811.

Returning to Fig. 156, the explanation will be given. On the rear peripheral wall portion 813, two of the five equally spaced circumferential locations are provided, and one of the three remaining locations is provided in the middle. Each of these locations is provided with a screw-in portion 813S that extends cylindrically in the front-rear direction and has a screw hole therein. Furthermore, the positioning boss 81
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge outward at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. One of the purposes of these bulging portions is to reduce sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. The central slit 814 is formed so as to extend linearly from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 further outward. However, the central slit 814 is formed so as to extend linearly from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 to a position slightly outside the circular opening 811.
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The side slits 815 are formed on both sides of the central slit 814 so as to extend parallel to each other with a slight gap therebetween.

In this way, five sets of three slits, each consisting of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on either side of it, are formed at equal intervals (72° apart) in the circumferential direction. Note that each end of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 may be formed in a round (semicircular) shape when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two side slits 815 located at the outermost position in the set of three slits, i.e., the two corners on the smaller diameter side among the four corners of the three slits, are shaped to extend slightly in a generally rectangular shape (with a rectangular slit) in the extension direction of the two side slits 815. This rectangular extending portion (slit) is for fitting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 into it.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end of a flat plate in which a central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and is provided with an arc plate 816 which is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 are formed.
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the groove 5 is formed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

As described above, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are provided as shown in FIG.
The five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 extend along a direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Therefore, the five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 are arranged closer to each other inwardly, and are more densely arranged. This also improves the slit member 81
The external shape of the No. 0 has been made compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are arranged in a circular opening 811,
The five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 can be laid out more densely when they are arranged and formed to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above than when they are arranged and formed to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11, and therefore the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a slide member 820 is disposed in the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810.
As shown in Figure 157, 20 is a resin member having a long, plate-like front shape, and is equipped with extension portions which are thin at both ends of the slide member 820 and have a semicircular tip when viewed from the front, a central portion which bulges out to a greater thickness than the performance portion at a position between the extension portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion, a guide pin 822 which protrudes from the center of the slide member 820 toward the front side and is inserted into a central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 which is fixed so as to penetrate forward and backward in a manner that protrudes from the center of the slide member 820 toward the rear side.

As shown in Figures 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is positioned so as to span the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in an orientation in which the extension direction of the three slits, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 820, and the longitudinal direction intersect at right angles.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 are
The screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes very slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, washer head screws 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are inserted along the corresponding outer edges of the side slits 815 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 is supported by the guide pins 8
The slide rib 803a restricts the slide movement so that the slide member 803 does not rotate around the center of the slide member 803 but keeps a constant outward facing position.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIG.
161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161(a), the fourth gear 880G is omitted.
In explaining Figures 150 and 161, reference will be made to Figures 155 and 156 as appropriate.

As described above, the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached has a rotating plate 830 disposed thereon from the rear side. The rotating plate 830 is a circular plate made of resin having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center, as shown in Figures 160 and 161 .

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall that extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830.
The loop is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend in a closed manner along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 in a long and narrow loop shape when viewed from the front.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap to allow play. The corners at the extension ends of the peripheral walls of the guide rail 832 are formed to be chamfered.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position where it contacts the outer side of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.
It extends in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front along a direction approximately halfway between the tangent and normal to the pivot opening 831, and then curves in an arc further in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front than this midpoint, extending to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, i.e., the center side end, which circumscribes the peripheral portion of the pivot opening 831, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and its front end protrudes toward the front side beyond the front end of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, so that in total, five guide rails 832 are spaced equally apart and extend outward in a spiral shape from around the pivot opening 831.

161, a second gear 830G having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, extending rearward like a peripheral wall from the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The second gear 830G is disposed to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotated by the central motor 804.

As shown in Fig. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 fits externally onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see Fig. 174(c)).

As described above, the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points, so that it makes linear rather than planar contact with the inner surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830, whereby the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotating plate 830 is pivoted smoothly and freely.

As shown in FIG. 161(a), a second gear 830G is further provided on the rear side of the second gear 830G.
A third gear 810 G having a slightly smaller diameter but larger than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically with the oil damper 805 G and arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805 G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are drilled at positions corresponding to the three screw-in portions 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see Figure 156), and positioning holes 810c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G that is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
The positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) is inserted into the positioning hole 810c to perform positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the screw-insertion hole 810b to form a screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 157).
56) to secure the cam.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G acts as a stopper to hold the rotating plate 830 against the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as to prevent it from coming off.

155 and 156, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 loosely fitted so as to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in Figures 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 comprises a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape with a portion of the peripheral wall of the cylinder cut away along the axial direction, and a flange 855 formed in a circular plate shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end of the shaft portion 852, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are formed integrally.

The center of the flange 855 is circularly open in communication with the inside of the shaft portion 852, thereby forming an inner cavity 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 from front to back. Around the inner cavity 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, at two locations on the left and right sides of the inner cavity 856, there are integrally formed a front screw-in portion 857 having a screw hole therein, a holding portion 858 having a countersunk shape and drilled toward the back side at a position shifted from the front screw-in portion 857 toward the inner cavity 856 side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend forward in a cylindrical shape and are somewhat short. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusions 859 have the same extension height.

A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole therein is integrally formed on the inner peripheral surface of the bore portion 856. The rear screw-in portion 853 extends cylindrically along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 in parallel to two opposing positions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and has a screw hole therein. In addition, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIG. 162 and FIG. 163, an LED board 861 is provided on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

The LED board 861 has a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 formed at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 to determine its position, and the screw is inserted into the central shaft member 8
The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 by screwing it into the front screw portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 .

Furthermore, an insertion hole 864 is drilled in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and is large enough to allow the screw-in portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 is provided with forward-facing LEDs at one central location and at multiple locations arranged at equal intervals on a concentric circle that extends multiple times (double) around the central location.
D865 are fixed in place and emit light forward.

Horizontal LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at multiple locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery of the front and rear side surfaces of the LED substrate 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED substrate 861. The horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed facing rearward on the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861.

A central decorative member 868 is disposed in front of the LED board 861.
is formed from a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but which is nearly transparent, extends cylindrically from a long plate-shaped base toward the rear side, and has a pair of screw-in portions 869 in the center of which is a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed.

The screw-in portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861.
The D board 861 is sandwiched between the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 and the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861.
The screw-in portion 869 that has passed through the flange 855 comes into contact with the front side, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855, thereby fastening and fixing the central decorative member 868 to the flange 855. In this way, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED board 861.

The loose fitting device 880 mainly comprises a small diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner circumferential surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, a large diameter cylindrical member 882 arranged coaxially with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer circumferential surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and a main cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 and is loosely fitted with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to be rotatable relative to each other.

The main cylindrical member 883 has four locations equally spaced circumferentially around the cylindrical portion, and at two locations every other one, a screw-in portion 883S extending cylindrically in the front-to-rear direction and having a screw hole therein is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the location at which the screw-in portion 883S is not formed among the four locations.

The main cylindrical member 8 is screwed into the screw hole 883S at four positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a.
In addition, the main cylindrical member 883 is provided with a sliding rib 88 that protrudes in the outer diameter direction and extends in the axial direction at the midpoint of the four corresponding circumferential positions and has the same protruding length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a.
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 is provided with a decorative member 884 which is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861 and which covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see Figure 149), and a rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed to the decorative member 884 near the outer diameter, forming a bottomless cup shape with the outer periphery side rising toward the front side from the fastening part, and which abuts against the flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 from the back side and is fastened and fixed.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010) on both sides, which makes the sides mirror-like. Therefore, for example, the light from the horizontally oriented LEDs 866 arranged on the back side of the LED board 861 can be reflected near the outer periphery to produce a light-emitting effect.

The decorative member 884 is a component that creates an illumination effect when light is irradiated from LEDs 865, 866 arranged on the LED board 861, and comprises a front side panel portion that is formed in the shape of a hibiscus flower and is made of a light-transmitting resin material of a specific color (red), and a rear side panel portion that is formed in a circular plate shape on the rear side with a peripheral wall rising towards the rear side and is made of a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and an opening 885 is drilled in the central portion large enough to allow the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therethrough.

The main cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fit device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed rearward of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161( a ), a fourth gear 880G, which has a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831, is concentrically disposed and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G.
The support base 801 is rotatably supported by the shaft and meshes with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other of the intermediate gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G.
08, it rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are drilled at positions corresponding to the two screw-in portions 883S of the main cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G that is fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. The fourth gear 880G is positioned relative to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 by inserting a positioning boss 883a (see FIG. 163) into a positioning hole 880c. A screw (not shown) is inserted into a screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through a screw insertion hole 880b.
The screw is then screwed into the corresponding hole in the mounting hole (see FIG. 3).

As a result, the loose-fitting device 880 is interlockingly connected (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, while the fourth gear 880G acts as a stopper, holding the slit member 810 in place so that it does not come off the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that is provided on the outer circumferential side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c and extends toward the rear side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. The detection arc plate 880d is a plate of the same shape that is arranged at five positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 154) and is provided with a donut-shaped recess 80.
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler-type detection sensor 801C that is disposed so as to be capable of detecting a member passing through the doughnut-shaped recess 801D. That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the position from which the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate, the detection arc plate 88
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (central angle 72°) (minimum angle 7
2° can be detected, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, on which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed, and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are inserted from the front side into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 protruding further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base material 801.
The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the supporting base 801 by inserting it into a positioning notch (not shown) in the supporting base 801 (see Figure 152) to position it, and then inserting the rear screw-in portion 853, which similarly protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the supporting base 801 and screwing it in place.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the inner cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above-described mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 so as to protrude forward, and as shown in FIG. 154, the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 is
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the large-diameter cylindrical member 882, and the front peripheral wall portion 8
12 is attached so as to fit over the outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main cylindrical member 883 has eight screw-in portions 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, it makes linear rather than planar contact with the inner surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, whereby the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the main cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is pivotally supported so as to rotate smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 shows the petal operation device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
164 is a rear perspective view of the rear plate 1100, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 moves up and down (moves forward and backward) by being given a load in the vertical direction from the driving side arm member 910. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 164 and subsequent figures, reference will be made to FIG. 150 to FIG.
Please refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back panel 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened to the innermost part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88 ) which is fastened to the back of the game board 13, and includes a support pillar 1110 which protrudes cylindrically toward the front side at the lower left corner when viewed from the front, a gear accommodating section 1120 which is recessed above the support pillar 1110 so that multiple gears can be accommodated from the front side, a rail fixing section 1130 which is arranged in a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position from left to right, and
and support elongated holes 1140 that are drilled on the left and right opposite sides of the support pillar 1110 and that slope downward as they approach the rail fixing portion 1130.

The support pillar 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the driving side arm member 910.
Near the outer periphery at the front end portion, it has a pair of left and right holes 1111 that are formed to allow screws to be screwed in, and a pair of positioning bosses 1112 that extend toward the front side on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111, one above the other.

As shown in Figure 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long, rod-shaped main body member bent in an L-shape when viewed from the rear, and mainly comprises a pivot hole 911 that is circularly drilled in the front-to-rear direction at one end and is rotatably supported on a support column 1110, a connecting protrusion 912 that is stepped and cylindrically protrudes on the front side at a position near one end of the long main body member, a transmission long hole 913 that is drilled in the shape of a linear long hole from the bending point of the long main body member toward the pivot hole 911, and a support portion 914 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end of the long main body member.

The driving side arm member 910 rotates around the support pillar 1110 in conjunction with the rotation of an arm gear 924 which has an internal fitting protrusion 925 which is fitted into the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 which extends radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected to each other while slightly intersecting each other. The first accommodating portion 1121 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922, and the second accommodating portion 1122 is connected to the first accommodating portion 1121.
22 and a third housing portion 1123 which is disposed opposite the first housing portion 1121 with the second housing portion 1122 therebetween and which houses an arm gear 924 which is engaged with the driving side arm member 910.
It mainly comprises 3.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a part that supports an operating rail 1000R (see Figure 150, not shown in Figure 165) which is made of multiple metal plates stacked front to back and supported so that it can slide up and down, and is equipped with insertion holes 1131 through which screws can be inserted to fasten the operating rail 1000R to the back panel 1100, and positioning bosses 1132 that fit into the operating rail 1000R and position the operating rail 1000R, and these are arranged in a straight line from top to bottom.
The rigidity of the movement rail 1000R keeps the posture of the petal movement device 800 constant.

The support long hole 1140 is a long hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of approximately 50° when viewed from the front, and is provided with an extension wall 1141 that extends from near the outer periphery toward the front side.

As shown in Figure 164, the driven arm member 950 is composed of a long, rod-shaped main body member that is formed in an approximately straight line when viewed from the rear, and mainly comprises a supported convex portion 951 that is cylindrically protruded toward the rear side at one end and is slidably supported in the support long hole 1140 of the rear panel 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operation device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported protrusion 951, and with the collar fitted inside the support elongated hole 1140, a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported protrusion 951, whereby the driven arm member 950 is supported slidably on the back plate 1100. In other words, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported protrusion 951, and the outer diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support elongated hole 1140.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

Figure 166 is an exploded front oblique view of the back panel 1100, side base material 1000S and second performance member 940, and Figure 167 is an exploded front oblique view of the drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930 and second performance member 940.

The slide plate 930 is supported on the lateral base material 1000S so as to be able to slide left and right by multiple (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the front-to-back direction in the shape of long holes extending left and right, and is connected to the connecting protrusion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 by a base end long hole 932 drilled in the front-to-back direction in the shape of a long hole extending up and down and arranged on the left end side, and is connected to the second performance member 940 by a tip end insertion hole 933 arranged on the right end side and drilled in the front-to-back direction.

The base end long hole 932 mainly comprises a retaining portion 932a at the upper end formed along the trajectory of the connecting protrusion 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and a displacement portion 932b extending vertically downward from the lower end of the retaining portion 932a.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a plate-like member fastened to a support column portion 1150 having a screw-in portion 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed, and is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole into which a screw can be inserted, and the positional relationship between the fastening plate portion 1001S and the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930 is determined. A support protrusion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the rear side in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the engagement, a shaft support hole 1003S is provided in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the right corner when viewed from the front and supports the second performance member 940 in a rotatable manner, an arc recess 1004S is provided in an arc shape concentric with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a protruding rib portion 1005S is provided in a protruding manner on the front side along an arc shape concentric with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S.
And, mainly prepare.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar is attached to the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and the supported long hole 931, and in this state a screw for preventing it from coming off is screwed into the tip of the supporting protrusion 1002S, thereby forming a part that supports the sliding plate 930 so that it can slide.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second performance member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex rib portion 1005S are portions that are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second performance member 940. Note that the convex rib portion 1005S is formed with a convex height that does not come into contact when the second performance member 940 is in the normal position, but can come into contact when the second performance member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position.

The second performance member 940 has a main body portion whose lower end is formed in two and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support portion 941, and the shaft support portion 941 is cylindrically protruding toward the rear side at the right corner when viewed from the front and is supported by a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary protrusion 942 is disposed adjacent to the shaft support portion 941 and protrudes toward the rear side in a cylindrical shape.
Provide for the Lord.

The shaft support portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar, which is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and has a screw-in portion 941a at its tip into which a screw is screwed (see FIG. 152).
With the cover member 945 having a disk shape and an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the tip of the shaft support hole 1003S, a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 941a, whereby the cover member 94
5 serves as a retainer. In this way, the second performance member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the tip end side through hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169 ), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip end, thereby preventing the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. That is, the connection between the auxiliary protrusion 942 and the tip end side through hole 933 links the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces the vicinity of the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second performance member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary protrusion 942 abuts against the arc recess 1004S and generates resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

The description will be given with reference to Fig. 165. The rear plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 detects a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward from the arm gear 924 within a range of a predetermined angle, a shaft support 1163 on which a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in a direction to lift the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported, a cover support portion 1164 that is arranged in a triangular shape in a front view at the lower right of the support long hole 1140 so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C, and a cover support portion 1164 that is arranged adjacent to the cover support portion 1164 and supports the board cover 1000C.
The main components are a wiring stopper 1165 that is hidden by the board cover 1000C in a front view, and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw that fastens the board cover 1000C is screwed in.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S has threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are threaded. The threaded portion 1006S is disposed at a slight distance from the second performance member 940 disposed at the end of the movement in the direction of movement of the second performance member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary protrusion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second performance member 940 in a front view is chipped,
The screw-in portion 1006S can regulate the displacement of the second performance member 940.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened to each of the side substrate 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked in front and behind and fastened to each other.
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. As a result, even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is raised and lowered by rotating the driving side arm member 910, it is possible to easily suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S.

Next, referring to Figs. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advancing and retreating operation unit 900 will be described. Figs. 168, 170 and 172 are front views of the petal operation device 800, the advancing and retreating operation unit 900 and the back plate 1100, and Figs.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal operating device 800 and the forward/backward operating unit 900.

168 and 169 show a state in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end side of the moving range, while FIGS. 170 and 171 show a state in which the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 164) of the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at a connecting position between the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side long hole 932, and FIGS. 172 and 173 show a state in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at a connecting position between the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side long hole 932,
is shown disposed at the lower end of its range of movement.

169 and 173, when the driving arm member 910 is located at the end of its range of movement, the transmission slot 913 of the driving arm member 910 extends in the tangent direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924, with the internal fitting protrusion 925 (see FIG. 151) of the arm gear 924 as the base point.
Since only the spring 25 is displaced and the driving side arm member 910 maintains its position within a range (a range in which the driving motor 921 rotates freely), the resistance at the time of starting the driving motor 921 can be reduced.

170 and 171, the petal operation device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in Fig. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940.

In the range from Figures 170 and 171 to Figures 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked together, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second performance member 940 can be visually perceived as being linked together.

Here, the second performance member 940 moves toward the original position of the petal movement device 800 in a protruding manner, as if the second performance member 940 were the petal movement device 800.
It can be visually recognized as operating in accordance with 00.

Next, we will explain the gathering and dispersing rotation operation of the petal operation device 800. Figure 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, Figure 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operation device 800, Figure 174 (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device 800 in a see-through manner with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and Figure 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 175(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 175(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
175(b) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG.
FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal movement device 800, FIG. 176(c) is a transparent front view of the petal movement device 800 with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 177(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
177(b) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG.
FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal movement device 800, FIG. 178(c) is a transparent front view of the petal movement device 800 with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 179(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 179(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
179(b) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 is lowered by the lifting operation to the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 moves from the initial position (assembled position) shown in FIG. 174 and FIG. 175 to the position shown in FIG. 176 and FIG. 177.
After passing through the mid-open position shown in FIG. 175, an opening operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, and then a rotation operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position, and then a reassembly operation (third operation) is performed to return to the initial position (reassembly position).

In the initial position (assembled position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is inserted into the central slit 81 of the slit member 810.
174 and 175, the five petals 802 are in the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and are gathered together to form a blooming hibiscus flower as a whole.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (assembled position) as described above, the central motor 804 first
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175(c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with the rotation of the rotating plate 83
0 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, so that it can easily rotate around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted around the large diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose-fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G as described above, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a small torque that can initially move the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotating plate 8
Only the slit member 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see Figures 176 and 177).

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated as described above, as shown in FIG. 175( a ), the guide rail 832 on the front side rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A11.
Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157 ) in a direction in which the slide pin 823 is pushed outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832 .

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is the same as that of the slit member 81 as shown in FIG.
Since the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is guided linearly along the central slit 814 from the inner end to the outer side.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 is greater than this torque. Therefore, the slide pin 823 moves in the center slit 810 as the rotating plate 830 rotates, while the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state.
14 in a linear outward motion.

As a result, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start to spread radially outward from the assembled position.
As described above, the central slit 814 of 10 extends along a direction D12 that is inclined at an angle θ11 counterclockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. Therefore, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward. However, due to this inclination, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively fast.

In other words, by tilting the central slit 814 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in this manner, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin 823 can be moved a predetermined distance with a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830, thereby making it possible to more efficiently spread out the petals 802.

Here, for example, if we assume that there was no inclination and the central slit 814 extended radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 would be relatively small compared to the above-mentioned case, while the moving speed of the slide pin 823 would be relatively slow. Furthermore, if we assume that the central slit 814 was inclined clockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the reduction in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed would both be even more significant.

Also, at this time, as described above, the guide rails 832 extend from the center end portion in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front along a direction D15 midway between the tangent and normal to the pivot opening 831, as shown in FIG. 177, and then extend outward in an arc-like curve further in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front than the direction D15, so that the five guide rails 832 as a whole extend in a spiral shape spreading outward.

The more the guide rail 832 is inclined clockwise as viewed from the front, the more the slide pin 82
The load on the guide rail 832 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower.
The more the slide pin 823 is curved in an arc shape toward the clockwise side in the front view from the direction D15, the
The reduction in load on the body and the reduction in movement speed are both more pronounced.

In other words, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, by tilting it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast, whereas in the case of the guide rail 832, by tilting it in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front and further curving it into an arc, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted into it from the front side, so if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, there is a risk that the slide pin 823 will deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. For this reason, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is sacrificed and reduced, and the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, the slide pin 823 is designed to pass through, so there is little risk of deviation. For this reason, the slide pin 823 is configured to increase its movement speed while increasing the load on the slide pin 823.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823, thereby preventing problems such as deviation and ensuring the reliability of power transmission.
14 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

After that, as shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the slide pin 823 is inserted into the central slit 81.
When the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement at No. 4, is reached (see FIG. 178(d)), the five sets of petals 802 spread radially to the fully open position, and the spreading operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in Figures 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely, so that the petals 802 are positioned so that they can be seen continuously outward from the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are seen as a unified whole, like a slightly larger hibiscus flower (see Figure 178(b)), compared to when only the decorative member 884 is visible (see Figure 174(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move outward any further, the slide pin 823
is engaged with the outer end of the central slit 814, so that a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 cannot cause the rotating plate 830 to rotate any further in the same direction as before.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully open state after the widening operation is completed can be maintained.

After the above-mentioned spreading operation is completed, the central motor 804 transmits the rotational power in the same direction as before to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking force of the oil damper 805 and starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, as shown by the arrow A12 in Fig. 178(d) . Thus, after the spreading operation, the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in the fully open state, as shown by the arrow A13 in Fig. 178(b) .

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the opening operation but continues to apply rotational power to the rotating plate 830, it is possible to immediately transition from the opening operation to the rotation operation without any gap.

When the petal 802 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in a fully open state as shown by the arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG.
Since the amount of movement (relative amount of movement) of one petal 802 based on a predetermined position 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

The above rotation operation is ended, and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the opposite direction to the above.
When rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in Figure 179(b), the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, while first only the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in Figure 179(b), thereby performing a gathering operation in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned spreading operation.

In other words, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 gather from the fully open position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, returning to the gathering position (initial position) shown in Figures 174 and 175, returning to the gathered state, and the gathering operation is completed.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or the central motor 804 may be stopped and then operated again, and the central motor 804 may further rotate the first gear 804.
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG.
However, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b), in the assembled state, they rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

When the petals 802 rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front in the assembled state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG.
Since the amount of movement (relative amount of movement) of one petal 802 based on a predetermined position 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

The central motor 804 is controlled as described above to change from the assembly operation to the rotation operation.
It is possible to have a pause and a transition after a delay, or to have an immediate transition without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes through the detection sensor 801c (see Figure 153), so the MPU 221 (see Figure 4) can determine whether the petal operating device 800 is performing a rotational operation by judging the output of the detection sensor 801c without controlling the rotation angle of the central motor 804.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. However, in the ninth embodiment, a passage forming unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in the wall forming the foul ball passage 9145.
The plate member 9150 is configured to protrude along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 180 to 183.

Fig. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, Fig. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and Fig. 182 and Fig. 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. As shown in Fig. 180 and Fig. 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage section 9145, the vertical positional relationship between the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 and the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142, the shape of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate section 53a.

That is, firstly, the foul ball passage portion 9145 has a notch 9145b recessed from the front end portion toward the rear side of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 has a thin plate-like thin plate blade portion 9153 formed by bending a portion extending from the top of the plate-like portion 152 toward the front side in a manner that covers the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a range including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2.
The depth of the recess is set to be approximately equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin blade portion 9153 abuts against the lower surface of an upper stopper protrusion (not shown) that protrudes from the plate member 14d (see Figure 91) toward the rear side, and is configured to withstand upward loads generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 9145.

This thin blade portion 9153 is a measure against fraudulent practices in which a thread Y8 is threaded through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the thread Y8 is pulled or loosened to manipulate the balls inside the play area and obtain an unfair advantage, and is disposed for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 threaded through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible fraudulent practices will be described.

Returning to FIG. 148, as described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
In order to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, a cutting metal member 725 is provided. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that uses the momentum of the shot of the ball to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, but if the momentum of the shot is weak, the ball may be shot without cutting the thread Y8.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the play area, but flows down to the foul ball receiving port 146, passes through the foul ball passage 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no risk of this ball directly entering the play area.

On the other hand, if we consider a case where balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises.
8 is weakly shot, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146.
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the thread Y8 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is positioned on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (the launch solenoid 701 side), so that even if the ball P9 is shot out with force, the thread Y8 will not be cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is shot out with force, the ball P9 will reach the play area without cutting the string Y8.
45, is discharged in front of the player, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see Figure 86).

Therefore, a person committing fraud can grab ball P8 stored in lower tray 50 and move ball P8 to pull or loosen string Y8, thereby enabling ball P9 to be passed repeatedly through winning hole 63 (see Figure 2) or the like, thereby obtaining fraudulent benefits.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a cheating act is committed using a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, a thin plate blade portion 9153 is disposed in the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes, so that the thread Y8 can be cut early.

That is, when a fraudster pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, damaging the thread Y8 and enabling the thread Y8 to be cut early (see FIG. 180).
By forming notch 9145b closer to the front side, i.e., on the side to which thread Y8 is gathered when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, thread Y8 can be positioned inside notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled, and thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

As described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase its resistance to an upward load by abutting against the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This can prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled.
Most of the load applied towards yarn Y3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is set to approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8, so that the ball P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, and at the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This makes it possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to a collision with the ball P8, and therefore makes it possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 is disposed lower than the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. In detail, it is disposed with a difference in height of about the radius Ra of the ball. This makes it easier for the dispensed ball to damage the yarn Y8. In other words, a person who commits a fraudulent act is afraid of being found out for his/her fraudulent act, so he/she may not be able to avoid the ball P
After picking up 8, the customer should hold the ball P8 close to his/her body (e.g.,
It is easy to commit fraud by keeping the string Y8 in a pocket (such as a trouser pocket) and pulling or loosening the string 8. In that case, the string Y8 is kept extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (contacting the upper surface). At this time, the string Y8 is stretched through a position approximately the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is dispensed, the lower tray 5 is inserted from the lower end of the lower tray passage 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to the lower tray 50 hits the lower tray 50 and bounces around, it runs over or hits the string Y8 located on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, flows down the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. In other words, by positioning the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 higher than the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 (by raising the upper limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 is
This can increase the possibility that the balls discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 will come into contact with the yarn Y8 and cause damage to the yarn Y8, thereby causing the yarn Y8 to be cut early.

And thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that slopes downward as it approaches the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward velocity to the ball that is discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 via the front door side lower tray passage section 9142.

As a result, the ball Y8 is discharged to the lower tray 50 before its momentum (kinetic energy) weakens.
That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give a velocity component to the right (towards the foul ball passage portion 9145) to the ball discharged along the front-to-rear direction to the lower tray 50, so that the ratio of balls that step on or hit the string Y8 among the balls that are discharged can be increased.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is a ball guide opening 5
On the left side of ball guide opening 53, the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies an area approximately 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and on the right side of the ball guide opening 53, the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53), and at the boundary between the two, a riding-up regulating step portion 9053a is formed.

As shown in Figure 180, the climbing restriction step 9053a is configured as a flat portion extending vertically and connecting the right end portion (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the left end portion (left edge) of the lower bottom portion near the outlet of the foul ball passage portion 9145 arranged to the right of that.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 is connected to the front door side lower tray passage portion 91.
42 is connected to the foul ball passage 9145. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9 before passing through the ball guide opening 53. This makes it easier for the ball to approach the string Y8.

The vertical width of the climb-up restriction step 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
This prevents the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage 9145 and comes into contact with the climb-up prevention step 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a. In other words, the climb-up prevention step 9053a functions as a one-way valve that allows the ball to pass left and right in space V9 in one direction (from left to right) and prevents the ball from passing left and right in the other direction (from right to left).

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 184 to Fig. 186. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. However, the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment is configured in such a manner that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 184 to Fig. 186.

Fig. 184 to Fig. 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. Fig. 184 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally above right, Fig. 185 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally above left, and Fig. 186 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally below left.

As shown in Figures 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is formed by a notch 10145 recessed from the front end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear end in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 that are provided to extend toward the front side in a manner to cover the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is approximately equal to twice the radius Ra (diameter) of the ball (see FIG. 180). In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted into the through hole from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is provided with an auxiliary protrusion 10145c that is disposed inside the cutout 10145c and that protrudes from the side surface on the rear side of the plate member 14d toward the rear side with the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the cutout 10145 is formed.
The auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in Figures 184 and 185, and is omitted in Figure 186.

The auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius Ra of the ball (see FIG. 180)), so that the length in the front-rear direction where the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 are exposed is approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8.
Since it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down 45 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, and it is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it approaches the foul ball receiving port 146 (to the right). Therefore, the width (front-to-back width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 in the cutout 10145c is
5a. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is slidably guided by the thin plate blade portion 1
This makes it easier for the nozzle 14 to be inserted into the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, which is the gap in which the nozzle 140153 and the nozzle 100154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion that protrudes from the rear side edge of the cutout 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a portion that forms a bifurcated blade portion together with the first thin plate blade portion 10153 on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153.
The first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 are provided at the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, and extend leftward in a slightly upwardly inclined manner.
5 is formed.

Similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment, the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is disposed on the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear edge of the notch 10145c. In this way, when the yarn Y8 enters the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 is caused to enter the acute-angled recess 10155, and the yarn Y8 is prevented from entering the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3.
This can make the device more susceptible to damage.

Furthermore, since the second thin plate blade portion 10154, which is arranged on the front side, is positioned higher than the first thin plate blade portion 10153, it is possible for the thread Y8, which is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person committing fraud, to more easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portion connected to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
and is configured to withstand upward loads arising from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end of the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end face of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 are arranged to face left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. That is, at these two points, the string Y8 is pulled in left and right opposite directions.

For example, there may be a case in which a person committing a cheating act tries to avoid detection of the cheating act by letting go of the ball P8 that has come to his/her hand and allowing the ball P8 to flow back through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and be discharged through the playing area. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied in opposite directions to the left and right to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary protrusion portion 14d2, making it easier for the reverse flowing ball P8 to get caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary protrusion portion 14d2 and become stuck there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y
By prolonging the time that the 8 is exposed to the play area, fraudulent activity can be discovered more quickly.

In addition, a sticky material (glue, glue, etc.) may be provided deep in the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 attached to the ball P8 that has come into the hand of a cheater is cut, the thread is adhered to the sticky material provided in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is not ejected from the play area but is maintained there, so that cheating using the thread Y8 can be discovered sooner.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a ball (foul ball) that was shot too weakly to reach the play area is discharged to the lower tray 50, but the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with a foul ball receiving port 2164 for receiving the foul ball. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and Figure 188 is a partially enlarged front oblique view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed of a resin material so as to have an arc shape on the game area side similar to the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment.
2a and a guide member 2062b formed up to near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship such that there is a gap V11 between the tip member 2062a and the guide member 2062b, the gap being of a width allowing the balls to flow down.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c is formed, which is connected to a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side.
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that allows one ball to pass through, and a spare return ball prevention member 68 is placed above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage 162 is arranged in the above embodiment, and the formation of the main body side lower tray passage 162 is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper tray 17 exclusively via the main body side upper tray passage 161. Then, when the balls on the upper tray 17 exceed the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged to protrude inside the ball flow path downstream of the payout device 133 is turned ON by the load of balls, and the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, the ball that passed through the foul ball passage 2062c is also delivered to the payout device 133 (
87) are also supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, as described above, balls are attached to both ends of the string Y8, and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c to supply the string Y8
When considering the fraudulent act of letting the ball enter the play area through the foul ball passage 2062c,
The effect of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the dispensing balls against the yarn Y8 can be generated regardless of the amount of balls accumulated on the upper tray 17. This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 early.

Figure 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In Figure 189, a spare return ball prevention member 68 disposed at the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and arranged side by side as a rear perspective view. In addition, in the explanation of Figure 189, Figure 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a position in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is positioned on the front side.

In detail, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the ball return prevention member 68. In the hollow, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically protrudes from the back side of the guide member 2062b toward the front side and has an inner wall formed with a screw groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is in face contact with the tip of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
With b1 in contact, a long screw B11 is inserted through a through hole that has been pre-drilled in the base member 68b1 as an attachment hole and through a through hole 2062b5 that has been drilled in the closure plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole, and in this state the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, thereby fastening and fixing the return ball prevention member 68 to the guide member 2062b.

The upper and left surfaces of the closing plate 2062b4, which are in contact with the guide member 2062b, are formed to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface is recessed to a degree that avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side of FIG. 189) is formed to be in contact with the guide member 2062b.
The gradient increasing portion 2062d of the groove 62b is formed as an inclined surface having a gradient similar to that of the inclined portion 2062d of the groove 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d is inclined downwardly toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b.
A straight line L11 extended along the surface 2d toward the tip member 2062a intersects with the tip member 2062a below the upper end of the surface (top surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, about 1/3 below the diameter of the ball).

By configuring in this way, when a ball is shot toward the play area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is withdrawn from the path of the ball, and it is possible to prevent the lower tip of the gradient increasing section 2062d from colliding with the ball. On the other hand, when a ball that did not reach the play area flows back, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling in the gradient increasing section 2062d, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will pass through the gap V11 to the left and right, pass over the tip member 2062a, and return to the ball launching unit 112a side.

Between the side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
The slit 206 has a width smaller than the diameter of the ball and allows the thread to enter (about 2 mm in this embodiment).
The notch 2062b1 is formed at a position where the path of the ball hit into the play area intersects with the foul ball passage 2062c at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side as viewed from the front has a side surface 2062d1 on the front side.
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This cutout 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11, which is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front, is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. As a result, as in the method described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment, when a foul play is committed by passing a thread Y8 having balls P8, P9 fixed to both ends through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, when the thread Y8 is subjected to a load of pulling both ends, it is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged deep in the notches 2062b1 (FIG. 190 (
In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, causing friction with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut early.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the ball passes. This makes it possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being disposed at a position where the launched ball abuts against the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), and therefore makes it possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from colliding with the launched ball and affecting the direction of the ball, etc.

Also, a player committing a fraudulent act by threading a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 attached to both ends through the foul ball passage 2062c pulls the end of the thread Y8 that projects toward the player (the end to which ball P8 is attached, see FIG. 182) toward the player to adjust the position of ball P9 within the play area, so that the thread Y8 moves closer to the front in the vicinity of gap V11 close to the player. Therefore, by positioning the cut 2062c closer to the front, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is positioned closer to the back.

A button switch SW11 having a detector protruding downward is disposed in a hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load that is much weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2. This reduces the possibility that the button switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button switch SW11 is for detecting the position of the gate member 68a, and when the position of the gate member 68a changes, the switch SW11 is turned on.
The switch is arranged to be switchable between N and OFF.

190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is
190(b), the weight of the ball 2 causes the weight portion 68a2 to tilt toward the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190(b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a
In the figure, the opening/closing portion 68a1 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c.
In Figure 190(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference and the button switch SW11 is shown to be turned ON, and in Figure 190(b), the button switch SW11 is shown to be turned OFF.

As shown in Fig. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 only provides a slight resistance to the ball passing through, and does not provide enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening and closing part 68a1 as shown in Fig. 190(b), once the ball flows away, it immediately returns to the state shown in Fig. 190(a).
This is because the state shown in Figure 190(a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds later at the earliest).

On the other hand, for objects that do not flow away like a ball, for example, objects that fill the passage as they move forward like an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance. This structure is a measure against fraudulent activities.

For example, possible fraudulent acts include moving the tip of an endoscope-like device through the foul ball passage 2062c in the opposite direction to the flow of the ball, reaching the inside of the play area and attempting to interfere with the inside of the play area (for example, bending a nail (not shown) set into the play board 13, grasping the ball and putting it in a winning hole, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning hole, or emitting a laser from the tip to cut the nail).

Fig. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In Fig. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that may be used for illegal entry is shown by imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, when the tip of an endoscope or other device is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in the opposite direction to the flow direction of the ball, it is advanced while excluding the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68. Here, when moving from the state shown in Fig. 191 (where the weight portion 68a2 is circumvented by the tip of the endoscope) to the state shown in Fig. 190(a), the insertion portion (long, flexible portion) connected to the tip of the endoscope is still positioned below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 is maintained in the pushed-up state. Therefore, it is difficult to expel the opening/closing portion 68a1, and the distal end of the endoscope can be prevented from advancing any further.

If the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is broken to enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent unauthorized access. On the other hand, in this case, the button switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state.
By controlling the alarm to sound if switch 1 is kept OFF for a predetermined period of time, fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

Also, when the button switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop paying out balls. Even in this case, in normal use, the button switch SW11 is turned OFF only when a foul ball passes by (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button switch SW11 is immediately turned OFF.
Since the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped is set to N (see Figure 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be made as short as possible, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, if the gate member 68a is destroyed illegally, the state in which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member.
By disposing the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced early. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent acts from being played even before replacement, compared to the case where a replacement part for the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, and the effect of saving the trouble of searching for the return ball prevention member 68 if the user forgets where it is stored. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported by a fixed shaft rod may be used (the support member 68b may not be provided).

In addition, if the return ball prevention member 68 is broken or bent and needs to be replaced, whether or not it will have the effect of preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts will depend on the extent of the damage to the return ball prevention member 68. However, it is difficult for a person committing a fraudulent act to know whether or not the member has been replaced.
Even if the item has been replaced, the extent of the damage cannot be known, thereby still serving as a deterrent to fraudulent activity.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 192 to Fig. 197. In the eighth embodiment, the petal operation device 800 rotates only at the assembled position or the fully opened position, but the petal operation device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment is configured in such a way that it can rotate even at the open position. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 14, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2882 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the rear cover 886 of the eighth embodiment.
The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is the same as the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
The only difference between this device and the device 80 is the rear cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are disposed, but these may be disposed at multiple locations on the rear cover 2886 .
Next, the functions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal movement device 2800;
193(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in Fig. 193 and Fig. 194, an example of the operation of the petal operation device 2800 is illustrated in time series, and Fig. 193(a) and Fig. 194(a), Fig. 193(b) and Fig. 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820.
) show the states at the same time.

In addition, in FIG. 194(a) and FIG. 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for the sake of convenience, and in the same cross section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803 of a flat plate member 2803 are shown.
193, the petals 802 that change position due to the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of screw-insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the two side slits 815 have inclined surfaces 2803T on the surfaces facing each other, which are inclined in a manner such that they incline away from the opposing screw-insertion portion 2803S with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center.

The inclined surface 2803T is inclined at an angle of about 30° with respect to the direction in which the sliding member 2820 slides.
The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will now be described.

As shown in Figures 193(a) and 193(b), when the petal 802 is slid (the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front) in a position in which the regulating portion 2888 is positioned radially outward in the direction in which the front portion 802b of the petal 802 moves, the regulating portion 2888 comes into contact with the front portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, if the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 changes its posture to deflect the load.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is changed from the normal position shown in FIG. 194( a ) (the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 ) to the normal position shown in FIG. 194( b ).
The petals 8 can be tilted toward the slits 815 on both sides.
In 02, posture changes occur whenever possible.

In this way, the sliding member 2820 and the petal 802 change their positions, and the restricting portion 28
While the load from 88 is borne, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide rib 803a abutting against the slits 815 on both sides, so that frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 is capable of moving smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815 .

In contrast, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 is in contact with the outer inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides, and the inclined surface 280 is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides.
3T are abutted against (pressed against) each other, the frictional resistance increases. In addition, the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, so the increase in frictional resistance becomes significant. Note that the inclined surface 2803T abuts against the inner walls of the both side slits 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both side slits 815, so the increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction, the resistance to the movement of the slide member 28
20 reaches the ends of the slits 814 and 815, the slide pin 823
Therefore, the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking force of the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b),
The petal 802 starts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the restricting portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800.
156B), the state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) has continued to rotate in the same direction.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the spreading position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front) to the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotation plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is transmitted to the oil damper 805 (
156) and therefore the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the open position.

196(a), 196(b), and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in Fig. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the spreading position to the gathered position is illustrated in time series.

In Fig. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see Fig. 156) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Fig. 195, and the front portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated in the same direction from this state, as shown in Fig. 196(b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front portion 802b, and the petals 802 and the sliding member 2820 are returned to their normal positions.

Furthermore, when the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see Figure 156) is greater than the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 by the slide pin 823, so the rotation of the petals 802 stops and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the petals 802 can be rotated in the expanded position and then automatically returned to the assembled position.

Although the case has been described where the petal 802 opens at a position where the front portion 802b of the petal abuts the regulating portion 2888, by rotating the petal 802 by a slight angle (by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise when viewed from the front), it is possible to avoid contact between the front portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888, and therefore it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

The arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that it does not come into contact with the petals 802 at the assembled position or the fully open position, or that it does not come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it is possible for the restricting portion 2888 to slip past the restricting portion 2888 and to be in a position where it can deflect the load, thereby preventing the restricting portion 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

In addition, as shown in this embodiment, by disposing the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by disposing a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petals 802 open, they can serve as guides for indicating whether they will pass through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position farther away, and the difference in perspective can make the difference between whether the petals 802 open to their fullest extent and perform a rotating motion, or only open halfway and perform a rotating motion.

For example, by performing an effect in which the probability of winning varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star pattern and the petals 802 can be increased, so that the star pattern can function as a performance part. This allows the regulating unit 2888 to be used as a part of the performance device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 in a front view. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the standpoint of design, and therefore the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

In the fully open position, the petals 802 may come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 and change their position slightly, which may be used as a presentation effect (for example, a presentation suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win). In this case, the meaning conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating or whether they come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 and rotate while changing their position slightly (fluttering).

In this embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of spreading when the petals 802 change position changes. Therefore, even if the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, the degree of spreading when the petals 802 change position can be changed in multiple ways.

Next, with reference to Figures 198 and 199, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 in the expanding position has been described, but the slit member 3810 of the petal operation device 3800 in another example of the twelfth embodiment is configured to be able to switch between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and their description will be omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In Fig. 198 and Fig. 199, an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Fig. 198(a) is illustrated in time series. Also,
In Fig. 198(a), Fig. 198(b), Fig. 199(a) and Fig. 199(b), the rotating plate 83
The arrangement and shape of guide rails 832 of 0 are shown in phantom lines.

In addition, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 198 (a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 exceeds the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 by the oil damper 805, and the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together, which is the same as in the twelfth embodiment, so no explanation will be given here.

198 and 199, for the sake of convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section, and in the same cross section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820, which receives a load from the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832, is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) in accordance with the displacement of the guide rail 832 (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional recesses 3814a, 3815a, 3815b are provided on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that, among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion on the clockwise side as viewed from the front is provided with the central slit 814.
a central recess 3814a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the central slit 814; a clockwise-side recess 3815a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the both-side slits 815 in the short direction of the central slit 814; and a clockwise-side recess 3815b recessed in a manner to widen the width of the both-side slits 815 in the short direction of the central slit 814;
and a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b recessed in a manner to widen the width of the short side of the pin 5.

In the state shown in FIG. 198( a ), the clockwise recessed portion 3815 a is
3 and is disposed opposite to slide rib 803a of the third embodiment.

The central recess 3814a is disposed in the state shown in FIG.
From the position where the guide pin 822 is opposed to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (FIG. 19
8(a) below).

The central recess 3814a is deeper than the clockwise recess 3815a and has a longer radial length than the clockwise recess 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198( a ), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815 b is
From the position where the inclined surface 2803T of the slit member 3810 is opposed to the inclined surface 2803T of the
198(a) (lower side).

The counterclockwise side recess 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recess 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recess 3814a.

The operation of the petal operation device 3800 configured as described above when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described.
starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 move in the lower right direction of Figure 198 (a) (in the direction in which the right end slide rib 803a enters the clockwise side recess 3815a) (see Figure 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portions of the both side slits 815 on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front and the flat plate member 2803 is released, and the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the abutting portion between the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the portion that first abuts between the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810) as a fulcrum (FIG. 199(a) and FIG. 199(b)).
)reference).

In addition, since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the above-mentioned slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 28
During rotation of the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the screw-in portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise side recess 3815b is avoided.

Furthermore, during the above-mentioned rotation, the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 are recessed in a clockwise side recess 3815a with a recess depth sufficient to prevent the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in Figures 198 and 199) from abutting the central slit 814 and both side slits 815.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 no longer rotate together.

199(b), in the process of reaching a position where the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 is perpendicular to the direction connecting the pair of screw-in portions 2803S (the longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803), the slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the clockwise side slits 815 on both sides as viewed from the front abuts against the wall of the both sides slits 815, causing the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum.
However, it moves counterclockwise in a front view from the recessed base end of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
Therefore, by continuing to rotate the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to move the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in Figure 198 (a) is reached, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830, it is possible to switch between a case in which the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830, and a case in which the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

This makes it possible to cause the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that were not possible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the spreading operation caused by rotating the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 194(b)), the flat plate member 280
195 and 196, the rotation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened to the plate member 2803 is interposed (the rotation of the petals 802 is accompanied by the slit member 3810).
(a) and Figure 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the spreading operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 198(a)), the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned to their original positions by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).
That is, the rotational movement (rotational movement that rotates together with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored can be omitted.

Therefore, according to the alternative example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 change during the spreading operation caused by rotating the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 198(a)), the rotating plate 830 can be moved to any state (phase or posture).
2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be caused to start moving toward the assembled position from the position of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 that matches any given state (phase or posture).
As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (FIG. 1
93(a)) rotates (see FIG. 195) while expanding (see FIG. 198(a)) and then assembles toward the assembly position (see FIG. 197), the arrangement of the petals 802 can be diversified, thereby diversifying the operation of the petal operation device 3800.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 200 to Fig. 203. In the first embodiment, the curved surface constituting the front side of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that in Fig. 200 and Fig. 202(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, in Fig. 201, the first state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and in Fig. 202(b), the state in which the tilting device 310 is changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 200 and FIG. 201, the operation device 8300 in this embodiment has a lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained, and the other configurations have been almost the same as those of the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-mentioned embodiments.
Therefore, the following describes the details of the lower frame member 8320, and only provides a brief supplementary explanation of the other configurations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged opposite the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-to-rear direction, and mainly comprises a first through hole 8326a drilled in an approximately egg-shaped manner at the central position on the left and right, a pair of second through holes 8326b drilled on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, which have a horizontally elongated rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and which connect the upper surface and lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326c drilled at the left and right corners, which have a vertically elongated rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the passage of liquids such as the drinking water downward and facilitating the removal of a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. A coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted, for example, by a player who finds the operation of the tilting device 300 to be a nuisance in order to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or by a curious player who purposelessly inserts the coin-shaped foreign object between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 33.
0.

Here, since the operating device 8300 is equipped with a tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13, V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the gap V13
, there is a high possibility that a foreign object will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is a ring member BR1 (
14(b)), that is, since the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length in the front-rear direction of the tilting device 310 is, the more likely it is to be displaced (deformed) left and right near the front end. Note that this displacement (deformation) includes, for example, displacement that utilizes rattle caused by adding up design errors built in from the design stage between members, and displacement (deformation) caused by slightly deforming each member.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides is
However, even if the gap V13 is designed not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (e.g., a 1 yen coin), when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one side (e.g., the left side), the gap V13 that is generated on the other side (e.g., the right side) is larger than the gap V13 generated by the tilting device 310 during normal use.
The gap V1 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the
3, which may be large enough to allow a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

In other words, if the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is not set to less than half the thickness of a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1 yen coin), a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right.

In addition, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction can be reduced by utilizing the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310.
If a load is applied to the rear side of 10, causing it to shift in position (deform), the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, and a coin-shaped foreign object can also be inserted into this gap V14.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is
Alternatively, if a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the front-to-rear gap V14 and the tilting device 310 performs a tilting operation, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in Figures 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured in a shape that narrows inwardly to the left and right toward the top and bottom center, it fits the player's fingers more easily and creates a good feel for operation, while in the second state (see Figure 202(a)), a coin-shaped foreign object stuck in the gap V13 in the second state (see Figure 202(a)) is subjected to a downward load from the part of the case main body 311 that protrudes outward from above the narrowing, making it more likely to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause problems in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, friction between the coin-shaped foreign object and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may cause problems in the light emission performance.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it becomes impossible to execute the intended performance with the operation device 8300.
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately, but if no through hole is formed in the lower frame member 320, it was necessary to disassemble the operating device 300 to remove the coin-shaped foreign object.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, since through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign objects through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shapes and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

FIG. 203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(b) is a front view of the operation device 8300 shown in FIG.
3(a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
FIG. 203(c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of FIG.
8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG.
Figure 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in Figure 203(a).

The first through-hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of (the first storage section 5431 of) the vibration device 5400, see FIG. 58. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left-right center position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through-hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400, so that the liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is in contact with the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 12).
Therefore, in the case where a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gap V14 is placed on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (the extension portion 311h is curved toward the left and right when viewed from the up-down direction in the second state, so that the coin-shaped foreign object is placed on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h).
In the first state of FIG. 10, the tilt D81 is inclined downward toward the center of the left and right, and the tilt device 310
Since the first through-hole 8326a is inclined, a coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a along a downward inclination D82 (see FIG. 201) that slopes downward toward the front side.

This makes it easy to remove coin-shaped foreign objects while keeping the size of the first through-hole 8326a to a minimum, thereby maintaining the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320. For example, compared to a case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded in both the left and right directions, it is easier to ensure the strength of the lower frame member 8320.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is set to the size of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
In other words, in this embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a size equal to or larger than the size of an object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object.
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state.
(see FIG. 25 ) is a portion that transmits light emitted from the spherical shell portion 31.
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are connected to the left and right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (mirror-finished members are fixed in place), thereby reflecting light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

With this arrangement, the first through hole 8326a can be used to create a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see Figure 15) and is visible to the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by using the first through hole 8326a to remove the resin member that weakens the amount of light, the central portion in the left-right direction can be made to appear brighter.

In addition, when a coin-shaped foreign object is placed in a position that partially blocks the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visible to the player is weaker than when there is no coin-shaped foreign object (the coin-shaped foreign object casts a shadow). In other words, the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign object can be used as clues to make it easier to notice that a coin-shaped foreign object remains in the lower frame member 8320, so the coin-shaped foreign object can be easily noticed without being noticed by the player.
This effect can be achieved by reducing the possibility that the voltage Vcc remains at 0.
This is not limited to the case where the image is viewed through 6a, but also applies when viewed through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is a hole for allowing a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen onto the bottom plate portion 321 to pass through the bottom plate portion 32
Therefore, in this embodiment, the second through hole 8326 is formed to have a width of about 30 mm in the left-right direction and a width of about 2 mm in the normal direction of the bottom plate portion 321 so that the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (e.g., a 500 yen coin) can be discharged.

Since the second through hole 8326b is positioned near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, the coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed even after it has slid downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, the second through hole 8326b can be used, for example, to discharge liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 to the outside before it reaches the vibration device 5400.

The third through-hole 8326c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20
3(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is formed as a through hole through which the coin-shaped foreign object can be removed while remaining in an upright position (attitude).

In other words, the longitudinal length of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign objects to be expelled when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321.In this embodiment, the longitudinal length of the third through hole 8326c is approximately 30 mm when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the left-right width is approximately 2 mm.

When removing a coin-shaped foreign object, the cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is opened.
By simply exposing the through holes 8326a to 8326c in a front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can
The cover 370 can be used to access the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371.
Since only parts 70a (see FIG. 91) are fastened to front frame 14 with screws inserted in the front-rear direction and hanging part 372 is fastened to the bottom plate in which recessed part 15a is formed with screws inserted in the up-down direction, covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). This makes it possible to keep the work time short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operating device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that is opened outward to the right at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)).
In all of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the coin-shaped foreign object cannot be removed, the operation device 8300 can be easily removed from the front frame 14 by removing the screws fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Therefore, if a replacement operation device 8300 that is normal is prepared, the operation device 8300 with the coin-shaped foreign object caught therein can be quickly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object becomes lodged in the operating device 8300, preventing normal operation and causing the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to be stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly resumed.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
Although a case has been described in which the board surface support device 600 does not receive a load from the front frame 14 when in the fixed state, the board surface support device 600 in the 14th embodiment is disposed in such a manner that, in the fixed state, it receives a load from the front frame 14 via the front-rear displacement member 2652 that is arranged so as to be able to abut against the front frame 14. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG.
204(a) illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and Fig. 204(b) illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12. In Fig. 204(a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in Fig. 204(b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are each simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that it includes a load transmission device 2650. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged to be vertically displaceable on the front side of a plate portion (a plate portion arranged on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12, and a vertical displacement member 2651.
and a locking portion 2653 that protrudes downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652.
a support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611 a, which is a portion that sandwiches the front and rear displacement member 52 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two positions, the front and rear, and a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that abuts against the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 and applies a biasing force to the front-rear displacement member 2652 toward the front side;
Equipped with.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of separation. That is, in the lower position shown in Fig. 204(a), it is retracted from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in Fig. 204(b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb, deforming the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 204(a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is set at a position where there is a slight gap between the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb in the lower position.

The front-to-rear displacement member 2652 is configured to be displaceable between a forward position (see FIG. 204(a)) in which it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and a rear position (see FIG. 204(b)) in which it is pushed rearward by the front frame 14.

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downwards toward the tip side is formed on the rear tip of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is inclined downwards from a vertically lower position of the up-down displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position.
52 is disposed at the rear position, the inclined surface is continuously connected to a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651.

The inclined surface 2652a is disposed at the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.
The inclination angle and the formation range are set so that at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652, the up-down displacement member 2651 is in the upper position.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the up-down displacement member 2651 is positioned in an upper position, and the torsion spring NBb can be deformed to the side where the load is increased by an amount equivalent to its front-to-rear thickness.

This allows the load applied by the rear-side rotation claw member 640 to the game board 13 from the rear side to be increased, making it easier to maintain the game board 13 in contact with the hanging rear plate portion 621d of the front-side rotation claw member 620, and making it easier to determine the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the rear of the front frame 14 (the rear of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14).
It is possible to easily define the thickness of the play area, and to stabilize the flow of the balls.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, that is, to fix the game board 13. When fixing the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and fixes it by pressing it against the hanging back plate portion 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so that a spring with a lower elastic modulus can be used for the torsion spring NBb compared to the spring used in the eighth embodiment.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the worker from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, and the force required to fix the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, so that the worker's freedom of choice and
Workability can be improved.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
To prevent fraudulent intrusion into the inside of the inverted cup portion 178, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the inverted cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire.
In the above description, a case has been described in which the fraud detection device 2280 detects the heat caused by the heated piano wire and aims to detect fraud at an early stage. However, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is configured to detect the heat when the inverted cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire and to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment.
205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280.
In b), the shape memory spring 2288 is shown in a state where it is maintained in a contracted shape, and in FIG.
205(c) shows the state where the tamper-evident shape (the memorized shape) is restored by applying heat.
281 is viewed in cross section at the midpoint between the front and rear.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with an opening on the back side and the bottom side, and has an inverted cup part 2
178, and a rear cover member 2282 attached from the rear side so as to cover the rear opening of the main body box portion 2281.
A space is formed between the rear cover member 2282 and the rear cover member 2282 .

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and an inverted cup portion 217 is provided extending from the lower right corner.
a narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner; a protruding portion 2285 protruding upward from the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284; a first conductive portion 2286 accommodated in a recess recessed from the rear side in the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281, one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281;
a second conductive portion 2287 which is accommodated in a recess formed in a right side wall portion of the housing 1 from the rear side, has one end protruding to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and is formed with a length capable of contacting an upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286; and a torsion spring SP15 which generates a biasing force pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286.
The shape memory spring 2288 is disposed on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284 , supported by the protruding portion 2285 , and below the second conductive portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 are each connected by a method such as soldering to a part protruding outward from the main body box part 2281, with one end of the separate wiring being connected to the part by soldering or the like, and the other end of the wiring being connected to the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, when the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 are in contact and conducting (see FIG. 205(b)), the contact between the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 is released (see FIG. 205(c)), and the conduction is broken,
The circuit is controlled so that an error signal is output when the continuity is interrupted.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see Figure 120) and the payout device 133 (see Figure 87) is stopped from paying out balls, etc., so that it is impossible to continue playing the game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in Fig. 205(a) to Fig. 205(c), a main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left and upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left compared to the eighth embodiment, and a gap capable of accommodating the extension portion 2283 is generated between the long cover member 173 and the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment.

By having the extension portion 2283 fill the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of a heated piano wire, the piano wire can be prevented from penetrating through the long cover 173.

According to this configuration, the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and continues onward, being guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and then to the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining a deformed shape at low temperatures and returning to a previously memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher.
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (approximately 80°) that is approximately the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see Figure 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, pushing up the second conductive part 2287, disconnecting the first conductive part 2286 from the second conductive part 2287, and outputting an error signal. Therefore, early detection of fraudulent activity is possible.

The extension part 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and drilled in the front-rear direction in the rear cover member 2282, and protrudes to the front side. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in a tensioned state and returns to a low temperature state, the operator can deform the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing the extension part 2288a downward, and return it to the contracted state (see FIG. 205(b)). In other words, even after fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be used repeatedly to facilitate early detection of fraudulent activity.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
Although the light guide member 540 has a uniform shape, the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted to both sides, the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes recesses having different shapes in each region. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206( a ) is a partial rear view of a right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, FIG. 206( b ) is a partial enlarged perspective view of a light guiding member 2540, which diagrammatically illustrates an upwardly facing concave portion 2543 b concaved in the light guiding member 2540 in a region CCVIb in FIG. 206( a ), and FIG. 206( c ) is a diagrammatically illustrates a downwardly facing concave portion 2543 c concaved in the light guiding member 2540 in a region CCVIc in FIG. Fig. 206(d) is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guiding member 2540 which is a schematic representation of a downward concave portion 2543d concavely provided in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVId of Fig. 206(a), and Fig. 206(e) is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guiding member 2540 which is a schematic representation of an upward concave portion 2543e concavely provided in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVIe of Fig. 206(a). Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in Fig. 206(a).

206(a), the light-guiding member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line in accordance with the shape of the light-guiding member 2540.

On both sides of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In this embodiment, however, the concave portions 254 are arranged in each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, there is a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side.
The shape of concave portion 2543 is different between region CCVId arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

206(b), in the region CCVIb, an upwardly facing concave portion 2543b is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The upwardly facing concave portion 2543b has flat surfaces on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged) and curved surfaces on the upper side and the back side, forming the convex portion used for hot pressing.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the light incident on the upward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction.
543b refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

206(c), in the region CCVIc, a downwardly facing concave portion 2543c is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The downwardly facing concave portion 2543c has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged) and curved surfaces on the lower side and the back side, forming the convex portion used for hot pressing.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
The light incident on the downward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position.
543c refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

206(d), in the region CCVId, a downwardly facing concave portion 2543d is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The downwardly facing concave portion 2543d is formed in such a manner that flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side, and the convex portion used for hot pressing is formed in this position.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
The light incident on the downward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position.
543d refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upwardly facing concave portion 2543e is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The upwardly facing concave portion 2543e has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces on the lower side and the back side, forming the convex portion used for hot pressing.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the light incident on the upward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction.
543e refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 are formed in the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (a conical shape with an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom diameter of about 1 mm).
The light emitted to the lens element 30 or the outer lens member 550 is only weakly refracted vertically and travels in an almost horizontal direction.

According to this embodiment, the above-mentioned configuration allows light to travel in a direction that converges it toward the inner lens member 530 side, and in a direction that diverges it toward the outer lens member 550 side, as shown in Fig. 206(a). That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in a flat plate shape, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540.
The effect of the light emission can be improved while suppressing the left and right width of 0.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or substituted for a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 310 is pushed down, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilting device 310 may be in the initial position when hanging down, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force that returns the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 3
15 may be unnecessary.

In the above first embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilt device 310 has moved to the end of the depression, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilt device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to press the tilt device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for presentation (for example, a "button that cannot be pressed" presentation can be performed).

In this case, it is preferable to arrange the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 in such a dimensional relationship that a slight gap is created between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 even when the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of its motion (the end of the extending motion). This makes it possible to suppress the impact sound of the voice coil motor 352 colliding with the lower frame member 320 during operation of the voice coil motor 352. This makes it possible to prevent the player from realizing that the voice coil motor 352 has already extended out, and makes it possible for the player to realize that the button is in the "button cannot be pressed in" state only after the tilting device 310 is pressed in.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the engaging rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first protruding portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, so that the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed immediately after the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state to change the attitude of the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be switched sequentially (the ascent end can be switched sequentially) by the driving mode that continues to rotate the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction. This makes it possible to perform a complex operation mode in which the ascent position of the tilting device 310 is switched sequentially while suppressing deterioration of the drive motor 342 by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a driving force to the tilting device 310
In the above description, the operation timing of the tilt device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the operation direction of the tilt device 310, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotates the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed and the operation direction of the tilt device 310. For example, the tilt device 310 may be driven until it reaches the pressing end (
The drive motor 5411 may be fixed in a position where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis while the tilt device 310 is moving downward, and the rotation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before the tilt device 310 reaches the end of the push-in and starts to move upward. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilt device 310 can be reduced while the tilt device 310 is being pushed down when the tilt device 310 is repeatedly struck, while the repulsive force pushing back the tilt device 310 can be increased when the tilt device 310 starts to move upward.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodation member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the accommodation member 543
Alternatively, the tilt device 31 may be fixed and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the tilt device 31.
When the storage member 5430 is fixed to the storage member 5430, for example, the protruding leg portion 5424 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321.
By arranging the flexible member 5420 on the side opposite the housing member 5430 and configuring it so that the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the end of the push-in period, the shape of the flexible member 5420 within the vibration device 5400 can be changed, thereby switching whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut against the housing member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the storage member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, a change in shape of the flexible member 5420 occurs. Since the degree of change in shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 can be increased by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, and a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the storage member 5430 can be formed. In other words, the player can feel vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, so that the variety of effects for making the player operate the tilting device 310 can be increased.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button.", but by adding a display such as "Press the button. Press it quickly, and if you feel a vibration, it's your big chance," it is possible to specify how the player should press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in the specified way is set as the condition for transmitting vibration to the player.
This can increase the player's motivation to operate the button (tilt device 310) in the specified pressing manner, and can prevent the operation of the button (tilt device 310) from becoming monotonous.

The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverse to the magnitude relationship with the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. In other words, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the containing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, a slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be set as a condition for transmitting vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 to the player, and the player can be recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310.
This makes it possible to restrain the player from operating the tilting device 310 by pushing it with excessive force, and to prevent malfunctions caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with excessive force.

In the above fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 by pushing in the tilt device 310, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut against the housing member 5430 when the tilt device 310 is not pushed in,
The tilting device 310 may be formed in such a manner that the weight member 5412 cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430 on the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of its movement.
While vibrations can be transmitted to the player when the button 0 is not being operated, the presentation can be lively,
The vibration stops when the button is pressed, allowing the player to easily notice the change in presentation mode (
Since the player can recognize the difference in the degree of expectation, only the player playing the machine can sense the change in the presentation mode, excluding the surrounding players, creating a sense of premium.

As a variation of the presentation, the player may push the tilting device 310 to place the weight member 5412 and the storage member 5430 in a position where they cannot come into contact with each other, or the weight member 5412 may be placed in a position where they cannot come into contact with each other.
It is desirable to generate both a case where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are in a position where they can be in continuous contact with each other, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the two different cases can be generated by changing the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disk cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination, so that the disk cam 53
In the above description, the frictional force is generated by the contact between the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed may be configured to partially protrude in a direction approaching the disc cam 5344 and to contact the disc cam 5344 when the disc cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, it is possible to ensure a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346, compared to the case in which the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 contact each other. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the top and bottom board surface support devices 600 may be configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, a portion of the multi-function cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to abut against the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600,
In the above description, the vertical position of the board 13 does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom 12c supporting the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side, and the front side end of the support bottom 12c is inclined toward the front side of the game board 13.
The rear side extension plate 621c may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600 in the released state. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there, the game board 13 can be made to ride up onto the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the efficiency of the work of fixing the game board 13 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent forward and backward, or may be a combination of forward, backward, left and right bends. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
It is preferable to form a long path in the front-to-rear direction directly behind 3, because this allows the ball to be discharged more smoothly. Also, by forming a path that bends forward and backward, the range of foul ball passage 145 along the surface of game board 13 can be narrowed, making it easier to prevent interference between the launch path and foul ball passage 145.

In the eighth embodiment, the light guide member 540 is curved so that the portion facing the opening 524 is concave. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. In addition, the light guiding member 540 does not need to be curved from top to bottom, and for example, curved parts and straight extending parts may be mixed at the top and bottom.

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467, 487 form a passage that bends up and down has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the passage bending may be left and right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the above eighth embodiment, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts against the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi are in contact with each other, the rear side wall 461H
The speaker connection wire 453 may be spaced apart from the speaker connection wire 453 in the thickness direction.
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched and held between the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi, even if a load is applied to the speaker connection wire 453 in a direction in which it is pulled outward from the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching, the speaker connection wire 453 can be held in place.
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

Also, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha may be configured so that, within a range of protruding length corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passing recess 464, it abuts against the inner surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall 461H, while within a range of protruding length greater than this, it has a step midway so as to be separated from the inner surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall 461H by approximately the diameter of the speaker connection wire 453. In this case, a sufficient range is secured in which the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H form a double wall, and the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped while suppressing sound leakage.

In the above eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is described as constituting a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to a speaker room and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to a duct, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the front-rear width of the intermediate body portion 461M to be equal to that of the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T, the base end side body portion 461B and the intermediate body portion 461
The speaker unit 461M and the tip side main body portion 461T may be configured together to form a large speaker chamber.

In addition, although the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the tip end side main body portion 461T in the above description, the volume relationship may be reversed, or the two may be configured to have the same volume.
The location of 1 is not limited to the left or right end, but may be the center in the left or right direction, or may be a position between the left or right end and the center in the left or right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467a to 487 constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are
Although the case has been described where adjacent rib portions among 67e, 487a to 487e do not overlap when viewed in the left-right direction (the direction connecting base end main body portion 461B and tip end main body portion 461T, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by front recessed portion 471 and rear recessed portion 491), this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (e.g., rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, the internal path of speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze-like manner, so that, for example, front recessed portion 47
The opening formed by the recess 491 and the rear recess 492 makes it difficult to commit a fraudulent act of inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the game area, and by lengthening the time required for such a fraudulent act, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts. Note that suppression of fraudulent acts here includes suppression of fraudulent acts themselves and obtaining a fraudulent benefit through fraudulent acts (successful fraudulent acts).
Examples include suppression of

In the above eighth embodiment, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is linked to the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the intermediate gear 808 is connected to the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830,
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose-fitting device 880 may be configured to mesh with each other. In this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotational operation of the petal operation device 800, but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. This allows the radial sliding operation of the petals 802 and the rotational operation of the decorative member 884 to be performed simultaneously, improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the loose fitting device 880 may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the axis of rotation of the rotating plate 830.

In the above eighth embodiment, the second performance member 940 is operated by transmitting a driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the driving side arm member 910, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second performance member 940 may be operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800 by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 to the tip of the second performance member 940. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which when the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing restricting portion 159, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 may be configured to abut in the front-to-rear direction above the opening/closing restricting portion 159. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 will be displaced toward the front side (the right side of the game board 13 will tilt toward the front side), and the game board 13 arranged opposite the operation unit back member 155 will move away from the front side.
Since the portion is also displaced toward the front side, it is possible to cause interference between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed against the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed in the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device 600 arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is fixed.
Whether or not the board support device 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155, which is arranged opposite the lower board support device 600, and the game board 13, and if the board support device 600 arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing against the inner frame 12. This allows the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 to be removed from the multi-function cover member 171, thereby improving the design freedom of the multi-function cover member 171. For example, the multi-function cover member 171 can be recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
In this case, the multi-function cover member 171 made of synthetic resin may collide with the metallic board surface support device 600, so that the multi-function cover member 171
Since the risk of damage to the multi-functional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multi-functional cover member 171 can be used for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover) for a long period of time.

In the above eighth embodiment, the right panel unit 500, in which light irradiated onto the end face of the light-guiding member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light-guiding member 540, is disposed at the right end of the front frame 14 on the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be disposed inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 may be configured to be switchable between a state in which one face of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a state in which the other face is disposed on the front side (for example, configured to rotate the right panel unit 500 around an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510), thereby making it possible to switch the form of light irradiated onto the center frame 86. Also, the form of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 and the form of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 may be switched by configuring the right panel unit 500 to be switchable between a state in which one face of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a state in which the other face of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side (for example, configured to rotate the right panel unit 500 around an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510).
By switching between the moving props that extend inward and the different movements, it is possible to diversify the presentation.

That is, for example, it is considered that only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524 are illuminated, and the right panel unit 500 is switched between a state in which one surface is disposed on the front side and a state in which the other surface is disposed on the front side.
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving props, the moving props arranged opposite the part corresponding to the top opening 524 (the part near the edge) emit light, whereas when the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving props, the moving props arranged opposite over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider area than the top opening 524) emit light. Therefore, the light-emitting part of the moving props can be switched by switching the position of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to be illuminated.

In this case, for example, the performance effect can be improved by operating the moving prop in accordance with the timing of the change in the light-emitting location. For example, the moving prop may be configured to contract and expand so that it fits into the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving prop, and expand (stretch) in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 when the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving prop. This makes it possible to change the location of the light-emitting location according to the movement of the moving prop by switching the position of the right panel unit 500 without the need to switch the LED 512a that controls the light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is concentrated (brightness is increased, the amount of light is large, and the light is clear), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is diffused (brightness is decreased, the amount of light is small, and the light is faint). Therefore, by switching the position of the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the light-emitting object (liquid crystal or moving object) can be easily changed.
The light emission mode can be changed.

Furthermore, by changing the orientation of the right panel unit 500 so that the front end 551 a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving props or liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is placed in front of the moving props or liquid crystal, the front end 551 a of the outer lens member 550 is placed on the rear side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-like (
While emitting light from a narrow beam (narrow width), it can emit light over a wide area in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving props and liquid crystal. This allows only the details of the moving props and liquid crystal to be illuminated, while illuminating a wide area away from the moving props and liquid crystal.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, the foul ball passages 9145 and 10145
In the above description, the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the slot 9150, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal members may be so fragile that they are partially broken by the load from the thread Y8 and the broken parts fall, and the detection sensor may be arranged at a position through which the broken parts pass when they fall. In this case, by issuing an alarm and forcibly stopping the shot of the balls due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, it is possible to detect the cheating act early and to minimize the profits gained by the cheater through the cheating act (losses suffered by the gaming hall).

In the twelfth embodiment, the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve frictional force, or spike-shaped hard members (members harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to bite into the resin slit member 810 to improve the operating resistance.

In addition, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portions of the side slits 815 arranged opposite the inclined surface 2803T are
A recess may be formed to an extent that the inclined surface 2803T can fit in. In this case, the inclined surface 2803T can fit in the recess, thereby improving the operating resistance.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the light traveling direction is changed to a direction in which the light is gathered or spread by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light-guiding member 2540. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light-guiding member 2540 is changed to a direction in which the light is gathered or spread by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region CCVIb to CCVIe.
In all of the above, the light is inclined upward, so that it is easy to direct the light toward the eye level of people walking by to choose a machine to play. This can improve the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010.

In addition, for example, the regions CCVIc and CCVIc are regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530.
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in the area CCVIb, CCVId, which is an area for emitting light to the outer lens member 550, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in the area CCVIb, CCVId, which is an area for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010 and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in an upwardly inclined direction, so that the light can be easily made to travel toward the eye level of a person walking to select a machine to play, while the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction, so that, for example, the balls stored in the upper tray 17 can be illuminated with light to make the balls look glittering. Therefore, the interest of the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved while improving the customer attraction effect.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiments. For example,
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times), including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and in which the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as a pachinko machine with a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and in which the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area.
It may also be implemented as various gaming machines, such as a gaming machine that combines a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after a coin is inserted and a symbol pay line is determined, a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device which variably displays a string of identification information consisting of a number of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information as a final display, and the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever), and is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button), or
A slot machine in which, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of identifying information stops and is displayed as a fixed value, and if the combination of identifying information at the time of the stop is a specific one, a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player is generated. In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

A specific example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that changes and displays a series of symbols, and then determines and displays the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a certain amount of balls are inserted based on a certain operation (button operation), the symbols start to change due to the operation of an operating lever, for example.
For example, when a stop button is operated or a certain time has passed, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and if the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is started in which a certain amount of game value is awarded to the player, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the game hall can handle only the balls as game value, which can eliminate problems seen in current game halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as game value, and restrictions on the location of game machines.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 207 to Fig. 287. Note that the first control example is a control example in which some configurations are changed from the above-mentioned embodiments, and detailed descriptions of the same configurations as the above-mentioned embodiments will be omitted.

Figure 207 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in Figure 207, the game board 13 in the first control example is configured by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general ball entrance 63, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a sorting device 700, etc., on a base plate 60 cut into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see Figure 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made of thin boards glued together, and is formed so that the player cannot see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entry port 63, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. In addition, as will be described in detail later, inside the sorting device 700, there is a first ball entry port 64 through which balls can enter, and a right second ball entry port 640r. Balls that enter the opening 710a are sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 208).

The center portion of the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see Figure 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be explained below, mainly with reference to Figure 207.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 77 is set up inside the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize openings and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 76, 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 218) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left of FIG. 207) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right of FIG. 207) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 207), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 218), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this first control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a, 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether the mode is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot (jackpot A, C), a normal jackpot (jackpot B), or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a winning ball is entered into any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 16R time-saving 100-time jackpot (jackpot A), a 16R odd-numbered jackpot (jackpot B1), a 16R even-numbered jackpot (jackpot B2), and a 2R jackpot (jackpot C). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only show whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as the stop symbol after the change, but also show a symbol according to the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won.

Here, a "16R time-saving 100 times jackpot" (jackpot A) refers to a jackpot in which a jackpot is announced when the third symbol stops and displays the same even number pattern, and then after a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot play, the state transitions to a low probability state and the time-saving state is in effect for a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 variations). A "16R guaranteed odd number jackpot" (jackpot B1) refers to a guaranteed odd number jackpot in which a jackpot is announced when the third symbol finally stops and displays the same odd number pattern, and then after a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot play, the state transitions to a high probability state and the state is in electric support until the next jackpot play is played. A "16R even number jackpot" (jackpot B2) is a jackpot where the third symbol finally stops and displays the same even number pattern, signaling a jackpot, and then after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16, the probability state transitions to a high probability state (until the next jackpot game is played), and the electric support state is set until the next jackpot game is played. A "2R even number jackpot" (jackpot C) is a jackpot where the third symbol finally displays a specific combination of symbols (chance number), and then after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2, the probability state transitions to a high probability state (until the next jackpot game is played). Note that in the case of jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), in other words, a state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The "electric support state" in the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of drawing the second symbol is set high and the time for the second symbol to fluctuate is set short. The "low probability state" refers to a state when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, the probability of a jackpot is lower than when in a probability change. The time-saving state (during time-saving) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit with the second symbol is increased, making it easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change or a time-saving state (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of a hit with the second symbol is increased).

During the electric support mode (electric support game mode) or time-saving mode in the high probability mode, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the high probability mode or time-saving mode, it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the electric support or time-saving period in the high probability period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the high probability period or time-saving period, the hit probability of the second pattern may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be changed. Also, during the high probability period or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second pattern may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are a number of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a third pattern in synchronization with the display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by a winning (initial winning) in any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a second pattern in a variable manner, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67.

The variable display unit 80 also has a center frame 86 disposed around the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be seen through an opening in the center of the center frame 86. The center frame 86 also protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third pattern display device 81, preventing the game ball from coming into contact with the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as the display symbol (second symbol (see FIG. 207)) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed is set to be shorter during electric support or time-saving during a special probability mode than during normal play. As a result, the second symbol changes and is displayed for a shorter period of time during electric support and time-saving during a special probability mode, so that more winning draws can be held than during normal play. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device 640a of the second ball entrance 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during electric support and time-saving during a special probability mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods during the special probability or time-saving period, the time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed is set shorter during the special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gates 67 are configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second pattern is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second pattern display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and is also displayed by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. There are four second pattern reserved lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed by using a part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. The assembly position of the through gate is not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

Below the variable display unit 80, a distribution device 700 is provided, through which balls can enter. When a ball enters the distribution device 700 through the opening 710a, the ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Also, when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640, just as in the case of the right second ball entrance 640r, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see Figure 238), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the distribution device 700 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is conducted by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b. Normally, the left and right wing-shaped electric devices 640a are in an upright position to restrict the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640, making it difficult for the game ball to enter. When a normal symbol, which will be described later, is hit, the electric devices 640a rotate about 45 degrees outward in a certain operating pattern as an opening operation, forming an inverted eight, guiding the game ball towards the second ball entrance 640 and making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize entrances from which two balls are paid out as prize balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r are configured to be different numbers, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r may be configured to be the same number.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the electric support and time-saving mode in the special probability mode, the probability of the second symbol hitting is higher than during normal times, and since the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special probability mode or time-saving mode, the time that the electric device 640a is open is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the special probability mode or time-saving mode, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during normal times.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second ball entrance 640, so the ball basically enters the opening 710a, and the ball is then sorted to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, and the big win lottery is executed.

On the other hand, during the electric support or time-saving period in the special probability mode, the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition to the ball entering the opening 710a being distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the jackpot lottery associated with the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is also more likely to be held. Therefore, there are more opportunities for a jackpot lottery than during normal play, which is more advantageous for the player than during normal play.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment allows the player to change the way the ball is shot depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in electric support during a special probability mode, in time-saving mode, or in normal mode). This allows the player to vary the way the ball is shot, making the game more enjoyable.

A variable winning device 65 is provided below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the variable winning device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning at any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37a or the first pattern display device 37b is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. Also, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be provided, and the location of the opening is not limited to the lower side when viewed from the front of the distribution device 700, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

A space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front door 5 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlet 66 is disposed below the sorting device 700.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 238). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (Fig. 255) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (Fig. 254) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (Fig. 253) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a forward around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the setting switch 291, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, etc.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 238). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 208, the sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 80 of the game board 13. A flow path section through which game balls that enter the opening 710a flow down and a flow path section through which game balls that enter the second ball inlet 640 flow down are housed in a through hole formed in the game board 13, and the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side by a base member.

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric device 640a located below the opening 710a, through holes (not shown) located on both left-right sides of the electric device 640a and formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) located below the through holes and formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction.

The allocating member 760 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape with the front side open. The allocating member 760 is bent at approximately the center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to incline downward as it moves from the approximately center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Furthermore, both ends of the allocating member 760 in the left-right direction are set in positions facing the through holes 731 of the above-mentioned winning member 730.

The distribution member 760 is mainly formed with a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front toward both the left and right, a distribution member 762 that is positioned in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and a ball throwing port that is formed above the distribution member 762.

The distribution member 762 is formed in a circular ring shape and is provided with three protrusions 762a that protrude outward from its outer edge at 90 degree intervals around the axis, and a shaft portion 762b that is inserted into the inside of the circular ring shape.

The shaft portion 762b is a support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around its axis, and is formed in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the inner side of the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged to be rotatable around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusions 762a are protrusions for distributing the balls alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the balls that have passed through the opening 710a are sent, and the balls are sent in the direction opposite to the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is located. In other words, the central protrusion 762a can send the balls sent from the opening 710a in the left and right directions. The protrusions 762a protruding from both ends are members that regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is located (rotate the distribution member 762) due to the weight applied when the ball passes through, and the rotation of the distribution member 762 is regulated by the contact of the tip surface of the protrusion 762a with the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the ball is guided to the central protrusion 762a, the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. This causes the protrusion 762a on the opposite side to be displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface, restricting its displacement.

The inclined surface is the rolling surface of the path (hereinafter referred to as the "third ball sending path KR3") along which the ball sorted to the left and right by the sorting member 762 described above rolls and is sent, and is formed with a downward incline from the center position in the left-right direction of the sorting member 760 toward the outside. As a result, the ball sorted to the left and right by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760 rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent (rolled) to the downward end of the inclined surface 761.

The downward end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so that the rear side surface becomes thicker toward the front as it approaches the end. This allows a ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent to the first ball inlet 64 of the intervening member disposed in front of the sorting member 760, or the right second ball inlet 640r. More specifically, a ball that is sorted by the sorting member 762 to the left side as viewed from the front and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is sent (enters) to the first ball inlet 64. On the other hand, a ball that is sorted by the sorting member 762 to the right side as viewed from the front and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is sent (enters) to the right second ball inlet 640r.

The intermediate member is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a first ball entry port 64 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction on the left side, and a right second ball entry port 640r that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction on the right side, and these first ball entry ports 64.

The first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r are formed on the front side of both the left and right ends of the distribution member 760, and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at both the left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r. Therefore, a path can be formed in which a ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball inlet 64 and is sent to the through hole of the winning member 730, and a path can be formed in which a ball passes through the right second ball inlet 640r and is sent to the through hole of the winning member 730.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above sends balls as follows. A ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760 and then sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When a ball sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in the left direction reaches the end of the third ball sending path KR3, it is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 inside the first ball entrance 64 of the intervening member 750 located on the front side. Here, the game ball that enters the first ball entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, when a ball is sent on the third ball sending path KR3 to the left, it is sent to the end of the third ball sending path KR3 and then sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 inside the right second ball entrance 640r of the interposed member 750 arranged on the front side. Here, the game ball that enters the second ball entrance 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entrance 640r.

In this way, the game balls that enter the opening 710a are alternately distributed by the distribution member 762 between the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640, so that the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, and reserved balls can be generated uniformly. This makes it possible to evenly generate reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved balls of the second special pattern, and the number of reserved balls on one side is set to an upper limit, suppressing overflow where balls are not stored as reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to change at the same time, but they may change at the same time. By configuring in this way, more game lotteries can be performed in a short period of time and the judgment results can be displayed, allowing for more time-efficient play.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols line up, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols do not line up.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot B1", a variable display is performed in which any of the odd-numbered main symbols "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are displayed in a sequence. Also, if it is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B2", a variable display is performed in which any of the even-numbered main symbols "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are displayed in a sequence. Also, if it is "jackpot C", a chance symbol consisting of the combination "341" is displayed. Note that this chance symbol combination is not selected if the lottery result is a miss. In this embodiment, the chance symbol is displayed in a specific combination of third symbols, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display one or more combinations of special symbols (for example, goldfish symbols) different from the normal third symbols 0 to 9, or to notify by displaying letters such as "chance".

Next, referring to Figs. 209 to 217, the display mode of the effect displayed by the third pattern display device 81 in this first control example will be described. As shown in Fig. 209(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two, top and bottom, with the upper 2/3 being the main display area Dm that displays the third pattern in a variable manner, and the remaining lower 1/3 being the sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, left, center, and right, and three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The above-mentioned third pattern is displayed in a specified order in each pattern column Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending numerical order in each pattern column Z1 to Z3, and the display is changed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each pattern column Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of this main display area Dm is set as the pay line L1, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the pay line L1 in the order of left pattern column Z1 → right pattern column Z3 → center pattern column Z2 during each game. If the third pattern stops on the pay line L1 with a combination of jackpot patterns (in this embodiment, the same combination of main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which the reserved symbol that will be changed is displayed by moving when the reserved balls reserved in the main display area Dm are displayed in a changing state (dynamic display). The reserved symbol that has been moved to the execution display area is displayed as a larger symbol than the reserved symbol so that it is possible to identify that the corresponding special symbol is being changed. Note that when a change is being executed, the color of the symbol or the pattern of the symbol is changed to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol that is being changed.

Small area Ds2 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, and a preview performance image. In small area Ds2, a character display area C is set up in which a preview performance image of a character is displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 209(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after it are displayed visibly, so a total of nine main symbols may be displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays the execution base symbol m0 indicating that it is an area where the reserved ball corresponding to the active special symbol is moved and displayed, and when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed as shown in FIG. 210(a), a round symbol is displayed. Among the reserved symbols (round symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the leftmost round symbol indicating that the most reserved symbol is the first is hidden, and then a round symbol with a diameter larger than the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed by moving the reserved symbols displayed in a row to the position where the leftmost reserved symbol that was hidden was displayed. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as the active symbol, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol that starts to change and the selected change pattern, etc., and the color and pattern of the active symbol are determined and displayed. By configuring in this way, the active symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 allows the player to quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol that starts to change and the selected change pattern, thereby improving the interest of the game. Note that the active symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to an effect that changes the color or pattern at the start of the change, but also an effect that changes during the period when the special symbol is changing. For example, it is executed at the timing when the third symbol switches from high-speed change to low-speed change, at the timing when the reach display mode (a display mode in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and the same symbol is displayed and the middle symbol is displayed in a scrolling manner), or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a specific movie effect is executed, etc.) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 209(b), the small area Ds2 has a first reserved pattern base m1 displayed at the left end, indicating that this is an area in which a reserved pattern indicating that the reserved pattern is the first to change is displayed. To the right of the first reserved pattern base m1, the second reserved pattern base m2 indicating that the reserved pattern is second, the third reserved pattern base m3 indicating that the reserved pattern is third, the fourth reserved pattern base m4 indicating that the reserved pattern is fourth, the fifth reserved pattern base m5 indicating that the reserved pattern is fifth, the sixth reserved pattern base m6 indicating that the reserved pattern is sixth, the seventh reserved pattern base m7 indicating that the reserved pattern is seventh, and the eighth reserved pattern base m8 indicating that the reserved pattern is eighth are displayed even when the reserved patterns are not displayed.

When the reserved number of reserved symbols is not more than the predetermined number, the reserved number indication symbol P is displayed on the top of the fifth reserved symbol base m5 to the eighth reserved symbol base m8. The reserved number indication symbol P is configured as a variable lid shape with the character "5" displayed on the top of the fifth reserved symbol base m5, indicating that the reserved symbol is the fifth. Similarly, the character "6" is displayed on the top of the sixth reserved symbol base m6, the character "7" is displayed on the top of the seventh reserved symbol base m7, indicating that the reserved symbol is the seventh, and the character "8" is displayed on the top of the eighth reserved symbol base m8, indicating that the reserved symbol is the eighth.

As shown in FIG. 209(b), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number indication symbol P is displayed across the area from the 5th reserved symbol base m5 to the 8th reserved symbol base m8, and the player is configured to recognize that the maximum reserved number is 8, including the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, a maximum of 4 is set for the first special symbol, and a maximum of 4 is set for the second special symbol. In this control example, a maximum number is set for each of the first and second special symbols, but this is not limiting, and the maximum number may be set to the combined reserved number of the first and second special symbols to prevent overflow.

To the right of the eighth reserved symbol base m8 is a character display base C1, which indicates that this is the area where the preview character will be displayed. By configuring it in this way, even if the preview character is not displayed, the player can check in advance the area where the character will be displayed, making it easy to play.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), when the third pattern (special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner in the main area Dm (during the period during which the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner), if a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, if the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern that entered is less than the maximum value, the reserved pattern is displayed at the top of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserved order. FIG. 210(a) shows the display of the reserved pattern when the number of reserved balls is three.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), when the number of reserved balls is three, the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P is displayed in the display area where the reserved ball numbers from the fifth to the eighth are displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 210(b), when the number of reserved balls becomes four, the variable lid pattern where the fifth reserved ball is displayed in the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P becomes invisible and is displayed variably. By configuring in this way, when the reserved ball is displayed close to the variable lid pattern, it becomes invisible, and the problem that the player mistakes the variable lid pattern for the reserved pattern and mistakes the actual number of reserved balls can be suppressed. Also, as shown in FIG. 210(b), when the number of reserved balls becomes four, not only the variable lid pattern in the display area for the fifth reserved ball becomes invisible, but also a girl character pattern is displayed in the character display area C.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display in a speech bubble indicating the number of balls remaining until the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, so that the player can be informed of the number of balls remaining until the maximum number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls reaches seven, the comment display shows the words "one more", indicating that when one more reserved ball is stored, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, which is eight, will be stored. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize the number of reserved balls until the upper limit, and by inserting a ball into either the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r (a ball entrance corresponding to a special pattern that is not the upper limit of the number of reserved balls) when the number of reserved balls is at the upper limit, the occurrence of an overflow that is not reserved and stored can be suppressed.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the game ball is alternately distributed by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700 to the first ball entrance 64 (corresponding to the first special symbol) and the right second ball entrance 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). This makes it easier for the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to accumulate alternately and evenly. This allows the player to continue playing by having the game ball enter the opening 710a without worrying about overflow, even if the total number of reserved balls (first special symbol and second special symbol combined) reaches seven.

In addition, when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached, the word "MAX" is displayed to indicate that the maximum number of reserved balls has been stored, preventing a malfunction in which the player continues to fire game balls even when the maximum number of reserved balls has been reached, causing an overflow of reserved balls.

In FIG. 211(a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the result of the judgment of whether the reserved ball is a hit or a miss determined by the pre-reading process (Z320: see FIG. 249) in the start winning process (Z105) in FIG. 248 and the information on the type of the variable pattern to be selected are output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, and based on that information, if it is judged to be, for example, a big hit or a miss super reach, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the white reserved pattern is changed to red) as a performance that makes the player expect a big hit, and the fifth variable cover pattern of the reserved number suggestion pattern P is displayed as it is without being hidden. Furthermore, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "as it is" is displayed, and a performance is executed that suggests not to increase the reserved number any more. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the word "OVER" is displayed in a speech bubble from the girl in the character display area C, so that even if there is no overflow, it is announced as if there is an overflow. This gives the player hope that the fourth reserved ball will change and prevents the player from wasting more of their balls (game balls) by firing them when a reserved ball with a high probability of winning has been stored.

As shown in FIG. 212(a), when the number of reserved balls from 0 to 4 is stored in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns P of the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P are hidden at the timing when the fourth reserved ball is stored, and a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "fast" is displayed, and a notification is executed to indicate that the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P is displayed in a special variable manner because the reserved ball number period is short. Here, normally, when there are four reserved balls, the fifth variable lid pattern of the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P is hidden, but because the number of reserved balls from 0 has increased to four within 5 seconds, a special display rule is set in which the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns are displayed as hidden. By configuring in this way, the performance to be executed can be changed depending on the period during which the number of reserved balls increases or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and the player can easily recognize that the reserved balls have been generated in a short period of time or more. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is configured to be different from normal, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display mode of the reserved pattern (for example, the color, pattern, or shape of the reserved pattern) to be variable without changing the display mode of the variable lid pattern P.

Next, referring to FIG. 212(b), an example of variable display of the variable cover pattern P in the time-saving game state will be described. In the time-saving game state (where the probability of determining whether or not a normal pattern is a hit is high), unlike the normal game state (where the probability of determining whether or not a normal pattern is a hit is low), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable cover patterns P are hidden as shown in FIG. 212(b). Then, a girl character is displayed, and a word "insert up to 6" is displayed in a speech bubble to prompt the player to store up to the sixth reserved ball. In the time-saving game state, the probability of determining whether or not a normal pattern is a hit is set to a high probability, and the normal pattern change time is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric role (electric support) 640a is more likely to be set to an open state, and the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, since reserved balls are more likely to overflow during time-saving play, unlike normal play, many variable lid symbols P are hidden during time-saving play, and the player is encouraged to play so that the number of reserved balls is six, which is less than the upper limit of eight, thereby preventing the reserved balls from reaching the upper limit and creating a state in which overflow is more likely to occur. Note that in the time-saving play state, when the number of reserved balls reaches the fifth, the seventh variable lid symbol P (m7) is hidden, and when the number of reserved balls reaches the seventh, the eighth variable lid symbol P (m8) is hidden.

In this control example, during time-saving play, when the number of reserved balls reaches five, the seventh variable lid symbol P is hidden, but this is not limited to the above, and the seventh and eighth variable lid symbols P may be kept displayed until the number of reserved balls reaches six. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent players from playing in an attempt to generate six or more reserved balls.

When the fourth reserved ball is stored, the sixth and seventh variable lid symbols may be hidden depending on the content of the winning command, and the words "Insert up to 6" may be displayed to suggest that the girl encourage the player to increase the number of reserved balls to six. In this way, by informing the player in advance of the type of jackpot game (either a special jackpot or a normal jackpot) as a special bonus for inserting up to six, the player's motivation to save up reserved balls can be increased.

As shown in Fig. 213(a)-(b), the type of girl displayed in the character display area C is configured to vary depending on the result of the pre-reading of the reserved balls stored (information indicated by the winning command). In the example shown in Fig. 214(a), a girl character that is usually displayed when there are four reserved balls is displayed, and in the example shown in Fig. 213(b), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, a special girl character different from the normal state is selected and displayed based on the result of the lottery for the pre-reading result being a specific result. Here, the specific result is the result of winning the lottery that determines the type of girl different from the normal state, and if the pre-reading result is a jackpot or a super reach with a miss, the probability of winning is set high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the expectation of a jackpot based on the type of girl character displayed to the player, which can increase the interest of the game.

Also, referring to Figs. 214(a)-(b), the display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum value and then an over-entry occurs will be described. In Fig. 214(a), when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C displays the word "MAX" in a speech bubble comment indicating that the number of reserved balls is the upper limit. If a game ball subsequently enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C changes to character J2 and displays the word "Over-entry" indicating that an overflow has occurred. In this way, when an overflow occurs, the player is notified that an overflow has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner, which can prevent overflows from occurring frequently.

In addition, in this control example, the type of character displayed is variable in order to prevent overflow, but if the purpose is to increase the profits of the gaming establishment, an overflow may be generated to notify the player of the result of a win/loss judgment for the variably displayed special pattern, the result of a pre-read of the stored reserved balls (win/loss judgment result, etc.), and the type of the current game state (normal game state or special game state) depending on the type of character displayed and the content of the comment. In this manner, the player can enjoy a variety of effects by playing while overflow is generated, and overflow that is disadvantageous to the player can be generated while having fun.

With reference to Figures 215(a)-(b), the display mode when the reach-in-reserve performance is executed will be described. As shown in Figure 215(a), when the variation pattern (various normal reaches, various super reaches) that becomes the reach display mode is varied, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in Figure 262) is executed, and when it is determined by the lottery that a special reserve performance is to be executed, as shown in Figure 215, the display mode of the reach-in-reserve performance is set when the reach display mode is reached. When the reach-in-reserve performance is executed, the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns P are hidden regardless of the number of reserved balls, a girl character J1 is displayed, and a balloon comment saying "Save up to 6" is displayed, suggesting the player to save six reserved balls during the reach variation.

As shown in FIG. 215(b), when six reserved balls are actually accumulated during the reach display, the even number symbol "6" is changed to an odd number symbol "7", which is an advantageous symbol type for the player, and displayed. Furthermore, the girl character J1 displays the words "Well done" in a speech bubble, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red, etc.). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from stopping the release of game balls and playing even during the reach, and it is possible to increase the profits of the gaming facility.

In this control example, the reach symbol is changed when the reserved balls reach the specified number (6 balls). However, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit and the hit type corresponds to an even number symbol, the reach symbol is not changed to an odd number symbol, but rather a school of fish swimming from right to left in the main display area Dm is displayed, and the number and color of the fish indicate the expected probability of a big hit, or a preview such as "Congratulations" is displayed to suggest the result of the hit/miss judgment.

With reference to Fig. 216(a)-(b), the display mode in the lucky reserved performance will be described. When a specific variation (a variation that won the advance lottery for executing the lucky reserved performance) is being executed, if a jackpot was won last time, the number of reserved balls when the reserved balls corresponding to that variation were stored is stored, and the mark pattern n6 as shown in Fig. 216(a) is displayed on the variable cover pattern P corresponding to that number of reserved balls, and a notification is executed from the girl character J1 in the character display area C urging the player to save reserved balls up to the reserved number corresponding to the mark pattern n6, saying "Aim for 6". As shown in Fig. 216(b), when six reserved balls are stored during the lucky reserved performance, the word "Well done" is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the word "Confirmed special variation" (advance display mode) is displayed in the main display area Dm, indicating that a special variation jackpot will be awarded in the special variation pattern.

In this way, it is configured to notify the type of jackpot that will occur if a jackpot is hit. In this control example, it is configured to execute this presentation if a jackpot is hit, but it is not limited to this. Even if a jackpot is missed, the type of jackpot that will occur if a jackpot is hit can be determined based on the obtained jackpot type determination value, and the type can be notified to raise the expectation of a jackpot.

The lucky reserved effect is configured so that when the reserved balls stored in the variable cover pattern P (5 to 8 reserved balls) become a winning ball, the number of reserved balls is stored and displayed as the lucky reserved number when the next big win variation is executed. By configuring it in this way, the player can be made aware of the number of reserved balls stored when the previous big win occurred, and can be encouraged to play in a state where as many reserved balls as possible are accumulated, making it easier for the lucky reserved effect to be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 216(a), the reserved pattern is displayed with a number (reserved number at the time of winning: the number indicated by i in FIG. 216) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total number of reserved balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern). When the reserved pattern is consumed (the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern has started to change), this reserved number at the time of winning is displayed as the same number even if it slides (changes) to the reserved pattern display area that is one step younger in the change order. By configuring it in this way, even when the change has started, the reserved number at the time of winning can be confirmed.

In addition, when a jackpot is hit, the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance, etc.) may be displayed as numbers or patterns to notify the player.

Next, referring to Fig. 217(a)-(b), the display mode of the reserved effect when a long-open effect is executed in a long-time win (a winning game in which the electric role 640a is in an open state for a longer period than during a normal win), which is one of the winning types of normal symbols, will be described. As shown in Fig. 217(a), when a long-time win of a normal symbol is won and a long-time win game is started, a comment "Opening" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display notifies the player that a long-time win game is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a malfunction in which a game ball is not launched during a long-time win game that is advantageous to the player and an opportunity to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r is missed. In addition, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during this long-time win game, the reserved pattern corresponding to the ball is displayed in black reserved pattern different from the normal time. This configuration makes it possible to distinguish between reserved balls stored during long-term play and reserved balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), when the display of the changing special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern stored during long-time winning play begins, a treasure chest pattern is displayed in the main display area Dm in synchronization with the start of the scrolling display of the third pattern, and the words "If the treasure chest opens, it's a big chance!!" are displayed, and the treasure chest is displayed while the third pattern is changing, suggesting to the player that there is a high expectation that the lottery result for the changing special pattern will be a big win.

By configuring it this way, when a long-lasting hit with a normal pattern is executed, the presentation of the reserved ball is changed, and a special presentation is also executed while the special pattern corresponding to that reserved ball is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by executing a long-lasting hit, the presentation of the game can be greatly changed, providing a fresh experience.

Returning to FIG. 207, we will continue the explanation. The second symbol display device 83 changes its display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67, is in progress by changing its lighting state, and indicates, as the stopping pattern after the change is completed, the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result for the normal symbol by changing its lighting state.

More specifically, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol, "○" and "×", are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. When the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric device 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined time, and as a result, the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter. The number of times that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also displayed by the second symbol reserved lamp 84. Four second symbol reserved lamps 84 are provided, the number of the maximum reserved numbers, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The normal pattern (second pattern) change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to a maximum number of reserved balls being four times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may not be turned on.

The sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and inside the sorting device 700, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are disposed, through which the game balls that enter the opening 710a are alternately sorted by the sorting member 762 and the balls can enter. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch are turned on, causing the main control device 110 to draw a lottery for a first special pattern and a second special pattern, and the display according to the lottery result is displayed by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are also one of the winning entrances from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls is the same when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but this is not limited to the above and the number of prize balls may be different. For example, the number of prize balls for the right second ball entrance 640r may be set to be greater than the number of prize balls for the first ball entrance 64, so that three prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and four prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r.

The variable winning device 65 is disposed below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to show the jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have been won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times set for the type of jackpot game being executed (for example, 16 times (16 rounds) for jackpot A). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward, with the lower edge of the opening plate as the axis. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 218). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 218. Fig. 218 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Note that in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 219, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81, etc.

The special winning random number counter C1 used for the drawing of the special symbols and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the special winning random number counter C1 used for drawing the special symbols, the special winning type counter C2 used for selecting the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbols (reach winning type, non-reach miss (long miss A, short miss A), reach miss type), the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. In addition, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 255), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the first special pattern, a special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the second special pattern, and a special pattern reserved ball execution area common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided. In each area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r.

The RAM 203 also has a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, which consists of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of these areas stores the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 when the ball passes through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The special random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a specified range (e.g., 0 to 957) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 957 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 957). In particular, when the special random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special random number counter C1.

In addition, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special win random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special win random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 957. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. The random number value that results in a special pattern jackpot is set by the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a, a special pattern jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. In addition, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for when the probability of a special symbol is low (the period when the probability of a special symbol is low) and one for when the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (the period when the probability of a special symbol is high), and the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is set differently for each type. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the probability of a special symbol is low and when the probability of a special symbol is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for when the probability of a special symbol is high (see FIG. 221(a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for when the probability of a special symbol is low (see FIG. 221(a)) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special win type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r.

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a big win for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that for a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this embodiment, the jackpot type is set to four types, namely, "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C", and the special winning type counter C2 determines one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C". Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot pattern.

The special win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 957. In this special win random number counter C1, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are three random number values that result in a jackpot with a special symbol, and these random number values "0 to 2" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 3 out of a total of 958, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is "3/958".

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are 27 random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot, and these values, "0 to 26," are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 27 out of a total of 958, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 27/958.

In this embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are set so that they do not overlap. If there is a value that is always used as the random number value for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, that random number value may be input from outside, making it easier to win a jackpot illegally. In contrast, as in this embodiment, by changing the random number value for the jackpot depending on the state (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for the special symbol or a low probability state for the special symbol), it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value for the jackpot for the special symbol, thereby preventing fraud.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type has a special win type selection table 202d1 that is referenced in response to the drawing of the first special symbol and a special win type selection table 202d2 that is referenced in response to the drawing of the second special symbol.

When the variation of the first special symbol stops, if the lottery result of the variation is a jackpot, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 stores a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot type for comparing (judging) with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

Figure 222 (b) is a data table that shows the contents of this special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, if the random number value in the acquired special jackpot type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, if the value is "40 to 75", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B1", if the value is "76 to 79", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B2", and if the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that one of four types of winning types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2.

In addition, the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 stores a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot type for comparing (judging) the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 set (acquired and stored) in the special pattern reserved ball execution area when the variation of the second special pattern stops and the lottery result in that variation is a jackpot.

Figure 222 (c) is a data table that shows the contents of this special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, if the random number value in the acquired special jackpot type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, if the value is "40 to 87", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B1", if the value is "88 to 91", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B2", and if the value is "92 to 99", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to determine four types of winning types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) according to the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2. In addition, the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the judgment result is a jackpot is different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, so that the player can be interested in whether the lottery is executed with the first special pattern or the second special pattern. In addition, the selection ratio of the special jackpot in which the special jackpot is granted for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern is the same (60%), so that the special jackpot ratio differs between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the problem that the special jackpot ratio is not constant as a whole gaming machine can be suppressed. In addition, the selection ratio of the jackpot C for the second special pattern is set low, so that the probability of selecting the 16R special jackpot is set higher than that of the first special pattern, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 198). The stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 described above determine the general display mode, such as short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, and super reach. The display mode is determined, specifically, by the change time of the pattern change. Based on the change time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 255) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 220b) that stores random number values that determine the variation time of the pattern variation from the values (random number values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 221(b), the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used in a game state where the probability of determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit is low (normal game state), and a time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in a game state where the probability of determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit is high (high probability game state or time-saving game state). As will be explained in more detail in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later, the main control device 110 determines the rough content of the variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time based on the result of the hit/miss judgment, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS1, and sets a variation pattern command indicating the determined content.

Next, referring to Figs. 223 to 224, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. Fig. 223 is a data table that shows the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the variation patterns. In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, a variation pattern is set in correspondence with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined by the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, a variation pattern is set for each number of reserved balls at the start of the variation (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "51 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 60", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "61 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C," if the reserved number is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250," then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100," a super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected, and for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 198," a super reach jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time, such as a normal reach or a super reach, is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time, the player can be made to expect that the result of the win/loss judgment will be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is miss, and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209", then miss length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", then normal reach miss A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", then super reach miss A (variation No. 9) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", then super reach miss B (variation No. 10) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198".

In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss short A (variation No. 11) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss normal A (variation No. 8) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super A (variation No. 9) is selected; and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, a small number of reserved balls (when there are 1 to 4 balls) and a long fluctuation pattern are set to be selected, so that by having a game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during that time, reserved balls are more likely to be generated, and a period in which the fluctuation of the special pattern stops (a period in which lottery play does not take place) occurs, which is configured to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game. Also, by setting the selection rate of normal reach and super reach low when the number of reserved balls is large, the normal reach and super reach fluctuations are executed when there are many reserved balls, allowing the player to hope that the hit/miss judgment result will be a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 224, a data table is shown which shows the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202b2. In the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202b2, various fluctuation patterns are set in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. Also, when the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit, a fluctuation pattern is set in correspondence with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). Furthermore, when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, a fluctuation pattern is set for each number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation (either 1 to 2 balls or 3 to 8 balls).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 224, when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 90", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "91 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 100", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "101 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C," if the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250," then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100," a super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected, and for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 198," a super reach jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, a variation pattern with a long variation time, such as a normal reach or a super reach, is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, the player can be made to expect that the result of the win/loss judgment will be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 2, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209", then the miss length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 229", then the normal reach miss A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", then the super reach miss A (variation No. 9) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", then the super reach miss B (variation No. 10) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198".

In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 3 to 8, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss short B (variation No. 12) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss normal A (variation No. 8) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super A (variation No. 9) is selected; and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) in the fluctuation pattern of Miss Short B is configured to be 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. As a result, when the win/loss determination result is a win and the number of reserved balls is three or more, Miss Short B is selected with a high probability, which allows the special pattern to fluctuate many times in a short period of time, making it easier to shorten the period until a jackpot is determined (the period between jackpots), and improving the efficiency of the game.

The normal win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the normal win random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol set by the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) is divided into two types: one for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and one for high probability of a normal symbol winning (period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state) when the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than the low probability, and the number of random numbers that result in a big win included in each is set differently. Furthermore, the type of winning normal symbol is set to normal winning or long-time winning, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, a normal win for a normal pattern is a win in which the operation of the electric device 640a being activated to the open state is executed once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds in the normal game state (low probability game state) and in the jackpot game state. Also, during the time-saving and probability period, it is a win in which the operation of the electric device 640a being activated to the open state is repeated twice with an opening time of 2 seconds. On the other hand, a long-term win is a win in which the operation of the electric device 640a being activated to the open state is repeated twice with an opening time of 2 seconds, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric device 640a executed during the time-saving period in a normal win and the opening operation in the special period are set to be the same as those in a long-time win, but this is not limited to the above, and a different opening operation may be used for a long-time win. Specifically, for example, an operation in the open state may be performed once for three seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ball enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r more easily during a long-time win, making it easier to execute the variable display of the second special pattern during normal play, and allowing the player to enjoy the changes in the game presentation due to the variable display of the second special pattern that displays a fresh preview display, etc.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221(c), when the probability of a normal pattern is low, if the value of the acquired normal win random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 6, it is determined to be a normal win of the normal pattern. Also, if it is any one of 7 to 8, it is determined to be a long-time win of the normal pattern. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal pattern is high, if the value of the acquired normal win random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined to be a normal win of the normal pattern. Note that, when the probability of a normal pattern is high, a long-time win of the normal pattern is not set, but when the probability of a normal pattern is high, the opening operation of the electric role 640a is the same as a long-time win, so even a normal win is essentially the same as a long-time win.

In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between when the normal pattern has a low probability and when the normal pattern has a high probability. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric device 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r can be reduced. Therefore, the player's consumption of game balls can be increased, and the profits of the gaming establishment can be increased. On the other hand, during the time-saving period and the probability-change period, when the probability is high, the electric device 640a can be given an opportunity to operate with a probability of "1/1.2", and the opportunity of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r can be increased. Therefore, the consumption of game balls by the player can be suppressed, and a game state advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, the player can play with the aim of playing with a high probability, and can play for a longer period of time.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern). If the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", it is a normal win, and the electric role 640a is opened (opened) for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if a normal pattern wins, the electric role 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Furthermore, if the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is between "21 and 28," it is considered a long-term win and the right second ball entrance 640r is opened for "2 seconds x 2 times."

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that will result in a normal symbol jackpot, and the range is "5 to 204." These random number values are stored in the high probability normal jackpot random number table 202c (see Figure 221 (c)). Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 200 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is "1/1.2."

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, the "○" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric role 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the opening period of the right second ball entrance 640r is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 2 times), so that the ball is easily able to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where there is a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second ball entrance 640r opens for "2 seconds x 2 times" when a normal symbol wins, but the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times."

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 243) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 255).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 218, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 255) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 254) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

As shown in FIG. 220(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 contains the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221), variable pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 221(b)), normal jackpot random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)), jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 222(a)-(c)), and prize command table 202e. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 also stores various data and programs necessary for playing the game in addition to the above.

Figure 225 is a data table that shows the contents of the winning command table 202e. The winning command table 202e is a table for determining the winning command corresponding to the judgment result of the variation pattern selected when the stored reserved ball starts to vary in the pre-reading process (Z320: Figure 249) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in Figure 225, if the lottery result in the pre-reading is a jackpot, a winning command corresponding to the determined jackpot type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. This makes it possible to notify not only the variation pattern type and the hit/miss judgment result but also the jackpot type by the winning command, and to notify more detailed information. In addition, if the lottery result is a miss, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. Note that the variation pattern types of miss long A, miss short A, and miss short B are all treated as misses and the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 220(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, an opening count counter 203g, a long-time opening flag 203i, a time-saving counter 203j, a fluctuation execution flag 203k, a sure-win flag 203m, a jackpot flag 203n, a fluctuation order storage area 203p, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winning events is stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 draws for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the drawing of the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved areas with area numbers one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) in which winning data is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special pattern.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a normal win random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is obtained when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see Z404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 33).

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command (see Z206 in FIG. 33 and Z405 in FIG. 35). The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is changed.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls that have entered the right second ball entrance 640r, and other configurations are the same as the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d, so detailed explanations are omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the through gate 67, up to a maximum of four. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four (see Z504 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is executed (see Z406 in FIG. 250).

When a ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display reserved for normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, when a ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Z503 in FIG. 252: No).

The opening count counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric role 64c is opened. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric role 64c.

The long-time opening flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long-time win is in progress. This long-time opening flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of Z429 in the normal pattern change start processing (Z408: Fig. 251) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the processing of Z403 in the normal pattern change processing (Z106: Fig. 250), it is set to OFF when a new normal pattern change starts (when the next normal pattern change starts after a long-time win game is executed).

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols. If the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for normal symbols. The initial value of this time-saving counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a lottery is performed for a special symbol in the main control device 110 and a jackpot for a special symbol is determined, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. In other words, when a jackpot for a special symbol is reached, a new value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set regardless of the value of the time-saving counter 203j.

The change execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this control example, the change starts according to the order in which the balls entered the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r (the order in which the balls were reserved and stored). Here, when the change of the special symbol stops and the change of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts, the change execution determination process (Z204: Fig. 245) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines whether the next stored change corresponds to the reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the reserved memory order data stored in the change order storage area 203p described later, and the corresponding change execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in Fig. 245).

The probability variable flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current game state is a probability variable game state. This probability variable flag 203m is set to ON when it is determined in the processing of Z1113 in the jackpot control processing (Z1104: Fig. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 that the jackpot game being executed is other than jackpot A (Z1111: No). In addition, in the processing of Z220 in the special pattern variation processing (Z104: Fig. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the varying display of the special pattern that will result in a jackpot is stopped.

The jackpot in progress flag 203n is a flag indicating that the game status is a jackpot game. This jackpot in progress flag 203n is set to ON when the start of a jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special pattern change processing (Z104: Fig. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the processing of Z1114 of the jackpot control processing (Z256: Fig. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the timing for the end of the jackpot game is reached.

The change order storage area 203p is an area in which the reserved order is stored when game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r and are stored as reserved balls. In this control example, the special symbol changes are configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed preferentially. In addition, in this control example, the distribution device 700 is configured to distribute the balls alternately between the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. By starting the change in the order in which they are reserved and stored, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also executed alternately in the change of the special symbol, and only one of the reserved balls is consumed, which can prevent the reserved balls of that special symbol from overflowing.

Other memory area 203z stores flags, counters, stored data, etc. required for other control processes executed by the MPU of main control unit 110, but details are omitted.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and continuous preview performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114, to change the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the content of the performance during a super reach.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a reserve change selection table 222b, a reserve performance mode selection table 222c, a reserve lid range selection table 222d, a reserve lid command selection table 222e, a reserve lid color change selection table 222f, a lucky reserve command table 222g, a background mode selection table 222h, a reserved character selection table 222i, a reserved character change table 222j, a speech bubble selection table 222k, a reach performance lottery table 222m, a reach start time calculation table 222n, and a lucky reserve lottery table 222p.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. Multiple variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time and variation pattern type that correspond to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by obtaining a selection counter value (not shown).

The reserved change selection table 222b is a selection table for determining whether or not to change and display the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the winning command received, and for obtaining the reserved change value required for the performance to be executed according to the content of the change.

Figure 227 (a) shows a schematic diagram of the contents of this reserved change selection table 222b. In the reserved change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is assigned to the type of winning command received, and the display mode (see Figure 211 (a)) that changes the reserved pattern in the secondary display area Ds and the reserved change value are set for the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The details of the acquired reserved change value will be explained in the reserved effect mode selection table 222c described later.

Specifically, when the winning command type is a miss, if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 180", it is determined that the display mode of the reserved pattern will not change from the normal reserved pattern, and the reserved change value is 0. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "181 to 198", it is determined that the display mode of the reserved pattern will change from a white circle pattern (normal display mode of the reserved pattern) to a blue circle pattern (change A), and the reserved change value is 1.

If the winning command type is a normal miss, and the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0" and "50", no change is determined, and the reserved change value is set to 0. If the value is between "51" and "100", change A is determined, and the reserved change value is set to 1. If the value is between "101" and "198", it is determined that the white circle pattern will be changed to a green circle pattern, and the reserved change value is set to 2.

If the winning command type is a super reach miss, if the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0" and "30", no change is determined and the reserved change value is set to 0. If it is between "31" and "90", change A is determined and the reserved change value is set to 1. If it is between "91" and "198", change B is determined and the reserved change value is set to 2.

When the winning command type is a normal reach jackpot, if the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0" and "20", no change is determined and the reserved change value is set to 0. If it is between "21" and "90", change A is determined and the reserved change value is set to 1. If it is between "91" and "198", change B is determined and the reserved change value is set to 2.

When the winning command type is a super reach jackpot, if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-10", no change is determined and the reserved change value is set to 0. If it is any of "11-100", change A is determined and the reserved change value is set to 1. If it is any of "101-189", change B is determined and the reserved change value is set to 2. If it is any of "190-198", it is determined that the white circle pattern will be changed to a red circle pattern and the reserved change value is set to 3.

In this way, by receiving a winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content, so that it is possible to predict the win/lose judgment result corresponding to the reserved symbol stored in reserve, not only from the special symbol being displayed in a changing state, but also from the displayed reserved symbol. Also, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the display will be in a reach display mode when it is changed in change B, it is possible to make the player expect that the change will start even before the special symbol changes, if it is stored in reserve, and even if a change of the special symbol that results in a loss is executed during that time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a reserved change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop the same reserved change into a reach effect via different execution effects, making it possible to attract the player with an unexpected effect.

The hold display mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting from multiple modes prepared according to the hold changes displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 227(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this reserved presentation mode selection table 222c. In the reserved presentation mode selection table 222c, the reserved presentation mode is set according to the reserved change value (range) acquired in the reserved change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in Figure 266). Specifically, when the reserved change value is "0", the reserved presentation mode is determined (selected) to be normal mode. Normal mode is a mode in which the interval between the display range of the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P is variable by one when all the reserved patterns being displayed have not been changed (state) and the number of reserved balls is four or more (see Figure 210(b)).

When the reserved change value is either "1" or "2", the reserved presentation mode is determined (selected) to be the preview A mode. Preview A mode is a reserved presentation mode in which there is no gap between the display range of the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P when the number of reserved balls is four or more and the reserved pattern is set to any change (any of changes A to C) (see FIG. 211(a)). Note that FIG. 211(a) is not strictly speaking a display mode representing the preview A mode, but is an example of a display mode of the reserved presentation mode of the preview B mode described below. In the preview A mode, the content of the comment displayed in the state of FIG. 211(a) is different. In the preview A mode, when a reserved ball is generated and a reserved pattern is displayed after the color-changed reserved pattern, one variable lid pattern P is also hidden accordingly (for example, when one reserved ball increases (generates) from the state of FIG. 211(a), the variable lid pattern P with the number 5 is hidden), and a comment indicating the expectation of a jackpot for the color-changed reserved pattern is displayed in a speech bubble. In this way, the preview A mode is configured to notify the expectation of a jackpot for the changed reserved ball each time a reserved ball is generated, so that the player is played in such a way that a reserved ball is generated after the color of the reserved pattern is changed.

When the reserved change value is "3", the reserved presentation mode is decided to be the notice B mode. Notice B mode is a mode in which, like notice A mode, when there is a change in the reserved pattern being displayed and the number of reserved balls is four or more, if any change (either change A, change B, or change C) is set to the reserved pattern being displayed (state), and when the number of reserved balls is four or more, the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P are displayed with no gap between them (see FIG. 211(a)), or the reserved pattern is displayed on the display range of the variable lid pattern P (see FIG. 211(b)).

By configuring it in this way, not only can the color of the reserved pattern be changed, but the display range of the variable lid pattern P can be changed in various ways by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls, and depending on the content of the change, the fun of predicting the result of the win/loss judgment is expanded, making it possible to attract players. Also, unlike the preview A mode, this is a reservation presentation that makes the player play so as not to generate any more reserved balls, and it makes the player suspend the game (the operation of firing game balls) and concentrate on the start of the change (dynamic display) of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern whose color has changed, thereby increasing anticipation. This can increase the excitement of the game.

The reserved lid range selection table 222d has multiple data tables set for obtaining reserved lid range values required to set the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

Here we will explain the special effects that take place during normal mode. In normal mode, the special effects include short-term winning effects, hold effects during reach, and lucky hold effects.

The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the time required for the number of reserved balls to go from 0 to 1 reserved ball being stored and then to 4 is less than 5 seconds. In normal mode, the space between the reserved lid pattern P and the reserved pattern is set to the space of one reserved ball (the reserved lid pattern P is displayed variable), but in the short-term winning effect, the number of reserved lid patterns P is displayed variable so that the space between the reserved lid pattern P and the reserved pattern is two balls, as shown in Figure 212 (a), and a girl character J0 is displayed to indicate that this is a short-term winning effect, and the comment "fast" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is normal, no other special effects are being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls changes from 0 to 1 or more, if the number of reserved balls becomes 4 before the short-term winning timer 223q, which measures the elapsed time, has reached 5 seconds, the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 1 (see Z2425 in FIG. 267) and execution begins (see FIG. 212(a)), and when the short-term winning timer 223q has reached 5 seconds, the special effect status memory area is set to 0 (see Z2606 in FIG. 270), and execution ends.

The pending effect during reach is an effect that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play to accumulate the number of pending balls to a predetermined number (for example, 6 balls in FIG. 215(a)) during the reach fluctuation. When the fluctuation type is reach, this pending effect during reach is executed by lottery based on the pending effect lottery table 222m described later, and when execution is confirmed, the value of the pending effect start timer 223r, which is set based on the fluctuation type by the reach start time calculation table 222n described later, becomes 0 after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds), and when no other special effects are being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0) at the timing when the reach effect starts, the special effect status memory area is set to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 262) to start execution (see FIG. 215(a)), and ends when the fluctuation ends.

The lucky reserved effect is an effect in which the number of reserved balls (reserved patterns) stored (displayed) is stored, and when a jackpot (specific judgment result) occurs, a predetermined mark pattern (see FIG. 216(a)) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time the jackpot reserved ball entered the ball entrance, and a preview display mode is displayed to encourage the player to play so that the reserved balls reach the mark pattern. When the reserved patterns reach the mark pattern, as shown in FIG. 216(b), pressing the frame button 22 executes an effect that notifies the player of the current game state (either a guaranteed game state (special game state) or a low probability game state (normal game state)). In the lucky hold effect, when no other special effects are being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0) and the lucky hold memory value 223p is stored, which is stored when the number of reserved balls is 5 or more when a previous start-up winning judgment result is a jackpot, a lottery is drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p described below to determine whether or not the effect can be executed, and if execution is confirmed, the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in Figure 261), and execution begins (see Figure 216 (a)), and the effect ends when the next fluctuation begins.

In this way, even during normal mode where there are no changes in reserved balls, various reserved effects related to the reserved ball patterns can be provided depending on the time interval between starting winning, the number of reserved balls during reach fluctuation, the stored contents of the winning/losing judgment results from past starting winning balls, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Figure 228 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the reserved lid range selection table 222d. The reserved lid range selection table 222d includes a normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, a predicted A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2, a predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3, a reserved lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning, a reserved lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance, and a reserved lid range selection table 222d6 for time reduction.

The normal reserve lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to obtain the reserve lid range value when the reserve performance mode is normal mode. FIG. 228(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal reserve lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal reserve lid range selection table 222d1, the reserve lid range value is obtained for the reserved ball count value (range). In addition, the normal mode includes a case where the reserve lid range value is obtained (see Z2354 in FIG. 263) when the special performance is not being performed (the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 0) and the game state is normal (low probability game state (low probability of jackpot and non-time-saving game state)), and a case where the reserve lid range value is obtained (see Z2346 in FIG. 263) when the lucky reserve performance is being performed (the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 3).

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between 0 and 3, the reserved lid range value is 4. If the number of reserved balls is 4, the reserved lid range value is 3. If the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved lid range value is 2. If the number of reserved balls is 2, the reserved lid range value is 1. If the number of reserved balls is 1, the reserved lid range value is 0. If the number of reserved balls is 0, the reserved lid range value is 0.

The predicted A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to obtain the reserve lid range value when the reserve presentation mode is the predicted A mode. Figure 228 (c) shows a schematic of the contents of the predicted A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2. In the predicted A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2, the reserve lid range value is obtained (see Z2351 in Figure 263) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between "0 and 3", the reserved lid range value obtained is 4. If the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value obtained is 4. If the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value obtained is 3. If the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value obtained is 2. If the number of reserved balls is "1", the reserved lid range value obtained is 1. If the number of reserved balls is "0", the reserved lid range value obtained is 0.

The preview B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to obtain the reserved lid range value when the reserved performance mode is the preview B mode.

Figure 228 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the B-mode advance notice reserved lid range selection table 222d3. In the B-mode advance notice reserved lid range selection table 222d3, the reserved lid range value is obtained (see Z2349 in Figure 263) for the reserved ball count value (range) and the reserved advance counter value (range).

Specifically, if the reserved ball count is "0-4", and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "0-4", the reserved ball lid range value is 4. If the reserved ball count is "5-8", and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "1-4", the reserved ball lid range value is 4, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "5", the reserved ball lid range value is 3, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "6", the reserved ball lid range value is 2, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "7", the reserved ball lid range value is 1, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "8", the reserved ball lid range value is 0.

The reserve lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning (Figure 229(a)) is a table used to obtain the reserve lid range value when executing a short-term winning performance. Figure 229(a) shows a schematic diagram of the contents of the reserve lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning. In the reserve lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning, the reserve lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2342 in Figure 263).

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value obtained is 2. If the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved lid range value obtained is 1. If the number of reserved balls is "6 to 8", the reserved lid range value obtained is 0.

The reserve lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance is a table used to obtain the reserve lid range value in the case of a reserve performance during reach. Figure 229 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserve lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance. In the reserve lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance, the reserve lid range value is obtained (see Z2344 in Figure 263) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the reserved ball count value is "0 to 8", the reserved ball lid range value obtained is 2.

The time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6 is a table used to obtain the reserved lid range value when a special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), the reserved effect mode is normal mode, and the game state is in the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter is other than 0).

Figure 229 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6. In the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6, the reserved lid range value is obtained for the reserved ball count value (range) (see Z2353 in Figure 263).

Specifically, if the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 6", the reserved lid range value obtained is 2. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid range value obtained is 1. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved lid range value obtained is 0.

By configuring it in this way, the display range of the variable cover pattern P can be changed in various ways depending on the win/loss judgment at the time of the initial winning and the reserved performance switched according to the type of variation, thereby creating a performance effect that increases the participation of the player.

The reserved lid command selection table 222e is a table used to select a command for setting the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 from the reserved lid range value obtained in the reserved lid range selection table 222d.

Figure 230 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved lid command selection table 222e. The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the reserved lid command to be sent to the display control device for the reserved lid range value (range) obtained by the reserved lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, if the reserved lid range value is "0", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF00, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is the shortest display (see FIG. 214(a)). If the reserved lid range value is "1", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF01, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 1 (only the reserved 8 area). If the reserved lid range value is "2", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF02, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 2 (reserved 7 to 8 area (see FIG. 212(a))). If the reserved lid range value is "3", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF03, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 3 (reserved 6 to 8 area (see FIG. 213(a))). If the reserved lid range value is "4", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 4 (reserved 5 to 8 area (see FIG. 211(a))).

The reserved lid command is set by the reserved lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the winning command receiving process (Z2209) at the start of the winning, and by the reserved lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the variation pattern receiving process (Z2202) at the start of the variation. Therefore, the display of the variable lid pattern P can be changed by setting the display reserved lid command based on the reserved lid range value (see Z2355 in Figure 263) each time the number of reserved balls changes.

The reserved lid color change selection table 222f is a data table for determining the reserved lid pattern P corresponding to the area in which the reserved pattern is displayed when the reserved balls exceed the specified number (four in the example shown in FIG. 211(a)) when a notice performance is being performed suggesting that the reserved number shown in FIG. 211(a) will not be increased. The reserved lid pattern P determined by the reserved lid color change selection table 222f is displayed in a specific color (with a transparent green interior) different from the normal display mode (normally, a black frame with a transparent white interior and a number indicating the reserved number corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside). The reserved lid color change selection table 222f is a table for selecting a command for setting the color change range of the reserved lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved notice counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the color-changed reserved pattern described later and the current number of reserved balls.

Figure 230(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the reserved lid color change selection table 222f. When the reserved performance mode is the notice B mode, the reserved lid color change selection table 222f specifies the color change range for the value (range) of the reserved notice counter 223g and the value (range) of the reserved ball count, and sets a reserved lid command (see Z2348 in Figure 263) to change the display range of the variable lid pattern P from the normal white display mode to green (see Figure 211(b)) according to the change range.

Specifically, when the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "0-4", if the value of the number of reserved balls is "0-4", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF10, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF11, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF12, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF13, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "5", if the value of the reserved ball count is "5", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the reserved ball count is "5", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF20 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

If the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF21, and the color change range is specified as the number of reserved balls in the range from 6 to 7. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF22, and the color change range is specified as the number of reserved balls in the range from 6 to 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "6", if the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF30 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF31 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "7", if the value of the reserved ball count is "7", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the reserved ball count is "8", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF40 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "8", if the reserved ball count value is "8", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, by changing the display mode in an area other than the reserved pattern that is changed depending on the judgment result of the previous winning (prediction judgment), it is possible to attract more attention from the player, and at the same time, by allowing the player to freely decide the degree to which the number of reserved balls should be increased depending on whether or not to stop shooting, it becomes possible to enjoy a wide range of reserved pattern modes and future change notice performances.

The lucky reserved command table 222g is a table for selecting a command that changes the display mode of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls in question.

Figure 231 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the lucky reserve command table 222g. When the lucky reserve effect is in progress, the lucky reserve command table 222g stores the area of the target reserved ball count as the lucky reserve memory value 223p, and the display reserve lid command is set based on that value (see Z2306 in Figure 261).

Specifically, when the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 5, the reserved lid command FB50 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 5 is changed to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 6, the reserved lid command FB51 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 6 is changed to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 216(a)). When the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 7, the reserved lid command FB52 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 7 is changed to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 8, the reserved lid command FB53 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 8 is changed to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by announcing the number of reserved balls that resulted in a jackpot as a result of the previous initial winning, interest in the game is increased, and at the same time, when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), it is possible to encourage the player to try to win, resulting in a performance that improves operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the background mode memory area 223i. Figure 232 (a) shows a schematic diagram of the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, a background mode is selected according to the value of the background mode memory area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 0, background A (ocean background) is determined, when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 1, background B (mountain background) is determined, when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 2, background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 3, background D (city background) is determined.

The reserved character selection table 222i is a table for selecting (determining) the content (type) of the reserved character (girl) to be displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the background, reserved performance mode, and performance counter 223h.

Figure 232(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. In the reserved character selection table 222i, the reserved character contents are set (see Z2363 in Figure 264) for the background mode stored in the background mode memory area 223i, the reserved presentation mode stored in the reserved presentation mode memory area 223m, and the value (range) of the presentation counter 223h. In addition, images that are easily identifiable by the player are provided for the reserved characters, such as J0 being a girl with short hair (see Figure 210(b)), J1 being a girl with tied hair (see Figure 213(a)), J2 being a girl with long hair (see Figure 213(b)), and J3 being a girl with long blonde hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A" and the reserved performance mode is "normal mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 210(b)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 213(a)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 213(b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the reserved performance mode is "preview A mode" or "preview B mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is "Background B", "Background C", or "Background D", and the reserved performance mode is "Normal mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the reserved performance mode is "Preview A mode" or "Preview B mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, by determining the reserved character with high expectations based on the reserved performance mode and background that have changed since the start winning, it is possible to display a reserved performance with high expectations without compromising the atmosphere of the background performance. In addition, by looking at the changes in the reserved pattern and the changes in the reserved character, the player can recognize the high expectations of the announcement.

In addition, historical information such as the number of changes that have been made as the game is played, the number of jackpots, the number of times a super reach has been made, and the number of points obtained by obtaining a symbol or character that is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game presentation, may be stored, and the character that is selected may be varied taking this historical information into consideration. By configuring in this way, the character that is selected can be changed the more the game is played, preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The pachinko machine 10 may also be equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) so that the character selected can be varied based on date and time information, etc. By configuring the machine in this way, the character selected can be varied based on the time that has passed since the machine was installed, preventing players from becoming bored with the game.

The reserved character change table 222j is a table for selecting the content of the reserved character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the background, reserved performance mode, current reserved character, and performance counter 223h.

Figure 233 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. In the reserved character selection table 222i, the reserved character to be changed is set for the background mode stored in the background mode memory area 223i, the reserved performance mode stored in the reserved performance mode memory area 223m, the current reserved character in the display mode, and the value (range) of the performance counter 223h. The reserved character change is selected when the start winning occurs when the number of reserved balls is at the upper limit value and an over winning occurs (Z2366: Yes), and a display character command is set (see Z2267 in Figure 264). In addition, if the selected character is different from the reserved character currently displayed, the character will be changed (changed), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will not be changed (changed).

Specifically, when the background mode is "Background A", when the reserved performance mode is "Normal mode", and when the current reserved character is "J0", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "181 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 214(b)) is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "191 to 189", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the currently reserved character is "J2", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the reserved performance mode is either "Preview A" or "Preview B", and the currently reserved character is "J0", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 80", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "81 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the currently reserved character is "J1", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "91 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the currently reserved character is "J2", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

When the background mode is "Background B", "Background C", or "Background D", and the reserved character mode is "Normal mode", if the current reserved character is "J0", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "151-199", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the current reserved character is "J1", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "171-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the current reserved character is "J3", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the reserved character is either "Preview A" or "Preview B", if the currently reserved character is "J0", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-50", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "51-189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the currently reserved character is "J1", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "71-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the currently reserved character is "J3", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to an over win, the player has a means of checking the winning or losing result for the current number of reserved balls by the over win, which can increase interest in the game. In addition, the reserved character to be changed is set to a character with higher expectations after the change than before the change, and when the reserved presentation mode is not in normal mode, the rate at which the reserved character is changed is set high, so that when there is a change in the reserved presentation mode, the player has a means of knowing the winning or losing result through a means to intentionally cause an over win, making it possible to provide gameplay that increases operation.

The speech bubble selection table 222k has multiple data tables set for setting the speech bubble (comment) content (see FIG. 211(a)) to be displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 234 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the speech bubble selection table 222k. The speech bubble selection table 222k includes a normal speech bubble selection table 222k1, a notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2, a notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3, a short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4, a reach performance speech bubble selection table 222k5, a lucky reserved speech bubble selection table 222k6, and a time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k7. The speech bubble content that is set is the content of the comment display uttered by the reserved character in the character display area C.

The normal speech bubble selection table 222k1 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when a special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is normal mode (see FIG. 210(b)), and the game status is normal.

Figure 234 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal speech bubble selection table 222k1. The normal speech bubble selection table 222k1 obtains speech bubble contents for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in Figure 265).

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is any value between "0" and "4", no speech bubble content is obtained (see FIG. 210(b)), if the number of reserved balls is "5", the speech bubble content obtained is YES, if the number of reserved balls is "6", two more speech bubble content is obtained, if the number of reserved balls is "7", one more speech bubble content is obtained, and if the number of reserved balls is "8", the speech bubble content obtained is MAX (see FIG. 214(a)).

The notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when the pending presentation mode is notice A mode (see FIG. 211(a)).

Figure 234 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2. The notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 obtains speech bubble contents for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the result of the hit/miss judgment of the winning information command (see Z2390 in Figure 265).

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between "0" and "3", no speech bubble content is obtained. If the number of reserved balls is "4", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Excited", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Excited". If the number of reserved balls is "5", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Stay tuned", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Stay tuned". If the number of reserved balls is "6", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 70%?", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 60%?". If the number of reserved balls is "7", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 80%?", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 70%?". If the number of reserved balls is "8", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "It's super hot!" If it's wrong, the speech bubble will say Something is going to happen!

Although it is configured in this manner, the notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 can further set speech bubble content by referring to the value (range) of the presentation counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the reserved ball count and the result of the winning information command hit/fail judgment, to create a presentation that expresses various expectations.

The notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when the pending presentation mode is notice B mode (see FIG. 211(b)).

Figure 234 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3. In the notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3, speech bubble contents are obtained (see Z2388 in Figure 265) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved performance counter.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is any of "0-4", the speech bubble content is obtained as is (see FIG. 211(a)); if the number of reserved balls is "5", and the reserved performance counter value is any of "0-4", the speech bubble content is obtained as OVER (see FIG. 211(b)); if the reserved performance counter value is "5", the speech bubble content is obtained as STOP; if the number of reserved balls is "6", and the reserved performance counter value is any of "0-5", the speech bubble content is obtained as OVER; if the reserved performance counter value is "6", the speech bubble content is obtained as STOP; if the number of reserved balls is "7", and the reserved performance counter value is any of "0-6", the speech bubble content is obtained as OVER; if the reserved performance counter value is "7", the speech bubble content is STOP; if the number of reserved balls is "8", the speech bubble content is obtained as MAX.

By configuring it in this way, when a highly anticipated change in the reserved pattern occurs, the winning can be recognized from the content of the speech bubble, and the player can be informed of the decision of whether or not to continue shooting balls beyond the current value of the number of reserved balls and increase the number of reserved balls, preventing unnecessary shooting and allowing for efficient gameplay. Also, when a highly anticipated change in the reserved pattern occurs, the content of the speech bubble can be changed to set it so that shooting continues.

The short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when a short-term winning occurs (see FIG. 212(a)).

Figure 235 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4. The short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4 obtains speech bubble content for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in Figure 265).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "4", the speech bubble contains the message "Fast!" (see FIG. 212(a)), when the number of reserved balls is "5", the speech bubble contains the message "Very fast!", when the number of reserved balls is "6", the speech bubble contains the message "Super fast!", when the number of reserved balls is "7", the speech bubble contains the message "Speed of sound!", and when the number of reserved balls is "8", the speech bubble contains the message "Fast!".

By configuring it this way, the interval between starting wins is short, and the player can recognize the degree to which the number of reserved balls has increased by a large amount from the speech bubble of the reserved character, enhancing the presentation effect.

The reach performance speech bubble selection table 222k5 is a table used to obtain the speech bubble content when a reach performance is in progress (see FIG. 215(a)).

Figure 235 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reach effect speech bubble selection table 222k5. The reach effect speech bubble selection table 222k5 obtains speech bubble contents (Z2384 in Figure 265) for the value (range) of the reserved effect counter and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the reserved effect counter value is "0", and if the reserved ball count is "0-4", the speech bubble content is "Save up to 6!" (see FIG. 215(a)), if it is "5", the speech bubble content is "One more ball left", if it is "6", the speech bubble content is "OK", if it is "7-8", the speech bubble content is "OVER", if the reserved effect counter 223h value is "other than 0", and if the reserved ball count is "0-4", the speech bubble content is "Save up to 6!" (see FIG. 215(b)), if it is "5", the speech bubble content is "One more ball left", if it is "6", the speech bubble content is "Well done", if it is "7-8", the speech bubble content is "OVER".

By configuring it this way, by changing the speech bubble of the reserved character during the reach performance, it is possible to encourage the player to shoot if the number of reserved balls is low, and by changing the speech bubble during the reach performance while the reserved performance is being executed, it is possible to play without getting bored.

The lucky hold speech bubble selection table 222k6 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when the lucky hold performance is in progress (see FIG. 216(a)).

Figure 236 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the lucky reserved ball bubble selection table 222k6. In the lucky reserved ball bubble selection table 222k6, the bubble contents are obtained (Z2386 in Figure 265) for the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p, which is set as the lucky reserved ball count (see Z2444 in Z268) to a value corresponding to the reserved ball value when a win/loss judgment result of a previous winning result becomes a jackpot, the value (range) of the reserved ball count, and the value (range) of the reserved change value.

Specifically, if the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "5", if the reserved ball count is "0-4" and the reserved change value is "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 5", if the reserved ball count is "5" and the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK", if the reserved change value is "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD", if the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done", and if the reserved ball count is "6-8" and the reserved change value is "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "OVER".

When the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "6", when the reserved ball count is any of "0-5" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 6" (see FIG. 216(a)). When the reserved ball count is "6", and the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK". When the reserved change value is any of "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD". When the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done". When the reserved ball count is any of "7-8" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "OVER".

When the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "7", if the reserved ball count value is any of "0-6" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 7", when the reserved ball count value is "7" and the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK", when the reserved change value is any of "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD", when the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done", and when the reserved ball count value is "8" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "OVER".

When the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "8", if the reserved ball count value is any of "0-7" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 8", when the reserved ball count value is "8" and the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK", when the reserved change value is any of "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD", and when the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done".

In this way, by changing the content of the speech bubble depending on the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy playing by aiming for the number of reserved balls that should win. If the result of the lottery for the number of reserved balls that was thus started to win is a jackpot within the range of 5 to 8 reserved balls, the display mode of the lucky reserved balls can be updated, allowing the player to continue playing without getting bored.

The time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k6 is a table used to obtain the speech bubble content when a special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is normal mode, and the game state is in the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter is other than 0).

Figure 236 (b) is a schematic diagram of the time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k7. The time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k7 obtains speech bubble content (Z2392 in Figure 265) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between "0" and "5", the bubble content will include up to 6 (see FIG. 212(b)), and if the number of reserved balls is between "6" and "7", the bubble content will read "OK".

By configuring it in this way, the optimal number of reserved balls during the time-saving period can be announced, and the player can understand the transition status of the number of reserved balls from the notification mode. If the optimal number of reserved balls can be maintained, it is possible to avoid situations where the fluctuation stops and a waiting state occurs, which is inefficient in terms of time, or the occurrence of an over-winning that occurs when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is exceeded and a winning is started, and it can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing with the balls in hand.

The reach-in-progress performance selection table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach-in-progress hold display performance (see FIG. 215(a)) displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 237 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this reach-in-progress performance selection table 222m. The reach-in-progress performance selection table 222m determines whether or not a reach-in-progress reserved performance can be executed based on the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the performance counter 223h. (See Z2324 in Figure 262) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", if the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 99", the reach-in-progress reserved performance is not displayed, and if it is "100 to 199", the reach-in-progress reserved performance can be displayed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4 to 5", if the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 140", the reach-in-progress reserved performance is not displayed, and if it is "141 to 199", the reach-in-progress reserved performance can be displayed. When the number of reserved balls is between "6" and "8", the pending effect during reach will not be displayed if the value of the effect counter 223h is between "0" and "199". In this way, by setting the rate at which the pending effect during reach is displayed high when the number of reserved balls is low, an effect is executed that encourages the player to save reserved balls when there are few balls reserved.

The reach start time calculation table 222n is a data table for determining the start time (start period) at which the pending effect during reach starts in the time (period) during the reach display mode in the variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the reach display mode to be executed (display mode in which the patterns in the left and right pattern rows are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same third pattern). The reach start time calculation table 222n selects a pending effect start timer based on the possibility of execution of the pending effect during reach (see FIG. 215(a)) obtained by the reach effect selection table 222m and the variation type.

Figure 237 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n sets the pending effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the pending effect during reach obtained by the reach effect selection table 222m can be executed (see Z2326 in Figure 262).

Specifically, if the fluctuation type is normal reach jackpot A, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot A, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot B, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot C, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 12,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot D, If the fluctuation type is a super reach big win E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is a normal reach miss A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is a normal reach miss B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is a normal reach miss C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms.

The lucky reserve selection table 222p obtains whether or not a lucky reserve effect (see FIG. 216(a)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 237(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this lucky reserve selection table 222p. The lucky reserve selection table 222p obtains whether or not a lucky reserve effect can be executed for the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 261).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 2", if the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the lucky reserved effect is not executed, and if it is "100 to 199", the lucky reserved effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4", if the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 189", the lucky reserved effect is not executed, and if it is "190 to 199", the lucky reserved effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5 to 8", if the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the lucky reserved effect is not executed. In this way, by setting the rate at which the lucky reserved effect is executed high when the number of reserved balls is low, an effect is executed that encourages the player to save reserved balls when there are few reserved balls.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 226(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a winning information storage area 223f, a reserved notice counter 223g, a performance counter 223h, a background mode memory area 223i, a SW effective time counter 223k, a reserved performance mode memory area 223m, a special performance status memory area 223n, a lucky reserved memory value 223p, a short-term winning timer 223q, a reserved performance start timer 223r, a sensor effective time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a display of the first special pattern change performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the first special pattern change performance reserved in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times for each type of special pattern, and is updated according to the timing of the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, such as when a winning information command or a change pattern command is received.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, is a display of the second special pattern changes performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of wait times) for the second special pattern change performance reserved in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times for each type of special pattern, and is updated according to the timing of the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, such as when a winning information command or a change pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern using the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the main control unit 110 detects a start winning and adds to the number of reserved balls in the variable display, or when the main control unit 110 executes a variable display for a special pattern and subtracts the number of reserved balls, it sends a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 259). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the values can be updated in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b changes its value in synchronization with the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or a second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 260), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 269). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command for a special symbol is received from the main control unit 110 (see Z2204 in FIG. 2590), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Z2506 in FIG. 269). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects an initial winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the main control device 110 predicts (estimates) various information (whether or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for the special symbol corresponding to the initial winning is performed from the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained in response to the initial winning, and the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the predicted various information by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, various information notified by the winning information command (win or lose, type of jackpot in case of jackpot, and variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the type of ball entry port where the ball was detected (first ball entry port 64 or second ball entry port 640), starting from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winning events is stored, and the first area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is configured to set a winning information command based on various information (win or lose, type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery is held for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning, and notify the audio lamp control device 113, but other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning occurs, a setting means may be provided that sets a winning information command by adding various information already stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the various information predicted in response to the start winning, and a determination means may be provided that, when a winning information command is received, determines whether the various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f matches the various information (winning information) included in the received winning information command. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f has been stored appropriately.

In addition, in this first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning occurs, but the timing of notifying the winning information command to the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (the timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command may be provided, and in addition to the timing of the start winning, the winning information command stored in the storage means may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 periodically (for example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions change (for example, when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special pattern starts (or stops) changing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute a performance (so-called pre-reading performance) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, the setting of the presentation mode, such as changing the display color of the reserved symbols, is executed as a look-ahead presentation based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f. In this way, by executing various presentations (look-ahead presentations) based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can have a sense of anticipation that each reserved ball will be a jackpot even before the variable display begins. It is also possible to execute a long-term presentation using multiple variable display periods.

The reserved ball number value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 266) when the reserved ball number value acquired from the change type of the received special pattern winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No) and the reserved pattern has changed (see FIG. 211(a)) in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when a change in the reserved color of the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, even if the number of reserved balls changes (the display position of the reserved pattern whose reserved color has changed as the reserved balls are consumed also changes). The reserved ball number value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 266) when the reserved ball number value acquired from the change type of the received special pattern winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No) and the reserved pattern has changed (see FIG. 211(a)). For example, as shown in FIG. 211(a), if the reserved ball number value at the time of the start winning is 4, the reserved ball number value is set to 4 in the reserved ball number value. The set hold notification counter 223g is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern starts to change during the change pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) that is executed when the change starts, and if the decremented value is 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold display mode memory area is cleared (Z2226), setting the above-mentioned hold display mode to normal mode.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used to select various effects. Each time the main process is executed, it is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 198. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include the reserved character change selection table 222b, the reserved character selection table 222i (reserved character), the reserved character change table 222j (reserved character), the in-reach effect selection table 222m (whether or not a reserved effect can be executed during a reach), and the lucky reserved selection table 222p (whether or not a lucky reserved effect can be executed), and various effects are selected depending on the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

In addition, when making these selections, in order to avoid synchronization between the update cycles of the performance counter 223h and other counters and timer values, the update range is set to a prime number (199), so that the selection results are not biased towards a few selection results.

The background mode memory area 223i is a memory area in which the numerical values required to determine the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring/performance process (Z2107), it is determined whether the demo screen is displayed in a standby state (Z2801), and if it is determined that the standby state is present (Z2801: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), the contents of the background mode memory area 223i are set by adding 1 (Z2804), and a display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804), and when the display switching command is sent to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. For the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, such as background A being the sea, background B being the mountains, background C being the river, and background D being the city.

The SW valid time counter 223k is a counter for counting the valid time (valid period) during which operation is possible in a performance involving pressing the frame button 22, which is performed during the fluctuation of a special pattern, etc. In the frame button input monitoring/performance process (Z2107), if the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) and a fluctuation pattern involving pressing the frame button 22 is set (Z2803: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. If the set SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802); if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), if the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), and if a preview performance is in progress (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (set to 0), a preview display command for display is set (Z2811), and the specified performance is executed.

The reserved performance mode memory area 223m stores information for distinguishing between multiple reserved notice modes prepared according to reserved changes when performing a notice performance related to the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when a special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, if the pending notification counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the pending presentation mode memory area 223m sets (Z2404) the pending presentation mode according to the value (range) of the pending change value acquired for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the pending change value is "0", the pending presentation mode is set to normal mode, if the pending change value is "1-2", the notification A mode is set, and if the pending change value is "3", the notification B mode is set.

The contents of the pending presentation mode memory area 223m are such that, when the value of the pending notice counter 223g, which is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern starts to change, becomes 0 (Z2225: YES) during the change pattern receiving process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed when the special pattern starts to change, the pending presentation mode memory area 223m changes the pending presentation mode to normal mode by setting the pending change value to 0 and clearing the pending presentation mode memory area 223m (Z2226).

The special effect status memory area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect executed when the reserved effect mode is normal mode. As described above, there are short-term winning effects (see FIG. 212(a)), reserved effects during reach (see FIG. 215(a)), and lucky reserved effects (see FIG. 216(a)). Special effects are executed according to changes in the special effect status memory area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of reserved effect being executed.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed upon receiving a winning command, if the game state is normal (Z2421: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the value of the short-term winning timer, which counts the time (5 seconds) that has elapsed since the number of reserved balls of the special pattern was 0, is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), then 1 is set in the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect begins execution. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, if the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes) in the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606) and the short-term winning effect ends.

In the pending effect during reach setting process (Z2228) executed in the change pattern receiving process (Z2202) executed when the special symbol starts to change, if the type of change of the special symbol is a reach change (Z2321: Yes), the pending effect mode is in normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), it is determined that the effect can be executed by the pending effect selection table 222m. If this is the case (Z2325: Yes), the pending performance start timer 223r is set (Z2326) based on the variation type, and the special performance status memory area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). Then, over time, in the pending performance management process during reach (Z2112), if the pending performance start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), a notice display command for performing the pending performance during reach is set (Z2706), and the pending performance during reach begins to be executed. When the pending performance during reach is being executed, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol ends (Z2707: Yes), the special performance status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708), and the pending performance during reach ends.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227), if the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), the game is in normal mode (Z2302: Yes), the lucky hold memory value is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p is approved (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect begins to be executed. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, if the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next change after the effect has started, the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

The lucky reserved memory value 223p is a memory area in which the value of the reserved ball number at the time of winning corresponding to the reserved ball determined to be a jackpot is stored when the result of the winning information command output at the timing of the start winning is determined to be a jackpot (pre-reading determination). In the lucky reserved memory process (Z2408) executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) executed at the time of the start winning, if the lottery result of the winning is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes), and the value of the reserved ball number is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the lucky reserved memory value 223p is set to the reserved ball number value (Z2444). Also, as described above, when the reserved performance mode becomes the lucky reserved performance, the display reserved lid command is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 261) based on the lucky reserved memory value 223p, and the lucky reserved performance is displayed (see FIG. 216(a)).

The short-term winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern becomes 0 from 1 or more to when the number becomes 4 or more. When the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds as the timer value, and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), the short-term winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602) until it becomes 0. As described above, when the reserved presentation mode becomes the short-term winning presentation (see FIG. 212(a)), the short-term winning presentation is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0. In this way, by performing the short-term winning presentation with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, the shorter (faster) the period until 4 balls are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning presentation becomes, and the player can recognize how fast it took to win 4 balls.

The short-term winning effect may be configured to run for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after four balls have been won. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to recognize that four balls have been won within five seconds.

The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing to execute the hold effect during reach (see FIG. 215(a)), which is an effect related to the hold pattern, during the reach fluctuation of the special pattern.

In the pending effect start timer 223r, when the type of special pattern change is a reach change (Z2321: Yes) in the pending effect setting process during reach (Z2228) executed in the change pattern receiving process (Z2202) executed when the special pattern change starts, if the pending effect mode is normal mode (Z2322: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), and the possibility of executing the effect obtained from the pending effect selection table 222m is yes (Z2325: Yes), the timer value is set (Z2326) by the reach start time calculation table 222n.

When a timer value is set in the pending performance start timer 223r, if the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: Yes) and the pending performance start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted until the pending performance in reach is started in the pending performance management process (Z2112). Also, as described above, if the timer value after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special performance is being performed, and the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command for performing the pending performance in reach is set (Z2706), and the pending performance in reach starts to be executed.

The sensor effective time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. In the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107), if the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) and a preview performance display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time counter 223s sets the sensor effective time set for the preview performance to the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0, it is subtracted (Z2824), and during that time the touch sensor detection becomes valid. In addition, if the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and if the value of the touch counter 223t incremented by 1 (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2809).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the touch sensor 290 detection is on during the period in which the touch sensor 290 detection is valid. If the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) during the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107), and if the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the touch counter 223t is incremented by 1 (Z2826), and is reset (Z2829) if the incremented value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes).

The other memory area 223z is an area where various data, flags, counters, etc. are set or stored in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 259) of the voice lamp control unit 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable presentation) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 238.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As such, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts at a time. In addition, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) that is executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) by the boot program is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 242) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (starting address of the source storage) and the end address (last address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the last address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see FIG. 274).

The power-on variable image will now be described. Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 239) on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variation, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position facing the screen and a power-on variation image with a "X" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern, during the variation period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "special pattern jackpot", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops, and if it is a "special pattern miss", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is constantly resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to display images showing "○" and "×" alternately on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 238, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 209) numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which a variable presentation is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 even though a variable presentation has already started on the first pattern display device 37 after a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so when a normal jackpot occurs and the electric device is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced even when playing, so the player can have a sense of anticipation that a jackpot with a special pattern will be obtained when the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and allows the player to continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols numbered "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 240, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 240 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed during that time, corresponding to an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for identifying the type of rear image.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time presentation) should be displayed based on the background type, the MPU 231 determines the background image corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time.

In this embodiment, the case where only the rear view type is specified as the drawing content of the rear view image in the display data table will be described. Alternatively, the rear view type and position information indicating which range of the rear view image corresponding to that rear view type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear view image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 240) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 242) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the image to be drawn. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing programs that become more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, which may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so that a variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of the sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 241 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 241).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 241) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 243) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 243, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should be started, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 239. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see Z3005 in FIG. 274). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see Z4705 in FIG. 285(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 276(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276(b)) and a simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see Z4601 in FIG. 285(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 242) that describes the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 242) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 242) described below that specifies the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, if the drawing list received from the MPU 231 contains transfer data information, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see Z3303 in FIG. 283) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 284(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 242) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, referring to FIG. 242, the details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 242, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. When the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area in character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) in image storage area 236a in normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing and display processing of one frame of image is completed, each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see Z4307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage state, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

When the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 286). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see Z4810 in FIG. 286) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding control processing of main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 243 to 256. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 243 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading the various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (299, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (Z104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display device 37 and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, and then a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 (Z105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 244 to 256.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed (Z107). Details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 251 and 252. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 244, the special pattern change processing (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change processing (Z104). This special pattern change processing (Z104) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and is processing for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the jackpot in progress flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that a jackpot is in progress. The period during which a special symbol jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during play in which a special symbol jackpot is in progress) and the period during which a specified time has elapsed since play in which a special symbol jackpot has ended. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times N1 for the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) are obtained (Z203). After obtaining the values of each counter, a variable execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variable execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245, but in this variable execution determination process (Z204), a process is executed to determine the special symbol that will be the next to change.

Next, it is determined whether the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (Z204) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern) (Z205), and if the change is to be performed with special pattern 1 (first special pattern), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of Z207, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a for special symbol 1 is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the reserved ball storage area 203a for special symbol 1 is shifted to the execution area side in sequence. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from reserved area 1 to execution area, from reserved area 2 to reserved area 1, from reserved area 3 to reserved area 2, and from reserved area 4 to reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the special symbol 1 change start process is executed to start the change display on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 246. In the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), a process such as selection of a change pattern (change period) required to start the change of the first special symbol is executed.

In the process of Z205, if it is determined that the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (Z204) is not a change execution on special pattern 1 (Z205: No), it is determined whether or not a change execution on special pattern 2 (second special pattern) is to be performed (Z210). If the change execution is not a change execution on special pattern 2 (Z210: No), that is, since there are no reserved balls stored for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern, this process ends. On the other hand, if the change execution is a change execution on special pattern 2 (Z210: Yes), the same process as the process for the reserved balls of special pattern 1 described above is performed for the reserved balls of special pattern 2.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Z211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (Z212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing Z212, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In processing Z213, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from reserved area 1 to execution area, from reserved area 2 to reserved area 1, from reserved area 3 to reserved area 2, and from reserved area 4 to reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the special pattern 2 change start process is executed to start the change display on the first pattern display device (Z214). The special pattern 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (Z215). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (Z216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the change time of the executing change display has elapsed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopping pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stopping pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern 1 change start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 246 or the special pattern 2 change start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. 247. When this special pattern change start process is executed, a lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, whether or not there is a jackpot for a special pattern is determined according to the value of the special jackpot random number counter C1, and if there is a jackpot for the first special pattern, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 determines whether it will be a jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C, and if there is a jackpot for the second special pattern, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 determines whether it will be a jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, and if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If a jackpot C occurs, the red and blue LEDs are turned on. Also, if a miss occurs, the red and green LEDs are turned on. The LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of Z217 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a jackpot for the special symbol (Z218). If the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (Z218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (Z219), the probability variable flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot flag 203n is set to on (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. In other words, during a jackpot game, a low probability game state is set, and the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also released and a non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z218, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special pattern (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is decremented by 1 (Z223), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the processing of Z223 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 245, the change execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the change execution determination process (Z204). This change execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process for determining whether the presentation pattern (change presentation pattern) of the change presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 is to be executed based on the values of various counters stored in either the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the change execution determination process, first, the change execution flag 203k is set to off (value "0") to perform initialization (Z241), and the data in the change order storage area 203p stored in RAM 203 is obtained (Z242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (Z244: Yes), the change execution flag 203k is set to change execution in special chart 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not a change execution in special chart 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is a change execution in special chart 2 (Z246), and if it is a change execution in special chart 2 (Z246: Yes), the change execution flag 203k is set to change execution in special chart 2 (Z247), and this process is terminated. Note that, if it is determined in the process of Z246 that the data in the execution area is not a change execution in special chart 2 (Z246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 246, the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a lottery result is a hit with a special symbol) or a miss with a special symbol based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), first, the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are obtained (Z251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the high probability period (high probability game state) (Z252). The determination of whether or not it is in the high probability period is made by determining whether the high probability flag 203m is on. This high probability flag 203m is set on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the game is in a special chance mode (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special chance mode, and the process proceeds to Z253. In the process of Z253, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the game is a special chance mode is obtained based on the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special chance mode random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)). Specifically, the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random number values stored in the special chance mode random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers from "0 to 26" are set as the random number values that result in a special chance mode game (special game mode), and if the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a win, it is determined that the game is a special chance mode game. After the result of the lottery for the special chance mode is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

On the other hand, if the process of Z252 determines that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state with the special symbol (Z252: No), the process of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Three random number values, "0 to 2," are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot with the special symbol in the normal game state (low probability game state), and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After the lottery result for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

In the process of Z255, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special pattern obtained by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special pattern jackpot (i.e., whether the value of the acquired special jackpot random number counter C1 matches the judgment value set in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a) (Z255), and if it is determined to be a special pattern jackpot (Z255: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z251 (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special jackpot type selection table 202d1, and it is determined which jackpot type is among the four types of special pattern jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times time reduction), if it is in the range of "40 to 75", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R odd number jackpot with certainty change), if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R even number jackpot with certainty change), and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (see Figure 222 (b)).

In the processing of Z256, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of pattern variation is specified in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the type of big win determined this time is big win A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", the variation pattern is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250", the variation pattern is super reach.

In terms of the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third pattern that notifies the win/lose judgment result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content of the variation display mode (variation pattern) to actually be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the win/lose judgment result. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a miss reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

For example, the fluctuation patterns for misses include "Miss (long time)", "Miss (short time)", various "Miss normal reaches", various "Miss super reaches", and various "Miss special reaches". The fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C include various "normal reaches" and various "super reaches".

On the other hand, if the process of Z255 determines that the special symbol is a miss (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of miss is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the missing symbol, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a miss is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at a miss pattern on the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the processing of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

When processing Z257 or Z259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set (Z260) to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in processing Z257 or Z259. Next, a stop type command is set (Z261) to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in processing Z275 or Z259. When processing Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special pattern variation process (Z104).

Next, referring to FIG. 247, the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) is a process executed within the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this special pattern 2 variation start process (Z214), similarly to the special pattern 1 variation start process (Z209), first the values of the special win random number counter C1 and the special win type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b obtained by the process of Z271 are obtained (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a high probability period (high probability game state) (Z272). If it is determined that it is in a high probability period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability period for the special symbol, so the process proceeds to Z273. In the process of Z273, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers from "0 to 26" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values for the jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After the result of the lottery for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z272 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a sure chance state (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Three random number values, "0 to 2," are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the result of the lottery for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the process of Z275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special jackpot type selection table 202d2, and it is determined which jackpot type is among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times time reduction), if it is in the range of "40 to 87", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R odd number jackpot with certainty change), if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R even number jackpot with certainty change), and if it is in the range of "92 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (see Figure 222 (c)).

In the processing of Z276, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of pattern variation is specified in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the type of big win determined this time is big win A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", the variation pattern is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250", the variation pattern is super reach.

In terms of the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third pattern that notifies the win/lose judgment result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content of the variation display mode (variation pattern) to actually be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the win/lose judgment result. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a miss reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

For example, the fluctuation patterns for misses include "Miss (long time)", "Miss (short time)", various "Miss normal reaches", various "Miss super reaches", and various "Miss special reaches". The fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C include various "normal reaches" and various "super reaches".

If it is determined in the process of Z275 that the special pattern is a miss (Z275: No), the display mode in the case of a miss is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the missing pattern, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Next, the variation pattern in the event of a miss is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at a miss pattern on the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the processing of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

When processing Z277 or Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set (Z280) to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in processing Z277 or Z279. Next, a stop type command is set (Z281) to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in processing Z277 or Z279. When processing Z281 is completed, the process returns to special pattern variation processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 248, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and determines whether or not there has been a win in the first ball entry port 64 (start winning). If there has been a start winning, it is a process for reserving the values indicated by the various random number counters, and for pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been reserved.

When the start winning process (Z105: see FIG. 248) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) (Z301). Here, the ball entry into the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved times N1 of the variable display in the special pattern) is obtained (Z302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, if there is no winning through the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: No), or if there is a winning through the first ball entrance 64 but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is not less than 4 (Z303: No), an over winning information command is set (Z304) and processing proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a winning through the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, a reserved ball count command for the first special pattern is set (Z306), which indicates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d changed by the calculation.

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of Z306, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated by Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 (Z307). Note that in the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, reserved area 4 is set as the first area. Next, special symbol 1 is set at the bottom of the variable order storage area 203p (Z308), and the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. The look-ahead process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 249.

Next, for Z309 to Z316, the processing for Z301 to Z320 described above is the same as that for winning the first ball entrance 64, except that the processing for winning the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 is changed to the processing for winning the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, and the detailed explanation is omitted. In addition, when a game ball wins the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special win random number counter C1 and the special win type counter C2 are obtained and stored in the corresponding empty reserved area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by obtaining the same values for the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type selection counter CS1 for the second special pattern based on a ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 as for the first special pattern, a lottery can be performed using a common random number for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, making it possible to keep the winning probability constant for both the first and second special patterns.

After executing the process of Z308 or the process of Z316, the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. Details of the look-ahead process (Z320) are explained in detail with reference to FIG. 249 as described above, but the process executes a process to determine in advance the results of each lottery to be executed at the start of the fluctuation based on the values of various counters obtained for balls entering the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640.

In this embodiment, the counter values are selected based on the ball scoring, but they may be selected when the fluctuation starts. This configuration eliminates the need for storage space to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, reducing the use of storage space in RAM 203. Also, some of the counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be acquired when the fluctuation starts. This configuration allows the counters related to the hit/miss judgment to be acquired when the ball scores, and the counters not related to the hit/miss judgment to be acquired later, reducing the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 249, we will explain the look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process within the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (Z320).

In the pre-reading process (Z320), first, a hit/miss judgment is made at the start of the fluctuation based on the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 (Z351). In this hit/miss judgment, the same processing as the Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246) and the Z275 processing in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247) is executed. Note that this hit/miss judgment corresponds to a pre-hit/miss judgment (pre-judgment) executed before the hit/miss judgment (judgment) at the start of the fluctuation (the Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246) and the Z275 processing in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247)). Next, it is judged whether the judgment result executed in the Z351 processing is a hit (also called a specific judgment result) (Z352). If the judgment result is a win (Z352: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type is obtained (judged) from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 (Z353). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, a win winning information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning/losing judgment result is determined to be a miss in the process of Z352 (Z352: No), the fluctuation pattern type is obtained from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 (Z355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, a miss winning information command is set from the winning command table 202e (Z356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the advance win/loss judgment before the fluctuation starts is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a reserved ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the win/loss judgment result and the type of win in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a preview performance that notifies the player of the win/loss judgment result for the reserved ball in advance based on the winning command (for example, changing the color of the reserved pattern to a color that notifies the win/loss judgment result, outputting an alarm sound to notify the win/loss judgment result for the reserved ball, etc.). In addition, since one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 250, the normal pattern change processing (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing this normal pattern change processing (Z106). This normal pattern change processing (Z106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and is processing for controlling the change display of the second pattern performed by the second pattern display device 83, the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (Z401). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (Z401: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (Z401: No), it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (Z402), and if the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (Z402: No), the long-time release flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved times M of the variable display of the normal pattern) is obtained (Z404). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in sequence to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (Z408).

Next, the normal symbol variation start process is executed (Z409), and this process is terminated. Note that the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 251, but a win/loss judgment of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed, and based on the win/loss judgment result, the normal symbol variation period (variation time or dynamic display time) is determined. If the win/loss judgment result is a win, a process is executed to set the opening operation of the electric role 640a (operation pattern of the normal symbol win game) corresponding to the type of win.

In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (Z410). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of Z437 or Z438 in FIG. 251 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the change time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (Z411). In the processing of Z411, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z427 or Z431 in FIG. 251, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loser and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. 251, the "X" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. When the stop display is set by the processing of Z411, when the second pattern display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (illuminated) in the display mode set in the processing of Z427, Z431, or Z435 in FIG. 251 on the second pattern display device 83. Note that in this control example, the "○" pattern is configured to be lit even in the case of a long-time win or a normal win, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be lit to display a pattern according to the type of win of the normal pattern (for example, "◎" for a long-time win, "○" for a normal win).

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable processing (the current lottery result) is a normal symbol winning (Z412). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol winning (Z412: Yes), the opening and closing control start of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this processing is terminated. When the opening and closing control start of the electric role 640a is set by the processing of Z412, when the electric role opening and closing processing (see Z1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) is next executed, the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set by the processing of Z430 or Z434 in FIG. 251 are completed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: see FIG. 251) described later, the opening operation data of the electric role 640a corresponding to the winning type of the normal symbol is set, so in Z413, the opening and closing control corresponding to the winning type of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the lottery result this time is a loss of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal pattern change start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this normal pattern change start process (Z408). This normal pattern change start process (Z408) is a process for executing settings for the start of normal pattern change, which is executed in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 251) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243).

It is determined whether or not a special pattern jackpot is currently in progress (Z421). The period during which a special pattern jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special pattern jackpot (including during play of a special pattern jackpot), and the period during a specified time after play of a special pattern jackpot ends. If the result of the determination is that a special pattern jackpot is in progress (Z421: Yes), processing moves to Z424. In processing Z421, if a special pattern jackpot is not in progress (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not a special pattern jackpot is in progress or a time-saving mode is in progress (Z422). If the special pattern jackpot is not in progress or a time-saving mode is in progress (Z422: No), processing moves to Z424.

If the game is in a special bonus or time-saving mode (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special bonus mode and is in a time-saving mode for normal symbols, so the game obtains the result of the lottery as to whether the normal symbol is a win or not (Z423) based on the value of the normal bonus random number counter C4 obtained in the process of Z407 in FIG. 250 and the normal bonus random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)). Specifically, the game compares the value of the normal bonus random number counter C4 with the random number value stored in the normal bonus random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)). As described above, if the value of the second bonus type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see FIG. 221(c)).

In the process of Z424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is obtained based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 obtained in the process of Z407 in FIG. 250 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 221(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined to be a normal hit with a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", it is determined to be a miss with a normal symbol (see FIG. 221(c)).

In this embodiment, during a jackpot of a special symbol, the lottery for a normal symbol is less likely to be a winning one. This is because during a jackpot of a special symbol (i.e., during a special game state), the player hits the ball to make it enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened to prevent the ball intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible. Note that since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second ball entrance 640, even if balls are prevented from entering the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot of a special symbol, many balls enter the second ball entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal pattern obtained by processing Z423 or Z424 is a normal pattern winning (Z425), and if it is determined that it is a normal pattern winning (Z425: Yes), it is determined whether the type of winning of the normal pattern is a long-term winning (Z426). The winning type of this normal pattern is determined by comparing the value of the normal winning type counter obtained when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with a preset judgment value. In this control example, the value of the normal winning type counter is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 at a timing synchronized with the other special winning type counter C2, and if the value of the obtained normal winning type counter is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-term winning, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal winning.

When the type of normal symbol hit is determined to be a long-time hit (Z426: Yes), the display mode for a long-time hit is set (Z427). In the process of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as the stopped symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the process proceeds to Z430.

When the process of Z426 determines that the type of winning of the normal pattern is a normal winning (Z426: No), the display mode for the normal winning is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is in a special winning mode or a time-saving mode (Z432). If it is in a special winning mode or a time-saving mode (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current winning mode is a special winning mode (Z433). If the result of the determination is that the winning mode is a special winning mode (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434. In this embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible during a winning mode of a special pattern, the number of times and the opening time of the electric device 640a are set in the same way as when the winning mode is a normal winning mode, even if the winning mode is a normal winning mode (Z426: No).

In the process of Z433, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 2 (Z430), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z430, the opening number counter 203g is set to 2, and the opening time counter 203h is set to a value equivalent to 2 seconds.

In the process of Z432, if the machine is not in a special bonus or time-saving mode (Z432: No), the process proceeds to Z434. In the process of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z434, the opening count counter 203g is set to 1, and the opening time counter 203h is set to a value equivalent to 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, if the process of Z425 determines that the normal pattern is a miss (Z425: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (Z435). In this process of Z435, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to Z436.

In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special probability mode (Z436). If the game is in a special probability mode (Z436: Yes), the time for the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 to fluctuate is set to 3 seconds (Z437), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game is not in a special probability mode (Z436: No), the time for the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 to fluctuate is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during a jackpot of a special symbol, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the time for the variable display is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the probability of a normal symbol is low, and the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and number of times of opening for a long-time hit are the same as when a normal pattern is hit in a special state or a time-saving state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be set to a different opening time and number of times.

Next, referring to FIG. 252, the through gate passing process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (Z107). This through gate passing process (Z107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring and reserving the value indicated by the normal win random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved normal pattern variable display times M) is obtained (Z502). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 but the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (Z503: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is incremented by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of RAM 203 (Z505), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the process of Z505, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area will be the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area.

Figure 253 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information about the power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information about the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 254, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 208) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), processing proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No), there is a possibility that processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, processing proceeds to Z913.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (Z906). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, processing also proceeds to Z913. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of Z1014 in FIG. 255, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working area) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (Z914, Z915).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (Z915). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), power outage information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z907: Yes), a status command is sent based on the long-release flag 203i (Z908). Next, the power outage information is cleared (Z909) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent (Z910) to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of the drive power cutoff, and processing proceeds to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, an interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 255, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of Z1010 and Z1011 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls obtained is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 244) or the start winning process (see FIG. 248) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning command set in the start winning process or the look-ahead process (see FIG. 249) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output process transmits the change pattern command, stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the third pattern change to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, if a special symbol jackpot state is reached, a jackpot control process is executed to execute the jackpot presentation and to open or close the specific winning port (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (Z1004). Details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 256.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed (Z1005) to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640. In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is set by the processing of Z412 in the normal pattern variation process (see FIG. 250), the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is started.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device 37 (Z1006). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the Z257 process or Z259 process of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 246), or the Z277 process or Z279 process of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 247), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display device 37. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process (Z1006), when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the Z257 process or Z259 process of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 246), or the Z277 process or Z279 process of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 247), ends, the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by the Z256 process or Z258 process of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 246), or the Z276 process or Z278 process of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 247).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (Z1007). In the second pattern display update process (Z1007), when the second pattern change time is set by the process of Z437 or Z438 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 251), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process, when the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 250), the change display executed in the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of Z427 or Z431 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 251).

After that, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (Z1008), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of this main process (Z1009), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (Z1009: Yes), the process proceeds to Z1001, and each process from Z1001 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (Z1009: No), the update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (Z1010, Z1011) until the specified time has elapsed, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing.

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, the execution time of each process Z1001 to Z1007 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the special win random number counter C1, and the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4), and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the processing of Z1008 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 253 is executed, so the processing at the time of power interruption from Z1012 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (Z1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (Z1014), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of Z1008 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of Z1001 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of Z1001, just as in the case where initialization is performed in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (Z901), so that the processing of Z1001 can be started. Therefore, the control burden of the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed within the main process (FIG. 255), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 256), it is first determined whether a special pattern jackpot will start (Z1101). The process of Z219 of the special pattern variation process (FIG. 244) is executed to set the start of a special pattern jackpot, and if a special pattern jackpot will start (Z1101: Yes), an opening command is set (Z1115) and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it sends a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, an opening performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if a special pattern jackpot has not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether or not a special pattern jackpot is in progress (Z1102). The period during which a special pattern jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special pattern jackpot (including during play of a special pattern jackpot), and during a predetermined time after play of a special pattern jackpot has ended. In the process of Z1102, if a special pattern jackpot is not in progress (Z1102: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if a special symbol is in the jackpot (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (Z1103). If it is time to start a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is opened (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1105). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number to the display control device 114. When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1103, if it is not the timing to start a new round (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been met (Z1106). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition has been met if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, or if a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) have won after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened.

If the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are met in the process of Z1106 (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are not met (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending presentation (Z1108). Specifically, it is determined that it is time to start the ending presentation when a special game state (all 16 rounds or 2 rounds) in which a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual has ended.

In the process of Z1108, if it is the timing to start the ending performance (Z1108: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1109) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it selects the display mode of the ending performance based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of RAM 223. Then, it transmits a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending performance to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if it is not the timing to start the ending (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110). The timing to end the jackpot is the timing when a predetermined ending period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z1110 that it is the timing for the jackpot to end (Z1110: Yes), in the process of Z1111, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot is jackpot A (Z1111). If the type of the current jackpot is jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot this time is not jackpot A (Z1111: No), the special jackpot flag 203m is set to ON (Z1113), and then the jackpot in progress flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process ends.

<Control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, referring to Fig. 257 to Fig. 273, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 257, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of Z2118 (see FIG. 258) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 258, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 258), it executes the power-off processing of Z2118. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of Z2118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (Z2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off processing of Z2118 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (Z2003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process moves to Z2004 and starts initializing RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process moves to processing of Z2008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003: Yes) and the process moves to Z2004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage has occurred and the execution of the power cut process of Z2118 has been completed, or if the process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No) and the process moves to Z2208.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the current startup process occurred after a momentary power outage and was started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of Z1318 was in progress. In this case, the power-off processing is in progress, so the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process transitions to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the Z2004 process, the entire storage area of RAM223 is checked (Z2004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM223 clears all storage areas of RAM223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of RAM 223 (Z2005: No), the abnormality in RAM 223 is notified (Z2007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of Z2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 258). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed, so the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (Z2009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z2010), interrupt permission is set (Z2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off, the process reaches Z2008 because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process reaches Z2008 via Z2004 to Z2006, or because noise or the like has reset only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process moves to Z2010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (Z2010), interrupt permission is set (Z2011), and the process moves to the main process. After that, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (Z2012). This status command is a command that indicates whether a long-term win of a normal pattern is occurring based on the long-term release flag 203i in the processing of Z908 in the start-up processing (see FIG. 254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the processing of Z2012 that a status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-term release flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this processing is terminated (Z2013). Here, if the received status command indicates a long-term win, the long-term release flag 203i is set to ON, and if it indicates that a long-term win is not occurring, the long-term release flag 203i is set to OFF.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not a long-term normal win is occurring, allowing the voice and lamp control unit 113 to also determine that state.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of Z2009 is that when processing Z2008 is reached via processing Z2004 to Z2006, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by processing Z2004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 258, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of Z2101 was executed (Z2101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (Z2101: No), the processing of Z2102 to Z2112 is not executed and the processing proceeds to Z2113. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 is that Z2102 to Z2112 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command judgment processing of Z2113, the variable display setting processing of Z2114, and the processing of updating various counter values not shown in the figure in a short cycle. By executing the Z2111 process at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the Z2112 process at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are sent to the display control device 114 (Z2102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to Z2105.

In the process of Z2105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third pattern display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process is executed (Z2107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the presentation effect, and sets up a corresponding presentation when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. Details of this frame button input monitoring and presentation process (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 272.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing Z2109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (Z2110), and processing proceeds to Z2111. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

When the processing of Z2110 is completed, the short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The details of this short-term winning management processing (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270, but the processing is executed to measure the period during which a predetermined number of reserved balls are generated, and if it is within the predetermined period, a specific effect (preview effect) is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the reach pending effect management process (Z2112) is executed. The reach pending effect management process (Z2112) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 271, but during the period when the variable state of the third pattern (special pattern) is the reach display state, a process is executed to set a specific effect (notice effect) that notifies the player to play in a way that accumulates a predetermined number of reserved balls.

When the processing of Z2112 is completed, a command determination process is executed (Z2113). Details of this command determination process (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259. After the command determination process (Z2113) is executed, a variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power outage processing is executed (Z2118). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (Z2119), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (Z2116: No), the process returns to the process of Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall staff member or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 259, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command memory area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process is terminated. Details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command is not received in the process of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received (Z2203). If a stop type command has been received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2203, if a stop type command is not received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received (Z2206). If a reserved ball number command has been received (Z2206: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved ball number counter (Z2207). This process then ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special pattern is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command is not received in the process of Z2206 (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not a winning command for a special symbol is received (Z2208). If a winning command for a special symbol is received (Z2208: Yes), the winning command reception process is started (Z2209) and this process is terminated. Details of the winning command reception process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266, but based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, a pre-determination is performed to determine the winning/losing judgment result and the variation type of the reserved special symbol, and a setting process is performed to execute each reserved performance that has been determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result. On the other hand, if the winning command for a special symbol is not received in the process of Z2208 (Z2208: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261) and this process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 260, we will explain the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one process within the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259). FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), detailed special symbol variation patterns (presentation modes), preview display modes, hold preview display modes, etc. are set based on the received variation pattern command.

In the fluctuation pattern receiving process (Z2202: FIG. 260), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, the display preview command is set to the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the pending preview counter 223g in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display preview command is a command to instruct the display of various preview effects (for example, a comment preview or a mini character preview that suggests the result of the win/loss judgment) determined based on the fluctuation pattern.

After the processing of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 0 or not (Z2225). If it is determined that the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the reserved change value is set to 0 and the reserved performance mode memory area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the processing of Z2226 is skipped and the processing of Z2227 is started. Next, the lucky display determination processing (Z2227) is executed. By configuring in this way, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), even if a performance is performed in which the color of the reserved ball is changed based on the result of the pre-reading determination, the display position is changed according to the consumption of the reserved ball according to the value of the reserved notice counter 223g, and after the change of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose color has been changed starts, the change stops and the display is not displayed, and the reserved change value can be set to the initial value of 0. Therefore, even if the color of the reserved balls changes, the player can be correctly notified of the order in which the display of the reserved balls will begin to change.

Now, referring to FIG. 261, we will explain the lucky display determination process (Z2227) executed within the variable pattern receiving process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). This lucky display determination process (Z2227) executes a process of determining the number of reserved balls at the time of a past jackpot win, and setting and displaying a mark pattern (reserved effect) in the display area corresponding to that number of reserved balls.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 261), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 or not (Z2301). In other words, it is determined whether the normal state is present and no special pending effects are being executed. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the normal mode is being executed (Z2302). If the normal mode is not being executed (Z2302: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of Z2302 that the normal mode is being executed (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the lucky pending memory value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 or not (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky pending memory value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process is terminated. Here, if the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 0, this indicates that the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the special pattern determined to be a jackpot has not been stored.

When it is determined that the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), the possibility of an effect is obtained based on the lucky reserve selection table 222p (see FIG. 237(c)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2304). Here, the lucky reserve selection table 222p executes a process of obtaining the value of the effect counter 223h, which is set corresponding to the current number of reserved balls, to determine whether or not to execute a lucky reserve effect.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), a display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (Figure 231) based on the value of the lucky hold memory value 223p (Z2306). Next, the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2301, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2308). In other words, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect was executed in the previous change. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is cleared (set as the initial value 0) (Z2309), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the process of Z2309, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), this process is terminated as it is. In this way, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the change, and is terminated by setting the special effect status to the initial value at the start of the next change. In addition, in this control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during the period in which the special pattern changes once, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed during the period in which multiple changes are executed. The number of times the special symbols will change when the lucky hold effect starts can be determined, and the effect can end when that number of changes has been performed. Alternatively, a lottery can be held to decide whether to end the lucky hold effect with each change, and the effect can end if the ending lottery is won, or if all the reserved balls are used up or a demo display appears.

Returning to FIG. 260, we will continue the explanation. After executing the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 261), when a change in a special pattern that becomes a reach display mode is executed, a process is executed to execute a reach pending effect (one of the special pending effects) that allows the player to play in such a way that reserved balls are accumulated during the reach display mode.

Now, referring to FIG. 262, we will explain the on-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing this on-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228).

In the reach pending performance setting process (Z2228: FIG. 262), first, it is determined whether the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not changing (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is changing (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the normal mode is not being used (Z2322: No), this process ends. If the change is in normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). In other words, it is determined whether the normal state is in which no special pending performance is being executed. If the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this process ends. Here, if the special performance status is 1 or more, it means that another special pending performance is being executed, so the determination of Z2323 is executed to prevent further overlapping of pending performances. If the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the possibility of executing an effect is obtained from the reach-in effect selection table 222m (see FIG. 237(a)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223h (Z2324). Here, in the reach-in effect selection table 222m, a judgment value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of reserved balls, and the judgment value is used to determine whether or not the reach-in effect can be executed.

The process of Z2324 determines whether a pending effect (execution effect) during a reach can be executed (Z2325). If it is determined that an execution effect cannot be executed (Z2325: No), this process ends. If it is determined that an execution effect can be executed (Z2325: Yes), the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is set from the reach start time calculation table 222n (Figure 237 (b)) based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special pattern (Z2326), data indicating special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2327), and this process ends.

In this way, according to the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) that will become the reach display mode is decided, and if no other special pending effects are being executed, a lottery is held to see whether to execute the reach pending effect, and if the lottery is won, the timing for starting to execute the reach pending effect is set. Therefore, when the variation of the special pattern that will become the reach display mode starts, the reach pending effect is set to be executed more frequently the fewer the current number of reserved balls, and it is possible to prevent players from stopping firing game balls during a reach, thereby increasing the profits of the gaming establishment. It is also possible to improve the efficiency of play.

Next, let us return to Figure 260 to continue the explanation. After executing the pending effect setting process during reach (Z2228), the pending lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this pending lid setting process (Z2229), the processes required to display the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds are executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 263, we will explain the reserved lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this reserved lid setting process (Z2229).

In the reserved lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 263), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). In other words, it is determined whether a short-term winning effect (short-term winning reserved effect), which is one of the special reserved effects, is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the reserved lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229(a)) at the time of short-term winning in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228(a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2342). The reserved lid command for display is set based on the reserved lid range value obtained in the process of Z2342 (Z2355), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212(a)) is set, the display range value (display mode) of the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball is selected and set from the short-term winning reserved lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229(a)), thereby making it possible to set a display mode of the variable lid pattern P different from the normal mode (a display mode in which the reserved pattern is displayed with a space of two reserved patterns instead of the normal rule of displaying the reserved pattern with a space of one reserved pattern).

As a result, if the time required for one to four reserved balls to be stored is within a predetermined period, the variable lid pattern P is displayed according to rules different from normal times, and the display mode of the variable lid pattern P also makes it possible to recognize that the time required for the reserved balls to be stored is short. This makes it possible to encourage the player to play in a way that will allow the reserved balls to be stored more quickly, improving the efficiency of the game. It also makes the game more interesting.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2341, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2343). In other words, it is determined whether the execution of the pending effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2343: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the reserved lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance (see Figure 229 (b)) in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see Figure 228) (Z2344). Based on the reserved lid range value obtained in the processing of Z2344, a reserved lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives a display reserve lid command indicating the reserve lid range value obtained from the reach performance reserve lid range selection table 222d5, it receives a notice display command to perform a reach reserve notice performance, indicating that it is time to execute the reach reserve performance, and displays the variable lid pattern P in a display mode corresponding to the display reserve lid command.

In this way, when it has been decided that a pending effect will be executed during a reach, a mode for varying the display of the variable lid pattern P is set, and the variable lid pattern P is displayed variably in a display mode that is set according to the execution timing of the pending effect during a reach, so that it can be determined that a special pending effect that differs from normal times has been executed by the variable lid pattern P.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2343, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2345). In other words, it is determined whether the execution of the lucky reserved effect, which is one of the special reserved effects, is set. In the process of Z2345, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 228(b)) in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. In this way, when the execution of the lucky reserved effect (see FIG. 216(a)-(b)) is set, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P similar to the execution of the reserved effect in the normal state (display mode in which the display is performed according to the rule of leaving one reserved pattern free from the last reserved pattern displayed) is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2345, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the advance notice B mode is active (Z2347). That is, as shown in Figures 211 (a) to (b), it is determined whether a reserved effect is being executed that suggests to the player not to enter any more reserved balls when there are four or more reserved balls and the color of the reserved pattern is variable, which suggests to the player not to enter any more reserved balls. If it is advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display reserved lid command indicating a color change of the variable lid pattern P is set based on the reserved lid color change selection table 222f (see Figure 230 (b)) provided in ROM 222 (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when a game is being played in the notice B mode (four or more reserved balls) in which the reserved pattern is displayed in a variable color and the player is informed to play in a way that restricts the number of reserved balls from increasing any further, if more reserved balls are stored, a setting is executed in which the display color of the variable lid pattern P at the position where the variable lid pattern P and the displayed reserved pattern overlap is changed to a color different from normal (for example, green, etc.). This allows the player to easily recognize that he or she has played in a manner that goes against the notification mode that informed the player to play in a way that does not allow reserved balls to be stored.

After executing the process of Z2348, the reserved lid range value is obtained (Z2349) based on the predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228(d)), the above-mentioned process of Z2355 is executed, and this process is terminated. The predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228(d)) can be configured to display the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the position of the fifth reserved ball according to a special rule that would be hidden in the case of a normal mode reserved performance when there are four reserved balls, as shown in FIG. 211(a), but is in a displayed state. As a result, in the predicted B mode, in which a reserved performance instructing not to increase the reserved balls is performed, the variable lid pattern P can be used to make the player think that four reserved balls is the upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit of reserved balls is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid pattern P.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2347 that the mode is not the preview B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the preview A mode (Z2350). In other words, it is determined whether there are four or more reserved balls, the color of the reserved pattern is set to be variable or has been set, and a reserved performance is being executed in which the variable lid pattern P is displayed without any gap between it and the reserved pattern, which is a rule different from that in the normal mode (normal state).

If it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 228(c)) (Z2351). After that, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2350 that the prediction A mode is not in effect (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced (Z2352). Here, whether or not the time is being reduced is determined based on the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110. In addition to the variation type (missed reach, hit) data, the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is also output with data attached indicating whether the current game state is a time-reduced game state (electric support game state), a sure-win game state (high-probability game state with electric support), or a normal game state (low-probability game state without electric support).

When it is determined that the game is in the time-saving mode (time-saving game mode or probability-changing game mode is set) (Z2352: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 229(c)) (Z2353). After that, the above-mentioned Z2355 process is executed, and this process is terminated. Note that during the time-saving mode (when there is electric support), unlike the normal game mode, when there are 0 to 6 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P is displayed only at the position where the 7th and 8th reserved balls are displayed, and when there are 7 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved pattern is displayed is hidden, and when there are 8 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the 8th reserved pattern is displayed is set to hidden. As a result, during time-saving play with electric support, when the electric device 640a is likely to be in an open state, the variable lid pattern P is configured to be displayed less than in normal game mode, preventing an increase in the load on the display control of the variable lid pattern P when there are many and frequent reserved balls.

On the other hand, if the processing of Z2352 determines that the time-saving mode is not in progress (Z2352: No), i.e., that the normal mode hold performance is in progress, the reserve lid range value is obtained (Z2354) based on the normal reserve lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 228(b)), and the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to Figure 260, we will continue with the explanation. After executing the reserved lid setting process (Z2229), the reserved character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), processes such as determining the girl character to be displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds are executed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 264, we will explain the reserved character setting process (Z2230) executed within the variation pattern receiving process (Z2202; FIG. 260) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the reserved character setting process (Z2230), it is first determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2361). In other words, it is determined whether the reserved effect state is set to normal mode, which is the normal state. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four, even after one reserved ball has been consumed by the new start of the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls has changed from three (the sum of the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b is 3) to four (the sum of the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b is 4) by the ball entering either the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, which is the starting point.

If it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four (Z2362: Yes), a reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 232 (b)) based on the contents of the background mode memory area 223i provided in the RAM 223, the reserved performance mode that has been set, and the performance counter 223h, and a display character command is set (Z2363), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the reserved balls become four, the girl's character type is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the reserved performance mode that has been set, and is set for display. This allows the characters displayed to differ depending on the background type and the reserved performance mode, and allows for a variety of reserved performances. In addition to the configuration of this control example, the type of character to be determined may be changed depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern during the change and the change pattern type (for example, super reach, etc.). By configuring it in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the player can recognize that a special pattern that is changing or a reserved ball that has been previously determined to be a hit is stored according to the character type. Also, if a character with a high selection rate is set according to the character type when it is displayed in a super reach, the player can expect early on that the super reach, which is a changing pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, will be executed when that character is displayed.

Also, in this control example, the notice A mode and notice B mode are likely to be set when a variable pattern type (e.g., a super reach type) has a high probability of a jackpot based on a pre-reading judgment, or when a hit/miss judgment result indicates a jackpot, so by displaying the J2 character or J3 character, the player can be made to expect the execution of a super reach type or the hit/miss judgment result to be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from three to four (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364: Yes), a display character command that clears the reserved character is set (Z2365), and this process ends. In this way, the character is set to hidden when the number of reserved balls falls below four, so the reduction in the reserved number can be clearly notified to the player.

In the process of Z2364, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether an over-winning state has occurred is determined by determining whether an over-winning information command output when the number of reserved balls exceeds the upper limit value and a start winning occurs from the main control device 110 is received. If it is determined that an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366: Yes), a reserved character to be changed is selected by the reserved character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode memory area 223i, the reserved performance mode, and the performance counter 223h, and a display character command is set (Z2267), and this process is terminated. Note that, if it is determined that an over-winning state has not occurred in Z2366 (Z2366: No), this process is terminated as it is. Thus, in this control example, when an over-winning state occurs, a change of the character displayed in the character display area C is executed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 233), the character change is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. For example, when the reserved ball pre-judgment results in a hit/miss judgment result of a big hit (hit) or when the expectation of a big hit is high in the variation pattern type, and the prediction A mode or the prediction B mode is determined, and a character J3 that is likely to be determined is selected, a character other than J3 is configured not to be selected. Also, when the J2 character is selected, or when the prediction A mode or the prediction B mode selects a character J0 or J1 that is difficult to select, the J2 or J3 character is configured to be easily selected. In other words, it is configured to be possible to step up to J3, which is set high as the expectation of selecting a big hit or a variation pattern type with a high expectation, and it is configured to allow the player to enjoy the reserved performance by generating an over-winning. Changing this character corresponds to a special benefit that is advantageous to the player.

Returning to Figure 260, we will continue with the explanation. After executing the reserved character setting process (Z2230), the speech bubble setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In this speech bubble setting process (Z2231), a process is executed to select the content of a comment to be displayed in a speech bubble from the character displayed in the character display area C, etc.

Next, referring to FIG. 265, we will explain the speech bubble setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing this speech bubble setting process (Z2231).

In the speech bubble setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 1 (Z2381). In other words, it is determined whether a short-term winning reserved effect is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the speech bubble content is obtained based on the short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4 (see FIG. 235(a)) in the speech bubble selection table 222k (see FIG. 234(a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2382). After executing the process of Z2382, a display speech bubble command is set based on the obtained speech bubble content (Z2394), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2381, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2383). In other words, it is determined whether a pending effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the bubble content is obtained based on the reach effect bubble selection table 222k5 (see Figure 235 (b)) (Z2384), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2383 that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2385). In other words, it is determined whether a lucky hold effect is set. If the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the bubble content is obtained based on the lucky hold bubble selection table 222k6 (see Figure 236 (a)) (Z2386), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2387 that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether the notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the speech bubble content is obtained based on the notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 234(d)) (Z2388), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2387 that the notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). If it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the speech bubble content is obtained based on the notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 234(c)) (Z2390), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2389 that the preview A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether the time-saving mode (time-saving play state or special play state) is set (Z2391). If it is determined that the time-saving mode is set (Z2391), the bubble content is obtained based on the time-saving bubble selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 236(b)) (Z2392), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z2391 that the time-saving setting is not set (Z2391: No), the bubble content is obtained based on the normal bubble selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 234(b)) (Z2393), the process of Z2394 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, the system controls the selection of a comment that corresponds to each reserved presentation mode, so that the comment content that matches the reserved presentation mode can be displayed, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 266, we will explain the winning command reception process (Z2209), which is one process within the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning command reception process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, based on the change type of the received command and the acquired value of the performance counter 223h, the reserved change value is acquired from the reserved change selection table 222b (Figure 227 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2402).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the reserved notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). In other words, it is determined whether the notice A mode or notice B mode in which the color of the reserved pattern is changed is set. If the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processes Z2404 to Z2406 are skipped and the process Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the reserved performance mode is set from the reserved performance mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 227 (b)) based on the reserved change value (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the reserved change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the reserved change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the process Z2406 is skipped and the process Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved ball change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the reserved ball notification counter 223g is set to the current reserved ball value (the sum of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b) (Z2406).

After completing the process of Z2406, the short-term winning determination process is executed (Z2407). Details of the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267, but it is determined whether it is time to execute the short-term winning reserved performance, and if it is time to execute (if the execution conditions are met), a process for setting the execution of the short-term winning reserved performance is executed. Next, the lucky reserved process is executed (Z2408). Details of the lucky reserved storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 268, but it is determined whether it is time to execute the lucky reserved performance (if the conditions are met), and if it is execution timing, the lucky reserved performance is set to be executed. Next, the above-mentioned reserved lid setting process (Z2409), reserved character setting process (Z2410), and speech bubble setting process (Z2411) are executed, and this process is terminated. Note that the reserved lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already explained with reference to FIG. 263, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Also, the speech bubble setting process (Z2411) is the same as that already explained with reference to FIG. 265, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 267, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed within the winning command reception process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the short-term winning judgment process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability game state or a time-limited game state (Z2421). If it is determined that the game state is a high probability game state or a time-limited game state (time-limited) (Z2421: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not a high probability game state or a time-limited game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 4 (Z2423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not zero (Z2424). If it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is zero (Z2424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not zero (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. In this way, if the period required for four reserved balls to be established is less than five seconds, the special performance status 1 is set, which indicates that the execution of the short-term winning reserved performance is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 268, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this lucky hold storage process (Z2408). This lucky hold storage process (Z2408) is executed within the winning command reception process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the lucky reserved memory process (Z2408), first, the lottery result for the winning is obtained from the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442). If it is determined that the obtained lottery result is not a jackpot (2442: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the obtained lottery result is determined to be a jackpot (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that it is four or more (Z2443: Yes), the current number of reserved balls is set to the lucky reserved memory value 223p (Z2444), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of reserved balls is four or less (Z2443: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 269, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (Z2114). This variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (Z2501). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (Z2501: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to Z2505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command for display is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (Z2504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, although not shown in the figure, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is shifted in sequence to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to Z2505.

In the process of Z2505, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (Z2505). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (i.e., it is off) (Z2505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (Z2509). By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. After the process of Z2509 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 270, we will explain the short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). This short-term winning management process (Z2111) executes processes such as measuring the period until four reserved balls are generated, which are necessary to determine whether or not to execute a short-term winning reserved performance.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), it is first determined whether the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and processing proceeds to Z2604.

In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2604). In other words, it is determined whether a short-term winning reserved effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if in the process of Z2604 it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or if in the process of Z2605 it is determined that the number of reserved balls is greater than 4 (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In this way, if the short-term winning reserved effect has already been set, the special effect status is set to 0 and is set to the initial value when the number of reserved balls falls to less than four. However, it is not limited to this, and the special effect status may be configured to be set to 0 when the execution of the short-term winning reserved effect ends (when the number of reserved balls reaches four in less than five seconds and the remaining period has elapsed).

Next, referring to FIG. 271, the reach-in-hold performance management process (Z2112), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing this reach-in-hold performance start process (Z2112). In this reach-in-hold performance management process (Z2112), processing is executed to determine the execution timing of the reach-in-hold performance and set the display mode of the reach-in-hold performance at the execution timing.

In the pending performance management process during reach (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2701). In other words, it is determined whether the execution of the pending performance during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pending performance start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). If it is determined that the value of the pending performance start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the pending performance start timer 223r is decremented by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether the value of the pending performance start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). If it is determined that the value of the pending performance start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pending performance start timer 223r after the subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command is set indicating that a pending performance during a reach will be executed (Z2706). Then, this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2702, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing when the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of the special pattern that is fluctuating ends (the timing when the fluctuation period elapses) (Z2707). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the fluctuation (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set to the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2708), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the fluctuation (Z2707: No), this process ends. In this way, in the pending effect during a reach, the special effect status is set to 0 when the fluctuation time of the special pattern that is in a reach fluctuation mode elapses, and the pending effect is initially set to normal mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 272, we will explain the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107), which is one process within the main processing (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107), the pressing action of the frame button 22 is determined, and based on the pressing, the execution of a preview performance or the like is set.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107: see FIG. 272), it is first determined whether the SW valid time counter 223k is set to a value greater than 0 as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), and if it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223k is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2802). Then, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to the variable pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. This sensor input process (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 273.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2806 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether the preview performance is being executed (preview performance in progress) (Z2809). If it is determined that the preview performance is in progress (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a display preview command indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is set (Z2811). Next, a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Now, with reference to FIG. 273, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process (Z2813), which is one process within the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z1307: FIG. 272) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and the execution of various performances, etc. is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273), it is first determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223s is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in a valid period. If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether a preview performance display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). If it is determined that a preview performance display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set for the preview performance is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2822 that a preview performance display is not set (Z2822: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2821, if it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is greater than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is updated by subtracting the amount of time that has passed (Z2824). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has operated the touch sensor 290 by bringing his/her hand or the like close to it (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and a display notice display command corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is set (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set for the selected touch notice performance display (Z2828). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to the initial value of 0 (Z2829). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit (Z2828: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 272, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2801, if the device is not in standby mode (Z2801: No), or if the process of Z2802 determines that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2802: No), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or greater (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or greater (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether a preview performance is being executed (preview performance in progress) (Z2808). If it is determined that a preview performance is in progress (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a display preview command indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is set (Z2810). Next, a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Note that the sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 273, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of Z2808 that the preview performance is not in progress (Z2808: No), the processes of Z2803 and Z2804 already described are executed, and then this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of Z2807 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2807: No), the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 are skipped, and the sensor input process (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 273 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2805 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time counter 223k based on the set fluctuation pattern (Z2812), sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Note that, if a fluctuation pattern has not been set in the processing of Z2811 (Z2811: No), the processing of Z2812 is skipped, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Here, there are fluctuation patterns in which a performance using the frame button 22 is set and in which it is not set, and if it is not set, "0" is set in the SW effective time counter 223k.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 274 to 287. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 274, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing executes initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the boot process (Z3001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (Z3101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Z3102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (Z3103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) to be executed after the end of this boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) (Z3105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (Z3001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex presentations using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of Z3102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of Z3101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of Z3101 and Z3102, and then execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program memory area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program memory area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute processes Z3103 to Z3105 without executing processes Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 274. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 285(a)) (see Z4602 in FIG. 285(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)), the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276(b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 239 is drawn.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image (not shown) can be instantly displayed during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After processing Z3005, interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is cut off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by processing Z3006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 276(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 276(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and then the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 276(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 276(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 242) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 276(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (Z3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (Z3301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so a command determination process (Z3302) is executed to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81, instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 239, and then a display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Z3302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 277.

The display setting process (Z3303) specifically identifies the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 283 to 284.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (Z3304). In this task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (Z3303) or the simplified display setting process (Z3309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 285 and 286.

Next, the drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 242 is generated from the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (Z3304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (Z3305), and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287.

Next, the update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of Z3307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed to display the power-on image (Figure 239) on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and processing proceeds to Z3304.

Next, with reference to Figures 277 to 282, the details of the command determination process (Z3302) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Figure 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277), as shown in FIG. 277, first it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Z3401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), a new command flag is set to on (Z3402) to notify the display setting process (Z3303) that a new command has been processed in the on state, and then the type of command is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (Z3403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (Z3405), and processing returns to Z3401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 278(a). FIG. 278(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 278(a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

In this case, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, as in this embodiment, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are set off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of Z3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (Z3506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by processing Z3505, extracts the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by processing Z3501, and identifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of Z3502 extracts the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the processing of Z3504, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 277. In the processing of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no variation pattern command for display (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (Z3406), and if there is a variation type command for display (Z3406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and processing returns to Z3401.

Now, referring to FIG. 278(b), the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described. FIG. 278(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (Z3407: Fig. 278 (b)), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (Z3601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see Fig. 276 (b)) is executed, to finally set the stop pattern after the variable performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (Z3602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (Z3603). After that, the process returns to the processing of Z3401 in FIG. 277.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of Z3602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of Z3602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by Z3603, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will continue. In the process of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display preview display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that a display preview display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), a preview performance display process is executed (Z3409). Details of the preview performance display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(a), but during the variable display of the special pattern, a preview display mode is set to notify the player of the expectation of a jackpot, a notification that a jackpot has occurred, etc., which are displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, referring to FIG. 279(a), we will explain the preview performance display process (Z3409). FIG. 279(a) is a flowchart showing this preview performance display process (Z3409).

In the preview performance display process (Fig. 279 (a), Z3409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received preview display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the preview set to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the preview display indicated by the received preview display command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to on (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z3704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this way, the preview display is set based on the display preview command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the specified timing. Therefore, a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same variation pattern can be made to appear to the player as if it were a different display mode.

In this embodiment, the content of the preview display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection of the preview display may be performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display data table for a notice is set, but this is not limited to this, and a display data table that has already been set may be overwritten with a notice display setting.

Returning to Figure 277 for further explanation. In the processing of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no display preview command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), mode switching processing is executed (Z3411). Details of this mode switching processing (Z3411) will be explained with reference to Figure 279 (b), but processing is executed to switch to a display mode corresponding to the background mode based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Now, referring to FIG. 279(b), the mode switching process (Z3411) will be described. FIG. 279(b) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special pattern is changing (Z3802). If it is determined that the special pattern is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer for the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (Z3803). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, when the special symbol is changing, the display mode of the changing pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched on. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background etc. in accordance with the background mode may be configured as follows:

The rear image change flag, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the rear image resulting from receiving the rear image change command, is set to ON. Then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear image A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF, the rear image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag to be set is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag to be set. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that one of the rear views A to C is to be displayed based on the rear view type of the rear view image specified, the rear view image discrimination flag that has been set is used to identify the rear view image type to be displayed at that time, and further, the range of the rear view image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the rear view image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to Figure 277, we will continue with the explanation. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that there is no display switch command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display reserved lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display reserved lid command (Z3412: Yes), the reserved lid command processing is executed (Z3413).

Now, referring to Figure 280, we will explain the reserved lid command processing (Z3413). Figure 280 is a flowchart showing this reserved lid command processing (Z3413).

In the reserved lid command process (Z3413: Fig. 280), first, a display data table for the reserved lid of the display performance corresponding to the received display reserved lid command is determined, and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer (Z3901). Here, the display data table is added to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). The added position is before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for reserved lids set in Z3901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for reserved lids set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other reserved lids are set on (Z3903).

Next, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, time data representing that change time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z3904), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a reserved lid command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is identified based on the time data indicated by the reserved lid command and the set variation pattern and background mode, and the display data table is set. By configuring in this way, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in multiple modes, the display mode after the added time can be set to the display mode corresponding to the set background mode, thereby reducing the control load on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, the data is added to the existing display data table, but it may be configured to set a new display data table.

Returning to Figure 277, we will continue with the explanation. In the processing of Z3412, if it is determined that there is no reserved lid command for display (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412: Yes), reserved character command processing is executed (Z3413).

Now, referring to FIG. 280(b), we will explain reserved character command processing (Z3415). FIG. 280(b) is a flowchart showing this reserved character command processing (Z3415).

In the reserved character command process (Z3413: Fig. 280), first, a display data table for the reserved character of the display effect corresponding to the received display reserved character command is determined, and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer (Z4001). Here, the display data table is added to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). The added position is before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variable pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the display data tables for the other reserved characters are set to off (Z4003).

Next, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in the display data table buffer 233d by processing Z4001, time data representing that change time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4004), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4005), and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a reserved character command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is identified based on the time data indicated by the reserved character command and the set variation pattern and background mode, and the display data table is set. By configuring it in this way, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in multiple modes, the display mode after the added time can be set to the display mode corresponding to the set background mode, thereby reducing the control load on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, the data is added to the existing display data table, but it may be configured to set a new display data table.

Returning to Figure 277, we will continue with the explanation. In the processing of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no reserved character command for display (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a speech bubble command for display (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a speech bubble command for display (Z3416: Yes), speech bubble command processing is executed (Z3417).

Now, we will explain the speech bubble command processing (Z3417) with reference to Figure 281. Figure 281 is a flowchart showing this speech bubble command processing (Z3417).

In the speech bubble command process (Z3417: Fig. 281), first, a display data table for the speech bubble of the display effect corresponding to the received display speech bubble command is determined, and is added to and set in the display data table set in the display data table buffer (Z4101). Here, the display data table is added to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). The added position is before the END data.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the speech bubble set in Z4101 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variable pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the speech bubble set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other display data tables for the speech bubble are set off (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the speech bubble set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4104), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing.

When a speech bubble command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is identified based on the time data indicated by the speech bubble command and the set variation pattern and background mode, and the display data table is set. By configuring in this way, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in multiple modes, the display mode after the added time can be set to the display mode corresponding to the set background mode, thereby reducing the control load on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, the data is added to the existing display data table, but it may be configured to set a new display data table.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 277. If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and if there is an error command (Z3414: Yes), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and processing returns to Z3415.

Now, with reference to FIG. 282, the error command processing (Z3415) will be described in detail. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 282), first, the error occurrence flag, which indicates that an error has occurred when it is in the ON state, is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (Z4202), the error command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by processing Z4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by processing Z4202, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the Z4202 process sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. This causes warning images corresponding to all error types to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence situation.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 277. If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and processing returns to Z3401.

In process Z3401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if there are any unprocessed new commands (Z3401: Yes), processes Z3402 to Z3416 are executed again. Then, processes Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when process Z3416 determines that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (Z3308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 239, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 278(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Z3501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of Z3502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figures 283 to 284, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z3303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (Z4301). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (Z4301: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, and processes Z4302 to Z4304 are skipped, and processing proceeds to Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (Z4302), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by processes Z4303 to Z4304.

In the Z4303 process, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (Z4304).

Now, with reference to FIG. 284(a), the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 284(a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (Z4401).

The task process uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing Z4401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (Z4402) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (Z4304), or in the process of Z4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (Z4303: No), then the process proceeds to the process of Z4305.

In Z4305, pointer update processing is executed (Z4305). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 284(b). FIG. 284(b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating pointer 233f, which specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time V interrupt processing is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After updating the value of pointer 233f by processing Z4501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d is End information (Z4502). If the data is End information (Z4502: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (Z4503), and if it is a demo display data table (Z4503: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (Z4505), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, the display setting process can expand the drawing contents in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to Figure 284, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents expanded in the processing of Z4306, together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (Z4308). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or greater (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (Z4309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (Z4309: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4310), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (Z4311). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set on (Z4314), the contents of the stop pattern discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop pattern discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (Z4315), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (Z3304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by Z4315 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the confirmation display flag is on and not off (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or not (Z4316). Then, if the demo display flag is off (Z4316: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmation display performance, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4317), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (Z4318). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demo display flag, which indicates that the demo performance is being performed in the on state, is set to on (Z4321), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

In the processing of Z4316, if the demo display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (Z3309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images (FIG. 239) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to Figs. 285 and 286, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (Z4601). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285(b).

On the other hand, if the result of processing Z4601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (Z4601: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that future transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

Next, referring to FIG. 285(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 285(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (Z4701), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (Z4701: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (Z4702). In this Z4702 process, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of Z4702 that the transfer process has not been completed (Z4702: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, and therefore the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Z4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Z4703. Also, if the result of processing Z4701 shows that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the process proceeds to processing Z4703.

In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of Z4703 (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Z4705) and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 7276b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276(b)), the command determination process (see FIG. 277 to FIG. 282) and the display setting process (see FIG. 283 to FIG. 284(b)) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 285(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, except for the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main process. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 286, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (Z4802). If it is transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (Z4803). Furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

In addition, in the processing of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (Z4802: No), the processing of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped and processing proceeds to Z4805. In the processing of Z4805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (Z4805), and if a transfer instruction has been set (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (Z4806).

In this process of Z4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if the process of Z4806 determines that the transfer process has not ended (Z4806: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to process Z4807. Also, if the result of the process of Z4805 indicates that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to process Z4807.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (Z4807). If the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), image data for which transfer should be started is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by processing of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and processing proceeds to Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this processing is terminated.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). This determination in the process of Z4809 is made by referencing the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of processing Z4809 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of Z4809 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it sends a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing Z4810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 287, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Z3306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list shown in FIG. 242 is generated (Z4901) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (Z3305). That is, in the process of Z4901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprite to be placed in the back of the image for one frame to the sprite to be placed in the front, and the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite are described as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite in the rearranged sprite order, thereby generating a drawing list. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (Z4902). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After processing Z4902, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (Z4903). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

In addition, in the above control example, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as a single device.

In addition, in the above control example, first, a command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the command to be sent to the display control device 114, and then the command is sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In contrast to this, it may be configured so that first, a command is sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines the command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and then the display control device 114 sends the command to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 may temporarily store the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 may determine whether the destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused, and if it is unused, transfer the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused may be determined by providing the image controller 237 with a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (i.e., in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (i.e., in use), and the MPU 231 checking the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 may monitor signals transmitted between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and check whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused based on the state of the signals. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing or ends accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 may notify the MPU 231 of this information as needed, and the MPU 231 may determine whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused based on the notification.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 can determine whether the scan is in a blank period by checking the drive status of the image controller 237 or by receiving a notification from the image controller 237, and if the scanning state is in a blank period, it can determine that each video RAM 235, 236 is unused. In this way, the image controller 237 can easily make the determination by checking only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 to determine whether it is unused or not.

In this case, when transfer data information other than null data exists at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may start a process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the specific sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. By transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite according to the display data table or the like, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

The process of reading image data from character ROM 234 and transferring it to normal video RAM 236 may be performed within the display main process or main process loop executed by MPU 231. This allows MPU 231 to execute image data transfer processing by utilizing time when important processes in display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, are not being performed. Furthermore, since command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed with priority over display main processing, etc., MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing without affecting command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 may not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but may assign different address areas to each video RAM in an address system commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify to the image controller 237 the video RAM to be accessed (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), but simply specifies an address, and the image controller 237 can determine whether the area specified by the address is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In other words, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of that video RAM to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify an address set in the common address system, and the configuration of the command for specifying the video RAM can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the information indicating the storage destination of sprite data does not include the storage RAM type, but simply specifies the storage destination address using an address set within a common address system, thereby simplifying the configuration of the drawing list.

In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the case, and the character ROM 234 may be directly connected to the image controller 237. Also, a bridge circuit that converts the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM may be provided, and the character ROM 234 may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

By providing this bridge circuit, it is possible to connect the character ROM 234, which is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a, by using the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240), which are designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM will be used as the character ROM. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or bridge circuit, it may be configured so that the character ROM 234 can be accessed directly from the MPU 231.

In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is configured as a NAND flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be configured as a large-capacity, inexpensive non-volatile storage means, such as a hard disk. Such large-capacity, inexpensive storage means generally have a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, it is possible to display the image at the desired time without any problems.

In the above control example, a NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a first program storage area may be provided in a memory configured with a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the first program storage area. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, a Ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM), a Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or a Phase change RAM (PRAM) may be provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area may be provided in the first program storage area to store a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. A memory made of a non-volatile storage medium that can read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), a first program storage area may be provided in that memory, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in that area. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, a Ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM), a Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or a Phase change RAM (PRAM) may be provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided therein to store a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b may set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" on the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has already been set in the buffer RAM 234c or is in the process of being set, so that the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary performance section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, it may directly read data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address from the first program memory area 234d1 and output it to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary performance section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program memory area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. This reduces power consumption in the character ROM 234.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected. In addition, if the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or image controller 237 via the above bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114 even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case was described in which one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more video RAMs may be provided. Also, multiple resident video RAMs may be provided, each of which stores resident image data corresponding to images according to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as a single-port type (single input/output port) DRAM, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a multi-port type RAM may be used. This allows writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to be performed simultaneously, so that, for example, image data can be read from the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image while image data read from the character ROM 234 is written to the normal video RAM 236 in parallel. This reduces the risk of delays in the drawing process due to the writing of image data.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as separate memories, but this is not necessarily limited to this. A single RAM may be divided into a resident area and a normal area, and the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When configuring a resident area and a normal area in a single RAM, it is preferable to use a multi-port RAM to prevent the input/output ports of the memory from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is just one example, and the type may be set appropriately depending on the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, it is preferable to make at least the image data corresponding to the image to be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 resident in the resident video RAM 235 in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input.

In the above control example, a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 234 is transferred to resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all image data stored in character ROM 234 may be transferred to resident video RAM 235. In this case, since the image data stored in non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in resident video RAM 235, normal video RAM 236 may be used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by image controller 237.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten while the power is on, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a specified trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be significantly different based on a command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, a specified transitional image may be displayed as a transitional period while the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is being changed. The image data corresponding to the transitional image may be stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and may continue to be retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 to read the image data that is to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may transmit a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for the image data that is to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 may read the image data that is to be resident from the character ROM 234 in accordance with the transfer instruction (transfer data information), and transfer the image data via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read).

When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction from the MPU 231 to transfer the image data to be resident, may access the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is made resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is resolved is stored, and during the main display process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is checked before starting to transfer the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and if the RAM judgment value is a normal value, this means that the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be prevented. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be prevented by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power outage and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally, it is possible to prevent the image data from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in vain, and the time required for recovery from the power outage can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In contrast, by storing the RAM judgment value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power outage or the like, the time required for the transfer of the image data can be shortened, so that the third symbol display device 81 can immediately display a normal performance image. Therefore, the player can immediately start playing. The RAM judgment value may be, for example, a checksum value of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. In addition, instead of using this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written to a specific area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the case, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). In addition, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, so that the transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the internal bus (bus line 240) through which a lot of data signals are exchanged.

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be set as appropriate. For example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be set to a data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 during the period (blank period) during which the third pattern display device 81 scans a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. This allows the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period.

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM may be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Also, one buffer RAM may be divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, the image data may be transferred from the other area in which the image data is stored to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be processed in parallel, so that the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on has been described, but the image data corresponding to the power-on main image may also be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This makes it possible to transfer image data to be resident from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image using image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to complete the transfer of image data quickly and simplify the process.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. However, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This allows the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred while the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the image data transfer to be completed quickly and simplifies the process.

In the above control example, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 is described. However, since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is being transferred, image data corresponding to the main image at power-on may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. Also, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on main image is displayed using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from resident video RAM 235 while the image data is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. This allows the transfer of image data to be completed more quickly without going through buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the case was described where image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235, but since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are being transferred, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. In addition, when image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows the transfer of image data to be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the presentation mode of the super reach based on the back image change command or the frame button operation command, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 may grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and generate a back image change command or a game state command according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change in the game state. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the back image or the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. The display control device 114 may also directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the presentation mode of the back image or the super reach according to the game state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a portion of the range of the rear image after the change, or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed performance mode, is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the rear image can be instantly displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

The display control device 114 may also change the rear image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, or composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table. Here, when transferring image data of the rear image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table, the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in a sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored, or the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in an area other than the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. In the latter case, when returning the rear image to the original rear image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer image data corresponding to the original rear image again, so that an increase in the processing load of the display control device 114 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal from the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114, causing the display control device 114 to immediately display a warning image on the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal from the vibration sensor may be input to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may send an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive the error command and further send an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the presence or absence of a vibration error may be detected by the display control device 114. If a vibration error is detected, an error occurrence flag may be turned on, and an error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error may be turned on. If the display setting process (see FIG. 283) determines that the error occurrence flag is on, a warning image setting process (see FIG. 284(a)) may be executed, thereby causing a warning image to be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, it is unnecessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and therefore the warning image may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 more quickly.

In the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of or together with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor may be attached to the back of the game board 13. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting a magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the ball entry hole by changing the flow of the ball with a magnetic field such as a magnet, and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if the main control device 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, an error command conveying the magnetic field error may be sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, when the voice lamp control device 113 judges that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, an error command notifying the magnetic field error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114 may be configured to be resident with image data corresponding to an error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by displaying the third pattern display device 81, and when an error command notifying the magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 judges that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 may turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on, thereby displaying the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or detects the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on an output signal from the magnet sensor, it can display an error message image notifying the player of the magnetic field error without delay on the third pattern display device 81 using an error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of an error message image by the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can be deterred from engaging in fraudulent behavior.

When the drawing contents required to change the color tone of a part or all of a performance are specified by an additional data table or a display data table, the additional data table or the display data table may correspond to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and may specify the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information specifying the color tone of the sprite after the change in that time. Then, when the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information specifying the color tone of the sprite after the change are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may replace the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the display data table to create a drawing list. This allows the image controller 237 to draw the image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing contents required to change and display an image displayed in one performance are specified by a display data table, the display data table may correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and may specify the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed at that time. Then, when the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may include the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite in place of the sprite to be replaced among the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image that includes the new sprite to be displayed.

In the above control example, the display data table includes transfer data information of image data required to draw an image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table. In addition, the display data table may include transfer data information of image data required to draw an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table (additional transfer data information). In this case, the additional transfer data information may be specified together with or separately from the additional drawing content, in association with identification information (such as "additional performance 1", "additional performance 2", etc.) for identifying the additionally displayable performance for each address. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the performance to be additionally displayed, it may be configured to create a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined performance.

In this way, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprites used in drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the additional effects to be displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Also, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, the necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing contents, so that the drawing of many sprites can be specified according to the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the above control example, in a display table corresponding to a variation pattern that allows the player to select a Super Reach, the drawing content corresponding to all Super Reach that can be selected by the player is specified in the display data table, and only the drawing content corresponding to the Super Reach selected by the player is identified. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected Super Reach may be added to the display data table. This makes it easy to identify the drawing content of the Super Reach selected by the player. Also, because there is no need to specify the drawing content corresponding to all Super Reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from becoming too large.

In the above control example, the display data table includes the drawing contents and the transfer data information, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The display data table may specify the drawing contents and the transfer data information, and the additional drawing contents of the effect to be added and displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when the effect to be added and displayed is determined, the additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. In addition, the additional data table may specify not only the additional drawing contents, but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents. This allows the drawing contents of the effect to be added and displayed and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing to be specified using the additional data table, so that the processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

In the above control example, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a display data table may be prepared for each element of the variation performance, such as "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "preview performance", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the elements required for the variation performance may be identified according to the variation pattern indicated in the display variation pattern command. Then, the display data tables corresponding to the identified papers required for the variation performance may be compiled into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern may be generated. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", and the like are displayed in common to each variation pattern. Therefore, by breaking down the variation performance into elements in this way and preparing a display data table for each element, the data tables can be efficiently held.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to identify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f, but a pointer may be prepared for each data table.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of an image at which the drawing process is completed (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example), but the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display one frame of an image. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of an image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so by transmitting a V interrupt signal each time one frame of an image is displayed, the time interval can be accurately maintained without having to be timed.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed based on the drawing target buffer information sent from the MPU 231, and reads out the image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits it to the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The image controller 237 may alternately select the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed each time it receives a drawing list, and read out the image information previously displayed from a frame buffer other than the selected frame buffer and transmit it to the third pattern display device 81. Also, the image controller 237 may switch the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed and the frame buffer that outputs image information to the third pattern display device 81 each time it transmits one frame of image information to the third pattern display device 81.

In the above control example, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display performance is set in the display data table buffer 233d, if neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display performance ends, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo performance is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, this may be set again to the display data table buffer 233d. In this case, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display performance may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the confirmed display performance ends until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to continue displaying the confirmed display performance until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, the demo performance changes the back image and displays a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9", but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the demo performance may display a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number in a semi-transparent state. It may also change only the back image without displaying the third pattern. It may also display a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern and back image used in the variable display.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, after power is turned on, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after power is turned on, only image data corresponding to the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then the image data to be resident, including the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image, is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. This allows the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, so that players, hall staff, or operational checks at the factory during manufacturing can immediately confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has started operating without any problems after the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may also monitor the completion of the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on variable image area 235b, a simplified variable display can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b based on the display variable pattern command. Note that it is preferable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the variable display using the power-on variable image to be performed more quickly.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table are described as specifying the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) and the information of the image data to be transferred at that time (transfer data information) in accordance with a time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any display contents may be specified at a predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81. For example, if the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third pattern display device 81 displays 30 frames of images per second, the third pattern display device 81 displays one frame of image every 1/30 seconds, so the display data table may specify the display contents at every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn at each predetermined time interval may be specified as the address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored, rather than specifying the sprite type itself. In order to read image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 manages the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of that sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored is specified as the display content to be displayed at each predetermined time interval in the display data table, it becomes unnecessary to manage both the information specifying the sprite and the address of the character ROM 234 in association with each sprite type, thereby reducing the processing load.

In the above control example, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Alternatively, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a specific sprite type, the MPU 231 may refer to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 to determine whether or not the specific image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, may set a transfer instruction for the image data of the specific sprite type. In addition, when the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for image data of a specific sprite type, the MPU 231 may store information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and erase information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a in which the image data of the sprite type is stored.

In the above control example, when transferring image data of a specific sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 determines whether the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the image data of the specific sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, the transfer process is not executed. However, this process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i may be prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite may be stored. In addition, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a specific sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 may send transfer data information for that image data to the image controller 237, regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236.

In the above control example, only image data corresponding to "rear A" among multiple rear images is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of rear images used in some super reaches may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear images of super reaches that appear frequently or are expected to appear frequently resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the number of times that the transfer process of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed can be reduced.

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table specifies an image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer the image data specified by the transfer command from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Information regarding the sprite type required in the display data table may be written at the beginning of the display data table, and the MPU 231 may control the image controller 237 to transfer the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information written at the beginning of the display data table. Alternatively, based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 may determine the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and control the image controller 237 to transfer the image data of that image type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the above control example, a case was described in which the color tone of a portion of the image, rear C, which is the rear image of the "island stage", changes over time, but the color tone of the entire image may also change over time. Furthermore, the rear image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color over time, and instead of such a rear image, an object (e.g., a person) that appears may move or change over time.

In the above control example, the main control unit 110 includes in the reserved ball count command the information of the various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning, which it notifies to the voice lamp control unit 113. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of the various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113 by a separate command.

In the above control example, when executing the variable effect, a high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that the player cannot see them. However, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they are not visible to the player, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which numerous white dots are displayed randomly.

In the above control example, a case was described in which the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entry port 64, which starts a lottery for a jackpot with a special pattern when a ball enters the game board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the game board 13 may be provided with multiple (e.g., two) first ball entry ports, each of which detects an entry ball independently and starts a lottery for a jackpot. In this case, the reserved ball count command sent by the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when there is a reservation at each first ball entry port may include information indicating which first ball entry port the reservation is from. In addition, the variation pattern command sent by the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when starting a variation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the variation performance is reserved from. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, a reserved ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the reserved ball number command is set to the reserved ball number, and when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each first ball entrance.

In the above control example, the case where the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively) is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This can reduce the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above control example, the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37 to notify the number of reserved balls.

Also, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

Here, an overview of the first control example will be described. The first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 are arranged on the game board 13 as starting holes (ball entrance means, starting means). When a game ball enters one of the starting holes, a lottery (judgment) for a win or a miss is executed with a predetermined lottery probability. If the lottery result (judgment result) is a win (a specific judgment result), a jackpot game (a bonus game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types are set for the jackpot game, and the bonuses granted to the player are set to differ depending on the type. For example, a difference in the number of jackpot rounds, a winning type in which a high probability game state (first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, a winning type in which a time-saving game state (a second special game state in which the player's profit is smaller than that of the first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, and the like are set.

The result of the winning/losing judgment is notified to the player by displaying the third pattern (special pattern (identification information)) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or the first pattern (special pattern (identification information)) displayed on the first pattern display device 37 in a variable display (dynamic display) during a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period) and then stopping the display in a display mode to show the winning/losing judgment result (judgment result). If a game ball enters the starting hole during the variable display period, the right to be drawn for the ball that entered is stored as a reserved ball. The reserved balls are configured to be stored with an upper limit of up to four balls for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (drawing for the first special pattern), and up to four balls in total for a ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r and the second ball entrance 640 (drawing for the second special pattern).

When the reserved balls are stored, one reserved pattern (identification pattern, identification information) is displayed for each reserved ball. Before the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed, a pre-determination is performed to determine the result of the winning/losing determination (determination result) at the start of the variation and the variation display mode (variation pattern type) of the special pattern. If the pre-determination result is a specific determination result (for example, a win or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved pattern is displayed in a variable (variable to a specific display mode). If the color of the reserved pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the type of special reserved performance is set by the set color, etc. As one of the special reserved performances, when the color of the reserved pattern is changed, a comment display (pre-notification display mode, suggestion mode) is displayed that suggests the expected winning probability for the changed reserved ball and the type of variation pattern to be executed by generating an overflow winning that generates more reserved balls or enters the starting hole with more than the upper limit number of reserved balls (pre-notification A mode). This allows players to get more game balls into the starting hole, increasing the profits of the gaming establishment. Also, by getting the game ball into the starting hole, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the win/loss judgment and the type of variation can be determined from the content of the comment, so that a bonus (information that serves as a bonus) can be given to the player, increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, as one of the special reserved effects, a reserved effect (notice B mode) is set that executes a game so that reserved balls are not generated when the color of the reserved balls has changed. In this reserved effect, a variable lid pattern P is displayed in the display area where the reserved patterns are displayed, and the variable lid pattern P is displayed in the position of the reserved pattern that will be displayed if a winning combination is made after the reserved pattern whose color has changed, thereby informing the player that the game will be played so that reserved balls are not generated. Furthermore, a comment is displayed that suggests that the reserved balls will not be increased.

In addition, the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is four, and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is four, for a total of eight reserved patterns, which are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (display area of the display means), and the area in which the reserved patterns are displayed is secured and set in advance. In the area in which the reserved patterns are displayed, a pedestal pattern is displayed at the position where the reserved pattern is displayed, and it is configured so that it is possible to identify that this is an area in which a reserved pattern is displayed even when the reserved pattern is not displayed. In the area in which the fifth to eighth reserved patterns are displayed, four variable lid patterns P are displayed in correspondence with the positions where the reserved patterns are displayed, even during normal times, and each variable lid pattern P is displayed with a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

In this way, by displaying the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to determine that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even when the reserved pattern is not displayed based on the numerical information of the variable lid pattern P. Furthermore, when reserved balls are generated and the reserved pattern is displayed, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is also changed. In the reserved performance that is the normal mode during normal times, when the number of reserved balls becomes three, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the fifth reserved pattern is displayed is changed to non-display, and then, similarly, the variable lid pattern P is changed so that the sixth variable lid pattern P is not displayed when there are four reserved balls, the seventh variable lid pattern P is not displayed when there are five reserved balls, and the eighth variable lid pattern P is not displayed when there are six reserved balls. In other words, the variable lid pattern P is changed and displayed so that there is an empty space for two reserved patterns for three or more reserved balls. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player see that the display area of the reserved patterns changes depending on the number of reserved balls.

It is also configured to execute a special reserved effect in which the variable rules of the variable lid pattern P are changed depending on the period in which reserved balls are generated, and the variable rules are changed depending on the displayed variable type. This configuration allows the player to recognize that a special reserved effect is being executed based on the variable rules of the variable lid pattern P. Furthermore, the special reserved effect is set based on the result of the reserved advance judgment, the variable type, the result of the variable display special pattern hit/miss judgment, and the variable type being executed, so that by changing the variable rules of the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to expect a win or predict the variable type.

In this control example, even if the game ball is launched to the left or right of the third symbol display device 81, the ball will enter the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 (the electric device 640a is in the open state) in the same way. However, the arrangement of the nails may be set to form a route that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, or a flow path that makes it easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a performance in which a lottery is held using only the second special symbol, or a game in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entrance 640. Furthermore, as a performance, a performance can be performed that suggests to the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to Figures 288 to 324. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to alternately change, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol is changed preferentially, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol change in a different order depending on the game state. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 288, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 288 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. In the first control example, the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when a ball enters through the opening 710a, the sorting device 700 sorts the ball into the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640. However, in this second control example, the sorting device 700 is not installed, and the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640 are installed as they are. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 289 to Fig. 293, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device in this second control example will be described. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the performance display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is partially changed, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same symbols are attached to the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in this second control example will be described with reference to Figures 289 to 291. In the first control example, the special symbols for which the start of variation is executed are configured to alternate between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this second control example differs in that the change is prioritized from the second special symbol.

Figures 289(a) and 289(b) are schematic diagrams showing the flow of special pattern changes and continuous performance in this second control example. In this second control example, as shown in Figure 291(a), if the special pattern changes and the first special pattern continues to change, the performance display will execute a continuous performance as shown in Figure 291(b). A continuous performance is a period that is set for multiple changes. In addition, this continuous performance can be extended based on winning during the execution of the continuous performance.

Figure 291 (a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol changes during a continuous performance. As shown in Figure 291 (a), in this second control example, the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds provided under the third symbol display device 81 displays the active pedestal symbol m0, and the small area Ds2 displays the pedestal m1 for the first reserved symbol to the pedestal m8 for the eighth reserved symbol and the reserved symbol. In addition, characters G1 to G3 are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm. By executing a performance with a story-like nature using these characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that a continuous performance is being performed. In addition, even during the continuous performance period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. A detailed explanation of the background mode change during the continuous performance period will be described later with reference to Figures 290 and 292.

Next, the flow of the presentation when the second special pattern change is executed during a continuous presentation will be explained. Figures 291 (c) and (d) are diagrams showing the flow of the presentation when the second special pattern change is executed during a continuous presentation. In this second control example, as shown in Figure 289 (c), when the second special pattern change is executed while the first special pattern change is being executed, the continuous presentation period with the first special pattern is interrupted as shown in Figure 289 (d), and a special presentation with the second special pattern change is performed during the interruption period. Next, when the special presentation period ends, the continuous presentation period with the first special pattern is resumed.

Figure 291 (b) shows how the continuous performance period is interrupted and the third symbol changes during the special performance period. During the special performance period, the reserved ball is displayed by changing to red, as shown in Figure 291 (b). Furthermore, shells K1, K2, and K3 are displayed in the display area Dm in a display manner that has a story-like quality. This allows the player to easily recognize that the special performance is in progress. Furthermore, white reserved symbols are displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, and when the white reserved symbol on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and is displayed as a symbol in progress, the continuous performance period that was interrupted by the special performance period is resumed.

Next, the flow of the performance when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous performance period will be explained with reference to Fig. 289 (c) (d). In this second control example, even if the variation is being executed with the first special symbol, if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the variation execution with the second special symbol is executed preferentially. As shown in Fig. 289 (c), if the variation execution with the special symbol 2 occurs while the continuous performance with the first special symbol is being executed, the continuous performance during the variation execution of the first special symbol is interrupted as shown in Fig. 289 (d), and a special performance is executed while the variation execution with the second special symbol is being executed. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 291 (b), when the variation execution with the second special symbol occurs and a special performance is started, the number of reserved balls is configured to change color only during the special performance period. In addition, shell-like characters K1 to K3 are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm, and a performance with a storyline is executed. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to understand that the continuous performance period has entered the special performance period, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, the continuous performance with the first special symbol that was being executed is interrupted at the same time as the start of the special performance with the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special performance period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls in the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are waiting to execute the interrupted continuous performance period. The variable execution of the active pedestal pattern m0 to the second reserved symbol pattern m2, which is the special performance period, ends, the reserved ball in the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, and the continuous performance period that was interrupted by the special performance period is resumed.

The relationship between the continuous performance and the background display will be explained with reference to Figure 290. Figures 290 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the performance display mode during special pattern variation and the flow of the background display at that time. As described above, even during the continuous performance period, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22. In this second control example, when changing from the background mode in which the continuous performance is being performed to another background mode, the normal performance for the changed background mode is displayed.

292 is a diagram showing the display mode when the background is changed during the continuous performance period. As shown in FIG. 292, in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the change of the third symbol, the background mode is set to mountain mode from the sea mode during the continuous performance period. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal performance of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous performance, but if the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed again to the sea mode, the continuous performance for the sea is restored. In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous performance period, the display area Dmb displays "Continuous performance in sea mode!!", so that the player can easily recognize that the sea mode is in the continuous performance period. In addition, the display area Dma displays "The background will change when you push the button", so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<Electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 293. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example have been partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same symbols are used for the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 293(a). FIG. 293(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a continuous performance execution selection table 222aa has been added.

The consecutive performance execution selection table 222aa is a data table for judging (determining) whether or not consecutive performances (Fig. 291(a)) will be performed. In the winning information related processing (see Z2255 in Fig. 300), if the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in Fig. 300: Yes) and the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5004 in Fig. 300: No), it is read out (Z5005 in Fig. 300) and used to judge whether or not consecutive performances will be executed (Z5006 in Fig. 96).

This continuous performance execution selection table 222aa specifies whether or not a continuous performance is to be executed in accordance with the value of one performance counter in the performance counter group 223aa, the current number of reserved balls, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol included in the winning information received this time. Specifically, the more balls currently reserved, the easier it is to execute a continuous performance, and it is specified that a continuous performance is more likely to be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol included in the winning information received this time indicates a jackpot than when the lottery result indicates a miss.

This configuration makes it easier to execute consecutive effects with a long execution period (the number of times special symbols change to be executed), and when consecutive effects are executed, it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation of a big win. This allows the player to play for a long period of time with heightened anticipation of a big win, improving the effect of the performance.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous performance ends, that is, when the variable performance corresponding to the winning information that has been determined to execute the continuous performance ends (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 301), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 301), and if it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes in FIG. 301), a determination is made as to whether to execute the continuous performance again, and even in this case, the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa is referenced to determine whether to execute the continuous performance (Z5109 in FIG. 301).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the continuous performance for newly entered game balls while the continuous performance is being executed, thereby increasing the frequency with which the continuous performance is executed. In addition, it is possible to make the period during which the continuous performance is executed longer than the upper limit of reserved numbers (4) for special pattern 1, making it difficult for the player to understand which reserved pattern the continuous performance is being executed for, providing the player with the fun of predicting the game.

In this control example, the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance, is specified as described above, but other contents may also be specified. For example, a timing means (e.g., a real-time clock (RTC)) that keeps track of the current time may be provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the rate at which the continuous performance is executed may be changed in accordance with the timing contents of the timing means.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that during a specified period (for example, one hour from 10:00 AM), consecutive performances are executed only if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. By configuring the system in this way, even if the same consecutive performances are executed, the degree of expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the timing (time) at which the consecutive performances are executed, and it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a guide notification means for notifying the player that consecutive performances will be executed only if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot during the specified period, and a period notification means for notifying the player of the remaining period (or the elapsed period) of the specified period. This allows the player to play while expecting the consecutive performances to be executed.

In addition, a means for determining the operation content of the operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the frame button 22) and a discrimination means for determining the launch status of the game ball (or the ball entry status) may be provided, and the rate at which the continuous performance is executed may be changed in accordance with the discrimination results of these discrimination means. The above-mentioned multiple contents may be appropriately combined or used individually.

In addition, in this control example, the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), is used to determine whether or not to execute a continuous performance in the stop command process (see FIG. 3017). However, the selection table referenced when determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) and the stop command process (see FIG. 301) may be different. In this case, for example, the contents of the selection table may be specified so that the selection table referenced in the stop command process (see FIG. 301) has a higher chance of winning a special symbol when a continuous performance is executed than the selection table referenced in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300). As a result, the longer the period during which the continuous performance is executed, the higher the chance of winning a jackpot, and the more interesting the game becomes.

Next, referring to FIG. 293(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this second control example will be described. FIG. 293(b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this second control example. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that a performance counter group 223aa, a continuous performance flag 223ab, a continuous performance in progress flag 223ac, a continuous performance interruption flag 223ad, a continuous performance update area 223ae, a performance count counter 223af, a performance setting prohibition flag 223ag, a setting prohibition release flag 223ah, a time reduction counter 223ai, a fluctuation count counter 223j, an operation invalid flag 223ak, and a status storage area 223az are added.

The performance counter group 223aa is composed of multiple counter means for performance. This performance counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting a performance variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol) and selecting various preview performances. Each of the multiple counters in this performance counter group 223aa stores a random number value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generating IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the random number generating IC is an IC that can operate at an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can update each performance counter to a different random number value and perform a judgment.

The values of the multiple counters in the performance counter group 223aa are used when making various judgments performed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as determining the performance change pattern (change pattern of the third symbol), whether or not continuous performances can be performed, and the types of various advance notice performances, and are updated so that the counter values are not synchronized. The multiple counters in the performance counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and an update process is performed so that the values become different each time main process 2 (see FIG. 298) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 ms).

In this control example, when selecting multiple effects based on the value of the effect counter, multiple effect counters with different update values are used. Therefore, even when selecting multiple effects within one main process, the same counter value is referenced, preventing bias in the selected effects. However, for example, if you want to synchronize multiple effect modes selected in different processes within one main process, you can configure it so that the same effect counter is used to select the effect modes.

In addition, in this control example, multiple counters with different counter value update patterns are used, but for example, a random value may be calculated using the update value of one performance counter, and each performance may be selected using the calculated value. By configuring in this way, the number of counters possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, it is advisable to calculate the update values of the performance counters so that each value has no regularity, for example, the last digit value, the last 2 digit value, and the last digit and last 2 digit value of the value obtained by multiplying the first digit value by the second digit value are added together.

The continuous performance flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the conditions for executing the continuous performance have been met, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the continuous performance are met. Specifically, it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 300) when it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 300) or when it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed in the stop command process (see FIG. 301) of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z5110: Yes in FIG. 301), and is set to OFF (Z5401 in FIG. 305) when the continuous performance setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 305) is executed in the performance setting process (Z5204 in FIG. 304) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303).

In other words, this continuous performance flag 223ab determines whether to execute a continuous performance based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and retains the result of the determination that a continuous performance will be executed until the timing of setting the variable display corresponding to the next variation of special pattern 1.

In this control example, the continuous performance is executed when it is determined in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) that the continuous performance is to be executed (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 300), the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on (Z5008 in FIG. 300), and the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on and the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the continuous performance will be started in the current variable display, and the variable display that will start the continuous performance is determined based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the timing when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous performance is started can be made different (the continuous performance is started after the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, with a variable display that does not execute the continuous performance in between), making it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous performance.

In addition, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), if it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed, the performance corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to a continuous performance. By configuring in this way, the timing when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous performance starts can be made closer, so that the player can easily grasp the ball that is the target of the continuous performance. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous performance, the player can be motivated to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 while the special pattern is changing (the variable display is being executed), and the operation of the game can be improved.

When changing the presentation corresponding to the currently running variable display to a continuous presentation, it is advisable to determine the display content or elapsed period of the currently running variable display, and change the presentation corresponding to the currently running variable display to a continuous presentation only when the conditions for changing the presentation are met (for example, the variable display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is in a display mode that is difficult for the player to see (rapidly changing)). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming confused by a sudden change in the currently running presentation.

In addition, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the currently executing variable display to a continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the currently executing variable display and displayed. In this case, it is advisable to provide a display area dedicated to the continuous effect. This can prevent the player from becoming confused even if a continuous effect is suddenly executed.

The continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that a continuous performance is being executed, and is set to on when a continuous performance is being executed. Specifically, in the performance setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 30300) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), when the continuous performance setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 304) is executed and a continuous performance command for display is set (Z5406 in FIG. 305), the flag is set to on (Z5408 in FIG. 305).

It is then referenced (Z5505 in Fig. 306) in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in Fig. 304) for setting an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, and is set to off (Z5116 in Fig. 301) if it is determined in the stop command process (see Fig. 301) that the continuous effect will not continue any further (Z5106: No or Z5110: No in Fig. 301).

The continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous performance is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous performance is interrupted. Here, a brief explanation will be given of the events that interrupt the continuous performance. In this control example, the continuous performance is configured to be executed based on winning information regarding the first special pattern (special pattern 1), which is a special pattern change that is actually executed when the game state is in a normal state (a state in which the game state is not in a special probability state or a time-saving state). In addition, in this control example, the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is configured to be consumed with priority over the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and the gameability (type of special pattern change executed) is configured to be different between the special probability state and the time-saving state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640a and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, in order to temporarily make it easier to win the lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) even when the game state is normal, in some cases where the lottery result for the normal pattern is a winning one, an electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640a and is configured to restrict the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640a, so that a winning game is executed in which the device is open for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds).

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, while a continuous performance was being executed using multiple winning information related to the first special symbol, a game ball could enter the second ball entrance 640a, causing the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol to be executed in preference to the first special symbol. When such a situation occurred, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed even though the continuous performance executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol was being executed, causing a problem that the content of the performance being executed and the lottery result for the special symbol differed, causing a sense of distrust among the player.

Therefore, in this control example, if the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is changed while a continuous performance is being performed, the continuous performance is interrupted, and if the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is changed, the interrupted continuous performance is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the content of the performance being performed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different, and prevents players from feeling distrustful.

This continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507 in FIG. 306) when it is determined that the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to on (Z5505: Yes in FIG. 306) in the special performance setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Then, when this continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on, a display interruption command is set to execute a "waiting" display (see interruption display mode ma in FIG. 291 (b)) to indicate that the continuous performance is interrupted on the third symbol display device 81 (Z5508 in FIG. 306). Then, in the performance setting process (see FIG. 304), if the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 304), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 304).

By configuring it in this way, if the change (lottery) of the second special pattern (special pattern 2), which is given priority over the change (lottery) of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), begins during the execution of a continuous performance set to target the change of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the continuous performance can be interrupted, and the interrupted continuous performance can be resumed at the timing when the change of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is executed (the timing when the change of special pattern 2 ends), so that the continuous performance can be executed in response to the change of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) regardless of the change status of the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

In addition, if the continuous performance is interrupted based on the change in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the execution of the continuous performance, the player is notified that the continuous performance has been interrupted. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable as if the continuous performance has suddenly ended, and allows the player to play in the hope that the continuous performance will resume.

The continuous performance update area 223ae is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous performance when the continuous performance is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the continuous performance execution period, i.e., when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous performance execution period and the background of the display screen is changed from an "ocean background" to another background ("mountain background", "river background"),

As described above with reference to FIG. 87(a), in this control example, the continuous performance is executed only when "ocean background (ocean mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The background of this display screen is configured to be variable by the player operating the frame button 22, and is configured so that, for example, when the special pattern change is not being executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special pattern change (during high-speed change), the background of the display screen is switched in the order of "ocean background (ocean mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 292), and "river background (river mode)".

Then, as a variation effect corresponding to the set background, a variation effect specific to each background or a variation effect common to multiple backgrounds is executed. By configuring it in this way, the presentation mode of the variation effect for showing the result of the variation (lottery) of the special pattern can be varied based on the display mode (background) that the player can variably set, so a variety of presentations can be provided to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when the background of the display screen is variably set while a variable performance exclusive to the sea mode (e.g., continuous preview) is being executed while the sea mode is set, a process is executed to rewrite the display data related to the variable performance so that the variable performance corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, if a player accidentally operates the frame button 22 while a continuous performance is being performed and switches the background of the display screen from "sea mode" to "mountain mode," the display data related to the continuous performance is erased, and even if the player operates the frame button 22 again to switch the display screen to "sea mode," the continuous performance is not performed, resulting in a problem of reduced performance effect.

To solve this problem, in this control example, a continuous performance update area 223ae is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to something other than "sea mode" while a continuous performance is being executed, the execution data of the continuous performance is temporarily stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae, so that if the background of the display screen is switched to something other than "sea mode" while a continuous performance is being executed, and then the background of the display screen is switched back to "sea mode" again, the remaining continuous performances can be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the continuous performances from disappearing due to incorrect operation by the player.

In the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 305), after the continuous performance mode is determined (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 305), if it is determined that the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z5405 in FIG. 305: No), display data relating to the determined continuous performance mode is stored in this continuous performance update area 223ae (see Z5409 in FIG. 305).

Then, in the performance return process (see FIG. 308) of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (see FIG. 307), when the background mode is switched to "sea mode" (Z2871 in FIG. 308: Yes), the stored information is referenced and a display performance command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 308). After that, when the continuous performance ends, the information stored in the area (display data indicating the performance mode) is erased (see Z5310 in FIG. 304).

The effect count counter 223af is a counter for indicating the period during which the continuous effect is executed (the number of times the special symbol changes). When it is determined in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), this effect count counter 223af sets the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a corresponding to the received winning command (Z5010 in FIG. 300). Then, when it is determined in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) that the counter value is greater than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 304: Yes), the continuous effect setting process for setting the continuous effect is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 304).

The value of this performance count counter 223af is decremented by 1 each time the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 305) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 305). By configuring it in this way, continuous performance can be executed using the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute continuous performance by the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is executed, that is, the period from the variable display executed while the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on to the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute continuous performance.

In this control example, the continuous performance is executed using the above-mentioned period, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous performance. For example, the continuous performance may be started by changing the performance mode of the variable display being executed at the timing when it is determined that the continuous performance is to be executed, or the continuous performance may be executed when the number of times the first special pattern (special pattern 1) changes becomes two when the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on. In addition, when the display mode of a new variable display is set (when variable display setting process 2 is executed) when the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on, an execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the continuous performance may be provided, and the continuous performance may be executed when it is determined by the execution determination means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the continuous performance starts, and to provide a performance that is unexpected.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous performance from being set during the execution of the continuous performance, and is set to ON during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 300) when it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 300). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the processing for determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) (processing of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 300) is skipped. This makes it possible to prevent a new continuous performance from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a new continuous performance from being started while the player is paying close attention to the progress of the continuous performance, which causes the player to feel dissatisfied. Then, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301), if it is determined that the continuous performance has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5103 in FIG. 301).

In this control example, the determination as to whether or not to execute a continuous performance is made not only when a new winning command is received, i.e., when the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is executed, but also when a stop command is received to end the continuous performance, i.e., when it is determined in the stop command process (Z2259 in FIG. 301) that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes). Therefore, even if it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 301) that a continuous performance will be executed, the flag is set to on (Z5111 in FIG. 301).

The time-saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times (remaining number of times the special symbol changes) for which the time-saving state is set when the time-saving state is set as the game state. When a state command indicating that the game state has transitioned to the time-saving state is received from the main control device 110, this time-saving counter 223ai is set to a value corresponding to the number of times the time-saving state is set (100 in this control example), and is decremented by 1 each time the time-saving process (see FIG. 302), which is executed when it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 301) that the current game state is in the time-saving state (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 301), is executed (see Z5151 in FIG. 302).

Then, during the time-saving process (see FIG. 302), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is set to 5.

The variation counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the number of variations of the special pattern after the time-saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is in the normal state, a special performance (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed when the variation (lottery) of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is executed. This is to give a bonus when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special pattern (special pattern 2) changes in the normal state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. However, when the game state is in the time-saving state, that is, when the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 (when the electric role 640a is easily opened), the reservation of the special pattern 2 is obtained, and the variation of the second special pattern corresponding to the reservation (special pattern 2 reservation) may be executed in the normal state after the time-saving state ends. Even in such cases, if special effects were executed, they would occur frequently after the time-saving feature had finished, making it difficult to give players a sense of exclusivity from the special effects.

To address the above-mentioned problem, in this control example, the special effects are not executed when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed within a specified period after the time-saving feature has ended. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of times the special symbol changes after the time-saving feature has ended has reached a specified number (five times in this control example), and if it is determined that the specified number (five times) has not been reached, the special effects are not set. This makes it possible to prevent special effects from occurring frequently after the time-saving feature has ended.

In this control example, the number of times the special symbol changes after the time-saving feature ends is set to 5, i.e., a value greater than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is set as the predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the time-saving feature ends with the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) at the upper limit, the reserved balls for special symbol 2 acquired during the time-saving feature are reliably prevented from executing a special effect. However, conditions other than the above-mentioned control example may be set as conditions for not executing a special effect. For example, a value (e.g., 3) less than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) may be set as the predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit at the end of the time-saving feature, the special effect will be executed, so that players can be motivated to save reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the condition for not setting the special effect is set using the number of times the special symbol changes, but other conditions may be set. For example, a measuring means may be provided that measures the elapsed time since the time-saving state ended, and the condition for not setting the special effect may be set such that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means does not exceed a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). By setting the condition based on the elapsed time in this way, it is possible to prevent restrictions on the execution of special effects for the next player's game, for example, in cases where the game ends immediately after the time-saving state ends (when the game ends without changing the special symbol after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is restored).

In addition, a game state determination means may be provided to determine the game state at the time when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and if the game state determination means determines that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 during a time-saving state, the system may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of a special effect as a variable display in response to the ball entering.

When the time-saving processing (see FIG. 302) determines that the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302: Yes), the value (5 in this control example) indicating the number of times the special symbol changes, which restricts (prohibits) the execution of the special effect, is set to this counter (Z5153 in FIG. 302), and this value is decremented by 1 each time the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) for setting the special effect, the value of the variable counter 223aj is referenced, and when it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 312: No), the normal effect mode is set without setting the special effect mode (Z5510 in FIG. 312).

The operation invalid flag 223ak is a flag for indicating the period during which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is invalid, and is set to on during the period during which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is invalid. In this control example, as described above, a special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special pattern, and the background of the display screen cannot be switched during the period during which this special effect is being executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the frame button 22 during the period during which an effect that is difficult to execute (special effect) is being executed, and to prevent the background of the display screen from being switched while the special effect is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223ak is set on (Z5504 in FIG. 306) when the special effect mode is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306), and is set off (Z5302 in FIG. 304) when the variable effect of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is set in the effect setting process (FIG. 304) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 304). And while this operation invalid flag 223ak is set on, the process of changing the background of the display screen (processing of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 307) in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 103) is skipped.

The status storage area 223az is an area for storing status information for indicating the current game status based on the status command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 299) that a status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 299: Yes), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 299). Note that in this control example, each piece of information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, but in this pachinko machine 10, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a status command for indicating the current game status, so that even if the power supply is turned off (such as a power outage), the voice lamp control device 113 can appropriately determine the game status.

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 294 to Fig. 297, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second control example will be described. In this second control example, the main difference is that the special symbol variation process (Fig. 244) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (Fig. 294), the special symbol 1 variation start process (Fig. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (Fig. 247) are changed to the special symbol variation start process 2 (Fig. 295), the start winning process (Fig. 248) is changed to the start winning process 2 (Fig. 296), and the look-ahead process (Fig. 249) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (Fig. 297).

With reference to FIG. 294, the special pattern variation process 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special pattern variation process 2 (Z154). The special pattern variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 295) in this second control example differs from the special pattern variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) in the first control example in that the processing of Z203 to Z214 has been changed to processing of Z330 to Z340. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: Fig. 295), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during special symbol jackpot play) and the period during a specified time after the special symbol jackpot play ends. If the determination results in a special symbol jackpot (Z201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is obtained (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e obtained is 1 or more (Z331). If it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z331: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Z332), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (Z333). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing Z333, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In processing Z265, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, special pattern change start processing 2 is executed to start the changing display on the first pattern display device (Z340).

On the other hand, in the process of Z331, if it is determined that the acquired value (N2) of the reserved ball count counter 203e for special pattern 2 is 0 (Z331: No), the value (N1) of the reserved ball count counter 203d for special pattern 1 is acquired (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d obtained is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Z337), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z338). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing Z338, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In processing Z339, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in sequence. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from reserved area 1 to execution area, from reserved area 2 to reserved area 1, from reserved area 3 to reserved area 2, and from reserved area 4 to reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, special pattern change start processing 2 is executed to start the change display on the first pattern display device (Z340). The special pattern change start processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 295. On the other hand, in processing Z336, if the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter is 0 (Z336: No), this processing is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 295, we will explain the special pattern change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this second control example. The difference between this and the special pattern change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) in this second control example is that the special pattern 1 change start process (Z209: FIG. 246) and the special pattern 2 change start process (214: FIG. 247) in the first control example are carried out together. The processing content is the same as in the first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 296, the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this second control example will be described. The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) in this second control example differs from the start winning process (Z105: FIG. 248) in the first control example in that the processes Z308 and Z316 are not executed, and the process Z320 is executed together with the process Z360. The process content is the same as in the first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 297, we will explain look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is one process within start winning process 2 (Z155) executed by MPU 201 of main control unit 110 in this second control example. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of look-ahead process 2 (Z360).

In the pre-reading process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), this process ends as it is. If it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the values of the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 corresponding to the current winning are obtained from the special pattern reserved ball storage area (Z362). Next, from among the determination results specified in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a, the winning determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is obtained (Z363). Next, from among the determination results specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the winning type determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the special winning type counter C2 is obtained (Z364).

Next, from among the judgment results specified in the stop type selection table, a stop type judgment result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is obtained (Z365). Next, from among the judgment results specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a fluctuation type judgment result corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is obtained (Z366). Next, a winning information command including hit judgment result information indicating the acquired hit judgment result, hit type information indicating the hit type judgment result, stop type information indicating the stop type judgment result, and fluctuation type information for indicating the fluctuation type judgment result is set (Z367), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 298 to Fig. 308. In this second control example, the main difference from the first control example is that the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107), which is one process within the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, has been changed to frame button input monitoring and performance processing 2 (Z2151), the command determination processing (Z2113) has been changed to command determination processing 2 (Z2152), and the variable display setting processing (Z2114) has been changed to variable display setting processing 2 (Z2153).

With reference to FIG. 299, we will explain command determination process 2 (Z2152) in main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In command determination process 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d in RAM 223 is set to on (Z2251), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this process ends. Note that the processes Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, if it is determined in the processing of Z2206 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether winning command information has been received (Z2253). If a winning information command has been received (Z2253: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, winning information related processing (Z2255) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the winning information related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 300.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2253 that a winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that a status command has been received (Z2256: Yes), status information indicating the game status corresponding to the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223az (Z2257), and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2256 that a status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2258). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), stop command processing (Z2259) is executed. Details of stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. 301. Next, the stop display of the third pattern is set (Z2260), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2258 that a stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 300, we will explain the winning information related process (Z2255), which is one process within the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning information related process (Z2255).

The winning information related process (Z2255) first stores the information of the received winning information command in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the value read from the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is 2 or greater (Z5003). If it is not 2 or greater (Z5003: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z5003, if the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a that was read is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the continuous effect (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if a continuous performance is to be executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read counter value is set as the value of the performance count counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

Referring to FIG. 301, we will explain the stop command process (Z2259), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command process (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in time-saving mode (Z5101). If it is determined that the game state is in time-saving mode (Z5101: Yes), the time-saving mode process (Z5115) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the time-saving mode process (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. 302. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not in time-saving mode (Z5101: No) in the process of Z5101, it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). If the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set to off (Z5103), and the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a that was read is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that it is not 2 or more (Z5105: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5105, if it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a being 2 or more is read from the winning information storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information of a jackpot (Z5107). If it is determined that there is no winning jackpot (Z5107: No), the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and this process ends. If it is determined that there is winning information of a jackpot (Z5107: Yes), the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read (Z5108), and it is determined whether the continuous performance is to be executed (Z5109). After executing the process of Z5109, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the continuous performance (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous performance (Z5110: No), the process of Z5116 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is time to execute a continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a corresponding to the big win is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 302, we will explain the time-saving processing (Z5115), which is one process within the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving processing (Z5115).

In the time-saving process (Z5115), first, the value of the time-saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). If it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5152 that the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is greater than 0 (Z5153: No), the process of Z5153 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Referring to Figure 303, we will explain variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one process within main process 2 (Figure 298) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. Figure 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). Variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in this second control example differs from variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The extracted variation pattern is obtained in the process of Z5202 (Z5203). Next, the performance setting process (Z5204) is executed. Details of the performance setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 304.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation count counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). If it is determined that the value of the variation count counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the variation count counter 223aj is decremented by 1 (Z5208). In the processing of Z5207, if it is determined that the value of the variation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the processing of Z5208 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 304, we will explain the performance setting process (Z5204), which is one process within the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of this performance setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current change is a change in the first special pattern (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special pattern (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303). If it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5304). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5303 that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of Z5304 is skipped.

After executing the process of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the performance count counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (Z5305: Yes), the continuous performance setting process (Z5306) is executed and this process is terminated. Details of the continuous performance setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 305.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, if the value of the performance count counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), a variation pattern that does not involve continuous performance is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5308). If the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301, if it is determined that the current variation is not a variation of the first special pattern (Z5301: No), a special performance setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the contents of the special performance setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

Referring to FIG. 305, we will explain the continuous performance setting process (Z5306), which is one process within the performance setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous performance setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous performance setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the performance count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). If it is determined that the value of the performance count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the continuous performance final mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, if the value of the performance count counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous performance continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the current background mode is set to sea mode (Z5405). If it is determined that the setting is sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a display continuous performance command is set to indicate the determined performance mode (Z5406). Next, the value of the performance count counter 223af is decremented by 1 (Z5407), the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to on (Z5408), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set mode is not sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined performance mode is stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command is set to indicate that continuous performance is waiting (Z5410). Then, the processes Z5407 to Z5408 described above are executed, and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 306, we will explain the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (Z5501). If it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving mode (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the special effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to on (Z5505). If it is set to on (Z5505: Yes), it is then determined whether the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506). If it is set to off (Z5506: No), the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507), and a display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display performance command corresponding to the determined performance mode is set (Z5509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5501 that the time is being shortened (Z5501: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z5502 that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No), the normal performance mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern is set (Z5510), the above-mentioned process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of Z5505 that the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is off (Z5505: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z5506 that the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506: Yes), the above-mentioned processes of Z5507 to Z5508 are skipped, the process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Referring to FIG. 307, the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (Z2151). This second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107) in the first control example in that the processes Z2851 and Z2852 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The process of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on (Z2851). If it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same process as Z2803 to Z2804 in the first control example is executed, and then the performance return process (Z2852) is executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 308, we will explain the performance return process (Z2852), which is one process within the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance return process (Z2852).

In the performance return process (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the background mode is "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the performance mode stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae is read (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display performance command corresponding to the stored performance mode is set (Z2874), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 307, the explanation will continue. The performance return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on (Z2851: Yes), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example described above will be explained with reference to Figures 309 to 312. In the third control example described above, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) starts while the continuous performance is being performed, the continuous performance being performed is interrupted, and the continuous performance that was interrupted when the variation of the first special symbol starts after the variation of the special symbol 2 ends is resumed. This allows the continuous performance to be performed in response to the variation of the first special symbol, and the continuous performance can be enjoyed until the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, if the continuous performance is interrupted, it will always resume after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the special chart 2 has finished changing), so the player cannot be excited about whether the continuous performance will resume or not, and so there was a demand for further enhancing the performance effect. In contrast, in the third control example, a determination is made as to whether or not to resume the interrupted continuous performance based on the game content (the number of times the special chart 2 changes) when the continuous performance is interrupted and the lottery result of the special chart 1 that is the target of the continuous performance, and the continuous performance is resumed based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when the continuous performance is interrupted, the player can enjoy the special performance executed as the special chart 2 change performance while predicting whether the continuous performance will resume or not, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this third control example, the continuous performance is configured to be easily resumed when the lottery result for the special chart 1 that is the target of the continuous performance is a jackpot. This allows the player to play while hoping that the continuous performance will be resumed. Also, in the third control example, the continuous performance is configured to be more likely to be resumed the fewer the number of special chart 2 changes (number of times special performances are executed) that are executed while the continuous performance is interrupted. This makes it easier for the continuous performance to be resumed when the period between interruption and resumption of the continuous performance is short, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if a long time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result for the special chart 1 that is the subject of the continuous performance is a miss, the continuous performance is configured to be difficult to resume in order to prevent players from having unnecessary expectations of a jackpot.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 309. Fig. 309 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example. In this third control example, in addition to the RAM 223 of the second control example described above, a special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added, which is different. The other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The special symbol 2 variation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol. When the special effect setting process 2 (Fig. 312) sets the special effect mode, the counter value is incremented by 1 (Z5551 in Fig. 312), and the counter value is referenced in the continuous effect return process (see Fig. 311) in the effect setting process 2 (see Fig. 310) (Z5602 in Fig. 311). In the process of Z5602, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 in Fig. 311: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603 in Fig. 311). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 variation counter 223ba is 3 or more (Z5602: No in FIG. 311), that is, if the second special pattern variation is executed three or more times while the continuous performance is interrupted, it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a jackpot among the winning information corresponding to the first special pattern (Z5605 in FIG. 311), and if it is determined that there is not (Z5605 in FIG. 311: Yes), the value of the performance count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 311), and the processing of Z5603 described above is executed.

In other words, in the continuous performance return process (see FIG. 311), when the interrupted continuous performance is resumed, if the number of times that the special chart 2 changed during the interruption of the continuous performance is a predetermined number (three times) or more, a decision is made as to whether or not to resume the continuous performance based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special chart 1 at that time. If the result of the continuous performance is a miss, the player will only be disappointed even if the continuous performance is resumed. Therefore, the value of the performance count counter 223af is set to 0, and the continuous performance is not resumed. As a result, if a long period of time has passed since the interruption of the continuous performance and the lottery result of the special chart 1 that is the target of the continuous performance is a miss, it is possible to prevent the player from having unnecessary expectations for a jackpot, and to have expectations for a jackpot when the continuous performance is resumed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 310 to Fig. 312, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the second control example mainly in that the content of the performance setting process (Z5204: Fig. 304), which is one process in the variable performance setting process 2 (Z2153: Fig. 303), has been partially changed. The other processes are the same, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 310, we will explain performance setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of variable display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example. Performance setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 310) in this third control example differs from performance setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304) in the second control example in that Z5310 processing is not executed, the processing content of the special performance process (Z5311) has been changed, and a continuous performance return process (Z5351) has been added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The continuous performance return process (Z5351) will be explained with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous performance return process (Z5351).

In the continuous performance return process (Z5351), first, the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special chart 2 fluctuation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined that it is greater than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the winning information corresponding to the special chart 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether the winning information read out includes a winning prize (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning prize (Z5605: No), the value of the performance count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed to terminate this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5605 that a winning prize has been won (Z5605: Yes), the processing of Z5603 is executed and this processing ends.

Referring to FIG. 312, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 312) in this third control example differs from the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example in that after executing the process of Z5504, a process of adding 1 to the value of the special effect 2 fluctuation counter 223ba (Z5551) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 313 to Fig. 324. This fourth control example is different from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that it has an adjustment means that allows the player to adjust the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10.

First, the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 313. FIG. 313 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it is provided with volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, we will explain the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. The RTC 292 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and is configured as a real-time clock that can keep track of the current time. This RTC 292 has an input/output port, a device control unit, and a register. In addition, an RTC power supply is connected to the RTC 292. This RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 that is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even in a power-off state in which the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. For example, a button battery is used as the RTC power supply 353, and it is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input/output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292. The input/output port is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so that they can communicate with each other. The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as keeping track of the current time and writing data.

A register is a memory area that can temporarily store data and perform calculations on the stored data. A register has at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

The clock register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the timing information measured in this clock register, it is determined whether or not a time performance is in progress.

In this embodiment, the device is configured to determine whether to store the value of the clock register (time information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) or the time information stored in the time information storage area in the power-on time storage area of the RAM 223 based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on. In other words, if the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed, the device is configured to store the time information stored in the time information storage area in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without the RAM erase switch 122 being pressed, the device is configured to store the value of the clock register (time information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) in the power-on time storage area.

As a result, the hall staff can simultaneously power on all the pachinko machines 10 at opening time, etc., without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, and the time elapsed since power-on can be matched for each pachinko machine 10. This allows the execution period of the time effects to be matched for each pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, when some of the pachinko machines 10 are powered off during the business hours of the hall (for example, to clear an error), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, so that the timing information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the power-on time storage area. This prevents the execution timing of the time effects from differing between the pachinko machine 10 whose power has been cut off and the other pachinko machines 10.

Next, referring to Fig. 314 and X, the display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Fig. 314(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 314(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in a standby state in which no game is being played, X(a) is a schematic diagram showing the customer waiting screen in a state in which no special symbol variation has been performed since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and X(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen during the first special symbol variation since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the message "Please wait a moment" as a display mode S1 during recovery to notify the user of the period until the recovery process of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 is completed, and displays a volume gauge S2 to indicate the currently set volume. This volume gauge S2 is formed of a horizontal gauge that visually displays the current volume, and a setting value display to the right of the gauge that indicates the current volume as a number. In FIG. 314, the setting value "1" is displayed, and the gauge displays a shaded area corresponding to the setting value "1". Details will be described later, but this control example is configured so that the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314(b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, a volume gauge S2 and a volume switching display S3 are displayed. The volume switching display S3 is formed of a "switch" display to indicate that the volume can be switched, a volume decrease display mode S3a indicating that the volume will decrease when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume will increase when the right volume button 23b is pressed. With this volume switching display S3 displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b.

Here, in conventional gaming machines, when committing fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, fraudulently manipulating the control contents of the main control device 110 in an attempt to win a jackpot), some players turn off the power to the pachinko machine 10 and then commit the fraudulent act. To make such fraudulent acts easier to detect, some pachinko machines are designed to emit a loud noise when the power is turned on.

However, in recent years, many pachinko machines 10 emit a temporary loud sound as a method of enhancing the presentation effect, and in an arcade where multiple pachinko machines 10 are in operation, there has been a problem in that the loud sound emitted when the power is turned on can be missed by arcade staff. In response to this, in this fourth control example, a sound quieter than the minimum value of the volume setting range that can be variably set by the player is output from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the first special pattern variation ends. By configuring it in this way, a gaming machine that emits a loud sound during normal play can create an unnatural state compared to surrounding gaming machines by emitting a quieter sound than necessary, making it easier for arcade staff to find.

In addition, this control example is configured so that the player cannot adjust the volume from when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on until the first special pattern variation ends, which prevents a player who has committed fraud from adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the volume button 23 after powering on so that the volume is the same as that of surrounding pachinko machines 10.

Specifically, as shown in X(a), the customer waiting screen after power-on displays the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 314(b) above, and is configured so that the volume switch display S3 is not displayed. In this way, although the volume output is lower than the volume setting value "1" internally, by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen, it is possible to prevent a cheating player from realizing that the pachinko machine 10 has anti-cheating measures in place by looking at the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, as shown in X(b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed during the special pattern change on the first spin after the power is turned on (when a volume lower than the set value "1" is being output), the volume switch display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this fourth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 316 to 318. The same elements as those in the above-mentioned control examples are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 316. In the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example, the difference is that volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) are provided, and the rest is the same as in the above-mentioned control examples.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 317(a). FIG. 317(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this fourth control example is significantly different from the ROMs of the above-mentioned control examples in that a volume table 222ca is provided. All other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table that specifies the volume setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23. The contents of the volume table 222ca will now be described with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram that shows the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 318, in addition to the setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 (setting values "1" to "4"), the volume table 222ca also specifies a setting value (setting value "A") that is set when a specified condition is met after power is turned on, and the specified setting value is set depending on the state.

Specifically, the setting value "A" is set until the special pattern variation (special pattern variation) of the first spin after power is turned on is completed. When the setting value "A" is set, a sound of 15 db (decibels) is output. Also, when the setting value "1" is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound of 30 db (decibels) is output, when the setting value "2" is set, a sound of 75 db (decibels) is output, when the setting value "3" is set, a sound of 85 db (decibels) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, a sound of 95 db (decibels) is output.

In this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value after power is turned on, but the initial volume value may be set in response to various conditions. For example, a flag may be provided that is set to on only when the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, and if the flag is set to on, the setting value "3" may be set as the initial value. Alternatively, the time when the power is turned on may be determined, and a different setting value may be set as the initial value based on the result of the determination.

Next, referring to FIG. 317(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the above-described second control example in that a set volume memory area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cb, and a volume change standby flag 223cc have been added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted with the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The set volume memory area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set volume, and stores the setting value set during the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 320) of start-up process 4 (see FIG. 319) (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 320). Also, the setting value set during the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) of main process 4 (see FIG. 321) of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 322).

The volume operation invalid flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period during which the change in volume (change in set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is invalid, and is set to ON during the period during which the change in volume (change in set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is invalid. This volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 320) when it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 116) that the RTC time is during business hours (for example, 10:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m.) (Z6002: Yes in FIG. 320), and is referenced in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) (Z6107 in FIG. 322). If it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the process of Z6107 (see Z6107 in FIG. 322), a display volume command is set (Z6110 in FIG. 322) for displaying only the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 314(a)) without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 314(b)). Then, it is set to OFF in the volume-related process (see FIG. 324) executed in the stop command process 4 (FIG. 323) (Z5122 in FIG. 324). In other words, if the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON when the special pattern variation is stopped, it is set to OFF.

The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to on when the volume can be adjusted. In this third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is first necessary to press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third pattern display device 81. Then, with the volume switching display S3 displayed, the volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed if the volume button 23 is pressed by mistake during play.

When the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation with the RAM clear switch 122 operated (depressed) at the time of power-on, a sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared may be output at the maximum volume set by operation or at a volume higher than the maximum volume set by operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud such as fraudulently clearing the RAM to target the winning random number value.

In addition, in this control example, the game sound is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation until one variation at the time of power-on is completed, but it is not limited to this. After power-on, the sound such as BGM and sound effects (sound for performance) when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation, and the third symbol display device 81 may display a display indicating the setting state of the volume, and the volume may be maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. By configuring in this way, when the game starts at the opening of the game store after power-on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (the volume setting of the previous day), and the player is surprised by the output at a high volume. Furthermore, by setting the volume lower than the minimum volume, the player can be made aware that the volume is low while preventing harm to the player, and can be made aware that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. It is also possible to configure the volume to be switched to a volume lower than the minimum by switching to a demo screen regardless of when the power is turned on, and to display the volume setting screen. Furthermore, after the game has started (the special symbols start to change), during the period when the volume button 23 is not operated and the volume setting remains lower than the minimum volume, the display color (volume symbol or volume button (operation to the right increases the volume, operation to the left decreases the volume)) on the volume setting screen may be changed to notify the expectation of a win depending on the winning lottery result of the special symbol that has been changed or the lottery result (pre-read result) of the reserved memory. By configuring it in this way, the game can be enjoyed at a quiet volume until a high expectation change or reserved memory occurs, and the volume can be increased to play at the timing when the expectation becomes high.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to Figures 319 to Z324. In this fourth control example, the main differences from the first control example are that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the start-up process, a volume setting process (Z2171) and a sound editing/output process (Z2109) are added to the main process, and a volume-related process (Z5120) is added to the stop command process, which is one process in the command determination process.

The startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 319. The startup process in this fourth control example (FIG. 319) differs from the startup process in the first control example (FIG. 275) in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) has been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 320, we will explain the initial volume setting (Z2051), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 319) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

When setting the initial volume, first, the RTC calculation time is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the current time is business hours (Z6002). If it is determined that the current time is not business hours (Z6002: No), setting value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca in ROM 222 and stored in the set volume memory area 223ca in RAM 223 (Z6003), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is business hours (Z6004), setting value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca and stored in the set volume memory area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to on (Z6005), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 321, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 4. The main processing in this fourth control example (FIG. 321) differs from the main processing in the second control example (FIG. 258) in that a volume setting process (Z2171) has been added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 322, we will explain the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of main process 4 (FIG. 321) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this process is terminated. If the volume button has been operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z6102). If it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to on (Z6102: Yes), a setting value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command is set to display a volume gauge corresponding to the read setting value (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command is set to indicate the read setting value (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the set volume memory area 223ca (Z6106), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z6102 that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation disabled flag 223cb is set to on (Z6107). If it is determined that the volume operation disabled flag 223cb is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command is set to show the volume gauge and adjustment display (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to on (Z6109), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z6107 that the volume operation disabled flag 223cb is set to on (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command is set to show the volume gauge (Z6110), and this processing is terminated.

Referring to FIG. 323, the stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in this fourth control example differs from the stop command processing (FIG. 301) in the second control example in that volume-related processing (Z5120) has been added. As the other processing is the same as that in the second control example, detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 324, we will explain the volume-related process (Z5120), which is one process within the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in this fourth control example. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume-related process (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to on (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to off (Z5122), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: No), the processing of Z5122 is not executed, and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 325 to Fig. 345. In this fifth control example, a control process related to the operation of the tilting device 310 (see Fig. 5) provided in the operation device 300 (see Fig. 5) will be described. Note that only the differences from the first control example will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

In this fifth control example, we will mainly explain the initial operation of the tilting device 310 and error handling during the initial operation when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and the control processing and error handling in the operation of the tilting device 310 during normal play.

With reference to Figures 325(a)-(b), the display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. Figure 325(a) is a diagram showing the display mode (error display) of the abnormality notification displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 when the tilting device 310 is not detected at the origin position even when the tilting operation timer 223db described later becomes 0 (the elapsed timing of the initial operation period from the end of the initial operation to the origin position) during the initial operation when the power is turned on (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: Figure 342) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110).

As shown in Fig. 325(a), when the origin sensor of the operating device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position even after the operation period during which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends has elapsed, the text "Button return error A, please call an attendant" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to inform hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. In this control example, during the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the origin position at the end of the initial operation period, an error message as shown in Fig. 325(a) is displayed. In addition, as will be described in detail later, if a player interferes with the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding it down with their hands or other actions, the normal operation that is predetermined by the presentation may not be performed. During normal play, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not displayed immediately. Instead, an error is notified if an abnormality is detected until a specific predetermined condition is met (for example, the tilting device 310 is operated every three changes in the special pattern and an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 four times in a row), and this is configured to suppress malfunctions that interfere with the progress of the game even though there is no mechanical abnormality.

The error display during initial operation is configured to be identifiable as "Button return error A" as shown in FIG. 325(a), making it easy to determine that the error is a mechanical (including control) abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 325(b), when the tilting device 310 is operated in a normal game (during a game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed) and then the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, if the movement to the origin position is not detected by the origin sensor even when the period for the movement to the origin position is completed, an error is not displayed immediately, but the status indicates that an internal abnormality has been detected. After that, the operation to move to the origin position is performed every three changes of the special pattern, and if it is not possible to move to the origin position four times in a row, the words "Button return error B, please call an attendant" are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and an error display is executed to inform the player and hall staff that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310.

Here, by displaying text different from that displayed during the initial operation, such as "Button Return Error B," it is possible to easily identify that an abnormality has occurred during normal play. In this way, in this control example, during normal play, the error display is executed taking into consideration that the player may be playing in a way that interferes with the tilting motion 310, thereby preventing a malfunction in which the error display is executed frequently. Also, when the error display is executed during normal play and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, this means that the player has been playing in a way that interferes with the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time, so that an erroneous operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented early on by hall employees or the like checking the playing method.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the change in the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described with reference to Figures 326 to 328. Figure 326 is a timing chart of an example in which the operation effect of the tilting device 310 is executed when the change in the normal reach miss A is executed as the change pattern of the special symbol (third symbol), and the tilting device 310 is not detected by the origin sensor even when the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (the period when the return to origin is completed).

When the normal reach miss A (fluctuation time (fluctuation period) 30,000 ms) fluctuation display is determined, the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained and compared with one of the judgment values "0 to 149" set in the operation performance selection table 222da described later. If it matches the obtained value of the performance counter 223h, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 333(a)) described later is determined. In the tilting operation scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 333(a)), after the tilting device 310 rises to the highest position (see FIG. 32), an operation is performed in which the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 33 and the highest position (see FIG. 32) are repeated at 0.5 second intervals as a tilting operation, and then the operation of lowering to the position shown in FIG. 22, which is the origin position, is executed (set).

When normal reach miss A is executed, the third symbol will be in reach display mode (the third symbols in the left and right symbol rows are temporarily stopped (stopped) at the same type of symbol) 18 seconds (T1) after the special symbol starts to change. When the reach display mode is reached, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the special symbol starts to change, to suggest that the frame button 22 should be pressed. Here, a valid operation period (T5) is set during which the detection is determined to be valid when the tilt operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is detected by the detection sensor 324 described later during the 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the special symbol starts to change.

As shown in Fig. 326 and Fig. 333(a), 18 seconds (18000 ms) after the normal reach off A starts to fluctuate (T1), the drive motor 342 rotates 210 steps in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Fig. 22), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in Fig. 22) and move to the cam release position shown in Fig. 30 (operation pointer 1 (see Fig. 333(a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see Fig. 333(a))). After the 3-second stop period, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Fig. 30), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 20 degrees counterclockwise and move to the engagement release position (see Fig. 32) (operation pointer 3 (see Fig. 333)(a)).

When moving from the cam release position to the lock release position, as already explained in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the release member 346 is rotated downward (counterclockwise), causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate clockwise, releasing the lock (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347, and the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide a forward/rearward assist to the tilting device 320, increasing the lifting force and improving the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period is awaited until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 333(a))). Then, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 50 degrees counterclockwise and move from the highest position (see FIG. 32) to the tilt-down position (see FIG. 33) rotated 50 degrees downward (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 333(a))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps again in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 33), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 50 degrees clockwise and causing the tilt device 320 to move again to the highest position (see FIG. 32) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 333(a))).

After that, again after 0.5 seconds, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest position to the tilt-down position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 333(a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven from the tilt-down position to the highest position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 333(a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 1 second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 333(a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the performance return operation process (Z2911: FIG. 340) is executed, and the drive motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32) based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 334(a)) described later, so that the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the drive force is transmitted in the direction in which the tilting device 320 descends to the origin position.

In the example shown in FIG. 326, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed at the highest position so that it cannot be lowered by the player. In such a case, as already explained in the first embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is disengaged from the transmission gear 343b, causing the transmission gear 343b to spin freely, so that the disk cam 344 does not rotate even when the drive motor 342 is driven.

Here, if the detection sensor 324 does not detect that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilt operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 334(a)) has elapsed, the tilt operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an internal abnormality of the tilt device 310 (an abnormal state that is not notified to the outside) described below.

In this way, even if there is a risk that the tilt device 320 cannot return from the highest position to the origin position because it is held by the player, the movable clutch 343c allows the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) to spin freely, thereby preventing damage to the drive motor 342, transmission gear 343b, etc. Furthermore, by configuring the tilt operation status to determine if there is an abnormality in the origin return operation, it is possible to identify that an abnormal state exists internally.

Next, referring to FIG. 327, a description will be given of the control that is executed after the tilt operation status is set to "4" when the tilt operation status is set to "4" without the origin sensor turning on even after the origin detection operation period (e.g., 1900 ms) has elapsed when an effect in which the tilt device 310 rises (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 326) is executed. FIG. 327 is a timing chart for the case in which, when the tilt operation status is set to "4," a retry operation is executed to return the tilt device 310 to the origin position every time three variations of the special pattern (special pattern) are executed.

When the tilt operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is executed in which the drive motor 342 is operated to move the tilt device 310 to the origin position every three changes of the special pattern as shown in FIG. 327. In this case, the tilt operation status value is maintained at "4" until the origin sensor is detected, and if the origin sensor does not turn on in four consecutive retry operations (four retry operations every three changes), the error display shown in FIG. 325(b) is executed.

As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in which the tilting device 310 rises and the tilting device 310 executes an origin detection operation, such as the player holding the tilting device 310 in a way that prevents the device from moving to the origin position, an abnormality is not immediately reported as in the case of an abnormality during the initial operation. Instead, a retry operation is performed every time the special pattern changes a specified number of times (three times), and if it is determined that the device still has not been able to move to the origin position in succession, an error is displayed. This prevents problems such as frequent error displays due to player mischief, which can overwhelm the employees of the game arcade.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, when the tilt operation status is set to "4", when a notice performance using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the control in the case of executing the origin detection operation (retry operation) based on the timing when the touch sensor 290 turns on will be described. FIG. 328 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilt device 310 executed when a performance using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The fluctuation of the special symbol starts, a notice performance in which the operation of the touch sensor 290 is valid is selected, the effective period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player performs an operation such as holding his/her hand over the top of the touch sensor 290, and the touch sensor 290 detects that it is on. At the timing when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 detects that it is on, the drive motor 342 of the tilt device 310 is driven and the origin detection operation is executed. FIG. 328 shows a case where the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilt operation status is set to "0". On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on after the origin detection period (e.g., 3600 ms) has elapsed, the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilt operation status is maintained set to "4." This causes the retry operation to continue to be performed every three fluctuations, and control can be executed to resolve the abnormality in the tilt device 310.

A player usually operates the launch handle with his right hand and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with his left hand. When a player plays while holding the tilt device 310 so that it does not return to the origin position, it is considered that the tilt device 310 is held with the left hand. Therefore, by performing the origin detection operation of the tilt device 310 when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin detection operation is performed with the tilt device 310 released from its holding, and the tilt device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, but the origin detection operation may be performed only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the launch handle is on, so that the origin detection operation is more reliably performed with the player's holding released. Also, instead of being limited to the touch sensor 290, a frame button 290 may be used, or a notice to use both hands (for example, text display such as "Raise both hands") may be executed by the third pattern display device 81, or an execution may be executed in which a three-dimensional code or the like is read by a mobile phone or the like, and an origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Naturally, an execution may be an audio notification to use both hands.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 329 to Fig. 334. Fig. 329 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The tilting device 310 has the same detailed configuration as that already described with reference to Figures 5 to 85, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and when the tilting device 310 is at the lowest position, it is driven to release the lock that prevents the tilting device 310 from rising at the lowest position, and when the lock is released, the vibration force in the forward and backward directions of the pachinko machine 10 from the voice coil motor 352 (described later), which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, helps the pachinko machine 10 rise to the highest position by the spring force.

On the other hand, when the tilting member 310 is in the highest position, the drive motor 342 rotates in the opposite direction to when it raises the tilting device 310, moving the tilting device 310 downward to the origin position. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311a is engaged by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 22), restricting the tilting device 310 from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is configured as a transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 13, and is configured as a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R. When the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 22 is restricted at the lower limit position, the left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311gR (OFF state), making it possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. In addition, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed down by the player at the lower limit position, the right detection sensor 324R detects the right detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the right detection sensor 324R and the left detection sensor 324L are ON, so that it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been operated at the lower limit position by the player.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect in which the player presses (operates) it not only when it is moved to the highest position, but also when it is restricted to the lowest position, allowing it to be used in a variety of effects. For example, if the effect in which the tilting device 310 rises and is pressed is set with a high probability of being executed during the fluctuation of a special pattern that results in a win/loss determination, the tilting device 310 can represent the expected degree of the win/loss determination result.

The voice coil motor 352 is located on the rear side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, it repeatedly vibrates the tilting device 310 from the rear side to the front side, vibrating the tilting device 310 to create an effect in which the player can feel the vibration when touching the tilting device 310. Furthermore, when the tilting device 310 rises, it rises due to the spring force against gravity, but the rising force is weakened by the tilting device 310's own weight. However, by driving the voice coil motor 352 when it rises, an upward force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352, preventing the problem of the upward force being weakened by its own weight.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 330. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example have been partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 330(a). FIG. 330(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that an operation performance selection table 222da, a tilting action scenario table db, an origin detection action A table 222dcc, an origin detection action B table 222dd, and a tilting initial action table 222de are added.

The operation performance selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation contents) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 332(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation performance selection table 222da. In the operation performance selection table 222da, a judgment value of the performance counter 223h that determines whether or not to execute an operation performance using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability depending on the variation type of the special symbol is set. The type of tilt operation scenario is set for the judgment value that executes the operation performance. In the tilting operation scenario, the operation performance start time (operation performance start period) which is a timer value that determines the timing at which the operation performance of the tilting device 310 starts as the special pattern variation time passes, the timer value of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of the tilting device 310, the operation effective start time (operation effective start period) which is a timer value that determines the start time (start period) at which the operation of the tilting device 310 becomes effective, and the operation effective end time (operation effective end period) which is a timer value that determines the end of the period at which the operation of the tilting device 310 becomes effective are set. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation performance selection table 222da, the setting of whether or not the performance using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if executed, the setting of the start timing of the operation performance using the tilting device 310 and the effective period (T5) that effectively determines the operation when the player presses the tilting device 310 are set are executed.

Specifically, if the variation pattern of the special symbol is "Normal Reach Big Hit A" or "Normal Reach Miss A", the operation effect selection table 222da obtains the value of the effect counter 223h and determines whether to execute the operation effect. If it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (if the obtained value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting operation scenario A table 222bd1 described later is selected as the operation scenario of the tilting device 320, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 18000 ms, the effective operation start time (T3) is set to 23300 ms, and the effective operation end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms.

In addition, if the special symbol fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach Big Hit A" or "Super Reach Miss A", the operation effect selection table 222da acquires the value of the effect counter 223h and determines whether to execute the operation effect. If it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (if the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting operation scenario B table 222bd2 described later is selected as the operation scenario of the tilting device, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, the operation effective start time (T3) is set to 41500 ms, and the operation effective end time (T4) is set to 45900 ms. In this way, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is effective are preset according to the type of fluctuation of the special symbol, and the operation is performed as time passes.

The tilting operation scenario table 222db contains data tables for setting the type of tilting operation scenario selected in the operation performance selection table 222da and the origin detection operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the tilting operation scenario.

Figure 332 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilting operation scenario table 222db includes a tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

The tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 is a table that defines the operation contents in the tilt operation scenario A, and can be selected when the fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach A miss or a normal reach A hit, and stores operation data when the tilt device 310 is movable. As described above, the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery from the operation performance selection table 222da when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Figure 333(a) is a diagram that shows the contents of the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1. When the operation performance start time set in the operation performance selection table 222da is triggered after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the operation of the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 starts.

The operation of the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 reads out the action content corresponding to the action pointer (Z2953 in FIG. 343) for the required time corresponding to the passage of time in the tilting action timer 223db, starting from the action pointer "1", and performs the defined action until the action pointer becomes "10" (tilting action timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation performance start time is triggered (18,000 ms) after the special symbol starts to vary, the operation pointer executes operation data of "1" (moves backwards 210 steps for 2,100 ms), and the cam release operation (the release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retraction portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second extension portion 344c3 is moved to the top of the release member 34 (see Figure 30) (i.e., the second extension portion 344c3 is moved to the top of the release member 34 (see Figure 30) without operating the rotating claw member 347)) is performed, and the cam release position is reached. Next, the operation pointer executes operation data of "2" (stops for 3,000 ms), and a standby operation is performed. The operation data for the operation pointer "3" (moving 20 steps forward in 200 ms) is executed, and the disengagement operation (the second protrusion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward, rotating the rotating claw member 347 to release the engagement with the tilting device 320) moves the disk cam 344 to the disengagement position, and the tilting device 320 begins to rise.

Next, the motion data of the motion pointer "4" (stops for 500 ms) is executed, and the pointer waits to rise. The motion data of the motion pointer "5" (moves 50 steps forward for 500 ms) is executed, and the pointer reaches the position of FIG. 33. The motion data of the motion pointer "6" (moves 50 steps backward for 500 ms) is executed, and the tilt motion is executed to the position of FIG. 32. The motion data of the motion pointer "7" (moves 50 steps forward for 500 ms) is executed, and the pointer reaches the position of FIG. 33 again. The motion data of the motion pointer "8" (moves 50 steps backward for 500 ms) is executed, and the pointer reaches the position of FIG. 33 again. The motion of the motion pointer "4" to "8" is repeated twice as a tilt motion, and the motion data of the motion pointer "9" (stops for 1000 ms) is executed, and the pointer stops at the position of FIG. 32, and the motion pointer reaches "10", and the motion is completed.

In this way, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is to move the tilting device 320 from the origin position to the highest position, perform a tilting operation at the highest position, and then return to the origin position. Here, as shown in FIG. 326, when the tilting device 320 starts to rise and is pressed down and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds, the detection is determined to be valid, and a specific advance notice performance (for example, a performance that notifies the expectation of a win, etc.) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and sound effects and lamp lighting modes corresponding to the advance notice performance are also displayed on the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 27. After the tilting device 320 starts to rise, if the player presses the tilting device 320 before the 3.5 seconds of the effective operation period (T5) have elapsed, the tilting device 320 will move to the origin position by the pressing operation before the return operation is performed by the origin detection operation A table 222db3, and when the tilting device 320 is locked and held at the origin position by the rotating claw member 347, an operation based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3 will be performed and the disk cam 344 will move to the initial position (origin position).

When the tilt device 320 is held by the player in a raised position, etc., causing the transmission gear 343b to spin freely, the left side detection sensor 353L turns ON, judging that it is in the initial position, and a control operation is executed to return the position of the disk cam 344 to the origin position.

The tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table that defines the operation contents in the tilt operation scenario B, and stores operation data for when the tilt device 310 is movable when the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach A. As described above, the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery from the operation performance selection table 222da when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Figure 333 (b) is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents of the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2. When the operation performance start time set in the operation performance selection table 222da is triggered after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the operation of the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 starts.

The tilt action scenario B table 222db2 reads out the action contents corresponding to the action pointer (Z2953 in FIG. 343) for the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilt action timer 223db, starting from the action pointer "1", and performs the defined action until the action pointer becomes "11" (tilt action timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation performance start time is triggered (38,000 ms) after the special symbol starts to change, the action pointer executes the action data of "1" (moves 50 steps forward for 500 ms) and is released, the action pointer executes the action data of "2" (stops for 3,000 ms) and waits, the action pointer executes the action data of "3" (moves 20 steps forward for 200 ms), the action pointer executes the action data of "4" (moves 20 steps backward for 200 ms), the action pointer executes the action data of "5" (moves 20 steps forward for 200 ms), and the action pointer executes the action data of "6". The motion data (moving 20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer at "7" (moving 20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer at "8" (moving 20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer at "9" (moving 120 steps in the forward direction for 1200 ms) is executed as a tilt motion, with the motion data for the motion pointer at "9" (moving 120 steps in the forward direction for 1200 ms) being executed, and the motion data for the motion pointer at "10" (stopping for 2000 ms) is executed, and the motion stops at the position in FIG. 38, with the motion pointer at "11" and the motion ending.

By configuring it in this way, the tilting device 310 performs a prodding action during the reach performance, encouraging the player to operate the machine, and by changing the prodding action depending on the type of fluctuation and stopping the rising height (length) at different points while the operation performance is being performed, it is possible to generate interest in operating the machine and increase the excitement of the game.

In this control example, the type of tilting action scenario is set to correspond to the type of fluctuation pattern, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, the selection rate may be set to vary depending on the result of the hit/miss determination by setting tilting action scenarios A and B by allocating the judgment value of the performance counter 223h for hit and miss determination results. By configuring in this way, for example, a tilting action scenario that is set to be selected more likely when the hit/miss determination result is a hit than when it is a miss is executed, which allows the player to hope that the hit/miss determination result will be a hit.

Also, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario type may be set in which, after a tilting motion is performed at the start of the motion, the ball is moved to the origin position without rising to the highest position. By configuring in this way, for example, tilting motion scenario B is set to be easily selected when the hit/miss determination result is a hit, and a tilting motion scenario with only a tilting motion is set to be easily selected when the hit/miss determination result is a miss, so that the tilting motion can be performed, raising expectations for a jackpot.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores operation data for storing the tilt device 310 in its original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilt device 310 performs the operation of tilt operation scenario A.

Figure 334 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. As with the operations in the tilt operation scenario table, operations are performed in order starting from the operation data where the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data with the motion pointer at "1" (movement 190 steps in the forward direction in 1900 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer becomes "2" and the motion ends.

When the operation of the tilt operation scenario A table is completed and the player operates the tilt device 310 during the operation valid period and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes), or when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: No), the origin detection operation A table 222db3 sets the value of the tilt operation timer 223db to 1900 ms based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3 and sets the tilt operation status 223da to 3 (Z2959). In the performance return operation process (Figure 344, Z2911), the operation content of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin return operation is performed until the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores operation data for storing the tilt device 310 in its original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilt device 310 performs the operation of tilt operation scenario B.

Figure 334 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. As with the operations in the tilt operation scenario table, operations are performed in order starting from the operation data where the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data with the motion pointer at "1" (movement 190 steps in the forward direction in 1900 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer becomes "2" and the motion ends.

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 is executed when the operation of the tilt operation scenario B table ends, the player operates the tilt device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes), or when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set to 1900 ms and the tilt operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), and the operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 is read (Z2974) in the performance return operation process (Figure 344, Z2911) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin return operation is performed until the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeating origin detection when the tilt device 310 performs an origin detection operation after performing a tilt operation scenario, but the origin is not detected.

Figure 334 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. Similar to the operation of the tilt operation scenario table described above, the retry operation table 222dc performs retry operations in order starting from the operation data where the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) or the origin is detected (Z2989: Yes).

Specifically, in the above-mentioned origin detection operation, the retry operation table 222dc is terminated when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), and in the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting the tilt operation status 223da to 4 (Z2975), setting the detection change counter 223dc to 3 (Z2976), and setting the detection check counter 223dd to 4 (Z2977), the detection check is performed at the timing when the special pattern changes (Z2981: Yes). If the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or greater (Z2982: Yes), it is decremented by 1 (Z2983). If the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), a retry operation time (900 ms) is set to the tilt operation timer 223db (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table, and the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). If the value after decrement is 1 or greater (Z2987: Yes), the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988). Then, if the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: No) and the tilt operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 327, the operation setting is performed once every three times that the special pattern changes, and if origin detection is not performed, it is performed a maximum of four times.

The tilt initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilt device 310 when the power is turned on.

Figure 334 (d) is a diagram showing the contents of the tilt initial action table 222dd. Similar to the actions of the tilt action scenario table described above, the tilt initial action table 222dd performs actions starting from the action data with the action pointer of "1" until the action pointer becomes "2" and the tilt action timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2931: Yes) or the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, in the start-up process (Fig. 335) executed when the power is turned on, if the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes), the operation time (7200 ms) is set in the tilt operation timer 223db (Z2061) based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd, and the tilt operation status is set to 1 (Z2062), thereby starting operation.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 331. FIG. 331 is a schematic diagram showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this third control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a tilt operation status 223da, a tilt operation timer 223db, a detection fluctuation counter 223dc, a detection check counter 223dd, a tilt operation flag 223de, and a press notice valid timer 223df are added.

The tilt operation status 223da stores information for determining the operating state of the tilt device 310. The tilt operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation settings of the tilt device 310 are performed during the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, and the initial operating state is reached.

The tilt operation status 223da is determined by the tilt device control process (Z2891) executed in the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (Z2161) to determine the process to be executed according to the value of the tilt operation status 223da. Specifically, when the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation performance setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilt operation is in a standby state waiting for the operation to start. When the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the tilt initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilt operation is in the process of executing the initial operation after power-on. When the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the operation performance process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilt operation is in the state of operation performance during the special pattern change. If the value of the tilt motion status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the return motion after performance process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilt motion is a return motion after the scenario motion.

If the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilt operation is currently being retried to detect the origin. If the value of the tilt operation status 223d is anything other than this (Z2912: No), the execution of this process ends when the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "5", but this is an error state when origin detection cannot be performed when performing the initial operation or return operation described above. When an error state occurs, there is no change in the tilt operation until the power is turned on again.

In the operation performance setting process (Z2905: FIG. 341), as described above, when the operation performance start time is triggered after the special symbol starts changing (Z2921: Yes), the tilt action status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922), and the tilt action becomes a state in which the operation performance is in progress during the special symbol changing action.

In the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: Figure 342), if the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2933: Yes), the initial operation is set to 0 if the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2933: Yes), and the tilt operation goes into standby mode, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

During the operation performance processing (Z2909: FIG. 343), if the tilt action timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), the tilt action flag is off (Z2957: No), and the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2961: Yes), the tilt action status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilt action goes into standby.

In the return motion processing after the performance (Z2911: FIG. 344), if the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2971: Yes), the tilt motion status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), the tilt motion goes into a standby state, and this processing ends.

If the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2971: No) and the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 4 and the tilt operation becomes a retry operation.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: Figure 345), if the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2989: Yes) after the special pattern starts to change (Z2981: No), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972) and the tilt operation goes into a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2989: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994) and the tilt operation goes into an error state.

The tilt operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilt device 310. When the power is turned on, the initial operation time is set (Z2061) in the tilt operation timer 223db, and is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 each time the main process (Fig. 336) is executed.

In the standby state when the tilt operation status value is "0", the operation time is set (Z2923) according to the tilt operation scenario table. In the state during the operation presentation when the tilt operation status value is "2", the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), and if the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes), the time of the origin detection operation is set based on the origin detection operation table. In the state during the retry operation when the tilt operation status value is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc.

The detection change counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of changes while the tilt device 310 executes a retry operation when the origin is not detected during a return operation after a scenario operation. The detection change counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2976) when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) during the post-performance return operation process (Z2911) that is executed when the tilt operation status value 223da is "3" and the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2971: No), and the tilt operation becomes a retry operation.

During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing when the special pattern starts to change (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following judgment process is performed. First, the detection change counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983), and if the decrement result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the change is one that will cause a retry operation. After the tilt operation timer is set based on the contents of the retry operation table (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). If the result is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times), and the detection change counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the tilt device 310 does not detect the origin during a return operation after a scenario operation. During the post-performance return operation process (Z2911) that is executed when the value of the tilt operation status 223da is "3", if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2971: No) and the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), the detection check counter 223dd is set to 4 (Z2976), and the tilt operation becomes a retry operation. Therefore, if there is no origin detection, the retry operation is performed a maximum of four times.

The tilt operation flag 223de is a flag indicating that when tilt operation scenario A or tilt operation scenario B is being executed, the tilt device 320 is pressed by the player during the valid operation period, moved to the origin position, and locked by the rotating claw member 347. This tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON when the tilt device 320 is pressed during the valid operation period and detected by the detection switch 324 by the processing of Z2956 in the operation presentation processing (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, after it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is ON by the processing of Z2957, the tilt operation status is set to 3, and is set to OFF after the origin return operation is executed (see Z2960).

The push-down notice valid timer 223df is a timer for determining the valid period for validly determining the detection of the detection switch 324 by the push-down operation of the tilt device 320 as a switch for performance when the tilt device 320 is not raised (i.e., when it is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position). When a fluctuation pattern is determined, and a notice performance in which the tilt device 320 is used as a switch for performance is determined as a notice performance, the push-down notice valid timer 223df stores data corresponding to the determined valid period based on the start timing of the valid period. Note that when data corresponding to the valid period is set in the push-down notice valid timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 337), the cam removal operation is executed. This allows the player to have an expectation that the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 will be executed due to the operation sound of the cam removal being executed and the vibration transmitted to the player from the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the press notification validity timer 223df is updated by subtracting one each time a press Z2873 (see FIG. 337) is made.

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 335 to 345, the control processing by the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example differs from the first control example in that some processes of the start-up process (Fig. 335) and the main process (Fig. 336) have been added, the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107: Fig. 272) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (Z2161: Fig. 337), the sensor input process (Z2813: Fig. 273) has been changed to the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: Fig. 338), and the touch input retry process (Z2860: Fig. 339), the tilt device control process (Z2891: Fig. 340), the operation performance setting process (Fig. 341), the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: Fig. 342), the operation performance process (Z2909: Fig. 343), the performance back movement process (Z2911: Fig. 344), and the retry operation process (Z2913: Fig. 345) have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The start-up process (FIG. 335) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 335. The start-up process (FIG. 335) in this fifth control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 257) in the first control example in that the processes Z2061 to Z2062 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (Fig. 335) in this fifth control example, after executing process Z2012 or process Z2013, the tilt action timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061) based on the tilt initial action table 222de (see Fig. 334(d)) provided in the ROM 222. Next, the value of the tilt action status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main process (Fig. 336) described below is executed.

In this way, the tilt operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, and the initial operation of the tilt device 320 is executed by the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: Fig. 342) described below when the power is turned on. Therefore, the initial operation is executed when the power is turned on, and the game can be started in the state where it has been moved to the origin position. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the disc cam 344 is operated by the initial operation, and based on the left detection sensor 353L being turned on, the step counter and the like are set to initial values, so that the drive motor 342 can be stably controlled.

Referring to FIG. 336, the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. The main processing (FIG. 336) in this fifth control example differs from the main processing (FIG. 258) in the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107) is changed to frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 (Z2161). The other processing is the same as in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 337, we will explain frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), which is one process of the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring/performance process 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), first, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing the special pattern for which the execution of the press notice has been decided (press notice is being set) (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the press notice has been decided. If it is determined that the press notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the press notice is in the valid period (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether the press notice is being executed, and whether the press notice valid timer 223df is a value greater than 0. If it is determined that the press notice is in the valid period (Z2882: Yes), the press notice valid timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2883). Next, it is determined whether the tilt device 320 is pressed by the player, and whether the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilt device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display press preview mode command is set (Z2885), and processing proceeds to Z2890. Note that if the press preview is not being executed in processing Z2881 (Z2881: No), or if it is determined in processing Z2884 that the player has not pressed the button (Z2884: No), other processing is skipped and processing proceeds to Z2890.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2882 that the press notification is not in the valid period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the press notification valid period, which is the start timing for executing the press notification (Z2886). Note that the start timing of the press notification is determined by a start timer (not shown) that is set when the special pattern starts to change, and the value of that start timer (when it is updated to a specific value of "0").

If it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) determined as the value of the press notification valid timer 223df is set, and the backward rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set for 2100 ms as the cam removal operation (Z2887). By configuring it in this way, the cam removal operation is always performed even if the press notification does not cause the tilt device 320 to rise, so the player can expect the rise performance to be executed.

If it is not the start timing of the press notice valid period (Z2886: No), the process skips Z2887 and executes the process Z2888. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the press notice valid period (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether the value of the press notice valid period timer 223df is 0. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the press notice valid period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the press notice valid timer 223df is reset and a backward rotation operation of 1500 ms is set as the origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2888 that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: No), the process skips Z2889 and executes the process of sensor input process 2 (Z2890).

Details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340.

Sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in this fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 338. Sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in this fifth control example differs from the sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 273) in the first control example in that Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed, and a retry process during touch input (Z2860) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 339, the touch input retry process (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the contents of the touch input retry process (Z2860).

In the touch input retry process (Z2860: FIG. 339), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation status 223da stored in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db stored in the RAM 223 is greater than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not detecting the origin (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set to rotate backward one step (Z2864) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865) and this process ends.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 340. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilt device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901). If it is determined that the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilt action timer 223db is decremented by 1. Note that, if it is determined in the process of Z2901 that the value of the tilt action timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilt action status 223da is 0 (Z2904). If it is determined that the value of the tilt action status 223da is 0 (Z2904), the operation performance setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, if the tilt operation status, which indicates an abnormality in the return to origin of the tilt device 320, is "4" at the time the touch sensor 290 is turned on, a retry operation of returning to the origin is executed. Therefore, by performing the retry operation of returning to the origin at a time when there is a high probability that the player is using both hands (one hand on the launch handle, the other operating the touch sensor 290), it is possible to make it easier to return the tilt device 320 to the origin.

Now, referring to FIG. 341, we will explain the operation performance setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340). FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance setting process (Z2905).

In the operation performance setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether the operation performance start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation performance start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation performance start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilt action status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilt action scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilt action timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilt action flag 223de is set to off (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation processing (Z2907) is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 342, we will explain the tilt initial operation process (Z2907), which is one process of the tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340). FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilt initial operation process (Z2907).

In the tilt initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2931). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the tilt initial operation table 222de is read (Z2932: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2931, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilt operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the error command to display (Z2936), and this process ends.

In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the initial operation of returning to the origin when the power is turned on, an error message (abnormality processing) is displayed immediately, unlike during gameplay, allowing for early detection of a malfunction in the tilting device 320.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2906, if it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 2 (Z2908). If it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), processing during operation presentation (Z2909) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 343, we will explain the operation performance processing (Z2909), which is one process of the tilt device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 340). FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance processing (Z2909).

In the operation performance process (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951). If it is determined that the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilt action flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to on (Z2952: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the tilt action flag 223de is not set to on (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt action scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation is not valid (Z2954: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is valid (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether a press is detected (Z2955). If it is determined that no pressing is detected (Z2955), this process ends. If it is determined that a pressing is detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2956), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2951, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2957). If it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 (Z2958). Next, the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2957, if it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to on (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the above-mentioned processing of Z2958 to Z2960 is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 3 (Z2910). If it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), a performance backtracking motion processing (Z2911) is executed, and this processing ends.

Now, with reference to FIG. 344, we will explain the performance return motion processing (Z2911), which is one process of the tilt device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 340). FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance return motion processing (Z2911).

In the performance return operation processing (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2971 that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read (Z2974), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2973 that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 4 (Z2975). Next, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc in RAM 223 is set to 3 (Z2976), the detection check counter 223dd is set to 4 (Z2977), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2910, if it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), a retry motion process (Z2913) is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2912, if it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), this process ends as it is.

Referring to FIG. 345, we will explain the retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340). FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start fluctuation (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the timing to start fluctuation (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is greater than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection variation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222 (Z2985), and the value of the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd is set to 3, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start fluctuation (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read (Z2991), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Z2990 that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), a tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2989 that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this process ends.

In the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or holds down the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, even if the unlocking operation is performed, the tilting device 320 will be locked by the rotating claw member 347 immediately, causing a problem that it will not rise. To deal with this, the number of movable steps can be set to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100 ms) as the operation data for the operation pointer 3 (see Figure 333 (a)), which is the unlocking operation, so that the unlocking operation is maintained in the position shown in Figure 31, and by configuring it so that no tilting operation is performed, the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise when the hand is released.

As another method, when tilt operation status A is being executed or when an unlocking operation is being executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324 or a touch sensor is placed on the top surface of the tilting device 320 to determine whether the touch sensor is on, and if it is on (pressed), the unlocking operation is not performed and the device waits until it is turned off, at which point the unlocking operation is executed. Also, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed or that the player is touching it, a notification may be issued by a display or sound to notify the player to release the hand from the tilting device 320 (to release the player's obstruction of the upward movement).

<Sixth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 346 to Fig. 370, a sixth control example in the present pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example, when a jackpot A in which the probability of winning or losing is set to a low probability (electric support is given up to 100 times) is executed after a jackpot game, the jackpot A is notified by displaying a set of even numbers, but in the present sixth embodiment, when a jackpot A is executed, if a reserved ball that will be a jackpot is stored in the reserved balls, the stopped pattern of the jackpot A executed first and the performance during the jackpot are displayed as if they were jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, and a performance is executed as if a high probability game state (probability game state) is set even after the jackpot game, which is different from the first control example. In the sixth control example, even if the third symbol of the even-numbered symbols indicating the jackpot A is displayed, multiple promotion effects are set to notify the player that the jackpot type is actually a jackpot type that sets the jackpot B1 or B2 probability variable state during the jackpot game, and the type of promotion effect is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the type of promotion effect to be executed thereafter is switched and set depending on the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not there is a promotion, etc.), which is different from the first control example. Note that detailed explanations of the same points as the first control example will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 346, an example of the stop display mode of the special pattern of the hit/miss judgment result that becomes the jackpot A in this control example will be described. FIG. 346(a) is an example showing a case where the pre-read result (pre-judgment result) of the reserved pattern h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the pre-read result of the reserved pattern h2 of the reserved ball displayed in the third ball is also the jackpot A. In this case, when the variation of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern h1 is executed, it is usually displayed as a set of even numbers, but at the start of the variation, it is switched to display a set of odd numbers so that it is stopped. That is, the same stop pattern as when the variation of the special pattern that becomes the jackpot B1 is executed is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 346(b), a notification is executed as if it is a jackpot with a probability variable game state set, while "Super jackpot! Look forward to the next one! " is suggested to be executed in a short time, and an announcement is executed as if it is a jackpot with a probability variable game state set. In this way, the reserved ball that will actually result in jackpot A is stored even when jackpot A is executed, and by executing an effect that makes it appear as if jackpot B1 has been executed even when jackpot A is executed, the player feels that the probability of jackpot B1 being executed is higher than the design value, which increases the interest of the game.

Referring to FIG. 347(a), the presentation mode when the special pattern is changed in the time-saving game state (low-probability electric support game state) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. 346 will be described. FIG. 347(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 in a state where the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in a state where the reserved ball that will be the jackpot A is stored (reserved pattern h2).

As shown in FIG. 347(a), even though the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is in a time-saving game state, the words "Super Time in progress" are displayed, which is displayed when the game is in a guaranteed variable game state, and the words "Expectation of big win increased", which indicates that the probability of winning or losing is not actually set high, but that the expectation is high. This is configured to prevent malfunctions that significantly damage the trust of players by notifying the player of a false notification that is different from reality. In this way, notifications that roughly approximate a guaranteed variable game state can also be called pseudo notification modes.

Figure 347 (b) is an example showing the display mode of the special pattern corresponding to reserved pattern h2 reserved in Figure 347 (a). Reserved pattern h2 is the result of jackpot A hit or miss judgment, and since there are no reserved balls that will result in a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C) stored among the reserved balls, the ball is displayed as a sequence of even numbers as in normal times, and a notification is made to indicate that it is a jackpot A.

Figure 348 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game of jackpot A in the example shown in Figure 347 (b) is executed. As a display mode indicating the time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 348 (a), the word "Chance (100 times)" is displayed to notify that time-saving game is set until the special pattern changes 100 times and stops. In addition, each time the special pattern changes once, the number (number of times) is subtracted by one and displayed.

Figure 348 (b) shows a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a jackpot game is executed in jackpot B1 or jackpot B2. The words "Super Time (Probability Change)" are displayed as a display mode suggesting that a probability change game state has been set, and the player is notified that the game state is a probability change game state.

In this embodiment, the display mode is only partially different between when a time-saving game state is set with a reserved ball that will be a jackpot stored and when a special probability game state is set, but this is not limited to the above, and the same text (for example, only during Super Time) may be displayed. Alternatively, the game state may be notified by background color without displaying text, and similar colors (for example, a red background color (special probability game state), a pink background color (time-saving game state when a reserved ball that will be a jackpot is stored)) may be displayed for the special probability game state and when a time-saving game state is set with a reserved ball that will be a jackpot stored. This configuration makes the player believe that the time-saving game state is a special probability game state.

Next, referring to Figures 349 and 350, a description will be given of the promotion effect executed during a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in this control example. Figure 349(a) is an example of the display mode of the opening effect executed when a jackpot game starts. When a jackpot game starts, the words "Jackpot!! Start!!" are displayed until the specific winning port 65a is opened, to notify the player that the jackpot game has started.

Figure 349 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-winning promotion effect is an effect in which the end condition of one round is 10 balls entering the specific winning port 65a in one round, and based on the entry of 10 game balls into the specific winning port 65a, a promotion effect is executed in which information regarding the type of jackpot is announced based on further game balls entering the specific winning port 65a during the period until the opening and closing door 65b is changed to the closed state.

In the over-winning promotion effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Put the ball in the attacker and get the key!!", suggesting that the key symbol will be displayed (awarded to the player) by putting a game ball into the specific winning port 65a (corresponding to the attacker). Furthermore, the words "When you collect 11 keys, it's a treasure chest chance!!" are displayed to inform the player that when 11 keys are collected, the promotion effect (over-winning promotion effect) indicated by "treasure chest chance!!" will be executed. Since the device is configured so that one key is displayed for each winning in the specific winning port 65a, when 11 keys are displayed, one over-winning has occurred. Therefore, when an over-winning occurs, "treasure chest chance!!" is executed. Here, when the "Treasure Chest Chance!!" is displayed as an open treasure chest with treasure inside, it notifies the player that the type of jackpot game being played is jackpot B2 or jackpot A in a state in which a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot as described above is stored (the player has been promoted). Also, if treasure is not displayed in the treasure chest, the type of jackpot game being played is not notified. If a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is not stored and the type of jackpot game being played is jackpot A, no presentation is executed to notify the player of the promotion. However, it may be configured so that a display mode (presentation in which treasure is displayed in the treasure chest) is displayed to notify the player of the promotion based on the reserved ball that will result in a jackpot being stored during the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 350, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion during round performance, which is one of the promotion performances, will be described. In FIG. 350(a), when the promotion during round performance is selected, a comment "Promotion chance! If you press the button and a school of fish appears, you're lucky!" is displayed during the round play at a specific round (the fifth round in this control example), suggesting (informing) that the promotion during round performance will be executed and that information regarding the jackpot game type will be notified by pressing the frame button 22. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 350(b), if the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or jackpot A in a state in which the reserved ball that will be the jackpot is stored as described above, a display mode in which a school of fish swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that a high probability game state of "probable change GET!!" will be set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of jackpot A when the reserved ball that will result in the jackpot described above is stored, the words "GET jackpot!!" are displayed to inform the player that a jackpot state has been set.

Next, referring to FIG. 351, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 350(a) is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect that indicates the end of a jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot game ends (after the 16-round jackpot round ends (the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have passed) is met)).

On the other hand, FIG. 351(b) is an example of a display mode in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When an ending promotion effect is selected, during the period in which an ending effect indicating the end of a jackpot game is being executed after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the 16th jackpot round (the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have passed) is met)), the words "LUCY!! Super Chance Time!!" are displayed, and a special display mode (a display mode different from normal) in which a school of fish (fish school) swims from the left to the right of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed, and a display mode is displayed suggesting that a guaranteed play state or a time-saving play state will be set after the jackpot game with the reserved balls that will result in the jackpot described above stored.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 352 to 353, the control processing by main control unit 110 in this sixth control example will be described.

Referring to FIG. 352(a), the ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This sixth control example differs from the first control example in that a promotion lottery table 222df has been added to the first control example. The rest of the configuration is the same as the first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 352(b). FIG. 352(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df is a lottery table for determining whether or not to notify the player of promotion as an over-winning promotion effect based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired based on the occurrence of an over-winning into a specific winning port 65a during a round. Specifically, when the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the pseudo-probability-change flag 223dm indicating that the execution of a jackpot A is suggested to the player as if a jackpot B2 had been executed is on, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 59", a promotion effect indicating promotion (in this control example, an effect in which treasure is displayed in a treasure chest) is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 353, the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that a winning fluctuation flag 223dg, a stopped pattern replacement flag 223dh, a big win counter 223di, a promoted flag 223dj, a promotion performance type storage area 223dk, and a pseudo-probability change flag 223dm have been added. Detailed explanations of the same configuration as the first control example will be omitted.

The winning change flag 223dg is a flag for determining whether the change of the special symbol that will result in a jackpot A is being executed in a state in which no reserved balls that will result in a jackpot are stored. When this winning change flag 223dg is on, if it is a period in which the display of the special symbol change can be replaced when a new reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is stored by a winning command, a process for switching to a repeating odd number symbol is executed. This makes it possible to make the player believe that even if the change of the special symbol that will result in a jackpot A is a jackpot B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is a flag that indicates that the stop symbols should be switched to odd-numbered patterns when the special symbol that will be the jackpot A starts to change and a reserved ball that will be the jackpot is already stored, by winning a replacement lottery that is executed with a predetermined probability. When the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is on, the stop symbols are switched to odd-numbered patterns and set when the special symbol starts to change.

The big win counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winning balls that are won in a specific winning slot 65a during one round of big win play.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag that indicates that a promoted effect (an effect in which treasure is displayed from a treasure chest) has been executed in the over-winning promotion effect executed during a jackpot game. This flag can prevent a malfunction in which a promoted effect is executed again after a promoted effect has been executed.

The promotion effect type memory area 223dk is a memory area in which the type of promotion effect to be executed during a jackpot game is determined when the jackpot game is executed, and the type data of the determined promotion effect is stored.

The pseudo probability change flag 223dm is a flag that indicates that the player has lost the replacement lottery that controls the special symbols to stop and display odd numbers when the special symbols that will result in a jackpot A begin to change and the reserved balls that will result in a jackpot are already stored. During a jackpot game, a promotion effect is executed, and an effect is executed that makes it seem as if the time-saving game state that is set after the jackpot game is set to a probability change game state (see FIG. 347(a)).

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the sixth control example>
With reference to Fig. 354, the control process by the main control device in this sixth control example will be described. In this sixth control example, the difference from the first control example is that the big win control process (Z1004: Fig. 256) is changed to the big win control process 2 (Z1004: Fig. 354). The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 354, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this sixth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in this sixth control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 256) in the first control example in that Z1120 and Z1121 processes are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

In the process of Z1110, if it is not the end of the jackpot (Z1110: No), it is determined whether a ball has entered the jackpot opening (Z1120). If a ball has entered (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121) and this process ends. Note that, if the process of Z1120 determines that no ball has entered (Z1120: No), this process ends as is. This ball entry command also allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a during the round, and also makes it possible to determine whether an over-winning has occurred.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example>
The control processing by the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 354 to Fig. 366. In this sixth control example, in comparison with the first control example, the command judgment processing (Z2113: Fig. 259) is changed to command judgment processing 3 (Z2113: Fig. 356), the fluctuation pattern receiving processing (Z2202: Fig. 260) is changed to fluctuation pattern receiving processing 2 (Z2240: Fig. 355), the winning command receiving processing (Z2209: Fig. 266) is changed to winning command receiving processing 2 (Z2270: Fig. 358), the fluctuation display setting processing (Z2114: Fig. 269) is changed to fluctuation display setting processing 2 (Z2114: Fig. 365), the frame button input monitoring and performance processing The difference is that the process (Z2107: Fig. 272) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107: Fig. 366), and that the stop pattern switching process (Z2450: Fig. 357), the stop pattern change process (Z2460: Fig. 359), the big win related command receiving process (Z2280: Fig. 359), the opening process (Z2282: Fig. 360), the big win ball entry process (Z2284: Fig. 362), the round process (Z2286: Fig. 363), and the ending process (Z2288: Fig. 364) have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 355, command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 3 (Z2113). Command determination process 3 (Z2113) in this sixth control example differs from command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example in that Z2279 and Z2280 have been added and that the processes of Z2240 and Z2270 have been changed.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2279 that a jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 355, we will explain the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), which is one process within the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in this sixth control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that the processes Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether there is a change in the game state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be attached to a variable pattern command and output from the main control device 110. As the game state, a low-probability game state without electric support (normal game state), a sure-change game state (with electric support), or a time-saving game state (with low-probability electric support) is set. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode memory area 223i, a display state command is set (Z2431), and the processing of Z2227 is executed. On the other hand, if there is no change in the game state in the processing of Z2430 (Z2430: No), the above-mentioned processing of Z2431 is not executed, and the process proceeds directly to the processing of Z2227.

Referring to FIG. 357, the stopped symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357) which is one process in the variable pattern receiving process 2 (FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stopped symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), first, it is determined whether the current change is a change to a jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that the current change is not a change to a jackpot A (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current change is a change to a jackpot A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there are other wins in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). If it is determined that there are other wins (Z2452: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained and a replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm provided in RAM 223 is set to on (Z2455), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop pattern switching flag is set to on (Z2456), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2452 that there are no other wins in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the win change flag 223dg is set to on (Z2457), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, if a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is stored at the time when the variation of the special symbol that will result in jackpot A is started, a lottery (determination) is made as to whether to replace the stopped symbol, and if it is determined that the symbol will be replaced, the stopped symbol replacement flag 223dh, which indicates that the symbol will be replaced, is set to ON. On the other hand, if the replacement lottery is unsuccessful, the ball is displayed as an even number, a jackpot game is started, and a promotion effect is performed during the jackpot game, or a special notification is made after the jackpot game as if the player is in a special probability game state.

With reference to FIG. 358, the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. The winning command reception process 2 (Z2270) in this sixth control example differs from the winning command reception process (Z2209: FIG. 266) in the first control example in that a stopped symbol change process (Z2460) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 359, we will explain the stopped symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process within the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop pattern change process (Z2460: FIG. 359), first, it is determined whether the winning fluctuation flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z2461). If it is determined that the winning fluctuation flag 223dg is not on (i.e., it is off) (Z2461: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning fluctuation flag 223dg is set to on (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo-certainty change flag 223dm is set to on (Z2463). After executing the process of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is fast changing (Z2464: Yes), a display pattern replacement command is set (Z2465) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is not fast changing in the process of Z2464 (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not executed and this process is terminated.

In this way, even if there are no reserved balls that will result in a jackpot stored when the special symbol that will result in jackpot A starts to change, if a new reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is stored during the subsequent change (during that change), the stopped symbols will be replaced (with matching odd symbols) if it is during the high-speed change period of the special symbols. In this way, because it is limited to the high-speed change period, the replacement can be performed without any sense of incongruity.

Even if the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, the stopped symbols may be changed by performing an effect such as sliding.

With reference to FIG. 360, we will explain the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360), which is one process within the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 360), it is first determined whether an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), the opening process (Z2282) is executed and this process is terminated. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG. 360.

Now, referring to FIG. 361, we will explain the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), which is one process within the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h obtained in the process of Z2291, a promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect set in the process of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to Z2295.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2295). If it is determined that the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether there is a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Z2296: Yes), the game status is set to jackpot (Z2297), a display status command is set (Z2300), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined that Z2295 is off in the processing of Z2295 (Z2295: No), the processing of Z2296 is skipped and processing proceeds to Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to OFF (Z2298), the game state is set to during jackpot play in which the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is OFF (Z2299), the processing of Z2300 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2281, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether a ball entry command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that a ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the big prize ball entry processing (Z2284) is executed, and this processing ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 362, we will explain the big prize ball entry process (Z2284), which is one process within the big prize related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize ball entry process (Z2284).

In the big prize winning ball processing (Z2284: FIG. 362), first, the value of the big prize winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is incremented by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion performance type is an over prize winning (Z2312). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not an over prize winning (Z2312: No), a big prize winning command for display indicating the value of the big prize winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion performance type is an over prize winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the big prize winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the big prize winning counter 223di is less than 10 (Z2314: No), a big prize winning command for display indicating the value of the big prize winning counter 223di corresponding to the over prize winning performance is set (Z2315), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the big prize counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained, and a promotion lottery is executed from the promotion lottery table 222df based on the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm or the type of big win (Z2316).

After executing the process of Z2316, it is determined whether the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a large prize command for display indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di and the win of the promotion effect is set (Z2318), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a large prize command for display indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di and the miss with the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this process is terminated.

Returning to Figure 360, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2283, if it is determined that a ball entry command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is then determined whether a round count command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that a round count command has been received (Z2285: Yes), round processing (Z2286) is executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 363, we will explain the round process (Z2286), which is one process within the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 363), first, it is determined whether the promotion performance type is over-winning (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not over-winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion performance type is ending (Z2332). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set (Z2334), a value corresponding to the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round performance is set (Z2335), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the processing of Z2331 determines that the promotion performance type is over winning (Z2331: Yes), or if the processing of Z2332 determines that the promotion performance type is ending (Z2332: Yes), or if the processing of Z2333 determines that the number of rounds is not 12R (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to Figure 360, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of Z2285 that the number of rounds command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (Z2287). If an ending command has been received (Z2288: Yes), ending processing (Z2288) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the ending processing (Z2288) will be described later with reference to Figure 364. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2287 that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2289), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 364, we will explain the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), which is one process within the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), first, it is determined whether the type of the promotion performance is an ending (Z2371). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not an ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z2372). If it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to off (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the process of Z2373, if it is determined that the jackpot type is other than jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2374). If the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to off (Z2374: No), a display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the processing of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223dj is set to on (Z2372: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of Z2376 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2374 that the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2374: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of Z2375 is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set to the end of the jackpot (Z2377), a display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the timing of execution of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, a determination is made during the jackpot game as to whether the promotion content has been notified by the over-winning promotion effect, and if not, a process is executed to switch to an ending promotion effect or a promotion effect during a round.

As a result, even if an over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even if the frequency of balls entering the specific winning port 65a is low.

Referring to FIG. 365, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in this sixth control example differs from the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269) in the first control example in that the processes Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed, and processes Z2511 to Z2515 are added. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to on (Z2511). If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as is (Z2512), a stop type command for display is set (Z2513), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2511 that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to on (Z2511: Yes), a stop type in which the odd jackpot symbol is the stop pattern is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2515), the processing of Z2513 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 366, frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107). Frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107) in this sixth control example differs from frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107: FIG. 272) in the first control example in that processes Z2808 to Z2810 are not executed, and processes Z2830, Z2831, and Z2840 are added. The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2807 that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and sensor input processing is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input processing, other SW processing is executed (Z2840), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2830 that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the above-mentioned Z2803 to 2804 are executed, and sensor input processing (Z2813) and other SW processing (Z2840) are executed, and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding control process by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 367 to 370. This sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the command judgment process (Z3302: Fig. 277) is changed to command judgment process 2 (Z3302: Fig. 367). The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) will be described with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 2 (Z3302). Command determination process 2 (Z3302) in this sixth control example differs from command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) in the first control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 have been added. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z3408 that there is no display preview command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display pattern replacement command (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display pattern replacement command (Z3430: Yes), the pattern replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the design replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 368(a). FIG. 368(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the design replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the pattern replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd jackpot pattern is replaced and set in the stop type table (Z3441). Next, the stop type table is compared with the stop pattern counter to set the stop pattern (Z3442). Next, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop pattern is set to on (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to Figure 367, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z3430, if it is determined that there is no display pattern replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display status command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display status command (Z3432: Yes), the game status setting process (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game status setting process (Z3433) will be explained with reference to FIG. 368(b). FIG. 368(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game status setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the game state set in the background mode memory area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 367, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z3432, if it is determined that there is no display status command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a jackpot-related command for display (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a jackpot-related command for display (Z3434: Yes), jackpot-related display processing (Z3435) is executed.

Here, the jackpot related display process (Z3435) will be explained with reference to FIG. 369. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related display process (Z3435).

In the big win related display process (Z3435), it is first determined whether an opening command for display has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that an opening command for display has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a big win command for display has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether a big win command for display has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that a big win command for display has been received (Z3463: Yes), the big win process (Z3464) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the big win process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 369.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3463 that the big prize command for display has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), a display data table for round display corresponding to the round number of the command is set, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the processing of Z3465 (Z3465: No), it is determined whether a promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). If it is determined that a promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), a display data table for the promotion round performance of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3467 that a promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether an ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that an ending command for display has been received (Z3469: Yes), a display data table for the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3469 that an ending command for display has not been received (Z3469: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (Z3471), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 370, we will explain the big prize processing (Z3464: FIG. 370), which is one process within the big prize related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 369). FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize processing (Z3464).

In the big win processing (Z3464), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big win related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 369), it is determined whether the received big win command for display has won the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the number of wins and the winning effect indicated by the received command is set (Z3481), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is a miss for the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is a miss for the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), a display data table for over win corresponding to the number of wins and the missing effect indicated by the command is set (Z3483), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, if it is determined that the received command is not a promotion miss (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command corresponding to the over prize presentation (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over prize presentation (Z3484: Yes), a display data table for over prize presentation corresponding to the number of prizes indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over prize presentation (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the number of prizes indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10 (Z3486: No). If it is determined that the number of prizes is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over prize presentation is set (Z3487), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3486, if it is determined that the number of prizes indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), this process is terminated as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 371 to Fig. 379, a seventh control example in the present pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example, in addition to the distribution device 700 which alternately causes balls to enter the winning hole which is the trigger of the lottery (variation) based on the first special symbol and the winning hole which is the trigger of the lottery (variation) based on the second special symbol which is more likely to result in a lottery result favorable to the player than the first special symbol, the electric role 640a is opened for a long period (2 seconds) when the long-time hit is won as a result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol normal symbol, so that the ball is easily allowed to enter the second winning hole 640. And, when the long-time hit of the normal symbol is won, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is motivated to play the game of winning the ball into the second winning hole 640 (see Fig. 207).

In the second control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric device 640a is controlled so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and when the variation of the second special symbol starts during the normal state, a special effect (see FIG. 291(b)) is executed to provide the player with a sense of specialness. Furthermore, in the second control example, the special effect is not executed for a predetermined period (5 variations of the special symbol) after the time-saving state ends, even if the normal state is set as the game state. As a result, in a state where a predetermined number (maximum 4) of reserved balls of the second special symbol are secured (with the reserved balls of the second special symbol secured during the time-saving state remaining), the above-mentioned special effect is not executed in the variation of the second special symbol executed when the time-saving state ends. This makes it possible to maintain the special feeling of the special effect.

In contrast, the seventh control example differs from the first control example in that, when a long-time win is won as a result of the lottery for the normal pattern, the normal pattern variable time (dynamic display period) corresponding to the lottery result is used to execute an effect (long-time opening effect) that suggests to the player that the long-time win has been won in the lottery for the normal pattern.

It also differs from the first control example in that it is configured to change the presentation style of the long-time opening presentation depending on the timing of the long-time winning result as a result of the lottery for the normal pattern. Note that detailed explanations of the same points as the above-mentioned control examples will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 371, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 371 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 371, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example, when playing a game (left-handed game) to make the ball flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80, a character resembling a "fish" is decorated (disposed) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 if the material forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin) as the guide display mode ZR1 that serves as a guide for the position to launch the ball, and is configured so that the player can easily see the guide display mode ZR1.

In addition, when playing a game (right-hand play) in which the ball is made to flow down to the right area (right-side area) of the variable display unit 80, a character resembling a "turtle" is decorated (disposed) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 if the material forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin) as a guide display mode ZR2 that serves as a guide for the position from which the ball is to be launched, and is configured so that the player can easily see the guide display mode ZR1.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand where on the game board 13 to aim the ball to play right-hand or left-hand. In addition, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtles) to guide the player to right-hand or left-hand play, when a performance (guidance performance) is performed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to guide the player to the play direction (right-hand or left-hand play), a performance that is easy for the player to visually understand can be performed.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example described above in that, when playing left-handed, the regulating nails ZK1 are planted so that the rate at which the ball flows down the area where the ball can win the second winning hole 640 (the area where the ball wins the second winning hole 640 if the electric device 640a is in the opening operation) is low. On the other hand, when playing right-handed, the nails are planted so that the rate at which the ball passes through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is low. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a left-handed game (first game) in which the player aims at the sorting device 700 and changes (draws) the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and a right-handed game (second game) in which the player aims at the second winning hole 640 and changes (draws) only the second special symbol.

As with the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is difficult to open, so the player will inevitably play with a left hand, and when the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so the player will inevitably play with a right hand. In addition, for example, even if the time-saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern has reached the upper limit (4 balls), even if further right-hand play is performed, the reserved special pattern (the right to draw (change) the special pattern) cannot be acquired, so it is also possible to play with a left hand and acquire reserved balls of the first special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 372(a), the presentation mode displayed during normal pattern variation when a long-time hit of a normal pattern is won in this seventh control example will be explained. FIG. 372(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening presentation) of the third pattern display device 81 during normal pattern variation when a long-time hit is won. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Will open soon" as a long-time hit (long opening effect) suggesting that a normal symbol has been won, and displays the opening target mode Za2, which imitates the electric device 640a that is about to open, and the guide display mode Za1, which imitates a "turtle" that indicates the playing direction to the player. This allows the player to visually and easily understand that the electric device 640a will open and that right-hand play should be performed.

Also, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, a discrimination means for discriminating whether the lottery result of the currently executed special symbol variation is a lottery result advantageous to the player (big win, small win, etc.), a priority display discrimination means for discriminating whether to prioritize display of the long opening effect or the third symbol variation effect based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the discrimination result of the priority display discrimination means may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prioritize display of the effect display to show the game result advantageous to the player, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In the above example, the effect that is determined to be given priority for display (priority effect) is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the effect that is determined not to be given priority for display (non-priority effect) is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, it is also possible to prepare multiple reduced display areas with different areas, and to vary the size of the area displaying the non-priority effect depending on the game result indicated by the effect determined to be a non-priority effect. It is also possible to configure the effect display determined to be a non-priority effect not to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was shown in which the display area of each effect (variable effect, long opening effect) is changed based on the lottery results of the special pattern being changed and the lottery results of the normal pattern being changed. In addition, for example, a reserved ball number discrimination means may be provided to determine whether the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is a predetermined number (e.g., 3 balls) or more, and the display area of the long opening effect may be changed based on the discrimination result of the reserved ball number discrimination means.

Next, referring to FIG. 372(b), the presentation mode during a long-time winning game (long opening) of a normal pattern will be explained. FIG. 372(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening presentation) of the third pattern display device 81 during a long-time winning game. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372(b), the word "OPEN" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the long opening is currently in progress, and the opening target mode Za2, which imitates the electric role 640a in the opening operation, is displayed in a display mode indicating the open state. Also, as in FIG. 372(a), a guide display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" is displayed, indicating the playing direction to be instructed to the player, and the third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, referring to FIG. 373, the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 during a long-time win, when the long opening effect is restricted. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above with reference to FIG. 372(a) is executed, and when it becomes easier for a ball to enter the second winning port 640 in the normal state (a state in which it is difficult to get a ball to enter the second winning port 640) (when a long-time hit with a normal pattern is won), the player is reliably notified of a state advantageous to the player (a state in which it becomes easier to make a variation (draw) of the second special pattern which is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern).

When configured in this way, the above-mentioned long opening effect will be executed even if a long-time hit with a normal pattern is won in the normal state immediately after the time-saving state ends, for example, when the number of reserved balls with the second special pattern has reached the upper limit (four balls). In this way, when the number of reserved balls with the second special pattern is at the upper limit, even if the electric device 640a performs a long opening and multiple balls enter the second ball entrance 640, no new reserved balls can be obtained, and the special feeling of the long opening effect cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in this seventh control example, during the specified period after the time-saving state ends (the period until the special symbol changes five times), even if a long-time hit with a normal symbol is won, the above-mentioned long opening effect is not executed (the effect during the long opening effect restriction is executed). This can increase the player's anticipation for the execution of the long opening effect.

As shown in FIG. 373, when the long opening effect is restricted, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 372(a) is not executed, and the third pattern variation effect is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Then, a guide display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating right-hand play is displayed as the play direction to instruct the player. In this way, even if a long-time hit of a normal pattern is won when the normal state is set as the play state, if the timing is within a predetermined period (the period from the end of the time-saving state to the execution of five special pattern variations), the long opening effect is not executed, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the player from being provided with a meaningless long opening effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent excessive drawing (variation) of the second special pattern by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special pattern immediately after the end of the time-saving state in which the variation of the second special pattern is the main.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is at the upper limit (4 balls), the period during which the long opening effect is restricted (restriction period) is set to the period from the end of the time-saving state until the special pattern changes five times, but it may also be set to a period from the end of the time-saving state until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, until the time required for the special pattern to change five times in a row. Also, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern falls below a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls or less) during the above-mentioned restriction period, the above-mentioned restriction period may be cleared and the long opening effect may be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted for a specified period of time after the time-saving feature has ended, but it may be configured to restrict the long opening effect based on other conditions. For example, the long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined that the currently running special pattern change has resulted in a jackpot, that a continuous effect is set to span multiple special pattern changes, or that the reserved ball for the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) contains winning information for a jackpot.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 374, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described. This seventh control example differs from the second control example in that a long opening performance flag 223e1 is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In addition, since the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in this seventh control example are the same, the various control processes related to the ball output of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example are the same as those in the first control example described above. On the other hand, the various control processes related to the presentation in this seventh control example (the control example of the voice lamp control device 113) are the same as those in the second control example except for the points described above. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same parts of the various control processes related to the ball output as in the first control example, and their explanations are omitted, and the same reference numerals are used for the same parts of the various control processes related to the presentation as in the second control example, and their explanations are omitted.

The change count counter 223aj has been described above in the second control example, so a detailed description will be omitted, but it is a counter that is set to a predetermined value (5) when the time-saving state ends, and is decremented by 1 when the third pattern change display is set (when a special pattern change occurs). In this seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of this change count counter 223aj becomes 0.

The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag to indicate that a long opening effect is being executed, and is set to on to indicate that a long opening effect is being executed. This long opening effect flag 223e1 is set on (see Z2907 in FIG. 377) when a long time win opening command sent from the main control device 110 is received and it is determined that the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904: No in FIG. 377), and is set off when a long time win end command for a normal pattern is received (Z2911 in FIG. 377).

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the seventh control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device in this seventh control example will be described. In this seventh control example, the difference between the first control example and the normal pattern variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) is changed to the normal pattern variation process 2 (Z171: see FIG. 375). As for the other processes, they are the same as the first control example, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 375, we will explain normal pattern change processing 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this seventh control example. Normal pattern change processing 2 (Z171) in this seventh control example differs from the normal pattern change processing (Z106: see FIG. 250) in the first control example in that it adds processing Z451 to Z453. The other processing is the same as in the first control example, so the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 375, when normal symbol change process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same Z401 and Z402 processes as in the first control example are executed, and if it is determined in the Z402 process that the normal symbol is not changing (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time release flag 203i is set to on (Z451). This long-time release flag 203i is a flag that is set to on (Z428) when it is determined in the normal symbol change start process (Z408: FIG. 251) that the normal symbol has won a long-time hit (Z426: Yes), as described above in the first control example.

If it is determined in the processing of Z451 that the long-time open flag 203i is set to on (Z451: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), a long-time end command is set (Z452), and processing proceeds to Z404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z451 that the long-time open flag 203i is not on (off) (Z451: No), the processing of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and processing proceeds to Z404. Then, the processing of Z404 to Z409 is executed, which is the same as the first control example described above, and this processing ends.

In other words, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set to ON from the time when the normal symbol that was won in the long-time win starts to change until the long-time win ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z402 that the normal pattern is currently changing (Z402: Yes), the process of Z410 to Z413 is executed in the same position as the first control example described above, then a command for a long time win is set (Z453), and this process is terminated. The command for a long time win set in Z453 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (Fig. 255) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113 that receives the command for a long time win creates a display command to indicate to the player that the long time win (long opening) is currently in progress, and transmits it to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 displays a display indicating that a long opening is in progress on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 372 (b)).

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example>
The control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 376 and Fig. 377. This seventh control example differs from the second control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z2152: Fig. 299) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: Fig. 376) and the long opening performance process (Z2272) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 376, command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 4 (Z2181). Command determination process 4 (Z2181) in this seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) in the second control example in that processes Z2271 to Z2277 have been added.

When command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes Z2201 to Z2209 as command determination process 2 (Z2152: Fig. 299) of the second control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received (Z2208: No), it is then determined whether a long-time win-related command has been received (Z2271). If it is determined that a long-time win-related command has been received (Z2208: Yes), the long-time opening effect process described below is executed (Z2272), and this process is terminated. In this long-time opening effect process (Z2272), a process is executed to set the display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a normal symbol wins a long-time win.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2271 that a long-time hit-related command has not been received (Z2271: No), the processing of Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, which is similar to Z2256 to Z2260 in command determination processing 2 (Z2152: Fig. 299) of the second control example described above, and this processing ends. In other words, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern, and when a specified command (a command indicating that a long-time hit has been won in the lottery for the normal pattern) is received, a presentation can be set to notify the player of this fact. Therefore, a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272) will be explained with reference to FIG. 377. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272). This long opening effect processing (Z2272) executes processing to set the effect mode of the long opening effect when a long-time hit of a normal pattern is won, and the effect mode is set according to the current game state (normal state, time-saving state, or within a specified period after the time-saving state ends) and the operation state of the normal pattern (changing, during a winning game).

When the long opening effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the long-time win-related command received this time is a long-time win open command (Z2901). This long-time win open command is a command that is set when a long-time win of a normal pattern is won in the normal pattern change start process (Z408: Fig. 251) of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of Z2901 that it is a long-time win open command (Z2901: Yes), then the current game state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that it is in the time-saving state (Z2903: Yes), this process is terminated as it is not the target period for executing the long opening effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2903 that the time-saving mode is not in effect (the normal mode is in effect) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the variation count counter 223aj is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (Z2904). A detailed explanation has been given in the second control example above, so we will only give a brief explanation. This variation count counter 223aj is set to a predetermined number (5) when the final variation for which the time-saving mode is set is stopped and displayed, and its value is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display setting process is executed. This counter is referenced to determine the period from when the time-saving mode ends until the variation of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times).

In the processing of Z2904, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223aj is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, if it is determined that at least five variations of the special pattern have been performed since the time-saving state ended, then since it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed while the normal state is set as the gaming state, a display long effect command is set (Z2906), the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to on (Z2907), and this processing is terminated.

The set display long performance command is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: Fig. 258) of the main process (see Fig. 258) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long performance command, it displays a display mode indicating a long opening performance on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 372 (a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2904 that the value of the variation counter 223aj is greater than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special pattern has not varied five times since the time-saving state ended, then since the normal state is set as the game state and it is a period during which the long opening effect cannot be executed, a display left-hit long effect command is set (Z2905) and this processing is terminated.

The set left-hit long display command is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: Fig. 258) of the main process (see Fig. 258) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long display command, it displays a display mode indicating that the long open display restriction is in effect on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 373).

If it is determined in the process of Z2901 that the long-time win-related command received this time is not a long-time win opening command (Z2901: No), it is then determined whether a long-time win command has been received (Z2908). This long-time win command is set after the start of the opening and closing control of the electric role is set in the normal pattern change process 2 (Z171: Fig. 375) of the main control unit 110, and is a command that indicates that a long-time win is being played.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2908 that a long time hit command has been received (Z2908: Yes), it is then determined whether the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to on (Z2909), and if it is determined that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to on (Z2909: Yes), a long opening command for display is set (Z2910) and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2909 that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to on (it is set to off) (Z2909: No), the processing of Z2910 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

Here, the processing of Z2909 will be explained. In this seventh control example, as in the first control example described above, the winning lottery and the operation mode (long release or not) of the electric role device 640a at the time of winning are determined at the timing when the normal pattern starts to change (the timing when the normal pattern change start process is executed), and the long-time winning release command is set at that timing. Then, after the normal pattern change time (minimum 3 seconds, maximum 30 seconds) has elapsed since the long-time winning release command was set, the stop display of the normal pattern (second pattern) is set, and then the operation control of the electric role device 640a is started.

Therefore, there is a time lag of at least 3 seconds and at most 30 seconds between receiving the long-time hit open command and the long-time hit medium command, so there is a risk that the long-time hit open command will be set when the time-saving state is set or when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is greater than 0, and then the long-time hit medium command will be received when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0.

In this seventh control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in conjunction with the long opening operation of the electric role 640a in such a state, if the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to on in the processing when a long winning opening command is received, the display long opening command is not set even if a long winning command is received. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, for example, the display mode effect based on the display left hit long effect command (see FIG. 373) from suddenly switching to the display mode effect based on the display long opening command (see FIG. 372(b)), which would give the player a sense of discomfort.

Returning to Figure 377, we will continue with the explanation. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the long time hit command has not been received (Z2908: No), it is then determined whether the long time hit end command has been received (Z2911). If it is determined that the long time hit end command has been received (Z2911: Yes), the long opening performance flag 223e1 is set to off (Z1912), the long opening end command for display is set (Z1913), and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2279 that a jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

<Regarding control process by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in this seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 378 and Fig. 379. This seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that command judgment process 2 (Z3302: Fig. 367) is changed to command judgment process 3 (Z3321: Fig. 378). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination process 3 (Z3321: Fig. 378) will be described with reference to Fig. 378. Fig. 378 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 3 (Z3321). Command determination process 3 (Z3321) in this seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z3302: Fig. 367) in the sixth control example in that it adds processes Z3441 to Z3442. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions are omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z3408 that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), the processing of Z3441 is executed. If it is determined in the processing of Z3441 that there is no long release related command for display (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a status command for display (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), the long release related processing (Z3442) is executed.

In the long opening related processing (Fig. 379, Z3442), first, a display data table for the long opening effect corresponding to the received display long opening effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long opening effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to on (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As explained above, in this seventh control example, when the normal state (a state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is unlikely to be executed) is set as the game state, if a long-time hit of the normal symbol is won, a long opening effect is executed during the variation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric device 640a is opened for a long time for the player, and the player can reliably play a game in which the ball enters the second winning hole 640.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, the execution of the above-mentioned long opening effect is restricted if it is within a specified period after the end of the time-saving feature when there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special pattern have been acquired in the normal state. This makes it possible to improve the quality of the benefit given to the player when the long opening effect is executed (the benefit of easily securing reserved balls of the second special pattern).

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is at the upper limit (4 balls), the period during which the long opening effect is restricted (restriction period) is set to the period from the end of the time-saving state until the special pattern changes five times, but it may also be set to a period from the end of the time-saving state until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, until the time required for the special pattern to change five times in a row. Also, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern falls below a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls or less) during the above-mentioned restriction period, the above-mentioned restriction period may be cleared and the long opening effect may be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted for a specified period of time after the time-saving feature has ended, but it may be configured to restrict the long opening effect based on other conditions. For example, the long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined that the currently running special pattern change has resulted in a jackpot, that a continuous effect is set to span multiple special pattern changes, or that the reserved ball for the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) contains winning information for a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, in the processing of Z2903 in the long opening effect processing (see FIG. 377), after determining Z2903: No, a process can be provided to determine whether the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is set on, and if it is determined that the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is set on, this process can be terminated as is so that the long opening effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without disrupting the priority with other effects being executed.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the display screen is configured to display different game methods depending on whether the long opening performance is restricted or executed. Specifically, when the long opening performance is executed, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is set to perform right-hand hit play to make the ball enter the second winning device 640, and when the long opening performance is restricted, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is set to perform left-hand hit play to make the ball enter the distribution device 700. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is at the upper limit (high), the first winning hole 64 and the right second winning hole 640 are targeted by left-hand hit play, and when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is low, the game can be performed by targeting the second winning hole 640 by right-hand hit play.

In the seventh control example, the game board 13 is configured to make the ease with which the ball flows down to the distribution device 700 and the second winning port 640 different depending on whether the ball is being played from the right or left. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the game board 13 may be configured so that a weaker ball launch in a left-handed game makes it easier for the ball to reach the second winning port 640, and a stronger left-handed game makes it easier for the ball to reach the distribution device 700. This makes it possible to greatly change the game results by making slight changes to the operation of the launch device, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, this seventh control example describes a configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above, but it is not limited to the control content of the main control device 110 used in the first control example described above, and may also be used in the control content of the main control device 110 in the second control example, that is, in a gaming machine of a type that executes the drawing (variation) of the second special pattern in priority over the first special pattern.

In addition, if a predetermined number or more (e.g., three or more) reserved balls are stored for the second special symbol at the end of the electric support game state (low probability electric support game state (time-saving game state) or high probability electric support game state (high probability variable game state)), the long-time win effect for the normal symbol may be prohibited (not executed), or may be switched to an effect that prompts the player to insert a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. By configuring in this way, even if the game state can be switched to the normal game state, if there are few reserved balls for the second special symbol, the long-time win effect for the normal symbol can be executed, and a malfunction that deprives the player of the opportunity to win with the second special symbol can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, when switching to the normal game state, the long-time hit effect of the normal pattern is not performed or the effect is switched to a different effect from the normal state until the special pattern changes a predetermined number of times (five times in this embodiment). However, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to not perform the long-time hit effect of the normal pattern or to switch to a different effect from the normal state when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), regardless of the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play advantageously according to the game state. Furthermore, the condition for not performing the long-time hit effect of the normal pattern or switching to a different effect from the normal state may be set to a case where a specific change pattern is being executed (for example, a change pattern of a jackpot or a change pattern of a super reach) regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. In addition, time information from the RTC may be obtained and set as a condition for switching if it is a specific time near closing time (for example, five minutes before closing). The switching condition may be set by combining the conditions given in this control example.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the eighth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 380 to Fig. 411. The eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (see Fig. 239), the control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when the background mode is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the performance content executed when the reserved ball number of the special pattern becomes a specific number (the upper limit number of 8 balls) are different, and detailed explanations are added about the control content of the sound lamp control device 113 related to the frame button 22 and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 254) and the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 257) are executed, and during the period when each start-up process is being executed (power-on period), as described above with reference to FIG. 239, a dedicated display screen (power-on screen) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and an announcement (power-on period announcement) to indicate that the power is currently on is executed is executed using the voice output device 226.

In the first control example configured in this manner, for example, if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut (turned off) while the special pattern is being displayed, and then the power is turned on (turned on), the special pattern change will resume from the state it was in immediately before the power was turned off, based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110. However, since the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the notification sound output from the audio output device 226 are configured to emphasize and notify the player that the power is on, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special pattern is being displayed, leading to the problem that the special pattern change that was being performed before the power was turned off has been erased.

In contrast, in the eighth control example, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, if the special symbol variation is in progress at the time the power is turned off, that is, if the special symbol variation is resumed after the power is turned on, BGM is output to indicate that the special symbol is varying during the power-on period. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand that the special symbol variation that was in progress before the power was turned off has resumed. In addition, since the amount of data processing is smaller when creating the audio data output from the audio output device 226 than when creating the data of the display image (third symbol variation image) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to immediately notify the player that the special symbol is varying after the power is turned on. Details of the audio output control when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 382.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22 even while the special symbol is changing. In addition, the timing of changing the background mode is configured to be variable according to the speed of change of the special symbol at the time when the frame button 22 is operated to change the background mode. Specifically, if the frame button 22 is operated during high-speed change, where the special symbol changes at a fast rate, the background mode is changed immediately, and if the frame button 22 is operated during low-speed change, where the special symbol changes at a slower rate than the high-speed change, the background mode is changed after the change of the special symbol has ended (after the special symbol has stopped being displayed, or when the next special symbol starts changing).

Generally, the variable display of special symbols executed in the pachinko machine 10 is configured to vary at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the variation starts, and then vary at a slower speed (second half period). The period during which the special symbols are displayed at a slower speed is used to execute an effect based on the lottery results of the special symbols. Therefore, by configuring as in this eighth control example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being changed while a special effect (an effect based on the lottery results of the special symbols) corresponding to the set background mode is being executed. The detailed control content for changing the background mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 384.

In addition, in this eighth control example, when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern reaches a specific number (for example, the upper limit of eight), a specific period of performance is executed using the variable time of the special pattern corresponding to the specific number of winning information reserved and stored. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play so that the number of reserved balls with the special pattern reaches the specific number.

When the periodic effect is configured to be executed within a predetermined range (within the time for changing the special pattern corresponding to a specific number of winning information stored in reserve) as in the eighth control example, if the first reserved pattern base m1 to the eighth reserved pattern base m8 are formed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 to notify the player of the current reserved ball number of the special pattern (maximum number 8), as in the first control example described above, and the reserved patterns are displayed in order from the first reserved pattern base m1 according to the reserved ball number of the special pattern (see FIG. 210(a)), the reserved pattern corresponding to the newly acquired winning information during the periodic effect is displayed in the small area Ds2, making it difficult for the player to grasp which reserved patterns are the target of the periodic effect, resulting in a problem of the presentation being difficult for the player to understand.

In contrast to this, in the eighth control example, when the periodic performance is not being performed, a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is displayed in the small area Ds2 as in the first control example described above, and when the periodic performance is performed, the number of reserved balls that are the subject of the periodic performance is displayed in the small area Ds2 as a performance reserved pattern. By configuring it in this way, even if new winning information is obtained during the periodic performance, the number of performance reserved patterns displayed in the small area Ds2 does not increase, so the player can be notified of the reserved patterns that are the subject of the periodic performance in an easy-to-understand manner. The detailed content of the periodic performance in this eighth control example will be described later with reference to Figures 386 to 388.

In addition, in the eighth control example, when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22, the operated (pressed) frame button 22 vibrates, and the vibration amount can be changed. By configuring the frame button 22 to vibrate in this way, when the player presses the frame button 22, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who pressed the frame button 22, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the presentation is configured to suggest the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration executed when the frame button 22 is pressed, the vibration level of the frame button 22 can be suggested to the player before operating (pressing) the frame button 22. By configuring in this way, the frame button 22 can be operated while the player predicts the vibration level. In addition, since the player can predict that the vibration level has been changed, the frame button 22 can be operated willingly multiple times.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 380, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 380 is a front view showing a typical game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 380, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is different from the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that a reserve LED 900 is provided below the third symbol display device 81, that mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are provided on the variable display device unit 80, and that a touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third symbol display device, but otherwise is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The reserved LED 900 is used to indicate the number of reserved balls of special patterns, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and are controlled to light up in accordance with the increased or decreased number of reserved balls of special patterns based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110 received by the audio lamp control device 113 indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of special patterns, or a reserved ball number command indicating a decrease.

By providing an area outside the display area of the third pattern display device 81 for reporting the number of reserved balls of the special pattern in this way, the number of reserved balls of the current special pattern can be reliably reported even if the reserved pattern display (see FIG. 381(b)) displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is temporarily erased or used for another purpose. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this reserved LED 900 uses a full-color LED and is configured to be able to produce light emission in at least three or more colors, and is controlled to light up so that the reserved balls of special pattern 1 and the reserved balls of special pattern 2 can be distinguished. This allows the player to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each pattern type, even if multiple special pattern types are provided.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect that is executed based on the results of advance judgment (pre-reading) performed on the reserved winning information stored in advance, when the color of the reserved pattern is changed, the reserved LED 900 is controlled to emit a color different from normal at the corresponding position. Furthermore, the display mode (light emission mode) of this reserved LED 900 is configured to be less noticeable than the reserved pattern display displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

In the eighth control example, a display area (illuminated area) showing the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is provided below the third pattern display device 81, outside the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but this illuminated area may be provided anywhere that is visible to the player, for example, in the lower right area of the game board 13. In addition, in the eighth control example, a maximum of eight reserved balls of the special pattern can be stored, so eight LEDs, the same as the upper limit of reserved memory, are used for the reserved LEDs 900, but this is not limited to this, and the number of reserved balls of the special pattern may be notified using four LEDs. Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the reserved LED 900 is controlled to always display the reserved number of balls with the special pattern, but other than that, for example, when the reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is erased or used for another performance, that is, when the player cannot easily grasp the reserved number of balls with the special pattern from the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 alone, the reserved LED 900 may be controlled to light up.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are light-emitting means consisting of four LEDs, and are used as notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variable performance (variable performance of the third pattern) for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, the player can select one of the background modes: a "sea mode" in which a display mode imitating the sea (e.g., a display mode imitating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device, and a "mountain mode" in which a display mode imitating a mountain (e.g., a display mode imitating a tree) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in a manner that can notify the player of the currently set background mode. This allows the player to easily ascertain the current background mode based on the emission manner of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d, even if, for example, a third pattern variation presentation using the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is executed and the player is unable to ascertain the current background mode even after ascertaining the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, in the first half of the special pattern change (when the third pattern is changing at high speed), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in an illumination manner that notifies the current background mode, and in the second half of the special pattern change (the period from when the high speed change of the third pattern ends until it is displayed as stopped), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in an indication manner that indicates the lottery result, rather than the current background mode. And, even in the second half of the special pattern change, the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in an indication manner that notifies the current background mode, by the player performing a specific operation on the operating means (frame button 22).

By configuring it in this way, the illumination of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d can be controlled in accordance with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special drawing results), making it possible to provide useful information to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that the illumination of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d is controlled based on the processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detection means (operation means) that has a predetermined detection range, and when it detects that the player's hand has entered the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that the player has performed an operation. The detection range of this touch sensor 2900 cannot be directly seen by the player, but a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 located on the rear side of the touch sensor 2900, making it easier for the player to operate the touch sensor 2900 (easier for the player to enter the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, the touch sensor 2900 in this control example is configured to be able to determine the movement (direction) of a hand that is entering the detection range, and is configured so that, for example, by moving the hand from right to left or bottom to top, a presentation display corresponding to the hand movement is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to execute a presentation operation corresponding to the operation of the player on the operating means (touch sensor 2900), so that the player can play while keeping his/her interest.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 381. FIGS. 381(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this eighth control example differ from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above in that the scroll direction of the third symbol (the decorative symbol that is displayed variably in synchronization with the special symbol) is changed from vertical to horizontal (right to left), the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is changed from one (see FIG. 209(a)) to five (see FIG. 381(a)), and the notification mode of information related to the game is changed. In addition, some elements are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but are given different symbols for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed explanation is omitted.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three rows of patterns (Z1 to Z3) are displayed: top, middle, and bottom (see Figure 381 (a)). The third patterns (decorative patterns that change in response to the changing display of the first special pattern (Special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (Special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are each composed of 10 main patterns each with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information that resembles a number. In this way, by using characters that correspond to each identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special symbol, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described below is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows, Z1, Z2, and Z3, at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling left and right periodically for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 and the middle pattern row Z2 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are configured to scroll from right to left as they change, while the lower pattern row Z3 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left as they change. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) that do not indicate the results of the special pattern lottery are formed between the main patterns.

As shown in FIG. 381(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction, and two active lines L4 and L5 formed in the diagonal direction. When each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed stopped, if the third pattern stops on the active line in a jackpot pattern combination (in this control example, a combination of the same main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 381(a), in this control example, each pay line (L1-L5) is formed to include the pattern display positions of each of the pattern columns Z1-Z3, so that the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern can be difficult to understand until all of the pattern columns V1-V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the variable display of the third pattern executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last pattern column (middle pattern column V2 in this control example) is stopped and displayed.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 381(b). As shown in FIG. 381(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result), and the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 2) to indicate the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the selection status of the special symbol can be notified to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 381(b)) to indicate the status in which the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a stationary manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm2 in FIG. 381(b)) to indicate the result of the selection of the special symbol. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed in a stationary manner to indicate the result of the selection of the special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 381(b), this control example shows an example in which the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the selection status of the special symbol is displayed is formed on the upper left and upper right sides of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the changing presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth pattern display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect. In this case, it is preferable to remove the fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure it so that the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

The display content displayed in the sub-display area Ds is substantially the same as in the first control example, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the first control example, as shown in FIG. 209(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, but in this eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is limited to only the small area Ds1, and within that small area Ds1, an in-progress area Ds1a and a waiting area Ds1b are formed. The display content of the in-progress area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 in the first control example described above, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the standby area Ds1b will be explained. In this control example, eight pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in the standby area Ds1b, and in normal times, a reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is displayed as in the first control example described above. On the other hand, in this eighth control example, when a reserved pattern is displayed on pedestal m8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern reaches the upper limit (8), a dedicated performance (period performance) using the eight reserved patterns stored in the reserved memory is executed (see FIG. 386). While this period performance is executed, the standby area Ds1b is configured to display a reserved pattern for performance that indicates only the period during which the period performance is executed (reserved pattern that is the target of the period performance), rather than a reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern.

By configuring it in this way, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period performance, a new reserved pattern will not be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so the player can be easily informed of how long the period performance will last.

Although not shown in FIG. 381, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 also displays display modes showing the following display contents. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode that guides the player on the direction to shoot the ball (play direction). By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

This guidance display area is configured to display a "right hit" display mode to guide the player to play right-handed games, and a "left hit" display mode to guide the player to play left-handed games. The "right hit" display mode is displayed during game states in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, i.e., during a special bonus state, a time-saving state, and during a jackpot game, and the "left hit" display mode is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after right-handed games have ended. Also, when right-handed games are detected to be being played during a game state in which left-handed games are advantageous to the player, i.e., during a normal state, the "left hit" display mode is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

<About the performance content in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 382 to Fig. 388, among various effects executed in this eighth control example, characteristic effects will be described. First, referring to Fig. 382 and Fig. 383, effects when the power is turned on will be described. Fig. 382 is a timing chart showing the flow of sound effects when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while the special symbol is fluctuating in the fluctuating pattern A.

In this control example, if a power outage occurs during a special pattern change (special pattern change) and the power is then turned on, a display mode indicating that the power is on is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 383 (a)) while the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed (during the return processing period). Then, if a special pattern change is being executed during the return processing period, the sound output device 226 is configured to output background music during the special pattern change. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily inform the player that a special pattern change is being executed during the return processing period.

In more detail, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a memory area (backup area) that temporarily stores various setting information even if the power is interrupted, and is configured to execute a power interruption process in which the game information before the power interruption (variation patterns for performance, BGM information, background mode, remaining variation time, etc.) is stored in the memory area when the power interruption occurs. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-mentioned memory area after the external power supply is cut off, so it is configured to store game information in the memory area only when a power interruption occurs. It is configured to store the part of the BGM that was output when the power interruption occurred ("B" in Figure 382) and output sound from the part of the BGM that was output when the power interruption occurred ("B") during the recovery process period after the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 382, the progress of the BGM that was being output when the power was interrupted is stored, and the BGM is played from the point where it stopped when the power was interrupted. However, this is not limited to this, and the BGM may be configured to be played from the start position of the part of the BGM that was being output when the power was interrupted. By configuring it in this way, the process of storing in the memory area when a power interruption occurs can be simplified.

Furthermore, in this control example, the return command indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 has ended (initial settings have been completed) is configured to include game information (selected change pattern, remaining change time, lottery results) regarding the special pattern change that was being performed before the power outage and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. This makes it possible to transition the display mode of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 from the initial screen (see FIG. 383(a)) to the normal screen (FIG. 383(b)) when the start-up process is completed (when the command indicating the completion of initial settings is output). This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the special pattern change that was being performed before the power outage has resumed.

Now, referring to FIG. 383, the display contents of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on will be explained. FIG. 383(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents immediately after power is turned on, and FIG. 383(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents after the initial settings are completed. Note that the contents shown in FIG. 383(a) are the same as the display contents shown in FIG. 239(b) of the above-mentioned control example, so a detailed explanation is omitted. However, in this eighth control example, when a special pattern change is being performed while this screen during initial settings is displayed, the BGM corresponding to that change pattern is output from the continuation at the time of power outage (see FIG. 382).

When the initial settings are complete, as shown in FIG. 382(b), a return-only variation pattern is executed based on the remaining period of the ongoing special chart variation. In this control example, the system is configured to execute a first judgment to determine whether the remaining variation time at the time the initial settings are complete is less than 2 seconds, a second judgment to determine whether it is 2 seconds or more but less than 5 seconds, and a third judgment to determine whether it is 5 seconds or more.

If the first judgment determines that the time is less than 2 seconds, the initial setting screen (see FIG. 383(a)) continues to be displayed until the remaining time has elapsed (until the ongoing special chart fluctuation ends), without setting a fluctuation pattern exclusively for return. This makes it possible to prevent a short-term fluctuation display that is difficult for the player to distinguish from being executed.

In addition, if the remaining fluctuation time is between 2 and 5 seconds, a return-only reach effect is executed in which the fluctuation display is executed from the reach state (a state in which the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 stop on the active line with the same pattern, and only the pattern row Z2 is displayed in a fluctuation state). This return-only reach effect is an effect that uses the fluctuation data of the normal reach, that is, the fluctuation pattern that is set to have the lowest probability of winning a jackpot among the normal fluctuation patterns, among the fluctuation patterns that result in a reach state.

Then, the variation data for a period of time corresponding to the length of the remaining variation time is played. By configuring it in this way, if the special chart variation being executed when the power is turned on is a jackpot, the jackpot winning can be notified with a variation pattern that is difficult to encounter under normal circumstances, providing added value to the player. Also, by using image data that is rarely actually used among the pre-stored image data (image data that shows a variation pattern that results in a jackpot in a normal reach), the image data can be used effectively.

Next, the operation for changing the background mode during special pattern change will be described with reference to Fig. 384 and Fig. 385. Fig. 384 is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of background change (background change) according to the timing of the background change operation during special pattern change.

As shown in FIG. 384, in this eighth control example, the speed of change of the third symbol, which is displayed in synchronization with the change of the special symbol, is variable. Specifically, the speed of change of the third symbol is gradually decreased in the order of "fast, medium, slow". This allows the player to play while predicting the timing at which the third symbol will stop. As with the first control example described above, this eighth control example is configured so that if the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot, a longer change time is more likely to be selected than if the lottery result is a miss, so that the lottery result for the current special symbol (length of change time) can be predicted based on the progress of the change speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed (background changeable) by the player operating the frame button 22 while the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state, and the timing of the background change varies depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 384, when the special symbol's changing state (the changing speed of the third symbol) is high speed and a background change operation (pressing frame button 22) is performed, a background change is executed immediately after the background change operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 384(a), when the current background mode is "sea" and the special symbol's changing state is high speed changing, if a background change operation is performed, a background change is executed immediately thereafter and the background mode transitions to "mountain mode" (see FIG. 385(b)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384(b), when the special pattern is not changing at high speed (medium speed, low speed, stopped), if a background change operation is performed, the background change is not performed until the special pattern change ends, and the background change is performed when the next special pattern change starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 385(a), the mode display area Dm1a provided in the information of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays "sea mode" indicating the current background mode, and the comment display area Dm2a provided to the right of the mode display area Dm1a displays the words "background change at next change" to indicate that a background change operation has been performed. This allows the player to be notified that a background change operation has been performed during the special pattern change (that the pachinko machine 10 has officially accepted the background change operation), and the background change is not performed immediately after the operation, which prevents the background change operation from being repeatedly performed.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the timing of the background change when a background change operation is performed while the special symbol is changing is varied depending on the state of change of the special symbol (the speed of change of the third symbol). This prevents the background from being changed while a presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) is being performed that indicates a high probability that the current special symbol will be selected as a winning symbol, while allowing the background to be changed immediately during a period when a presentation suggesting the current special symbol will be selected as a winning symbol (high-speed change period) is unlikely to be performed, allowing the player to experience a variety of presentations (backgrounds).

In the flow of background change explained with reference to FIG. 384, an example is shown in which a background change is performed at the timing when the next special chart change starts when a background change operation is performed during special chart change at a time other than when the special chart is changing at high speed, but this is not limited to this, and the background change may be configured to be performed, for example, at the timing when the third pattern is displayed in a stopped display mode (combination of three third patterns) for indicating the special chart lottery result (the timing when the performance suggesting the special chart lottery result ends).

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, if a background change operation is performed during special chart fluctuation other than during high-speed special chart fluctuation, the background change is not executed at least until after the result of the current special chart lottery is frozen and displayed; however, it is only necessary to configure the background change so as to prevent the performance suggesting the result of the special chart lottery from becoming difficult to understand when it is executed, and the background change may be delayed until a predetermined timing in the special chart fluctuation. Specifically, if a background change operation is executed when the special chart fluctuation state is a medium-speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the special chart fluctuation state switches to a low-speed fluctuation.

In addition, if a background change operation is performed during a special chart change other than during high-speed special chart change, the timing at which the background change is performed may be configured to switch based on the results of the current special chart lottery. For example, if the special chart change during change is a jackpot change, it may be configured to make it easier to perform a background change at a predetermined timing during the change period (for example, the timing at which it switches to low-speed change) than if the special chart change is a miss change. Furthermore, even if a background change operation is performed during high-speed special chart change, the timing at which the background change is performed may be configured to switch based on the results of the current special chart lottery.

This allows the player to experience new effects (backgrounds) by performing background change operations, and also motivates the player to perform background change operations.

In FIG. 384, the speed at which the third pattern (special pattern) is changing is used as the element for determining the timing of the background change when a background change operation is performed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the process of the performance display executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the special pattern change can be divided into multiple stages (e.g., five stages), and the timing of the background change can be determined according to the process of the performance display during the background change operation.

Specifically, the performance displays executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided into "fluctuation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach performance period", "developing performance period", and "performance result notification period", and for example, the "fluctuation start period" and "reach establishment period" can be configured to correspond to the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation state of the special pattern in this eighth control example, and the "reach performance period", "developing performance period", and "performance result notification period" can be configured to correspond to the "medium-speed fluctuation", "low-speed fluctuation", and "stop" fluctuation states of the special pattern in this eighth control example.

In this way, even if the timing of the background change that is executed after the background change operation is varied according to the progress of the performance display, rather than the speed at which the third pattern (special pattern) changes, the same effect as this control example can be achieved.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, if a background change operation is performed during a special chart change other than during a rapid special chart change, the background change is performed after the result of the current special chart lottery is frozen and displayed. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to vary whether or not to perform a background change and the destination of the background change (background mode) based on the lottery result of the next special chart change (the special chart change following the special chart change for which the background change operation was performed) or the lottery result of the next or subsequent special chart changes (the result of advance judgment (pre-reading) of the winning information that is reserved and stored).

By configuring it in this way, players can be motivated to perform background change operations in order to know the results of the special chart lottery in advance. By encouraging players to perform background change operations enthusiastically, a variety of effects can be provided to players, and players can be prevented from becoming bored with the game too early.

Next, the contents of the treasure chest effect (8 reserved ball effect) will be explained with reference to Fig. 386 to Fig. 388. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern reaches the upper limit of 8, the 8 reserved ball effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using 8 reserved balls, is executed. This 8 reserved ball effect is a dedicated effect using 8 reserved patterns, and reserved patterns for effect, which have a display mode imitating a treasure chest, are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b as reserved patterns for effect corresponding to each reserved pattern (see Fig. 386 (a)).

When a special pattern change corresponding to the reserved pattern that is the target of the 8 reserved performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 386(b), the first reserved pattern for performance tb0 is displayed in the execution area Ds1a, and from within that, the contents of the treasure chest tb10, which indicate the lottery result of that change, are displayed. Details will be described later, but these contents tb10 are configured to display different colors depending on the lottery result of the special pattern.

If new winning information is subsequently stored on hold while the eight-reserved effect is being executed, as shown in Figures 387(a) and (b), the reserved pattern corresponding to the new winning information is not displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the new reserved pattern 900z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900. This makes it possible to easily inform the player of the period (effect period) during which the eight-reserved effect will continue to be executed, up to which reserved pattern.

When the last special pattern change that is the subject of the 8-ball reserved effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 388, the reserved pattern for effect tb7 is displayed in the active area Ds1a, and the reserved pattern corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is displayed in the standby area Ds1b. In other words, when there are no more reserved patterns that are the subject of the 8-ball reserved effect, a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls currently stored is displayed. This prevents players from becoming confused when they finish the 8-ball reserved effect because they do not know how many reserved balls they have currently acquired.

In this control example, the 8 reserved ball presentation shown in FIG. 386 to FIG. 388 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even during the 8 reserved ball presentation, when the player performs a specific operation on the operation means while the reserved pattern for presentation is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the waiting area Ds1b may be configured to display a reserved pattern indicating the current number of reserved balls instead of the reserved pattern for presentation. Also, if it is determined in the advance determination process executed during the 8 reserved ball presentation that there is winning information for a jackpot, the 8 reserved ball presentation may be configured to continue until the special pattern change corresponding to the winning information is executed.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 389. FIG. 389(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example, and FIG. 389(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example. This eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that an eight-reserved lottery table 222fa, a special performance selection table 222fb, and vibration pattern data 222fc are added to the ROM 222, and a next background change flag 223fa, a reserved performance execution flag 223fb, and a reserved performance counter 2223fc are added to the RAM 223. The other elements are the same as those in the first control example, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

The 8-piece reserved selection table 222fa is a data table used when making a selection (determination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece reserved effect (treasure chest effect), and is referenced in the reserved number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 398) to determine whether or not to execute the 8-piece reserved effect (Z2475 in FIG. 398) when the sum of the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b is the upper limit value of "8" (Z2473 in FIG. 398: Yes). When it is decided to execute the 8-piece reserved effect, the 8-piece reserved effect described above is executed with reference to FIG. 386 to FIG. 388.

Now, with reference to FIG. 390(c), the contents of the 8-piece reserved lottery table 222fa will be explained. FIG. 390(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 8-piece reserved lottery table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 390(c), the 8-piece reserved lottery table 222fa is configured to determine whether the reserved special chart (the reserved chart used for the 8-piece reserved presentation) contains winning information indicating a lottery result (a winning prize) that is advantageous to the player, and to vary the probability of the 8-piece reserved presentation based on the result of this determination.

Specifically, if there is winning information indicating a win in the reserved special chart (if the reserved judgment result is "win"), it is stipulated that if the acquired reserved performance counter 223fc value is "0 to 140", the 8 reserved performance will be executed, and if it is "141 to 198", the 8 reserved performance will not be executed. On the other hand, if the reserved judgment result is "miss only", it is stipulated that if the acquired reserved performance counter 223fc value is "0 to 90", the 8 reserved performance will be executed, and if it is "91 to 198", the 8 reserved performance will not be executed.

In other words, in this control example, the eight-reserved effect is configured to be executed more easily when the reserved balls that are the target of the eight-reserved effect contain winning information indicating a lottery result (a winning prize) that is advantageous to the player than when they do not. In this way, by executing the eight-reserved effect, it is possible to make the player believe that they are about to win a jackpot, enhancing the effect of the presentation.

In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of a special symbol reaches the upper limit of eight, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute an eight reserved ball effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight reserved balls. However, it may also be configured to hold a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect (period effect) when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, seven balls) rather than when the upper limit is reached. In this case, for example, the probability of executing the eight reserved ball effect may be varied depending on whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to one of the special symbol types is three or four out of the seven reserved balls.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 having multiple special symbol types, the results of pre-determining the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) that is more likely to result in a jackpot game in which a large bonus (number of winning balls, game state set after the jackpot game) is given to the player in the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and the other special symbol type (unfavorable special symbol) may be separated to set the probability of the 8-piece reserved effect being executed differently. In this case, it is preferable to configure the 8-piece reserved effect to be executed more easily when there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserve of the advantageous special symbol than under other conditions. This can further increase the player's expectations for the 8-piece reserved effect.

The special effect selection table 222fb is a data table that is referenced when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is operated, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern, and a different vibration amount is set based on the lottery result (pre-determination result) in the reserve.

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 390(a). FIG. 390(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special effect selection table 222fb, and FIG. 390(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the vibration pattern data 222fc having the vibration amount scenario (vibe type) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb.

In this eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate when the player operates the frame button 22, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can be varied in three stages. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special pattern or the pre-determination result of the special pattern is favorable to the player, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate with a larger vibration amount. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is configured to be controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to be driven when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed.

As a result, the player cannot know whether the frame button 22 will vibrate or the amount of vibration if it does vibrate unless he or she presses the frame button 22, which makes it possible to motivate the player to press the frame button 22. Furthermore, this control example is configured so that a vibration amount corresponding to multiple presses of the frame button is specified as a single vibration amount scenario (vibration type), and the more times the frame button 22 is pressed, the more likely it is that the frame button 22 will vibrate with a larger vibration amount. This makes it possible to motivate the player to press the frame button 22 multiple times.

In this eighth control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 sets the variation pattern for the variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 399), it is configured to also set whether or not to have an effect (operation effect) that causes the frame button 22 to be operated, and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (part of the operation effect) that causes the frame button 22 to vibrate is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibration type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222fb when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the vibration operation of the frame button 22 according to the set vibration type is executed.

As shown in FIG. 390(a), the special effect selection table 222fb is for the case where a winning combination is included in the reserved special chart, and when the effect counter value is in the range of "0 to 79", "Vibe A" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), when the effect counter value is in the range of "80 to 139", "Vibe B" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), when the effect counter value is in the range of "140 to 175", "Vibe C" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and when the effect counter value is in the range of "176 to 198", "Vibe D" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type).

In addition, when there are no winnings (only misses) in the reserved special chart, and the performance counter value is in the range of "0 to 49", "Vibe B" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), when it is in the range of "50 to 90", "Vibe C" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and when it is in the range of "91 to 198", "Vibe D" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type).

Next, referring to FIG. 390(b), the detailed contents of each vibration type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb will be explained. As shown in FIG. 390(b), in this eighth control example, four vibration types (vibration A to vibration D) can be set, and a vibration amount corresponding to the number of operations (number of pushes) of the frame button 22 is defined for each vibration type.

Specifically, for the vibration type "Vibe A," "none (no vibration)" is specified for the first push and "strong" for the second to fourth pushes; for "Vibe B," "weak" is specified for the first push, "medium" for the second push, and "strong" for the third and fourth pushes; for "Vibe C," "none (no vibration)" is specified for the first push, "weak" for the second push, "medium" for the third push, and "strong" for the fourth push; and for "Vibe D," "weak" is specified for the first push, and "medium" for the second to fourth pushes.

In this way, the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated varies depending on the vibration type that has been set, and the amount of vibration can be varied depending on the number of pushes, allowing the player to enjoy wondering at what amount the frame button 22 will vibrate the next time he or she presses the frame button 22. This allows the player to actively participate in the operation presentation, enhancing the presentation effect.

In the eighth control example, the vibration amount specified for each vibration type is configured to increase (not decrease) as the number of pushes increases, but this is not limited to the above and the vibration amount may be configured to decrease. In this case, if the special chart change being executed is a jackpot change, or if there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserved special chart, it is preferable to configure the vibration amount of the frame button 22 to tend to decrease midway through the special performance. This makes it possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the vibration amount decreases.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, regardless of which vibration type is set, the vibration amount is set for a specific number of pushes (4 pushes), but this is not limited to this, and the number of pushes for which the vibration amount is set may be different depending on the vibration type.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this eighth control example, the same operation presentation as the normal operation presentation (a presentation that has the player operate the frame button 22 multiple times according to the course of the changing display (reach change)) is configured to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the frame button operation a prescribed number of times (four times) simply by operating the frame button 22 in accordance with the presentation (operation presentation) of the changing display executed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, this eighth control example also has a display effect dedicated to special effects. This display effect dedicated to special effects executes an effect in which the display mode can be stepped up in stages (up to four stages) during a specific period within the special chart change period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the special chart change begins). This effect is configured with an effect that can suggest that the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 is variable (increased) when the frame button 22 is pressed.

By using such a special effect, the player can be made to actively operate the frame button 22 while expecting the vibration of the frame button 22 to become even greater. In addition, even if a vibration amount scenario (vibration type) that causes the vibration of the frame button 22 to become even greater is set, it is possible to prevent the special effect from ending without vibrating the frame button 22 at the maximum vibration amount specified for the set vibration type.

In this case, the presentation mode of the display effect dedicated to the above-mentioned special effects may be configured to be set based on the lottery results of the variation, rather than just the vibration type that has been set, and a presentation pattern may be set in which the display mode steps up even though the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is not changed.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be explained. In this control example, the vibration amount is defined based on the magnitude of the amplitude of the "frequency (number of vibrations per unit time)," "amplitude (amplitude)," and "period (period)," which are definitions indicating the strength of the vibration. Therefore, the amplitude of the vibration felt when pressing the frame button 22 varies depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, allowing the player to easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

The special effects described above may be configured so that the player can feel different vibrations when the frame button 22 is pressed multiple times, and any method that changes the vibration mode (amplitude, frequency, duration of vibration, period from pressing the frame button 22 until vibration starts, etc.) may be used, or a combination of each may be used. Also, multiple vibration means (motors, etc.) that can impart vibration to one operating means (frame button 22) may be provided, and the position of the vibration source that vibrates the frame button 22 may be changed by controlling the drive of the multiple vibration means, or the drive start timing of each vibration means may be made different to change the vibration mode felt by the player. Also, the player may be able to select the variable content of the vibration mode.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 when a special effect is set, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be configured to vibrate with an amount of vibration that is smaller than the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 set for the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that a special effect is currently being performed.

The vibration pattern data 222fc is a data table that stores the contents of each vibration type (Vibe A to Vibe D) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. The contents have been described above in the explanation of the special effect selection table 222fb, so they will be omitted here.

Next, referring to FIG. 389(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. As described above, the RAM 223 in this eighth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that it adds a next background change flag 223fa, a pending performance execution flag 223fb, a pending performance counter 2223fc, and a SW special performance counter 223fd.

The next background change flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is satisfied, and is set to ON when the background change condition is satisfied. In this control example, even when a background change operation is performed to change the background mode, the timing of the background change is configured to differ depending on the timing of the background change operation. In such a case, a time lag occurs between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) actually changes (transitions). Therefore, the next background change flag 223fa is configured to be set to ON in order to temporarily store that the background change condition has been satisfied.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 403), if it is determined that the state of change of the special pattern (the speed of the change display of the third pattern) at the time when the background change operation (operation on the frame button 22) is executed is not changing at high speed (Z2964: No in FIG. 403), it is set to on (see Z2965 in FIG. 403). Then, in the change stop process 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 397), which is executed when a stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern change is received, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266: Yes in FIG. 397), it is then determined whether or not there is a reserved memory of the special pattern (Z2267 in FIG. 397), and if it is determined that there is no reserved memory (Z2267 in FIG. 397: No), the background change is executed at the timing when the special pattern change is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special chart is reserved (Z2267 in Figure 397: Yes), a background change will be performed when the next special chart change begins (see Z2258 in Figure 396).

The pending performance in progress flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that the 8 reserved ball performance (see FIG. 386) is being performed, and is set to ON when the 8 reserved ball performance is being performed. Then, when the 8 reserved ball performance ends, it is set to OFF (see Z2534 in FIG. 399). Although detailed illustration is omitted, while this pending performance in progress flag 223fb is set to ON, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) reaches the upper limit (8), a lottery is not performed to determine whether to perform a new 8 reserved ball performance.

Specifically, in the reserved ball count control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 398), if it is determined that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter is 8 (Z2473 in FIG. 398: Yes), it is then determined whether the reserved performance execution flag 223fb is set to on, and if it is determined that it is not set to on (off), the processes Z2474 and Z2475 in FIG. 398 are executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the 8 reserved performance from continuing for an unnecessarily long time, and therefore the value of the 8 reserved performance can be increased. In addition, it is also possible to configure it so that, different from the configuration of this control example, when the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the 8 reserved performance, a lottery is performed to determine whether to execute a new 8 reserved performance. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that the lottery to determine whether to execute a new 8 reserved performance is different from the lottery to determine whether to execute the initial 8 reserved performance. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the new 8 reserved performance so that it is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is included in the target reserved performance than the initial 8 reserved performance. This can further increase the expectation of a jackpot when the 8 reserved performance is executed for a special pattern variation that is more than 8. In addition, it is possible to make the player eager to play again to save reserved balls up to the upper limit number even during the 8 reserved performance.

The reserved effect counter 223fc is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to a different value each time the main processing (see FIG. 394) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (every millisecond). The value of this reserved effect counter 223fc is obtained when the reserved number control processing (see Z3343 in FIG. 398) is performed by referring to the 8 reserved effect selection table 222fa to determine whether or not to execute an 8 reserved effect (see Z2474 in FIG. 398).

The SW special effect counter 223fd is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which a special effect is set, and when a special effect is set (see Z2944) in the SW effect processing (see Z2841 in FIG. 402), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (see Z2945 in FIG. 402). Here, in this control example, regardless of the type of special effect set, a special effect equivalent to four frame button operations is set, so the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to a value of 4.

Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during a special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 402), and the SW motor data is set to execute an effect corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the decrement (see Z2947 in FIG. 402).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to Figures 391 and 392. In this eighth control example, the contents defined in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the contents defined in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 are different from those in the above-mentioned first control example, but the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 391 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this eighth control example. As shown in Figure 391, the work RAM 233 in this eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that an 8-item display setting flag 233fa, a display 8-item effect counter 233fb, a display pending ball count storage area 233fc, and a display effect counter 233fd have been added to the work RAM 233 in this eighth control example.

The 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is a flag to indicate that the 8-piece reserved effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the 8-piece reserved effect is being executed. While this 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to ON, the remaining number of reserved patterns (reserved patterns for effect) that are the target of the 8-piece reserved effect, rather than the number of reserved balls of the special pattern, is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 383(b)) of the secondary display area Ds of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 388). This makes it possible to easily notify the player of the execution period of the 8-piece reserved effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) that is executed across multiple special pattern changes.

In the eighth control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the subject of the eight reserved effect and the number of reserved symbols for effect are displayed in a synchronized manner, but it is sufficient to display the number of reserved symbols for effect so that the execution period of the eight reserved effect can be clearly notified to the player. For example, the number of reserved symbols for effect can be set according to the number of times the third symbol stops or temporarily stops during the eight reserved effect, or one reserved symbol for effect can be set for two or more special symbol variations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the eight reserved effect (which reserved symbol is currently being displayed as a variation).

The display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is a counter for measuring the number of reserved symbols for effect displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 383(b)) of the secondary display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the 8-piece reserved effect. In this control example, the number of reserved symbols for effect is variable in accordance with the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the subject of the 8-piece reserved effect, so the counter value is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 409) in the 8-piece display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 409), which is executed when a display 8-piece effect reserved command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

Then, in the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 408) executed when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the counter value is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 408), and it is determined whether the counter value after subtraction is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 408). When the value of the display 8-piece performance counter 233fb becomes 0, all reserved patterns that are the subject of the 8-piece reserved performance have been used, so the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to off to end the display of the reserved patterns for the performance (see Z3525 in FIG. 408), and the reserved patterns are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b in the reserved display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 410) (see FIG. 388). As a result, when the last special pattern variation that is the subject of the 8-piece reserved performance is executed, the reserved pattern indicating the reserved ball number of the special pattern is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that when the 8-piece reserved performance ends, the player can be easily informed of how many reserved balls of the special pattern have been accumulated.

The display reserved ball count storage area 233fc is a storage area for storing the current number of reserved balls for the special chart on the display control device 114 side, and when a display reserved ball count command output from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233fd is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to a different value each time the display control device 114 command judgment process (see Z3302 in FIG. 407) is executed. The value of this display effect counter 233fd is obtained when the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 398) is used to determine whether or not to execute an 8-item hold effect by referring to the 8-item hold selection table 222fa (see Z2474 in FIG. 398).

Next, the contents of the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 in this eighth control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 391, the NAND type flash memory 234a in this eighth control example differs from the NAND type flash memory 234a in the first control example described above in that an eight-stage performance scenario selection table 234a3 has been added.

The 8-piece presentation scenario selection table 234a3 is a data table for selecting the presentation result of the 8-piece reserved presentation, and is referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the 8-piece reserved presentation based on the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the subject of the 8-piece reserved presentation and the lottery result of the special symbol.

Here, the detailed contents of the 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3. As described above with reference to FIG. 386 to FIG. 388, in this 8th control example, when the 8-piece reserved performance is executed and the special chart change starts, the displayed treasure chest in the execution area Ds1a is opened and a suggestion state for showing the lottery result of the change is displayed, and the suggestion state is selected with reference to the 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3.

In this 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3, when the corresponding variation result (the result of the lottery for the currently executed special pattern variation) is a win (jackpot) and the value of the displayed 8-piece performance counter 233fb is "7 to 4," i.e., when 4 to 7 reserve patterns for performance imitating treasure chests are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "rainbow" is defined for the value of the displayed performance counter 233fd in the range of "0 to 50," the suggested mode "red" is defined for the range of "51 to 90," the suggested mode "blue" is defined for the range of "91 to 150," and "white" is defined for the range of "151 to 198."

In addition, when the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 treasure chest-like reserved effect symbols are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "rainbow" is defined in the range of the value of the display effect counter 233fd "0 to 89", the suggested mode "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", the suggested mode "blue" is defined in the range of "150 to 179", and "white" is defined in the range of "180 to 198".

On the other hand, if the variation result (the lottery result of the special pattern variation executed this time) is a miss and the value of the display 8-piece performance counter 233fb is "7 to 4", that is, if 4 to 7 reserved symbols for performance imitating treasure chests are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "red" is specified in the range of the display performance counter 233fd from "0 to 39", the suggested mode "blue" is specified in the range of "40 to 149", and "white" is specified in the range of "150 to 198". Also, if the value of the display 8-piece performance counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, if 0 to 3 reserved symbols for performance imitating treasure chests are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "red" is specified in the range of the display performance counter 233fd from "0 to 59", the suggested mode "blue" is specified in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is specified in the range of "160 to 198".

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the suggestive mode displayed as the 8-reserved effect has a win suggestive mode "rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a win. Therefore, when the suggestive mode "rainbow" is displayed, the player is notified of the favorable lottery result at the timing when the special chart fluctuation begins, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the lower the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb, i.e., the more the 8-piece reserved effect progresses, the more likely it is that various colors will be displayed as indications of the 8-piece reserved effect. This allows you to enjoy the 8-piece reserved effect, which is a continuous effect that is executed across multiple special chart changes, all the way to the end without getting bored.

In the eighth control example, when an eight-reserved effect is executed, a reserved pattern (treasure chest) for the effect is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b to indicate the target special pattern change, and when the target special pattern change for the effect is executed, the treasure chest displayed in the execution area Ds1a opens and displays a suggestive pattern to suggest the lottery result of the change. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the reserved pattern (treasure chest) for the effect is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the color of the displayed treasure chest may be set based on the results of a pre-determination for each reserved pattern.

Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that multiple treasure chest colors can be set so that they are more likely to be selected when the winning information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a jackpot, compared to when the information indicating a jackpot is not included. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the special symbol change that is executed during the eight reserved symbols performance, even before the special symbol change is executed.

In addition, when a combination of an effect (pre-reading effect) that changes the state of the reserved pattern for the effect (color of the treasure chest) displayed in the waiting area Ds1b and an effect (the relevant variable effect) that changes the display state of the contents of the treasure chest displayed in the active area Ds1a is executed, it is preferable to set the variable state so that the player focuses on the relevant variable effect executed after the pre-reading effect that is executed first. In this case, when setting the performance state (color of the treasure chest) of the pre-reading effect, the performance state of the relevant variable effect corresponding to the reserved pattern for which the performance state is set may also be configured to be set in advance, or when selecting the relevant variable effect, the relevant variable effect may be selected based on the performance state of the pre-reading effect set for the reserved pattern corresponding to the current relevant variable effect. This allows the performance states of multiple effects (pre-reading effect, the relevant variable effect) executed at different times for one reserved pattern (winning information) to be related, and consecutive effects can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 393 to Fig. 406, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. In this eighth control example, the difference from the above-mentioned first control example is that the contents of the performance setting process (Z5204: Fig. 304), which is one process in the main processing variable performance setting process 2 (Z2153: Fig. 303) of the start-up process, have been partially changed. The other processes are the same, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 393, the start-up process (see FIG. 393) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 257) of the first control example described above in that the process when a status command is received (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 257) has been deleted. It also differs in that the content of the process executed in the initial setting (Z2001) has been changed. As the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 393) is executed, the processes Z2001 to Z2011 are executed as in the first control example described above, and this process ends. Here, the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighth control example will be explained with respect to the differences from the first control example described above. In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 382, during the period in which the initial setting is being executed, if a special chart change is being executed, the BGM for the special chart change is output. In other words, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 393), a process is executed to read the game information at the time of power off, and if it is determined that the game information at the time of power off read by this process is during a special chart change, an audio change command is set to output the BGM for the special chart change from the audio output device 226.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this eighth control example, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko machine 10, power is supplied from an internal power source provided inside the sound lamp control device 113, and the game information at the time of the power outage (whether or not there is a special chart change, the lottery results for that change, the background music for the change, the remaining change time, etc.) is temporarily stored in the display memory area. This makes it possible to read out the game information stored in the display memory area during the initial settings (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 393).

Next, the contents of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a schematic diagram showing the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example.

The main processing of this eighth control example differs from the main processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 258) in that it replaces the reserved item number display update processing (Z2106 in FIG. 258) with a reserved item number update processing 8 (Z2171 in FIG. 394), replaces the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107 in FIG. 258) with a frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 394), replaces the command determination processing (Z2113 in FIG. 258) with a command determination processing 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 394), and replaces the variable display setting processing (Z2114 in FIG. 258) with a variable display setting processing 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 394), and in that it has deleted the short-term winning management processing (Z2111 in FIG. 258) and the pending performance management processing during reach (Z2112 in FIG. 257) and added a lamp setting processing (see Z2173 in FIG. 394). The rest of the process is the same, so the same elements are given the same reference numbers and detailed descriptions are omitted.

When main processing 8 (see FIG. 394) is executed, first, the processing of Z2101 to Z2105 is executed, which is the same as the main processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 258). Then, when processing Z2105 is completed, next, pending number display update processing 8 is executed (Z2171). The details of this pending number display update processing 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 400. When processing Z2171 is completed, next, frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 is executed (Z2172). The details of this frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 401.

After completing the process of Z2172, the process of Z2108 to Z2110 is executed, which is the same as the main process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 258), and then the lamp setting process is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the light emission state of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d provided on the upper side of the variable display unit 80. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 406.

When the processing of Z2173 is completed, or when it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: No), command determination processing 8 is executed (Z2174), and then variable display setting processing 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the processing of Z2115 to Z2119 is executed, which is the same as the first control example described above. Note that the details of command determination processing 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, and the details of variable display setting processing 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG. 399.

Next, referring to FIG. 395, the contents of command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 8 (Z2174). This command determination process 8 (Z2174) differs from the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 259) in that the contents of the process executed when a fluctuation pattern command and a reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110 are different, a process (fluctuation stop process 8) that is executed when a stop command output from the main control device 110 is received is added, and a process that is executed when a display start command output from the display control device 114 is received is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Note that in the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 259), the process executed when the stop type command shown in the figure is received (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 259) is the same process executed in this eighth control example, but for ease of explanation, it will be assumed to be executed as the process corresponding to other commands (Z2261 in FIG. 395).

When command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), variation pattern reception process 8 is then executed (Z2241), and this process is terminated. The details of this variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 396, but it differs from the variation pattern reception process of the first control example described above (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) in that it is configured to execute processing for a background change at the start of the variation.

Returning to FIG. 395, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of Z2201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes), variation stop processing 8 is executed (Z2242), and this processing is terminated. This variation stop processing 8 (Z2242) is a process for setting the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a process for executing a background change when the special pattern is stopped, and the details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

If it is determined in the process of Z2203 that a stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is then determined whether a reserved ball count command has been received (Z2205). If it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (Z2205: Yes), the reserved number control process is executed (Z2243) and this process is terminated. The details of this reserved number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 398.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 2205 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (Z2205: No), the process executes Z2207 and Z2208, which are the same as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 259), and then determines whether a display start command has been received (Z2244). This display start command is set when the display control device 114 completes the initial setting process after power-on, and is output from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a command output process (not shown) executed by the display control device 114.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2244 that a display start-up command has been received, i.e., the initial setting processing of the display control device 114 has been completed and it is possible to display any image data on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z2244: Yes), the set voice data is started up and set (Z2245), and this processing is terminated.

In this Z2245 process, a process is executed to read out the game information (audio data) stored in the display memory area when the power is turned off and output the audio data to the audio output device 226. This allows the audio output device 226 to output audio based on the audio data stored in the display memory area in accordance with the timing at which the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 switches from the initial screen to the normal screen, as described above with reference to FIG. 382.

In this control example, the game information stored in the display memory area when the power is turned off can include information indicating whether or not the special chart is changing (special chart changing information) and information indicating the type of sound (BGM) being played while the special chart is changing (BGM type information).When setting sound data in the processing of Z2245, the special chart changing information and BGM type information are read, and the start-up sound data is set based on the read information.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2244 that a display start command has not been received (Z2244: No), processing according to other commands (including processing when a stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be explained with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the contents of fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241). This fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) differs from the fluctuation pattern reception process of the first control example described above (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) in that the processes Z2225 to Z2231 have been deleted and a background change process at the start of the fluctuation has been added. As the other processing contents are the same, the same reference symbols are used for the same processing contents and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the variation pattern receiving process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 396) is executed, the same processes Z2221 to Z2224 as the variation pattern receiving process of the first control example described above (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) are executed, and then it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2256). If it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2256: Yes), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z2257), a display switch command to the variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2259), and this process is terminated.

In other words, when a background change operation is performed outside the third pattern high speed change period during special pattern change, and the change pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 396) is executed with the next background change flag 223fa set to on, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation performed during the previous special pattern change. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2256 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to on (is set to off) (Z2256: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) will be explained with reference to FIG. 397. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242). When the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third pattern is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z2266: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved special pattern (Z2267). In this process, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a for special pattern 1 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b for special pattern 2 are read out to make the determination. In the process of Z2267, if it is determined that there is no reserved special pattern (Z2267: No), even though the condition for executing a background change with the next special pattern change is met, the next special pattern change is not executed. Therefore, in order to execute a background change when the current special pattern change is stopped, the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z2268), a display switching command for the change pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of Z2266 determines that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to on (Z2266: No), or if the process of Z2267 determines that a special chart is reserved (Z2267: Yes), the background change is not performed at the timing of executing this process (timing when the special chart stops changing), so the processes of Z2268 and Z2269 are skipped and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, if the next background change flag 223fa is on and the conditions for executing the next special chart change are not met (if there is no special chart reserved at the time the current special chart change stops), the background change is executed at the time the current special chart change stops, so that the new background mode can be provided quickly to players who wish to change the background.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the above-described control example, for example, the next background change flag 223fa may be kept on until the next special chart change is executed. In this case, a predetermined effective period (for example, one minute) may be set as the period until the next special chart change is started, and if the next special chart change is not executed within the predetermined effective period, the next background change flag 223fa may be set to off.

By configuring it in this way, for example, even if the previous player performed a background change operation and ended play with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON, it is possible to prevent a background change from being performed immediately after the next player starts playing.

Next, the contents of the reserved number control process (Z2243) will be explained with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved number control process (Z2243). In this reserved number control process (Z2243), the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for managing the number of reserved balls for the special chart based on the information contained in the reserved ball number command received from the main control device 110, and executes an effect (8 reserved balls effect) whose execution condition is that the number of reserved balls for the special chart reaches a specified number.

In the reserved number control process (Z2243), first, the reserved ball number of the special pattern is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved number counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) (Z2471), and a reserved ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the special pattern reserved number counter stored in the process of Z2471 is set (Z2472). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is the upper limit value of 8 (Z2473).

If the processing of Z2473 determines that the counter value (number of reserved special balls) is 8 (Z2473: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained (Z2474), and the lottery result is obtained from the 8-reserved lottery table 222fa based on the obtained value of the performance counter 223h (Z2475), and it is determined whether the lottery result indicates that an 8-reserved performance will be executed (Z2476).

If it is determined that the lottery result indicates that an 8-item reserved performance will be executed (Z2476: Yes), the corresponding 8-item reserved performance is set (Z2477), an 8-item reserved performance command for display is set (Z2478), the reserved performance execution flag 223fb is set to on (Z2479), the reserved performance counter 223fc is set to 8, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2476 that the lottery result indicates that an 8-item reserved performance will not be executed (Z2476: No), the 8-item reserved performance will not be executed, so the processing of Z2477 to Z2480 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the contents of Variable Display Setting Process 8 (Z2175) will be explained with reference to FIG. 399. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the contents of Variable Display Setting Process 8 (Z2175). This Variable Display Setting Process 8 (Z2175) differs from the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 269) in that control processing related to the reserved presentation (8 reserved presentation) has been added, but is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first it is determined whether the variable start flag is set to on (Z2501), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (Z2501: No), it skips to the process of Z2505 as in the first control example. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable start flag is set to on (Z2501: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc is greater than 0 (Z2531), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (Z2531: Yes), the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc is decremented by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc after the decrement is 0 (Z2533).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2533 that the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc is 0 (Z2533: Yes), this means that the timing for the end of the eight reserved performances has arrived, so the reserved performance execution flag 223fb is set to off (Z2534), and the process proceeds to Z2502, which is the same as the first control example described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2531 that the value of the reserved effect counter 223fc is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2531: No), this means that there are not currently 8 reserved effects, so the processing of Z2532 to Z2534 is skipped and processing proceeds to Z2502.

In addition, in the process of Z2533, if it is determined that the value of the reserved effect counter 223fc is not 0 (Z2533: No), since the 8 reserved effect is being executed and it is not the timing to end the 8 reserved effect, the process of Z2534 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2502. When the process proceeds to Z2502, the process of Z2502 to Z2509 is executed, which is the same as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 269), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171) will be explained with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the contents of reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171). In this reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171), processing is performed to control the lighting of the reserved LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode that indicates the number of reserved balls of the special pattern.

When the reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the reserved ball count LEDs 900 corresponding to the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b) are set to light (Z2631), then a reserved ball count command for display corresponding to the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b) is set (Z2632), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, in the processing of Z2631, the reserved LED 900 is configured to light up in the same manner in response to the combined value of the reserved ball count for special chart 1 and the reserved ball count for special chart 2. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the reserved LED 900 may be configured to light up in a manner that allows the player to distinguish the reserved ball count for special chart 1 and the reserved ball count for special chart 2. Alternatively, the reserved LED 900 may be configured to light up in response to only the reserved ball count for one of the special charts depending on the current game state.

In addition, in this control example, the reserved LED 900 is configured to always be lit to indicate the reserved balls of the special pattern, but without being limited to this, the reserved LED 900 may be configured to be lit only during periods when certain game conditions are met (for example, periods during which it is difficult to visually confirm the number of reserved balls of the special pattern on the third pattern display device 81, such as periods during which an 8-ball reserved performance is being performed, periods during which a movable part (gimmick) for the performance is moving so that the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, and periods during which a variable display is being performed using the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81).

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172) will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172). This frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172) differs from the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above in that the processing contents executed when the frame button 22 is pressed and the processing contents executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated are changed, but otherwise they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processing Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above is executed, and if it is determined in processing Z2805 that frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2805: No), the processing related to the various effects that are executed when frame button 22 is pressed is skipped and the process moves to Z2842.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2805 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), SW performance processing is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed if the switch that the frame button 22 comes into contact with when it is pressed continues to output ON for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In other words, in this control example, it is configured so that a return period of at least 0.2 seconds is required for the frame button 22 to return to its initial position after the frame button 22 is physically pressed and the switch is turned ON (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), and the frame button 22 is configured to be located in a position where the switch is turned ON for 0.15 seconds of the return operation.

By configuring it in this way, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch remains on for at least 0.15 seconds, so if the on state is detected to continue for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, for example, when an output indicating an on state for a short period (e.g., 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being mistakenly determined to have been pressed.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841) executed in the processing of Z2841 in FIG. 401 will be explained with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), control processing related to a special effect that vibrates the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, background change processing that changes the background mode by pressing the frame button 22, and processing identical to a portion of the processing in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above are executed. Note that processing identical to a portion of the processing in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing (Z2841) is executed, it is first determined whether a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, it is determined whether the current timing is one in which a variable pattern including a special effect is set as the SW effect when setting the display variable pattern command in the Z2504 processing of the variable display setting processing (see Z2175 in FIG. 399), and also in which the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is set in the Z2804 processing of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 401).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that it is a special effect (Z2941: Yes), the current operation of the frame button 22 is an operation of the frame button 22 during a special effect, so the control processing for the special effect (Z2942 to Z2947) is executed. First, in Z2942, it is determined whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0 (Z2942).

The value of this SW special effect counter 223fd is set when a special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 0 at the time of the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. If the processing of Z2942 determines that the counter value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2942: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2943), and a special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222fb based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223h (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, no matter which special effect is selected, the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is operated four times, so in the processing of Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 4.

Next, a special effect command for display corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2947), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2942 that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0, i.e., that a special effect has already been executed (Z2942: Yes), the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1 (Z2948), and the process is terminated by executing the processes of Z2946 and Z2947 corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the decrement.

Now, the processing of the above-mentioned special effects will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 390(b) in the case where a special effect type (vibration type C) is selected. First, when the current variation pattern includes a special effect, the first operation of the frame button 22 is performed, and the type of special effect (vibration type C) is selected by processing Z2944. Then, by processing Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 3, and by processing Z2447, the amount of vibration (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation for vibration type C is set (see FIG. 390(b)).

In addition, in the processing of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and a press suggestion display mode for executing the action of pressing the button display mode) is displayed to encourage the player to operate the next frame button. Here, the above-mentioned operation suggestion display mode is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to the current special pattern change and the type of special effect selected, and is configured so that, for example, when a vibration greater than the amount of vibration generated when the current frame button is operated is applied when the next frame button is operated, a display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is more likely to be displayed than when a large vibration is not applied.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the next frame button. Also, it is configured so that if the result of the current special drawing is a jackpot, a display mode that emphasizes the operation suggestion is more likely to be displayed than if the drawing result is not a jackpot (a miss), and if a vibration greater than the amount of vibration generated when the current frame button is operated is applied when the next frame button is operated, and if the result of the special drawing is a jackpot, a display mode that most emphasizes the next frame button operation is more likely to be displayed.

This makes it possible to predict the outcome of the current special drawing based on both the operation suggestion displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the amount of vibration generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. Furthermore, because the operation suggestion is emphasized when the amount of vibration generated when the next frame button is operated is greater than the amount of vibration generated when the current frame button is operated, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to press the frame button 22, allowing the player to fully enjoy the set presentation.

Next, when the frame button is operated a second time during a special effect, in the processing of Z2942, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0 (is 3) (Z2942; Yes), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 2 is set to the SW motor data. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd becomes 0. Then, when the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is completed with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd being 0, the special effect setting is cleared.

In other words, in this control example, when a special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button is operated a predetermined number of times (the value set in the SW special effect counter 223fd). In this control example, since the special effect can be set as a SW effect by corresponding the change pattern to the setting, the execution period of the special effect is configured to fit within one special chart change period, but the special effect may be set regardless of the change pattern setting (regardless of the special chart change period). For example, a determination may be made as to whether or not to execute a special effect at the start or end of a jackpot game, and the special effect may be set based on the determination result. Also, a special effect may be set when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22).

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to execute special effects regardless of the set time for the special chart to change. In addition, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 in this case can be configured to vary depending on the result of the special chart lottery during the change, the winning information in the reserve, and the set game status.

Returning to FIG. 402, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2941, if it is determined that the set SW effect is not a special effect (SW effect is not set) (Z2941: No), then the same processing as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810, and Z2811 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if it is determined that the current timing is one in which no SW performance is set (Z2806: No), the current frame button 22 is a background change operation for changing the background mode, so the background change process is executed (Z2949) and this process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 403, the contents of the background change process (Z2949) will be explained. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (operation on frame button 22 to change the background mode) is performed, and processing is executed to vary the timing of executing the background change based on the operation timing of the background change operation.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 403), first, it is determined whether the timing when the background change operation was performed was during the special symbol fluctuation period (when the special symbol is fluctuating) (Z2963), and if it is determined that it is during the special symbol fluctuation period (Z2963: Yes), it is then determined whether it is during a high-speed fluctuation period (a period when the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high speed) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that it is not a high-speed fluctuation period (a medium speed, low speed period, or a stopped period) (Z2964: No), since it is not possible to immediately change the background mode, the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2965), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of Z2963 determines that the current period is not a period of special chart fluctuation (for example, a waiting period for customers) (Z2963: No), or if the process of Z2964 determines that the current period is a period of high speed fluctuation (Z2964: Yes), the background mode can be changed immediately, so the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z2966), a display switch command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2967), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in frame button input monitoring/performance process 8 (Z2172) in FIG. 401 will be explained with reference to FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the contents of sensor input process 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes are executed when the player operates the touch sensor 2900.

This sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is different from the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 273) of the first control example described above in that it executes a mode identification process (Z2968) when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 and the preview performance display is not set, but otherwise is the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted. In the first control example described above, the operation on the touch sensor is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is greater than 0, but in this control example, the sensor effective time counter 223s is used to measure the effective period corresponding to the performance set based on the variation pattern among the period during which the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Therefore, even if the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. In addition, in this eighth control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided to provide a period during which the operation on the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined, as in the first control example described above, but its explanation is omitted.

When sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, the same processes Z2821 to Z2829 as the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 273) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2822 that the preview performance display is not set (Z2822: No), a mode identification process is executed (Z2968), and this process is terminated. In this mode identification process (Z2968), a process is executed to display the current background mode on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900.

Next, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described with reference to FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, it is first determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969). If it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969: Yes), a mode display command corresponding to the current background mode is set (Z2970), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2969 that the touch sensor 2900 has not been operated (Z2969: No), the processing of Z2970 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In other words, in this eighth control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player simply by operating the touch sensor 2900. By configuring it in this way, it is no longer necessary to constantly display the current background mode within the limited space of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so a large area can be secured within the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 for use in producing the variable display.

In this eighth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on an operation on the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a (see FIG. 385(a)). However, without being limited to this, it is possible to determine the presentation mode of the variable display presentation being executed at the timing when the current background mode is displayed based on an operation on the touch sensor 2900, and based on the determination result, determine a display area in which the display mode of the presentation is not displayed, and display the background mode in that display area. This allows the background mode to be displayed without interfering with the variable display presentation being executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be explained with reference to FIG. 406. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to change the lighting state of the frame lamp (the lamp that lights up the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d (see FIG. 380) according to the game situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, it is first determined whether the special chart is currently changing (Z2131). If it is determined that the special chart is not currently changing (Z2131: No), a frame lighting command is set to turn on the frame lamp in green (Z2135), and then a mode lighting command is set to turn on the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d to indicate the currently set background mode (Z2134), and this process is terminated.

Here, we will explain what the frame lamp lights up. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) that is a light-emitting means is embedded in the frame button 22, and by lighting up this light-emitting means, the surface of the frame button 22 can be made to emit light of any color. The frame lamp is then configured to notify the player of various information depending on the color it is lit.

Specifically, green is specified as the lighting state indicating that the special symbol is not changing, blue is specified as the lighting state indicating that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and red is specified as the lighting state indicating that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing at a rate other than high speed. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily grasp the current state of the special symbol change (the speed at which the third symbol changes) by visually checking the lighting state of the frame lamp.

In addition, the surface of the frame button 22 (the surface that the player touches) that is operated when performing the background change operation is illuminated by the frame lamp, so that the player who is about to perform the background change operation can easily understand the current special symbol change state (the speed at which the third symbol changes). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the timing of the background change is controlled to differ depending on the special symbol change state when the background change operation is performed.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the timing of the background change is varied depending on the speed at which the third symbol changes, which can cause a problem that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the speed at which the third symbol is changing as it is being displayed on the display screen; however, the above-mentioned problem can be solved by varying the lighting state of the frame lamp depending on the special symbol change state (the speed at which the third symbol changes).

In this control example, the frame lamp is configured to directly illuminate the surface of the frame button 22, but the location of the frame lamp is not limited to this and may be any location that is within the field of view of the player performing the background change operation. For example, the frame lamp may be provided near the frame button 22.

Returning to Figure 406, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2131, if it is determined that the special pattern is changing (Z2131: Yes), it is then determined whether the special pattern (third pattern) is changing at high speed (Z2132), and if it is determined that it is changing at high speed (Z2132: Yes), the frame lamp is lit in blue (Z2133), and the processing proceeds to Z2134, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2132 that the special chart is not changing at high speed (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is set to red (Z2136), and then a lighting command is set to light all mode lamps, and this processing ends.

<Regarding control process of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of this eighth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 407 to 411. This eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it executes command judgment process 8 (see Z3302 in Fig. 407) instead of command judgment process (see Z2302 in Fig. 277), executes variable pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in Fig. 408) instead of variable pattern command process (see Z3405 in Fig. 278), executes resident image transfer setting process 8 (see Z4631 in Fig. 411) instead of resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in Fig. 285(b)), and adds 8-item display setting process (see Z3493 in Fig. 409) and reserved display setting process (see Z3495 in Fig. 410). The other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination process 8 (Z3302) will be explained with reference to FIG. 407. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 8 (Z3302). This command determination process 8 (Z3302) differs from the command determination process described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 277) in that it adds a process executed when a display 8-piece effect hold command is received and a process for updating the value of the display effect counter when this process is looped, and changes the contents of the process executed when a display variation pattern command is received and the contents of the process executed when a hold ball count command is received. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same processes Z3401 to Z3404 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 277) are executed, and if it is determined in the process of Z3404 that a display variation pattern command has been received (Z3404: Yes), variation pattern command process 8 is executed (Z3491), and then processing proceeds to Z3496. The details of this variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408.

In the processing of Z3496, a process is executed to update the value of the display effect counter. In this eighth control example, the configuration is such that the value of the display effect counter is updated each time command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed once. This command determination process 8 (Z3302) is then configured to execute various processes depending on the type of command (display command) received by the display control device 114. This makes it possible to always make the timing of execution of the processing of Z3496 irregular. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the value of the display effect counter will be updated. Then, once the processing of Z3496 is completed, the process moves to processing of Z3401, and command determination process 8 is executed repeatedly.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3404 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (Z3404: No), the processing of Z3406 to Z3411 is executed, which is the same as the command determination processing described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 277), and the processing proceeds to the processing of Z3496 described above. If it is determined in the processing of Z3410 that the display switching command has not been received (Z3410: No), it is then determined whether the display 8-item performance hold command has been received (Z3492), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z3492: Yes), the 8-item display setting processing is executed (Z3493), and then the processing proceeds to the processing of Z3496.

This 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data for the 8-piece reserved performance (see FIG. 386), and its detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 409. In the process of Z3492, if it is determined that the display 8-piece performance reserved command has not been received (Z3492: No), it is then determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received (Z3414). If it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (Z3414: Yes), the reserved display process is executed (Z3495), and processing proceeds to Z3496. This reserved display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting the display mode to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and its detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 410.

If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (Z3414: No), the processing of Z3418 to Z3420 is executed, which is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 277), and then the processing proceeds to Z3496.

Next, the contents of variable pattern command processing 8 (Z3491) will be explained with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable pattern command processing 8 (Z3491). This variable pattern command processing 8 (Z3491) differs from the variable pattern command processing described above (see Z3405 in FIG. 278) in that it adds control processing for when eight reserved effects are being executed, but all other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the variable pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the process Z3501 to Z3506, which is the same as the variable pattern command process described above (see Z3405 in FIG. 278), is executed, and then it is determined whether the 8-item display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z3521). If it is determined that it is not set to on, that is, if it is determined that the 8-item reserved performance is not being executed (Z3521: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z3521: Yes), the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is subtracted by 1 (Z3522), and the effect mode (contents of the treasure chest) is selected using the 8-piece effect scenario selection table 234a3 by referring to the display 8-piece effect counter after subtraction (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: Yes), the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to off (Z3526), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of Z3525, if the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is not 0, that is, if the 8-piece reserved effect continues even in the next or subsequent special chart changes (Z3525: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the 8-item display setting process (Z3493) will be explained with reference to FIG. 409. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the 8-item display setting process (Z3493). When the 8-item display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8-item display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5701), and the 8-item performance display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z5702).

Then, the data table for the set 8-item effect display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to on (Z5704), the time counter is set to time data based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), the 8-item display effect counter is set to 8, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball display process (Z3495) will be explained with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball display process (Z3495). When the reserved ball display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of reserved balls is set in the display reserved ball number storage area 233fc based on the information contained in the reserved ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the 8-item display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5802), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z5802: Yes), since the 8-item reserved effect is currently being performed, a pointer corresponding to the value of the display 8-item effect counter 233fb is set (Z5803), and this process is terminated. In other words, while the 8-item reserved effect is being performed, the reserved patterns for the effect (treasure chests) are displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in a number corresponding to the value of the display 8-item effect counter 233fb.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5802 that the 8-ball display setting flag 233fa is not set to on (Z5802: No), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display reserved ball count storage area 233fc is set (Z5804), and this processing is terminated. In other words, while the 8-ball reserved performance is not being executed, a reserved pattern (circle) corresponding to the reserved ball count of the special pattern is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the contents of resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be explained with reference to FIG. 411. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the contents of resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631). This resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) differs from the resident image transfer setting process of the first control example described above in that a command (display start-up command) is set to indicate that all resident target image data has been transferred. All other aspects are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same processes Z4701 to Z4705 as the resident image transfer setting process described above (see Z4602 in FIG. 285(b)) are executed, and when Z4705 is completed, a display start command is set (Z4721) and this process is terminated. In this way, by configuring the main processing (see FIG. 274) of the display control device 114 to output a command (display start command) to the voice lamp control device 113 to indicate that the transfer processing of various image data executed after the initial setting processing (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) has been completed, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing when the display control device 114 becomes able to operate normally.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time to initialize among the various other devices (main control device 110, audio lamp control device 113, audio output device 226), so that a display start-up command is output from the display control device 114, and an instruction to display the normal screen after power-on and an instruction to output various sounds (BGM) can be executed synchronously.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 412 to Fig. 419. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example differs from the eighth control example described above in that it is provided with the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example described above (see Fig. 314), in the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113, and in part of the control content, but the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The eighth control example described above is configured so that when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing of changing the background mode (timing of executing the background change) is varied according to the timing of the operation, thereby making it possible to prevent, for example, a situation in which the background mode is switched while a performance exclusive to a specific background mode is being executed. This allows the player to carry out the background change operation with peace of mind, and encourages the player to actively carry out the background change operation.

However, the technology of the eighth control example described above only changes the timing of the background change that is performed based on the background change operation, and the presentation style that is performed is the same, so there is a problem in that the player becomes bored with the presentation that is performed by the background change operation (background change presentation).

In response to this, the ninth control example is configured to execute a background preview effect that suggests the background mode after the transition between when the background change operation is executed and when the background change is actually executed, and to vary the presentation style of the background preview effect depending on the timing of executing the background change operation (e.g., when the special chart is not changing, when the special chart is changing). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with different presentation styles depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the presentation that is executed.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the presentation mode of the background preview performance is changed based on the results of the lottery for the special symbol. This makes it possible to motivate the player to perform a background change operation in order to see the background preview performance.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, similar to the fourth control example described above, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable during the period when the special symbol change is not being performed (the waiting period for customers). Here, conventional pachinko machines are configured to be able to set a game state in which the special symbol change is likely to be performed (for example, a time-saving state (a state with a low probability of a special symbol, a state with a high probability of a normal symbol)) and a game state in which the special symbol change is unlikely to be performed (for example, a normal state (a state with a low probability of a special symbol, a state with a low probability of a normal symbol)), and further, when the time-saving state is set, it is easier to set a shorter change time as the special symbol change time than when the normal state is set.

In other words, in conventional pachinko machines, even if a period occurs during the time-saving state during which special pattern changes are not being performed, a new special pattern change is likely to be initiated immediately, and if a period occurs during the normal state during which special pattern changes are not being performed, it is more difficult to initiate a new special pattern change than during the time-saving state.

In a conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, if a customer waiting display (for example, a title display showing the name of the game machine) or a customer waiting period function (for example, a volume adjustment function, a light intensity adjustment function) is executed during a period when special pattern variation is not being performed (a customer waiting period) without taking into consideration the set game state, the display content on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is switched unnecessarily during the time-saving state, providing a display that is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, there is a problem that the processing for creating each image data to be displayed on the display screen is performed in a complicated manner, which increases the control load of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, since the time-saving state is a state in which special pattern variation can be performed efficiently by continuously firing balls, even if a customer waiting period function (a volume adjustment function, a light intensity adjustment function) is temporarily enabled, a new special pattern variation will start before the adjustment operation using that function is completed, causing discomfort to the player.

To address this issue, for example, the problem above could be solved by configuring the system to activate the customer waiting period function described above when a certain period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the special pattern fluctuations stopped and no new special pattern fluctuations are executed. However, this creates a new problem in that a player playing in the normal mode needs to stop playing for a certain period of time when they want to adjust the volume or light level, which is annoying for the player and reduces game activity.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in this ninth control example, the period from when the special chart change is no longer being executed until the customer waiting period function can be executed is configured to differ depending on the set game state. This allows, for example, during a high probability state (time-saving state, probability-changing state) of a normal pattern in which a special chart change is likely to be executed, the customer waiting period function to be executed a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) after the special chart change is no longer being executed, and during a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern in which a special chart change is unlikely to be executed, the customer waiting period function to be executed immediately after the special chart change is no longer being executed.

<About the performance content of the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 414, the background notice performance among the performances executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. Fig. 414(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the background mode is changed to the sea mode, and Fig. 414(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in a state in which the background mode is changed in the next change. Note that, among the elements of the display screen, the same elements as those in the above-mentioned eighth control example are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In this ninth control example, when a background change operation is performed, a preview effect suggesting the destination background mode is executed before the background mode is switched. To specifically explain the display form of this preview effect, it is configured to be able to display a "mode display", which is a display form that shows the destination background mode with a comment just before the background mode is switched, and a "silhouette display", which is a display form that suggests the destination background mode with a character silhouette just before the background mode is switched.

If the timing of the background change operation is outside the special chart change period (for example, during a waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and if it is during the special chart change period, either "mode display" or "silhouette display" is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the performance (background preview performance) executed depending on the timing of the background change operation, allowing the player to perform the background change operation at various times.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, when a background change operation is performed during the special chart change period, the selection ratio between "mode display" and "silhouette display" is varied depending on the lottery result of that special chart change. In addition, when a display mode in which the background mode suggested in the background preview performance differs from the background mode to which the player will actually transition is selected, the possibility of winning the jackpot is increased (higher than the display modes of other background preview performances). Thus, the player can be made to actively perform background change operations in an attempt to predict the lottery result of the special chart. Also, by making the player actively perform background change operations, it is possible to provide the player with performances that correspond to various background modes, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 414(a), the background mode is changed to sea mode by a background change operation, and a fish-like silhouette K100, which suggests sea mode, is displayed as a background preview effect. In this way, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background preview effect continues to be displayed on the display screen even after the background mode is changed, so that the player can visually compare the display mode displayed in the background preview effect with the background mode to which the change actually occurred.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 414(b), a comment "Background change in next change" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a, indicating that the background change operation has been performed and the background mode will change when the next special chart change begins. A silhouette K100 resembling a tree is displayed as a background preview effect, suggesting mountain mode. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 414(b) is a state in which the current state is "mountain mode" and the background mode will change (to sea mode) in the next change, and the silhouette K100 suggesting mountain mode is displayed as a background preview effect suggesting the background mode after the change. When a discrepancy occurs between the actual background mode change destination and the suggested display mode of the background preview effect in this way, it is highly likely that the change will result in a jackpot.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 412 and Fig. 413. Fig. 412(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example, and Fig. 412(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 412(a), the ROM 222 of this ninth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the eighth control example described above in that the vibration pattern data 222fc has been deleted and a background preview selection table 222ga has been added, but the other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The background preview selection table 222ga is referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the background preview presentation when a background change operation is performed. Here, the contents of the background preview selection table 222ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the background preview selection table 222ga.

As shown in FIG. 413, the background preview selection table 222ga is configured to allow selection of background previews with different display modes depending on the result of the win/loss determination (the result of the lottery for the special chart change being performed at the time the background change operation is performed), the acquired value of the performance counter 223h, and the background mode after the transition.

Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "0 to 69" for "Silhouette A", a range of "70 to 159" for "Silhouette B", a range of "160 to 169" for "Mountain mode display", and a range of "170 to 198" for "Mountain mode". If the background mode after the transition is "Mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "0 to 69" for "Silhouette B", a range of "70 to 159" for "Silhouette A", a range of "160 to 169" for "Sea mode display", and a range of "170 to 198" for "Mountain mode display".

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is a miss and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", "Silhouette B" is specified in the range of "0 to 119" for the effect counter 223h, and "Sea mode display" is specified in the range of "120 to 198" for the effect counter 223h, and if the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", "Silhouette A" is specified in the range of "0 to 119" for the effect counter 223h, and "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "120 to 198" for the effect counter 223h. Furthermore, if the timing of the background change operation is during the waiting period, if the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", "Sea mode display" is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the effect counter 223h, and if the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the effect counter 223h.

Here, we will explain each display mode that can be selected as the display mode for the background preview performance. In this control example, the display mode for the background preview performance can be set to "silhouette display," which displays a silhouette of a character that suggests the background mode to be transitioned to, and "mode display," which displays text indicating the background mode to be transitioned to.

Among the "silhouette display", "Silhouette A" is a silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting the mountain mode shown in FIG. 414(b), and "Silhouette B" is a silhouette of a character imitating a fish suggesting the sea mode shown in FIG. 414(a). In this control example, the display mode formed by a still image is displayed as the silhouette display, but a dynamically changing display mode may be used as long as it suggests the background mode after the transition to the player. For example, the display mode may be configured to make it difficult for the player to understand which background mode is being suggested immediately after the suggestion display mode is displayed, and to gradually change to a display mode that makes it easier to understand the background mode to be transitioned to based on the passage of time or the operation of the player on the operation means (frame button 22 or touch sensor 2900). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance in order to quickly determine the performance result of the background preview performance.

As explained above, in this control example, the display modes for the background preview performance are configured to be able to display "silhouette display" and "mode display", and if a background change operation is performed during a period when the special chart is not changing, only "mode display" is selected, and if a background change operation is performed during a period when the special chart is changing, "silhouette display" can be selected. As a result, by performing a background change operation while the special chart is changing, a special performance mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, the background preview effect can be set to a display mode that suggests a background mode different from the background mode to which the player will transition, and this display mode is configured to be selected only if the result of the win/loss determination is a win. Therefore, by creating a sense of incongruity between the content of the background preview effect and the actual background mode transition situation, it is possible to notify (suggest) a lottery result that is favorable to the player in advance, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this control example, two background modes (sea mode, mountain mode) are used, but there may be three or more types of background modes, and the background mode to which a transition occurs as a result of a background change operation may be set randomly. Also, a configuration may be made in which a transition occurs to the same background mode as before the transition as a result of a background change operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether the display mode of the current background preview performance will match the post-transition background mode, based on the pre-transition background mode and the suggested content of the post-transition background mode displayed in the background preview performance.

In addition, in this ninth control example, similar to the eighth control example described above, the period from when the background change operation is performed until the background mode is changed is configured to vary depending on the timing of the background change operation. The above-mentioned background preview performance is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, the display period during which only the background preview performance is displayed can be varied depending on the timing of the background change operation.

In this ninth control example, when selecting the display mode of the background preview performance, the display mode is selected based on the lottery result of the special chart change currently being performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, the display mode may be selected based on the result of pre-determining the winning information included in the special chart reserve. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be shifted (changed) during the special chart change in which the background change operation was performed, the display mode of the background preview performance is selected based on the lottery result of that change, and if the background mode is shifted (changed) in the special chart change next to the special chart change in which the background change operation was performed, the display mode of the background preview performance is selected based on the lottery result (pre-determined result) of the next special chart change.

Returning to FIG. 412(b), the explanation will continue. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the eighth control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223ga and a delay counter 223gb have been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the current time is a customer waiting period, and is set to ON when the customer waiting period is reached. When the game state is normal (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), this customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (see Z2734 in FIG. 418) in the customer waiting setting process executed in the variation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417). Also, when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the customer waiting performance process 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 419) is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 419). And, when the special symbol variation starts, it is set to OFF.

In this ninth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is adjustable during the period when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on, and a notification display that notifies the player that the volume is adjustable is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In other words, the customer waiting flag 223ga is also a flag for indicating the period during which the volume can be adjusted. Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on is varied depending on the set game state, and the customer waiting flag 223ga is configured to be less likely to be set to on when the game state is in a time-saving state or a special probability state than when it is in a normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a notification display that notifies the player that the volume has become adjustable during the probability change state or the time-saving state to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In other words, the time-saving state and probability change state are configured to be set with a shorter special pattern change time than the normal state, and a period in which special pattern changes are not executed temporarily may be set. However, since the time-saving state and probability change state are also game states in which new special pattern changes are more likely to be executed than the normal state, the period in which special pattern changes are not executed tends to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223ga is frequently set to on, there is a risk that the display content of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 will be switched cumbersomely, making the player feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in the ninth control example, the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON unless a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) during the time-saving state or the probability of winning state in which the special pattern change is not performed has elapsed, thereby solving the above-mentioned problem. Note that the predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) required to set the customer waiting flag 223ga ON during the time-saving state or the probability of winning state may be set to a period longer than the normal pattern change time (the period from when the electric role 640a opens until the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) that is executed in the high probability state of the normal pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting flag 223ga from being set to ON simply by continuing to play during the probability of winning state or the time-saving state.

The delay counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special chart change to when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on, and is used to delay the timing of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to on during the special chart change state and the time-saving state.

In the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417) executed when the special chart fluctuation stops, this delay counter 223gb is set to a predetermined period (5 seconds) that is a delay period when the game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state (Z2733 in FIG. 418). Then, each time the customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 419) is executed, it is subtracted (Z2759 in FIG. 419), and when the counter value becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2761 in FIG. 419). This makes it possible to delay the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the high probability state or the time-saving state from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the normal state.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 415 to Fig. 419. This ninth control example differs from the eighth control example described above in that customer waiting performance processing 9 (see Z2181 in Fig. 419) is executed instead of the customer waiting performance processing executed in the main processing, frame button input monitoring and performance processing 9 is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8, and command judgment processing 9 is executed instead of the command judgment processing 8, but otherwise is the same. The same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, main process 9 of this ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 415. Fig. 415 is a flowchart showing the contents of main process 9. As shown in Fig. 415, main process 9 differs from main process 8 (see Fig. 394) in that it executes customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181), frame button input monitoring/performance process 9 (Z2182), and command judgment process 9 (Z2183), but is otherwise identical.

The contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 9 (Z2182) differ from frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 401) of the above-mentioned eighth control example only in that background change processing 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 416) is executed instead of background change processing (see Z2949 in FIG. 403). Therefore, only background change processing 9, which is a subroutine of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 9 (Z2182), will be explained with reference to FIG. 416, and other control contents (the same control contents as in the eighth control example) will not be illustrated.

In addition, command determination process 9 (Z2183) differs from command determination process 8 (see Z2174 in FIG. 395) in the above-mentioned eighth control example only in that it executes fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417) instead of fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242), which is a subroutine. Therefore, only fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) will be explained with reference to FIG. 417, and other control contents (the same control contents as in the eighth control example) will not be illustrated.

Next, the contents of background change process 9 (Z2541) will be explained with reference to FIG. 416. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of background change process 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) differs from the background change process of the eighth control example described above (Z2949 in FIG. 403) in that a process for setting the display mode of the background preview performance has been added.

When background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes Z2963 to Z2967 as the background change process described above (see Z2949 in FIG. 403) are executed, and then the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained (Z2978), and the performance mode of the background preview performance is selected using the background preview selection table 222ga based on the obtained value of the performance counter 223h (Z2979). Then, a display background preview command indicating the performance mode selected in the Z2979 process is set, and this process is terminated.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the display switching command set in the processing of Z2967 and the display background preview command set in the processing of Z2980 are set within the same process and are output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, but the display control device 114 is configured to first execute a display using image data based on the display background preview command, and then execute a display using image data based on the display switching command after an interval of 0.5 seconds. This allows the background preview performance to be executed before the background transition.

Next, the contents of fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) will be explained with reference to FIG. 417. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the contents of fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651). This fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) differs from the fluctuation stop process of the eighth control example described above (see Z2242 in FIG. 397) in that it executes a customer waiting setting process (Z2652) after completing the processing of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270, but the rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be explained with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), a process is executed to set the customer waiting period after the special chart fluctuation has stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, it is first determined whether a special symbol is reserved (Z2731). In this Z2731 process, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b are both 0.

In the process of Z2731, if it is determined that a special chart is reserved (Z2731: Yes), the next special chart change will be executed immediately, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2731, if it is determined that a special chart is not reserved (Z2731: No), it is next determined whether the current game state is a time-saving state or a high probability state (Z2732), and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving state or a high probability state (it is a normal state) (Z2732: No), the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2734), a customer waiting command for display is set (Z2735), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the process of Z2732 determines that the current state is the time-saving state or the guaranteed bonus state (Z2732: Yes), then the delay counter 223gb is set to a value corresponding to 5 seconds (Z2733), and this process ends. The value of the delay counter 223gb set here is subtracted by the main process, which is executed every 1 millisecond.

Next, the contents of customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181) will be explained with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the contents of customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181). In this customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181), the value of the delay counter 223gb set in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) is subtracted, and when the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0, a process of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to on is executed, and a volume adjustment process is executed when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on.

In customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2751), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z2751: Yes), it is determined whether the up button (right button) of the volume buttons that increases the volume has been operated (pressed) (Z2752). If it is determined that the up button has been pressed (Z2752: Yes), the volume level is then set so that the volume level is increased by 1 (Z2753), a display command indicating the volume after the setting is set (Z2754), and this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of Z2752 that the up button has not been pressed (Z2752: No), it is determined whether the down button (left button) for lowering the volume has been operated (pressed) (Z2755). If it is determined that the down button has been pressed (Z2755: Yes), the volume level is then set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), a display command showing the volume after the setting is set (Z2757), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2751, if it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to on (Z2751: No), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2758), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2758: No), the special chart change is not currently stopped, so this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is greater than 0 (Z2758: Yes), then 1 is subtracted from the value of the delay counter 223gb (Z2759), and it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb after the subtraction is 0 (Z2760). If it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb after the subtraction is not 0, that is, if the game state is a special bonus state or a time-saving state and 5 seconds have not yet elapsed since the previous special chart fluctuation stopped (Z2760: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the processing of Z2760 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is 0 (Z2760: Yes), since the game state is in a special bonus state or a time-saving state and 5 seconds have passed since the last special chart fluctuation stopped, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2761), a customer waiting command for display is set (Z2762), and the processing proceeds to the above-mentioned Z2752.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 420 to Fig. 427. The tenth control example differs from the above-mentioned ninth control example in that it executes an operation effect (crack effect) that changes the effect mode based on the operation contents of the player to the frame button 22, and executes an effect (background change effect) that shifts (changes) the background mode based on the display mode of the third pattern (a decorative pattern that is displayed variably in synchronization with the variation of the special pattern (special pattern) and whose display mode is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to inform the player of the lottery result of the special pattern) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but is otherwise the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

<About the performance content of the 10th control example>
Here, we will explain the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this tenth control example. Unlike the above-mentioned control examples, the pachinko machine 10 of this tenth control example executes a crack effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stopped pattern.

The cracked effect is an effect in which a variable display mode imitating multiple cracks is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third pattern is switched based on the display mode of the variable display mode at the time when the effect period during which the variable display mode can be changed has elapsed, and is configured so that the variable display mode can be changed based on the timing and number of times the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during the effect period described above.

This configuration encourages the player to actively operate the frame button 22, enhancing the presentation effect. Also, in this control example, the content of the variable display mode based on the second and subsequent frame button operations is configured to vary based on the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the presentation period of the cracked presentation. Specifically, the number of operations on the frame button 22 to vary the number of "cracks" displayed as the variable display mode is configured to vary.

In other words, the crack effect in this control example varies the number of "cracks" displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of times the frame button is operated, and switches the subsequent performance mode (for example, the development destination of the variable display performance (reach performance) executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (the display mode when the reach performance develops into a super reach performance)) based on the number of "cracks" displayed at the end of the period during which the number of "cracks" can be changed, and the conditions for varying the number of "cracks" are set according to the timing of the frame button operation a predetermined number of times (the timing of the first operation in this control example).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the timing of operation of the operating means and the number of operations, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Note that in this tenth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the cracking effect, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to select the variable pattern of the subsequent variable display mode according to the timing of the second or subsequent frame button operations. Also, in this control example, it is configured to select all variable patterns (variable scenarios) of the variable display mode during the effect period according to the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation), but it may also be configured to select only a portion of them.

Furthermore, in the cracked effect of this control example, when the first frame button operation that causes the selection of a variable pattern (variable scenario) of the variable display mode is performed, the same variable display mode (for example, a display mode in which one "crack" is displayed) is displayed regardless of when the frame button operation is performed. In other words, in the cracked effect of this control example, the first frame button operation is configured to clearly notify the player that the cracked effect has been performed, and is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the variable display mode selected based on the first frame button operation.

This allows the player to play while paying close attention to how the cracking effect progresses. In addition, the cracking effect of this control example varies the rate at which the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected based on the results of the lottery for the special symbol. This allows the player to pay close attention to the cracking effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in the cracked effect of this control example, a first effect period (5 seconds) and a second effect period (10 seconds) after the first effect period have been set as effective periods during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22), and the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected by performing an operation (first frame button operation) to select the variable pattern of the variable display mode during the first effect period. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not performed during the first effect period, the cracked effect is ended at that point (the setting for the second effect period is cleared and an effect other than the cracked effect is switched to). This makes it possible to prevent an effect that encourages the operation of the frame button 22 from being displayed for a long period of time to players who do not want to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, if a frame button operation (first frame button operation) is performed during the first performance period, the second and subsequent frame button operations are accepted immediately thereafter (for the remainder of the first performance period). This allows continuity to be imparted to the multiple frame button operations performed during the cracking performance, enhancing the performance effect.

The background change effect is an effect that changes the background mode when the combination of third patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives a stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, it is configured to determine the stopping mode (combination of stopped patterns) of the third patterns displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to receive a background change pattern type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114, and when the background change pattern type command is received, a determination is made as to whether or not to change the background mode based on the stop pattern information contained in the command. By configuring it in this way, even if the lottery result for the special pattern is a miss, the player can be made interested in which stop mode will display the miss, and the player can enjoy the performance executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the very end.

Furthermore, unlike conventional pachinko machines that determine in advance whether or not to change the background mode, and based on the determination result that the background mode will be changed, freeze-display the third symbol to notify the player that the background will be changed (freeze-display the background change notification symbol), this machine is configured to determine whether to execute a background change depending on the stopping mode of the third symbol that is actually frozen and displayed; in other words, it is configured so that the stopping mode of the third symbol is the trigger for the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily control the ease of changing the background or the destination of the background change based on the stopping mode of the third symbol and the set game state.

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the special symbol lottery is unsuccessful, the player may operate the operation means to variably select the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the stop mode can be varied based on the player's operation result, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operation means than when the player does not operate the operation means at all. For example, it is preferable to configure the stop mode of the third symbol, which will result in a background change, to be displayed only when the operation means is operated. This can make the player more motivated to participate in the performance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 420 and Fig. 421. Fig. 420(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example, and Fig. 420(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 420(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the ninth control example described above in that it adds a crack effect selection table 222ha that is used when selecting the presentation mode of the crack effect, but the other elements are the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 421, the contents of the cracked effect selection table 222ha will be explained. FIG. 421 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the cracked effect selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 421, the cracked effect selection table 222ha defines different cracked effect presentation modes (number of frame button operations that increase the number of cracks) depending on the lottery result (win/lose determination result) of the special chart change that will result in the cracked effect being executed, the timing of the first frame button operation (press) during the SW effective period of the cracked effect, and the acquired value of the SW special effect counter 223ha.

Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit (jackpot) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value that corresponds to 0-1 second or 3-4 seconds, effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counterha is in the range of "0-39", effect B is specified when the value is in the range of "40-89", and effect C is specified when the value is in the range of "90-99".

Here, we will explain the specific contents of each effect type defined in the crack effect selection table 222ha. Effect type A is a scenario in which the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to appear is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required for the third crack to appear (MAX) is set to "10". Effect type B is a scenario in which the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to appear is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required for the third crack to appear (MAX) is set to "15", and effect type C is a scenario in which the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to appear is set to "10", and the number of frame button operations required for the third crack to appear (MAX) is set to "25".

In other words, the number of times the number of cracks is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations will vary depending on the presentation mode of the cracking presentation, which is set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. This makes it difficult for the player to understand how many frame button operations are required to change the cracks, enhancing the presentation effect.

The crack effect selection table 222ha shown in FIG. 421 only shows effect types in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times, but in reality, effect types in which the second crack is not displayed no matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated and effect types in which the third crack is not displayed are also specified. In this way, by specifying effect types in which the cracks are difficult to change and effect types in which the cracks are not variable, it is possible to keep the player excited until the end and keep operating the frame button, even if an effect type in which the cracks are not variable is set.

Let's go back to Figure 421 for an explanation. If the result of the win/loss determination is a win (jackpot) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value other than 0-1 seconds or 3-4 seconds (1-3 seconds, 4-5 seconds ranges), then effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counterha is in the range of "0-19", effect B is specified when it is in the range of "20-79", and effect C is specified when it is in the range of "80-99".

In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, then effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counter ha is in the range of "0 to 29", effect B is specified when the value is in the range of "30 to 89", and effect D is specified when the value is in the range of "90 to 99". In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (ranges of 1 to 3 seconds, 4 to 5 seconds), then effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counter ha is in the range of "0 to 4", effect B is specified when the value is in the range of "5 to 79", and effect D is specified when the value is in the range of "80 to 99".

Next, the configuration of the RAM in this tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 420(b). As shown in FIG. 420(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned ninth control example in that it adds a SW performance counter 223h, a button press counter 223hb, and a crack information storage area 223hc, but the other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect counter 223ha is a counter used to select the crack effect. Each time the main process is executed, it is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 198.

The button press counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and its value is incremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the crack effect executed in this tenth control example, the effect mode (display of a variable number of cracks) corresponding to the effect type that has been set is executed based on the value of this button press counter 223hb.

The crack information storage area 223hc is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of effect selected using the crack effect selection table 222ha.

<Regarding the control contents of the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 422 to Fig. 426. Note that the same control contents as those of the above-mentioned control examples are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 422, the main processing 10 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 10. As shown in FIG. 422, main processing 10 differs from main processing 8 of the eighth control example described above in that frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 has been changed to frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10, and command determination processing 8 has been changed to command determination processing 10, but otherwise is the same.

Next, the contents of command determination process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 423. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 10. This command determination process 10 differs from command determination process 8 described above in that it adds a control process for when a background change pattern command is received, but is otherwise the same. Details of this background change pattern command will be described later, but this command is a command output from display control device 114 and contains information for indicating the stopping mode of the third patterns to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of third pattern display device 81 (the combination position of each third pattern when stopped).

When command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes Z2201 to Z2208 as command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether a background change pattern command has been received (Z7201). If it is determined in the process of Z7201 that a background change pattern command has been received (Z7201: Yes), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z7202), a display switch command to the variable pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z7203), and this process is terminated.

In other words, in this tenth control example, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a process to change the background mode based on the stopping mode of the third symbol set by the display control device 114. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode depending on the stopping mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, the player can be made to pay attention to the stopping mode in which the third symbol will be stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 424. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10. This frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10 differs from the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 in that the SW special processing executed has been changed to SW performance processing 10, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, the cracked effect end process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 425. FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the contents of the cracked effect end process (Z2896). In this cracked effect end process (Z2896), when a specific period has elapsed in the cracked effect, processing is executed to set the subsequent effect mode.

When the crack effect end process (Z2896) is executed, first the value of the SW effective time counter is obtained and it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the crack effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) (Z7002). If it is determined that it has not passed 5 seconds (Z7002: No), it is then determined whether 15 seconds have passed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). If it is determined that 15 seconds have not passed (Z7006: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of Z7002 determines that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: Yes), it determines whether the value of the button press counter 223hb is greater than 0 (Z7003), and if it determines that it is not greater than 0 (Z7003: No), it sets a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect (Z7004), clears the values of the SW valid time counter 223k and the button press counter 223hb (sets them to 0), and terminates this process.

If it is determined in the process of Z7003 that the value of the button press counter 223b is greater than 0 (Z7003: Yes), this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of Z7006 that 15 seconds have elapsed (Z7006: Yes), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button press counter 223hb is set (Z7007), the value of the button press counter 223hb is cleared (Z7008), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of SW performance processing 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 426. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the contents of SW performance processing 10. This SW performance processing 10 differs from the SW performance processing described above in that processing related to cracking effects has been added. As the rest of the process is the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

When SW effect processing 10 is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101), and if it is determined that it is not a crack effect (Z7101: No), the same control as the SW effect processing of the eighth control example described above is executed. On the other hand, if the processing of Z7101 determines that the set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101: Yes), it is then determined whether information (data) indicating the effect mode of the crack effect is stored in the crack information memory area 223hc (Z7102).

If it is determined in the processing of Z7102 that information (data) indicating the presentation mode of the crack effect is already stored in the crack information storage area 223hc (Z7102: Yes), the value of the button press counter 223hb is incremented by 1 (Z7106), the crack effect type set in the crack information storage area 223hc is read (Z7107), a display presentation command is set to indicate the presentation mode (variable number of cracks presentation, teasing presentation) corresponding to the read presentation type and the value of the button press counter 223hb, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of Z7102 that there is no data (Z7102: No), then the value of the SW effect counter 223ha is obtained, the crack effect selection table 222ha is read (Z7104), the corresponding crack effect type is determined based on the value of the SW effective time counter at the time the button was pressed and the obtained value of the SW effect counter 223ha, and set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the tenth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 in this tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 427. The control contents of the display control device 114 in this control example are the same as those in the eighth control example described above, except that stop type command process 8 has been changed to stop type command process 10. The same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 427 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop type command processing 10 (Z3496). In this stop type command processing 10 (Z3496), a command (background change pattern command) is set to output information about the stop pattern set in the voice lamp control device 113.

When stop type command processing 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same Z3601 and Z3602 processes as those of stop type command processing 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether the stop pattern set in the Z3602 process is a stop pattern that indicates a background change (Z8001). If it is determined in the Z8001 process that the stop pattern is not a stop pattern that executes a background change, the stop pattern determination flag is set to on, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of Z8001 determines that the stopped pattern indicates a background change, a background change pattern command is set (Z8002), the stopped pattern determination flag is set to on (Z3603), and this process is terminated.

<Technical ideas added to each of the above control examples>
Next, a new technical concept to be added to each of the above-mentioned control examples will be explained. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested to the player by using the liquid crystal presentation using the third symbol display device 81 and the role presentation using the movable role for presentation provided near the variable display device unit 80.

Specifically, the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command that includes information indicating the result of the lottery for the special symbol, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the presentation mode of the liquid crystal presentation and the presentation mode of the gimmick presentation based on the information indicating the result of the lottery for the special symbol included in the received variation pattern command.

The liquid crystal display effects set here are output to the display control device 114 as display effect commands, and various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is created by the display control device 114. On the other hand, for the reel effects, a drive scenario is set for driving the movable reels in a predetermined manner, and drive control is performed on the drive means (drive motor) for moving the movable reels based on the set drive scenario.

In this way, when data for LCD performance and data for gimmick performance are created based on one piece of information (variable pattern command), and performances are executed for multiple performance devices (third pattern display device 81, movable gimmicks) based on the created data, it is possible to execute more interesting performances by synchronizing the performances executed by each performance device. However, because data related to the performance is output to each different performance device, there is a problem in that it is difficult to synchronize the performance content executed by each performance device.

In particular, in a reel performance that moves a movable reel that is configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position, a preparatory operation must be performed to move the movable reel to its initial position after the reel performance has ended. Therefore, when a performance is performed for multiple performance devices based on one piece of information (a variation pattern command), if the performance is performed without taking into account the position of the movable reel at the time the performance corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed, there is a problem that the LCD performance and the reel performance will be misaligned.

Therefore, in this technical concept, the position of the movable prop is determined when setting the suggestive performance based on the variable pattern command, and the content (performance mode) of the performance (composite performance) that executes the LCD performance and the prop performance is set based on the determination result. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a composite performance without misalignment between the LCD performance and the prop performance.

When the content of the effect (composite effect) that executes the LCD effect and the gadget effect is set to be different depending on the position of the movable gadget, for example, if it is determined that the movable gadget is in the initial position, a predetermined composite effect (for example, a composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special chart fluctuation) is executed, if it is determined that the movable gadget is in a position (state) where it can be moved to the initial position within one second, the predetermined composite effect (a composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special chart fluctuation) is executed with a delay of one second, and if it is determined that the movable gadget is in a position (state) where it can be moved to the initial position within one second, the movable gadget is not moved and a suggestive effect of only the LCD effect is executed. This allows various effects to be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, if a pachinko machine is capable of executing at least a first reel performance in which a predetermined first position is set as an initial position and a second position different from the first position is set as an end position as a reel performance that moves a movable reel, and a second reel performance in which a third position different from the first position and the second position described above is set as an initial position and the second position described above is set as an end position as a reel performance that moves a movable reel, the machine may be configured to determine whether to execute the first reel performance or the second reel performance based on the position of the movable reel at the timing for setting the content of the composite performance.

In this case, it is also preferable to configure the system so that a provocative effect can be executed in which the movable part approaches the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22, regardless of the change in the special chart. This allows the player to select the position of the movable part when the composite effect is executed. This makes it easier for the player to execute the composite effect he or she desires, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

In the above technical concept, an example was given of setting the contents of the suggestive effects based on the change pattern command, but the invention is not limited to this and may be applied when setting the contents of the effects during a jackpot that are executed during a jackpot game (for example, effects that suggest the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends, or effects that suggest the results of the lottery for special chart changes that are executed after the jackpot game ends (pre-determined results of winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols that have been acquired by the end of the jackpot game)).

In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine that is configured to have a performance (teasing performance) in which the movable role is moved by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a jackpot game) regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern, thereby encouraging the player to operate the operation means, the position of the movable role becomes indefinite when the suggestive performance described above is executed, and the above-mentioned problems are likely to occur. However, by using this technical concept, various performances can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, as a technical idea for solving the above-mentioned problems that may arise when performing the above-mentioned composite performance, there has been a technical idea of configuring the first half of the composite performance to include a period (preparation period) during which the movable prop can be moved to the initial position of the prop performance, regardless of the position (state) of the movable prop when the composite performance is set up.

When using such a technical concept, it is possible to execute a composite performance in which the liquid crystal performance and the movable performance are synchronized, but there is a problem that the content of the composite performance executed depending on the movement state of the movable role during the preparation period is noticed by the player. In particular, in a pachinko machine that has a first composite performance in which the role performance is executed with the movable role located at the first position as a composite performance, and a second composite performance in which the role performance is executed with the movable role located at the second position, and is configured to vary the selection ratio between the first composite performance and the second composite performance depending on the lottery result of the special pattern, the player can easily tell whether the movable role moves to the first position or the second position during the preparation period, so that even the lottery result of the special pattern is easily distinguished by the player, and there is a problem that the performance effect (the performance effect of the composite performance) is reduced.

To solve these problems, this technical concept is designed to execute control to execute a preparatory operation for moving the movable prop to the first or second position before the composite performance is set (before a decision is made as to whether or not the composite performance will be executed).

In this way, by configuring the preparatory action to be set separately from the composite performance setting, it is possible to make the player believe that the composite performance (gimmick performance) will be executed after the preparatory action of the movable role is executed. Also, because the preparatory action is executed regardless of whether the composite performance (gimmick performance) is executed or not, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the composite performance will be executed or the lottery result of the special pattern depending on the movement status of the movable role during the preparation period.

When using the technical idea of setting the role device performance and the preparatory operation differently in this way, for example, based on the determination result of the pre-determination means that pre-determines the winning information that is reserved and stored, in some cases where it is determined that a composite performance will be executed in a special chart change executed after two changes, or in some cases where it is determined that a composite performance will not be executed in a special chart change executed at two changes, it is advisable to set the preparatory operation so that the preparatory operation is executed before the special chart change after two changes is executed.

In addition, a decision means for deciding whether or not to execute a preparatory operation when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) may be provided, and the preparatory operation may be executed when the decision means decides to execute the preparatory operation. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation performance to be executable only when the movable role is located at the initial position of the operation performance at the timing of setting the operation performance. This makes it possible to vary the probability of a composite performance being executed depending on whether or not the player operates the operation means, so that the player can operate the operation means more proactively. Furthermore, it is preferable to combine the operation timing of the operation means using the above-mentioned decision means with a performance that operates the operation means as a suggestion performance that suggests the lottery result of the previous special chart variation that is executed before the special chart variation that executes the operation performance, and to configure the decision means to decide to execute the preparatory operation when a performance that suggests the lottery result of the previous special chart variation is a miss is executed as a result of operating the operation means.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for the player to operate the operating means to perform the preparatory operation without feeling unnatural. Also, since it is possible to perform the preparatory operation of the movable role while a suggestive performance is being performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which suggests the lottery result of the previous special symbol variation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the movable role is moving.

In addition, in each of the above control examples, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 have been used as examples of the various effects that can be executed, but any other effect that can achieve the same desired effect can be used, such as a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by sound, or a light-emitting effect that notifies the player using various light-emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The various effects executed in each of the above control examples include notification effects that ensure the player understands the content, and suggestive effects that subtly inform the player of the content, but suggestive effects may be executed instead of notification effects, or the system may be configured to execute notification effects instead of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 is used that has two types of probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (jackpot probability), high and low (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, a setting means (e.g., a setting switch) that can set one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values may be provided, and the main control unit 110 may be configured to execute control in which a different jackpot probability is set for each setting value set by the setting means.

In this case, for example, six setting values from 1 to 6 can be prepared, and the probability of a jackpot can be set for each setting value in order so that when setting value "1" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the highest, and when setting value "6" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the lowest.

In addition, the jackpot probability set for each setting value may be configured so that only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value, or only the jackpot probability corresponding to the high probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value.

In addition to the probability of winning a jackpot, the selection rate for each jackpot type, the probability of winning a small jackpot, the selection rate for the special symbol variation pattern, and the variation time may be varied according to the above-mentioned setting values. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is likely to be selected only when a specific setting value is set may be provided, and the player may determine the currently set setting value by paying attention to whether or not a special symbol variation based on that variation pattern or a jackpot game based on that jackpot type has been executed.

Furthermore, it may be configured to set a setting command to indicate the set value that has been set, and execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, or to determine the currently set setting value from the content of the received command when a command indicating the type of jackpot (a command to indicate the lottery result) or a command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern (a command to indicate the fluctuation time) output from the main control device 110 is received, and execute a setting suggestion effect based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, the number of commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 may be used that can simultaneously draw (change) the first special symbol and draw (change) the second special symbol. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-mentioned setting values, various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that the ease of variation (drawing) of each special symbol varies depending on the set value, or various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that a specific game state in which the drawing of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value, and a specific game state in which the drawing of the other special symbol different from the one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value different from the specific setting value. In this case, the drawing of the special symbol being advantageous to the player is a concept that includes a state in which the drawing of the special symbol is easier to be performed, and a privilege (jackpot game content, small jackpot game content, game state set after the end of the jackpot game) that is granted when the drawing result of the special symbol is a specific drawing result is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and allocation rate are unified according to the type of special chart regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition allocation rate may be changed according to the game state. This has the effect of making it possible to provide more complex gameplay and preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Furthermore, the special chance state may continue until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (e.g. 100 times), or a lottery may be held to transition to the normal game state each time the special symbol changes, and a transition from the special chance state to the normal game state may occur if the lottery is won. In this case, the special chance state that is favorable to the player and the special chance state that is unfavorable to the player may be determined, for example, by setting a difference in the number of times the special symbol changes before the special chance state ends, or by varying the probability of transitioning from the special chance state to the normal game state.

In addition, multiple time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, may be set, and among the multiple time-saving end conditions, when the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a specific number of times, i.e., when the change count end condition is met, and when the time-saving end condition is met when a small jackpot is won by the lottery for the special symbols, i.e., when the win count end condition is met, it may be configured so that the high probability state of normal symbols can be transitioned to a low probability state at different times.

Using this configuration, for example, a gaming machine can be provided that is controlled so that when the variable count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the start of the special pattern variation, and when the winning count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small win game.

As a result, even if the time-saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different within the combined range of the time for which the special symbol varies and the time for which the small win game is executed. Therefore, the player can also be interested in the type of time-saving end condition that is established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during the small win game that gives the player a small bonus, it is possible to make the small win game a more advantageous game state for the player by operating the electric device 640a to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance.

In addition, it is a good idea to provide multiple types of small wins with different periods during which the small win game is played, and to vary the bonus given to the player depending on the type of small win for which the winning count ending condition is met, even if the winning count ending condition is met. This makes it possible to get the player interested not only in the type of time-saving ending condition that has been met, but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving ending condition.

In this case, even if the winning count end condition is met, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state to end when the small win game starts and when the small win game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a configuration is used in which the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special pattern changes and the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on winning a small win are separately executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the time-saving information updated according to the lottery (change) of the special pattern is centrally managed and the timing to end the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving end condition that has been met.

In each of the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

Also, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted and displayed to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured to be configured other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a right-hand hit game is executed to target the right area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. However, it is sufficient to change the area of the game board 13 targeted depending on the game state, and a left-hand hit game may be executed during a time-saving state and a right-hand hit game may be executed during a normal state. In addition, a game may be configured to be executable in different game states while targeting the same area.

In each of the above control examples, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that the player can operate, which is determined by the player pressing it, but other configurations may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by emitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, some or all of the operation controls of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be configured to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is executed by the main control device 110, which is different from the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, the process for executing the game (lottery) and the process for displaying the result of the game (lottery) as a performance may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute multiple different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as the multiple special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Also, in each of the above embodiments, a game feature in which multiple special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules and a game feature in which the symbols are drawn (varied) independently of one another are described, but the game features described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Feature A Group> (Points where the player pushes in from the back to the front)
A gaming machine A1, characterized in that the operating device has an operating means which is operated by a player by pushing it, the operating device is capable of being configured into a first state under normal circumstances and a second state in which the operating means is positioned in a position which protrudes further from the player than in the first state, the operating means is provided with a biasing means which biases the operating means from the first state towards the second state, and the direction in which the operating means is pushed in the second state is from the back to the front as viewed by the player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured with an operating means that can be operated by the player that moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (see, for example, JP 2014-144218 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's sense of anticipation of a big win at the advanced position, so the player is likely to operate the operating means at the advanced position with high acceleration, and so the operating means needed to be designed with high strength. In this case, there was a problem that the operating means became heavy overall, and the drive means that drives the operating means became larger.

In contrast, with gaming machine A1, when performing a push operation in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is from the back to the front as viewed by the player, so the part that cannot be operated with a simple up and down linear movement is made to slip between the player's hand and the operating means, allowing the momentum of the push to be released.

In addition, when a player's playing posture requires pushing and operating the operating means with their shoulders or elbows as the main force, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the player, allowing the player to naturally apply less force to the operating means.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the operating device in gaming machine A1 is rotatable around an axis located at the back side of the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down around the axis, and has a tilting means having the operating means, and the tilting means positions the operating means facing away from the player in the second state.

According to gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means is positioned facing away from the player in the second state, thereby preventing the player from slamming the operating means when in the second state.

In addition, by placing a hand near the shaft and tilting the hand using that position as a fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, providing a new method of pushing that is less likely to accelerate, and preventing damage to the operating device due to the player's pushing operation.

Examples of new pressing operation methods include a method in which the outer side of the left little finger is placed near the axis rod, the hand is positioned near the operating means with the palm raised up and down, and the thumb is tilted down toward the operating means, or a method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the axis rod, the palm is positioned facing the operating means, and the palm is dropped toward the operating means.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in the first state of gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the up and down direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 allows the operating means to be pushed in the up and down direction in the first state, ensuring operability in the first state while preventing damage caused by the pushing operation in the second state.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the operating device in the gaming machine A3 is configured so that the operating means can operate automatically, and is equipped with a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device acts in the direction in which the player pushes in and does not act in the opposite direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 has the advantage that the driving force of the driving means that automatically operates the operating device acts only in the direction of the pushing operation, preventing the driving force from acting in a direction opposite to the player's operation. This makes it possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pressed down, it is possible to prevent the drive means from being subjected to a high load caused by the player pulling the button in the opposite direction when retracting it.

A gaming machine A5 is provided with a maintaining means that is operated by the drive means and that can form a maintaining state that maintains the operating device in a first state or a second state in the gaming machine A4, the drive means having a rotating means that transmits a driving force to the operating means via an eccentric portion, the rotating means can change phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is in the maintaining state, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintaining state is released is changed between the first phase and the second phase, and the maintaining state can be released by the same rotation in both the first phase and the second phase.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintenance means is in the maintenance state, and in the changed phase, the rotation means is caused to perform a movement that releases the maintenance state, thereby changing the movement width of the operation device moved by the biasing means. Therefore, multiple operating modes can be configured by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating means, and the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.A gaming machine A6 is configured in such a manner that the maintaining means is movable in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating means, and the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 adds a movement mode of the operating means that moves in the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, which is caused only by the biasing force, and thus the movement mode of the operating means is limited to one, so that the operating means can be moved in a different manner following the maintaining means, thereby increasing the variety of the movement modes of the operating means. This can increase the attention of the operating device.

A gaming machine A7 is any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, which is provided with a light-emitting means disposed inside the operating device and which emits light toward a player, and which is characterized in that, compared to the first state, in the second state, the area of the operating means is reduced from the player's viewpoint and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light-emitting means is expanded.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A6, it is equipped with a light-emitting means, and compared to the first state, in the second state, from the player's viewpoint, the range of light emitted by the light-emitting means is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, so that the player can focus his/her attention on the light and the presentation effect is improved, and by making it difficult to press the operating means unless aimed, the force required by the player to operate it can be reduced.

Gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light-emitting means changes as the operating means moves toward or away from the display means between the operating means and the display means.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and as the operating means moves towards or away from the display means between the operating means and the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light-emitting means changes, thereby preventing the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image on the display means difficult to see.

<Feature B> (Points that allow for rapid succession of hits while still providing small repulsive force under normal conditions)
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the device has a first state and a second state in which the range of operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force to move the operating means from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating a biasing force to move the operating means from the first state to the second state, the gaming machine being characterized in that it further comprises a second driving means for generating a driving force to move the operating means from the first state to the second state in response to the operation of a player.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the force for returning the operating means to its initial position is generated by a spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by a drive motor. In this case, however, the return of the operating means becomes slower, and when the player operates the operating means quickly, the operating means does not keep up with the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated tapping operations.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the first driving means is used to move the operating means, while the second driving means can be used when it is desired to return the operating means quickly.
The operating means can be pushed back by the driving means to make the return faster, allowing the player to enjoy repeated tapping operations.

In the gaming machine B1, a rapid-fire determination means is provided for determining whether or not a rapid-fire operation is being performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke of the operating means within a specified time, and the detection value of the rapid-fire determination means is used to determine whether or not to drive the second driving means.

According to gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the rapid-fire determination means, so that the second drive means operates even when the player is not performing a rapid-fire operation (for example, performing a single push operation or a long push operation), thereby preventing the player from feeling the strain of having his hand pushed back.

A gaming machine B3 is provided with an end detection means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means has been placed at the end position, a position difference detection means for detecting whether the operating means has been placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position, and a movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection values of the end detection means and the detection values of the position difference detection means, and is characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the movement direction determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction returning from the end of the push-in to the first state, that is, at the timing when the player's hand moves in the direction away from the button, a load pushing back against the operating means can be generated in synchronization with the player's movement.

Therefore, the second drive device operates in a direction opposite to the direction of movement of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being placed on the player's hand.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to effectively utilize the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, and is provided with a support frame supporting the operating means, the second drive means comprising a drive motor which rotates an eccentric weight, and support means which elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame, the support means being configured such that the drive force which moves the operating means from the first state position to the second state position becomes greater as the operating means approaches the terminal position, and the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame when the operating means is positioned at the terminal position, generating a drive force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving means is generated separately as a driving force generated by the support means and a driving force generated by the abutment of the eccentric weight with the support frame, so that the driving force applied to the operating means can be adjusted while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and it can be adjusted while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves toward the support frame in the movement direction of the operating means and abuts against the support frame based on the operating means being placed at the terminal position.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight approaches the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and abuts against the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the abutment can be used to move the drive motor in the moving direction of the operating means away from the support frame. As a result, the support means supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (direction approaching the operating means), so that the drive force pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Feature C> (The point where the VCM is used as a braking device and a vibration producing device)
A gaming machine C1 is provided with a detection sensor that detects a position near the end position of an operating means, the detection sensor being composed of a plurality of sensors, and is provided with a measurement means that measures the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, a threshold determination means that determines whether the measurement value measured by the measurement means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means that generates a driving force in the opposite direction to the pushing direction of the operating means, wherein the driving force generated by the repulsion means is greater when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on light operation by the player, the operating resistance is low, and there is a risk that the operating means may be damaged by the player's operation, whereas if the operating means is supported more firmly, the movement of the operating means itself can be slowed down, and the possibility of the operating means being damaged can be reduced, but the force required for the player to operate the operating means increases, and there is a problem that operating the operating means is a burden for players with little strength.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or greater than a threshold, and if it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased, so that the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold is reduced, and the operating means is decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsion means can improve operability and prevent damage.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when a threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, a control is executed to push the voice coil motor to an extended position, and before the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and by driving the voice coil motor before the operating means is positioned so that it can come into contact with the voice coil motor, the impact that occurs between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

A gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, a control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 or C2, by controlling the current flowing through the voice coil motor to be increased after the operating means and voice coil motor come into contact with each other, it is possible to gradually increase the degree to which the operating means is braked while preventing a large load from occurring at the moment the operating means and voice coil motor come into contact with each other, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operating means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operating means by using spring elasticity.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that a driving force can be generated without time delay even when the movement speed of the operating means is high.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed when the value measured by the threshold determination means is above a predetermined threshold, compared to when the value measured by the threshold determination means is below the predetermined threshold.

According to gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite the end that abuts the operating means is narrowed, so that the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased when the operating speed of the operating means is faster.

<Feature D group> (The clutch cuts off the transmission of driving force, preventing damage to the driving means)
A gaming machine D1 having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force to operate the operating means; a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means; and a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the release means releasing the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmission means reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for a performance, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being generated in the drive system.

In contrast, according to gaming machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the drive force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is released (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed.

Gaming machine D2 is characterized in that in gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and in a second direction which is opposite to the first direction, and the release means functions to release the drive regardless of whether the drive is in the first direction or the second direction.

Here, in the case where whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the player operates the operating means to drive the driving means in a direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be placed on the driving means, which reduces the freedom of presentation when operating the operating means.

When the button is driven between the first and second positions, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the direction opposite to the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or backward. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the drive force must be cut off in both cases.

In contrast, gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine D1, can release (disconnect) the transmission of driving force in both driving directions, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means, thereby improving the freedom of operation in the presentation in which the operating means is automatically operated.

In addition, as a method of releasing the transmission, for example, the clutch may move in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the drive means and the transmission means into a state in which a drive force can be transmitted, and the release means is a convex portion formed at the abutment portion between the drive means and the transmission means, and is provided with engaging teeth that transmit the drive force when they are in an engaged state, and the engaging teeth are configured with a shape that is inclined relative to the abutment surface so that both sides facing the operating direction of the drive means become tapered as they move away from the abutment surface.

According to gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the drive means and the transmission means together, and at the contact surface against which they are pressed, the release means transmits the drive force in an engaged state, while both sides facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined in a tapered manner as they move away from the contact surface, so that the engagement of the engaging teeth allows the transmission means to be separated from the drive means, thereby releasing the transmission of the drive force.

In addition, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means by the biasing means, and a load is applied by the biasing force in the operating direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth when the transmission means separates from the drive means, so that a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between a state in which the drive force is transmitted and a state in which the transmission is released can be suppressed.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission means as the transmission means becomes farther away from the drive means, so that it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large.

Additionally, in the released state, resistance periodically returns, rather than being completely removed upon release, allowing the player to begin operating the button within a short period of time after releasing it.

That is, as a "performance," when the button is activated and the player is holding the button,
If the player releases the button midway through the action, the button will stop moving for a long period of time, and the action will start from the end of that phase.
This reduces the sense that "things are starting to move now that players are no longer burdened."

In contrast, with the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released, which creates the feeling that the player has started moving because the load on the player has been released.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from interlocking sawtooth shapes.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it is possible to facilitate early return of the release means to the engagement position with the transmission means when the load from the player is released.
That is, if there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate at the tip of the engagement surface, it is possible to prevent the transmission means and the release means from butting against each other at that plane, thereby preventing the release means from stopping its movement along the direction in which it approaches and separates from the transmission means. Therefore, it is possible to start operating the operating means early after the load from the player is released.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, the operating mode of the operating means is different when the drive means is operated continuously in the forward direction and when the drive means is operated continuously in the reverse direction.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, while multiple operating modes of the operating means are provided, the transmission of driving force can be released without being limited to any one of the operating modes.

In gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when the drive means operates in the forward or reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is similar, but the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, when the operating mode of the operating means is such that the operating mode of the driving means has a different operating direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the driving means is similar, but the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different, thereby improving the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operating means with information that benefits the player, such as the probability of winning a big win, the player can be made to watch the operation of the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operation mode of the operating means changes.

Furthermore, since the difference in the operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the drive means, if the operating direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the likelihood of winning a jackpot, etc., without watching the operation of the operating means. However, since the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the drive means in advance, and the player can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Feature E Group> (The position of the cam protrusion is changed based on the rotation of the cam)
A gaming machine having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means; a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means; a first means for suppressing a change in position of the operating means from the first position, configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position; a biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and a terminal means for forming a changeable end of movement of the operating means moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. The first means suppresses the change in position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means, and comprises a release load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement of the first means with the operating means, and the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change in the end of movement of the operating means at the terminal means are performed by a single driving means.
1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixed state is released by a release load means, so that the operating means is extended by the biasing force of the biasing means, and the displacement amount of the extended operation can be changed by a terminal means (for example, see JP 2014-144218 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement amount of the extended operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of release of the fixation, so that the phase of the cam at the time of release of the fixation is changed in various ways, and therefore the cam that moves the operating means and the release load means that releases the fixation are operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there was a problem that multiple driving means were required, and the arrangement space for the driving means was large.

In contrast, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixed operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. This allows the drive means for changing the terminal position of the operation means by the terminal means and the drive means for moving the release load means to be used together, thereby making it possible to reduce the number of drive means.

A gaming machine E2, in which the change in position of the release load means is effected based on the operation of the transmission means in the gaming machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the change in the position of the releasing load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means, so that the state of the releasing load means can be determined by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection means such as position sensors that detect the state of the releasing load means, and therefore the number of parts.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational periods of the cam and the protrusion, or a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is placed at a predetermined phase and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion at other phases.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load applied from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is arranged operatively relative to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously or not.

According to gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, a release load means is arranged so as to be operable relative to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously or not, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any components.

In gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member, and the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that multiple types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by the second rotating means abutting against the first means at a predetermined phase.

According to this configuration, when the operation means is maintained in the first position, the action of the first means is released and the operation means moves toward the second position, and multiple types of end positions can be prepared.
For example, a similar configuration can be used to realize a performance in which the terminal position is gradually moved away from the first position, or a performance in which the terminal position is gradually moved closer to the first position.

<Feature F Group> (Vibration device supported by a soft case)
A gaming machine F1 is provided with an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating means being configured so that the operating means can move between a first position and a second position reached by the player operating the operating means from the first position, a vibration means having a vibrating vibration unit, and a receiving means arranged so that it can come into contact with the vibration unit, wherein when the operating means is arranged at the first position, the vibration unit is in a separated state so that it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, and when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibration unit is in an abutting state so that it can come into contact with the receiving means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
(See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is being operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine, and is then transmitted to the player who touches the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Therefore, when performing an effect in which vibration is transmitted immediately after the operating means is operated,
The vibration means must be operated after the operation of the operating means is detected. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, the vibration means must be operated before the player releases his/her hand from the operating means. Depending on the manner of operation of the player (for example, the manner of operation in which the operating means is pressed in and then released), the start of vibration may not occur in time before the player releases his/her hand, which causes a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine F1, whether the vibration unit abuts against the receiving means changes depending on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player to place it in the second position, so even if the vibration unit is vibrated continuously, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. Also, since the vibration of the vibration unit occurs before the player presses it, the vibration unit can be vibrated before the player releases his/her hand regardless of the manner of the player's operation, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged in the separated state to extend into the occupied area that the operating means occupies when the operating means is arranged in the second position, and when the operating means moves to the second position, the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area, thereby changing to the abutting state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, and thus the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. Therefore, the contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibration unit can be changed depending on the degree of movement of the operating means.
The strength of the vibration transmitted can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the vibration transmitted in response to the strength of the player's operation can be achieved by vibrating the vibration means in the same manner, without any particular change in the drive mode.

Gaming machine F3 is the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 and F2, the support means can be used to position the receiving means while suppressing the transmission of vibrations from the vibration means to the receiving means. This allows the receiving means and the vibration means to be spaced apart, preventing the transmission of vibrations and suppressing the displacement of the vibration means caused by vibrations.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in the abutting state of gaming machine F3, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibration section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be utilized to increase the load generated when the vibration part and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can provide momentum to the vibration part when it moves in the direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along the movement direction of the operating means,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is lower than that in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction.

According to gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the support means, due to differences in the deformation resistance of the support means.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibration part and the receiving means can be made different.

Examples of methods for varying the deformation resistance include, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, extending rubber feet along the direction of movement of the operating means; when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding to vary the deformation resistance for each direction; and, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, forming the support means from a rail that guides the operating means to move in a direction along the direction of movement and a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the direction of movement of the operating means.

Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the portion with which the vibration portion abuts in gaming machine F3 is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means separate from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but via a receiving means which is a means separate from the operating means, so that the vibration of the vibration means is prevented from being transmitted to the drive means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore the drive means is prevented from being placed under a load, thereby improving the durability of the drive means.

In addition, since vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from being startled by the vibrations and stopping the operation.

Examples of receiving means include parts of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the gaming balls are supplied, the edge of the glass frame, and other parts that a player may touch unconsciously while playing, as well as storage parts that partially surround the operating means.

<Feature G group> (One-touch attachment of cam and shaft. Shape (elastic deformation) possible at attachment part)
A gaming machine G1 has an operating means operated by a player, the operating means being configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force to drive the operating means; and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, the transmission means comprising a deformation section that elastically deforms when overloaded.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means (see, for example, JP 2014-144218 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the player holds the operating means in a fixed position, the driving force generated by the driving means to drive the operating means may cause damage to the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operating means,
There has been a problem in that a load accumulates at the connection between the transmission means and the drive means, and this connection may be damaged.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformation part of the transmission means elastically deforms, thereby reducing the load applied to the connection part between the operating means and the transmission means and the connection part between the drive means and the transmission means.

A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G1, the transmission means comprises a rotatably supported cam member, the deformation portion forms a connecting portion with the rotation shaft of the cam member, and a fixing force to the rotation shaft is generated by the elasticity of the deformation portion.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion serves as a portion that elastically deforms the cam member relative to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and serves as a portion that generates a support force for the cam member relative to the rotation shaft.
Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the same function. For example, a separate fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a convex portion that is convexly arranged parallel to the rotation axis, the convex portion is connected to the operating means, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotation axis tilts relative to the cam member.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can be achieved, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. In this case, however, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion as one member, and there is a risk of the number of parts increasing.

In contrast, according to gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotation axis tilts relative to the cam member, so that the cam member can be easily constructed from a single component, and the components can be simplified, compared to when the convex portion is slidably moved relative to the cam member.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance to elastic deformation of the deformation portion is greater in a second rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion and the extension direction of the rotation shaft, compared to a first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated around an axis that is a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation part different for each direction, the state after the deformation part is elastically deformed can displace the protruding tip of the protruding part in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member compared to the state before the elastic deformation when viewed in the rotation axis direction. As a result, the protruding part of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is about to move, and the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means can be alleviated by the elastic deformation of the deformation part.

A gaming machine G5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines G3 or G4, it is provided with a friction member that is arranged a predetermined distance apart along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and when the deformation portion elastically deforms, the posture of the cam member changes and the cam member and the friction member abut.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformation portion elastically deforms, causing the cam member to change posture and bring the cam member into contact with the friction member, thereby increasing the operating resistance of the cam member itself and thereby reducing the load applied to the connection portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting an inclination displacement of at least a portion of the cam member relative to the axis.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating while the driving means is operating, for example, when detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the displacement predicted by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means that detects the deviation in displacement is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complex and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was difficult to configure the detection means to detect the occurrence of an overload at low cost and at an early stage.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member has been inclined relative to the axis, so that it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred as soon as the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member without the need to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Feature H group> (Structure to prevent balls from rattling)
This game machine H1 is provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls that flow back down toward the launching device among game balls launched into a game area can pass, and is characterized in that the foul ball passage is provided with a one-way obstruction means that allows the game balls flowing down to pass through and obstructs the progress of objects flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutter is provided inside the guide path that guides the gaming ball from the upper tray to the launching device, and is equipped with a function to prevent fraudulent acts (cutting the thread) performed by shooting the gaming ball connected to the thread into the playing area (for example, JP 2015-02
(See Patent Publication No. 4179.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the string is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is released, and the string is cut by the tension generated at that time. If the strength of the game ball released is weak, the game ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball without the string being completely cut.
Therefore, for example, a cheating tool can be prepared with game balls connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string can be fired with a weak firing strength to send it into the foul ball passage, and while holding the one game ball that has been returned to the player, the other game ball connected to the other end of the string can be shot into the play area.This can remove the string from the guide path and create a state in which the one game ball and the other game ball are connected by the string through the foul ball passage, which can cause the problem that an external load can be applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, allowing the other game ball placed in the play area to be manipulated and an illegal advantage to be obtained.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is committed by using a thread guided into the gaming area through the foul ball passage to put a load on the other gaming ball, the one-way obstruction means obstructs the movement of the thread in the reverse direction of the gaming ball, making it difficult to generate an illegal advantage.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bending portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means on the inner corner side of the bend that does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down and applies a load to the object flowing backward.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to the object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward by the load means.

Gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H3, the load means is disposed in a recessed portion recessed with a width less than the diameter of a gaming ball.

According to gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, it is possible to avoid a collision between the load means and the gaming ball, and prevent damage to the load means.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H3 or H4, it is provided with a restricting means for restricting movement of said load means outwardly of said foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the movement of the load means outwardly of the foul ball passage, so that when a load is generated between the thread-like member and the load means, the load means deforms outwardly of the foul ball passage, thereby preventing the load applied to the member on the thread from weakening.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H1 to H5, it is provided with a receiving tray which is the tray where the foul ball first arrives at the front side of the front door, and the payout ball discharge section which discharges the gaming balls paid out from the payout device into the receiving tray is located above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the payout device passes just before the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that in the event of a fraudulent act of applying load to another gaming ball by using a thread guided into the playing area through the foul ball passage, the paid out gaming ball can be intentionally hit to apply load and reduce the durability of the thread.

Gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge section, which discharges gaming balls paid out from the payout device into a receiving tray, which is the tray that the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines H1 to H6, when a fraudulent act is committed in which a thread guided into the gaming area through a foul ball passage is used to put a load on another gaming ball, the gaming ball that is paid out can more easily damage the thread.

<Feature I> (Board surface holding structure)
A gaming machine I1 comprising: a gaming means used during play; and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from that side, the receiving means comprising a state change means that can change the gaming means from an unusable state in which the gaming means cannot be used to a usable state in which the gaming means can be used, the state change means comprising an approach means that approaches the gaming means from the one side when the gaming means is put into the usable state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fixing means that is rotatable in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and changes state between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame (see, for example, JP 2005-230420 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the fixing means is configured to change state only after the game board is pushed into the position for use, so if the game board is only half-pushed in, it becomes necessary to repeat the work of pushing it in again, which may reduce work efficiency.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into a usable state. Therefore, even if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the approaching means abuts against the gaming board and applies a pushing force,
This has the effect of enabling the game board to be pushed into a position for use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state change means displaces the gaming means to one side when the state change means changes to an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable.

According to gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine I1, when the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side), thereby improving the work efficiency of the operation of removing the gaming means.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state change means causes the approach means to retreat to the outside of the gaming means when the state change means renders the gaming means unusable.

According to gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines I1 or I2, the approaching means is retracted outside the gaming means, thereby improving the work efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and since this is done in conjunction with making the gaming means unusable, the work efficiency can be further improved.

Gaming machine I4, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state change means is provided with abutment means that receives a load from the playing means when the state is changed to the usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state-changing means changes to a usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so that the state of the state-changing means can be changed to a usable state in a series of steps by pressing the gaming means against the state-changing means.

Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means by an axis and is configured to be received by the receiving means by bringing the other side close to it, and the state change means is arranged on the other side of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is utilized to
A load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the play means.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I5, it is provided with a blocking means for blocking the opening on one side of the receiving means, and the blocking means is provided with a blocking regulation section that makes the opening on one side of the gaming means unblockable when the state change means maintains an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can determine whether the gaming means is in a usable state or not depending on whether the blocking means can block one opening of the gaming means. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the blocking means blocks one opening of the gaming means even though the gaming means maintains an unusable state.

<Feature J group> (The inverted cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from rattling.)
A gaming machine J1 comprising: a gaming means used during play; and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from that side, the receiving means comprising a positioning means that is disposed in a path that connects the gaming means to the outside, the positioning means being configured to be able to prevent the entry of objects from the outside at multiple locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention unit to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a piano wire into the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP 2016-
(See, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 26573.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the fraud prevention unit is located in only one place, and this causes a problem that the fraud prevention effect is insufficient.

In contrast, in gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path into which the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to prevent the piano wire from entering at multiple locations, thereby improving the effectiveness of fraud prevention.

In the gaming machine J1, the placement means includes a first means for suppressing entry of an external member at a first location, and a second means for suppressing entry of an external member at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing the intrusion of external components in different ways.

According to gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J1, the method of preventing the intrusion of external components differs between the first location and the second location of the placement means, so that the intrusion of external components can be further prevented compared to the case where the number of placement means is simply increased.

The method of preventing intrusion from the outside is not limited in any way. For example, a method of preventing intrusion by blocking a path or a method of preventing fraudulent acts by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

A gaming machine J3, in which the placement means in the gaming machine J1 or J2 is provided with an intrusion prevention portion formed from a cup shape that opens outward from the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 and J2, the intrusion prevention portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from intruding further.

In gaming machine J3, the placement means is provided with a support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is positioned downstream of the entry restriction section on the path from the outside to the gaming means.

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J3, when fraud occurs in which high heat penetrates the entry restriction section, changes that occur in the wiring due to the high heat (such as a break in the wiring due to heat) can be detected, making it easier to achieve the effect of suppressing the entry of external components.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the placement means is configured to place a member inserted from the outside into the game machine.
A gaming machine J5 characterized by having a resolution means that guides a ball to a resolution area far from the gaming means.

According to gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines J1 to J4, the positioning means guides a member that has entered from the outside to a resolution area far from the gaming means, so that even if the degree of entry of the member that has entered from the outside increases, the member that has entered from the outside can be prevented from reaching the gaming means.

<Feature K Group> (The structure of the five-piece decorative plate. Also includes fraud prevention measures)
Gaming machine K1 comprises a first means and a second means arranged opposite each other along a first direction and having at least one side connected, and a third means disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction, characterized in that the gaming machine K1 further comprises a connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with first and second means that are arranged opposite each other and connected by at least one side, and third means that is disposed between the first and second means along a first direction (see, for example, JP 2016-26573 A).
However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the various components are connected using existing methods such as gluing or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the third means, which may cause damage to the third means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting part connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the load applied to the third means from the first direction can be reduced, thereby preventing the third means from being damaged.

A gaming machine (K2) characterized in that, in the gaming machine (K1), the connecting portion is disposed at a distance from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

Gaming machine K3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connecting means which is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected by displacing the second means relative to the first means in a third direction close to the connecting means and fitting them together.

According to gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines K1 or K2, it is provided with a connecting means that is connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means is connected and fixed by engagement caused by displacing the second means relative to the first means in a third direction approaching the connecting means, thereby improving resistance to disassembly of the first means and the second means in a direction intersecting the third direction.

Gaming machine K4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3, the one sides of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed outward.

According to gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and one side of the second means are exposed to the outside, so that the state of the mating portion can be easily confirmed.
This makes it possible to quickly detect fraudulent acts even if the mating portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled.

Gaming machine K5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction.

According to gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of gaming machines K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength due to the fastening.

Gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a light irradiating means that irradiates light toward the first means or second means and is fixed to the connected means, and a light guiding means that is fixed to one of the members of the first means or second means and is configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the interior, in any one of gaming machines K3 to K5.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means.

A gaming machine K7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine K6, a contact means is provided that comes into face-to-face contact with the other member of the first means or the second means in an area facing the light guiding means.

According to gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine K6, a gap of the dimension of the abutment means can be maintained in the opposing area between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means.
This makes it possible to prevent the gap between the other member of the first means or second means and the light-guiding means from changing when the first means or second means is subjected to a load in the opposing direction and displaced.

This makes it possible to prevent the positional relationship between the first means, the second means and the light-guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means is subjected to a load in the opposing direction when an attempt is made to illegally disassemble the first means or the second means.

<Feature L group> (Point L that utilizes a curved light guiding means. Points not yet achieved)
Gaming machine L1 comprises a light-guiding means that is formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in the direction of irradiation of light passing through the inside, and a projection means that is arranged opposite the light-guiding means and onto which the light that has passed through the light-guiding means is projected, wherein the projection means comprises a concave surface opposing portion that is arranged opposite the concave surface portion of the light-guiding means, and a convex surface opposing portion that is arranged opposite the convex surface portion of the light-guiding means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light incident from an end face (see, for example, JP 2016-26573 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, there is a problem in that in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine L1, the projection means includes a concave surface facing portion and a convex surface facing portion. Therefore, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion have the following characteristics:
The emission intensity of the projection target device can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less light-transmitting than the concave surface facing portion.

According to gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of light passing through the convex opposing portion, it is possible to improve the effect of the light presentation at the concave opposing portion where the light emitted from the light-guiding means is concentrated.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine L2, it is provided with a counter projection means which is arranged on the opposite side of the projected means across the light guiding means and on which light which has passed through the light guiding means is projected, and that the counter projection means has a portion which is arranged opposite the concave portion of the light guiding means and a portion which is arranged opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means which are formed from a material having approximately the same light transmittance.

According to gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter projection means that is arranged opposite the concave portion of the light guiding means and the portion that is arranged opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means are formed from materials having approximately the same light transmittance, so that by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the presentation of the light viewed through the projected means and the presentation of the light viewed through the counter projection means can be made different.

<Feature M Group> (Bass reflex speaker layout)
A gaming machine M1 comprising first and second means arranged opposite each other and fixed to each other to form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means disposed with at least a portion thereof inserted into the internal space, and a bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged on both the left and right ends of the front frame, and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (for example, JP 2016-1
In such a gaming machine, the vibration waves traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body are caused to travel to the center position of the gaming machine, and then sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
While it is easy to create effects that produce low-pitched sounds, there was a problem in that the path length of the vibration waves was determined by the left-right width of the gaming machine.

In contrast, according to gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, so that by forming a path longer than the length of one side, the restrictions on the left and right width of the gaming machine can be lifted and the vibration wave can travel any distance.

In a gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which a load is applied in opposing directions, and the bending means has a protruding portion that protrudes in a rib-like manner from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other, and the protruding tip of the protruding portion abuts against the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, thereby preventing the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means when fastening and fixing, and therefore preventing a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bent path.

Gaming machine M3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine M1 or M2, it has an opening that connects the internal space with the outside, and the opening is blocked by a passing member that connects the internal space with the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means.

According to gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines M1 or M2, the opening is blocked by a passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that the wall constituting the internal space can be properly blocked by passing the passing member from the internal space to the outside, without the need to prepare an additional blocking member.

Gaming machine M4 is characterized in that in gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protruding portion and becoming disconnected.

Gaming machine M5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines M1 to M4, it is equipped with a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means that is arranged below the support fastening means and performs performance associated with the game, and that the performance means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that a heavy object can be used for the support and fastening means without compressing the space used for the presentation.

<Feature N> (movable unit, flowers that rotate in the opposite direction, petals that stop midway)
a base member, a first displacement means supported displaceably on the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a second displacement means switchable between a following state in which the first displacement means displaces in a displacement direction and a non-following state in which the first displacement means displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
Gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it has a third displacement means which is displaced in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the driving means, at least when the second displacement means is in a following state.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the first displacement means' extension and contraction movement as the first displacement means extends and contracts, while the second displacement means displaces in a direction different from the direction of the first displacement means' extension and contraction movement when the first displacement means operates near the extension end (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first displacement means and the second displacement means have the same displacement direction when the first displacement means extends and contracts, resulting in a slow presentation and a problem in that the presentation effect is insufficient.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means,
Since the displacement means is displaced in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means, so that the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be made higher than the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

A gaming machine N2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N1, a resistance means is provided for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change the switching point between the following state and the non-following state.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means makes it possible to change the switching point between the following state in which the second displacement means operates to follow the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state, thereby increasing the types of the displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Gaming machine N3 is characterized in that in gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by utilizing the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state.

According to gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means that drives the first displacement means, so that the driving means can be used for both purposes.

Gaming machine N4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can serve both as a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and as a presentation device that is visible to the player.

Gaming machine N5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N4, it is provided with a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means so that they can rotate coaxially.

According to gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine N4, the axis means which functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that as the attitude of any one of the first displacement means, the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means also changes accordingly, thereby preventing an excessive increase in displacement resistance.

<Feature O> (use of shell buttons and holes. Points not achieved)
A gaming machine O1 is provided with a first means and a storage means configured to store the first means, the storage means comprising a first opening which is an opening for receiving the first means when storing the first means, and a second opening which is opened with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper tray that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down relative to the upper tray (see, for example, JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause a malfunction.

In contrast, the gaming machine O1 has a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, so that foreign objects can be easily removed to the outside of the storage means through the second opening, thereby preventing the foreign objects from remaining inside.

A gaming machine O2, characterized in that in the gaming machine O1, the storage means has a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is located on the opposite side of the support portion across the first means.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, it is possible to form the second opening while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

A gaming machine O3, in which the storage means in the gaming machine O1 or O2 has a low water resistance portion, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistance portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines O1 and O2, water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the less water-resistant portion. In other words, the second opening can be used both to allow a predetermined solid object to pass through and to discharge liquids such as water.

A gaming machine O4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured to have shapes based on shapes projected in different directions of the solid object.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the misaligned solid object, it can be made easier to remove the solid object through the second opening.

A gaming machine O5, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 allows the player to see the shadow of the solid object when the solid object is blocking a part of the second opening. This allows the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will remain.

<Feature P group> (G2 advance notice control)
A gaming machine P1 having a judgment means for executing a judgment, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when identification information showing a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, characterized in having an effect execution means for executing an effect during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, a decision means for deciding to have the effect execution means execute a specific effect for each of multiple consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information, and an interruption means for, when it has been decided by the decision means to execute the specific effect, interrupting the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of a specific condition until a return condition is established.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that draw a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole, and display a variable performance or a big win performance on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such performances, various patterns of performances are executed, such as performances to make the player feel a sense of expectation and performances to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the like, in order to improve the interest of the game. Among these types of pachinko machines, a gaming machine has been proposed that can improve the interest of the game by providing the player with a series of performances using multiple variable performances by executing a special performance for multiple consecutive variable performances (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., if a notification performance that should be executed during the execution of multiple consecutive variable performances occurs irregularly, there is a risk of a problem occurring in which the execution is delayed, making it difficult for the player to understand the content of the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can make the content of the game easy for the player to understand.

According to the gaming machine P1, even if the determination means has determined that a specific effect will be executed for each of multiple dynamic displays of identification information, the execution of the specific effect is suspended based on the satisfaction of a specific condition until the return condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when the execution of a specific effect has been determined, the execution can be suspended and necessary control can be performed, providing the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, since the execution of the specific effect is resumed when the return condition is satisfied, the player can be informed that the specific effect has not ended midway, which has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

A gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it has an operating means operable by a player in the gaming machine P1, a switching means capable of switching and setting a setting when the operating means is operated, and a dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the setting set by the switching means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P1, gaming machine P2 allows the player to change settings by operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. This makes it possible to vary the dynamic display mode through the player's operation, and provides a wide variety of dynamic display modes that can be executed, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Gaming machine P3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine P2, the specific condition is met when the setting is switched by the switching means when the execution of the specific performance has been decided by the decision means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P2, gaming machine P3 can interrupt a specific presentation and start a dynamic display mode based on the settings switched by the player when the settings are switched by the player. This has the effect of preventing a malfunction that makes it difficult to notice that the settings have been switched, since the specific presentation is executed in the same way even if the player switches the settings.

A gaming machine P4 is any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, and is characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, and a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the judgment means executes the judgment based on the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, gaming machine P4 has the effect of increasing the interest in getting a gaming ball, about which information is obtained when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means, into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine P4, the ball entry means is at least provided with a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is configured to acquire first information when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and acquire second information when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means, the dynamic display means dynamically displays first identification information to indicate the judgment result when the first information is judged by the judgment means, and dynamically displays second identification information to indicate the judgment result when the second information is judged by the judgment means, the judgment means performs the judgment with priority on the second information stored in the storage means over the first information, and the specific condition is met when the second identification information is dynamically displayed in a state where the execution of the specific performance has been determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed multiple times in succession.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine P4, gaming machine P6 has the effect that when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed multiple times in succession, even if a ball enters the second ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed preferentially, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the player can easily recognize that the dynamic display of the second identification information has started preferentially.

Gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the first ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter the machine more easily than the second ball entry means when the machine is in a first gaming state, and the second ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter the machine more easily than the first ball entry means when the machine is in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P7, gaming machine P8 has the effect of increasing the interest in the game because, in the first gaming state, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means, making it easier for the first identification information to be dynamically displayed continuously and for a specific performance to be executed multiple times.

<Feature Q Group> (G Production)
Gaming machine Q1 has a judgment means for making a judgment, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when identification information showing a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, and is characterized in having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in response to multiple consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on an LCD screen according to the lottery results. In these effects, various patterns of effects are implemented, such as effects that create a sense of expectation in the player and effects that increase the player's desire to participate in the game, in order to increase the interest of the game. (Patent document: JP 2010-075741 A). There has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game in this type of pachinko machine. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has the purpose of providing a game machine that can increase the interest of the game.

With gaming machine B1, even if the dynamic display of identification information does not result in a specific judgment result, multiple identification information can be displayed as one dynamic display, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that it has an interruption means for interrupting the execution of the specific performance, based on the establishment of a specific condition, when the specific performance is being executed by the specific performance execution means, until a return condition is established, in accordance with the establishment of the specific condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q1, gaming machine Q2 has the effect of suspending the execution of a specific effect based on the establishment of a specific condition until a return condition is established, thereby making it possible to clearly indicate to the player that a specific condition has been established. Furthermore, when a return condition is established, execution of the specific effect is resumed, which has the effect of preventing a malfunction in which the specific effect ends midway, leaving the content of the effect incomplete and confusing the player.

Gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that it has, in gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means operable by a player, a switching means capable of switching and setting a setting when the operating means is operated, and a dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the setting set by the switching means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines Q1 and Q2, gaming machine Q3 allows the player to switch settings by operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by that setting. This makes it possible to change the dynamic display mode through the player's operation, and provides a wide variety of dynamic display modes to be executed, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q3, the specific condition is met when the setting is switched by the switching means while the specific performance is being executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q3, gaming machine Q4 can interrupt a specific presentation and start a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player when the player switches the setting. This has the effect of preventing a malfunction that makes it difficult to notice that the setting has been switched, since the specific presentation is executed in the same way even if the player switches the setting.

Gaming machine Q5 is any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means.

Gaming machine B5 has the effect of increasing the interest in getting a gaming ball, about which information is obtained when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means, into the ball entry means, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines B1 to B4.

Gaming machine Q6 is characterized in that it has a pre-judgment means for executing a judgment before the judgment means based on the information stored in the storage means in the gaming machine Q5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q5, gaming machine Q6 has the effect that a pre-determination is performed by the pre-determination means, making it possible to identify the determination result before the identification information is dynamically displayed.

In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, the ball entry means is at least provided with a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is configured to acquire first information when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and to acquire second information when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means, the dynamic display means dynamically displays first identification information to indicate the determination result when the first information is determined by the determination means, and dynamically displays second identification information to indicate the determination result when the second information is determined by the determination means, and the specific condition is met when the second identification information is dynamically displayed after the first identification information has been dynamically displayed.

Gaming machine B7 has the effect of, in addition to the effect of gaming machines B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed multiple times in succession, even if a ball enters the second ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed preferentially, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the player can easily recognize that the dynamic display of the second identification information has started preferentially.

A gaming machine Q8 is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls by varying the launching force based on the player's operation, a first flow path configured to allow gaming balls launched by the launching means with a first launching force to flow down, and a second flow path configured to allow gaming balls launched with a second launching force different from the first launching force to flow down, the second flow path being configured to make it difficult for gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path to flow down, the first ball entry means being arranged at a position where gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means being arranged at a position where gaming balls that have flowed down the second flow path can enter.

In addition to the effects of game machine Q7, game machine Q8 has the effect that the player can adjust the launch force of the game ball to intentionally make it easier for a specific condition to be fulfilled.

<Feature R group> (If special chart 2 remains after the time limit ends, the charge effect will not be activated until 5 changes)
The present invention relates to a first ball entry means for allowing a game ball to always enter the ball, a second ball entry means which is variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state which is more difficult to enter than the first state, an acquisition means which is capable of acquiring first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and of acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, a storage means which stores the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means which makes a judgment based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means which dynamically displays identification information for indicating a judgment result by the judgment means on a display means, and an identification information for indicating a specific judgment result on the display means. A gaming machine R1 having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when different information is stopped and displayed, characterized in that it has a discrimination means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition that changes the second ball entry means from the second state to the first state, a presentation means for executing a presentation to indicate the result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means, a presentation determination means for determining a specific presentation as the presentation to be executed by the presentation means when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific condition is established, and a prohibition means for prohibiting the execution of the specific presentation by the presentation determination means when a prohibition condition is established.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, to improve the interest of the game. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes an effect to notify the player that the special period will be executed before or during the period when a special period is set in which it is easier to enter the starting hole than usual (Patent Document: JP 2011-229733 A). When it is highly likely that a large number of reserved balls have been generated, such as immediately after the end of the state in which it is easy to enter the starting hole, a notification is executed, which is not advantageous to the player, and there is a risk of a malfunction in which the interest of the game is reduced. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

According to gaming machine R1, when the prohibition condition is met, a specific effect that indicates that the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means will not be executed. Therefore, when the prohibition condition is met, an effect that meets the needs of the player can be executed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

A gaming machine R2, which is characterized in that it has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more likely to change from the second state to the first state than the normal state in the gaming machine R1, and the prohibited condition is set as at least one first condition that is established when the normal state is set from a state in which the special state is set by the state setting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R1, gaming machine R2 has a first condition based on the end of a special state in which a gaming ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means as a prohibited condition, and therefore has the effect of suppressing defects that reduce the interest of the game by executing a specific presentation during a period in which the player is unlikely to benefit from the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means, since a large amount of second information is stored.

A gaming machine R3, characterized in that the prohibited condition in the gaming machine R2 is set as at least one condition in which a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage means when the state setting means sets the normal state from the state in which the special state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R2, gaming machine R3 requires that a predetermined number or more of the second information be stored when the special state ends, so that the prohibited condition is met only when a large amount of second information is stored. This has the effect of preventing malfunctions in which a specific effect is not executed and the player's profits are lost even when the number of stored second information is small.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the discrimination means is configured to be able to distinguish between a specific first discrimination result that changes the second ball entry means to the first state for a first period and a specific second discrimination result that changes the second ball entry means to the first state for a second period longer than the first period, and the effect determination means determines the specific effect based on the discrimination of the specific second discrimination result. Gaming machine R4.

According to gaming machine R4, a specific effect can be executed on any of gaming machines R1 to R3 to notify the player that a more advantageous period is in progress, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature Group S> (Volume Control)
a sound output means for outputting sound as part of the effect executed by the effect execution means; a volume setting means for setting the volume of the sound output by the sound output means based on an operation from outside the gaming machine; an output control means for switching between a first state in which sound is output from the sound output means based on the volume set by the volume setting means and a second state in which sound is output from the sound output means at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means; and an initial setting means for setting the second state when the gaming machine goes from a power-off state in which the power supply for operating the gaming machine is cut off to a restored state in which power supply to the gaming machine is started.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery results. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects that give the player a sense of expectation and effects that increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, to increase the interest of the game. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows the volume of sound effects and voices output as effects to be variably set according to the player's operation or the settings of the gaming parlor (Patent Document: JP 2011-200511 A). There has been a demand for this type of gaming machine that allows more suitable volume control. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows suitable volume control.

When the gaming machine S1 is powered on, the second state is set in which a predetermined volume is output regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means, so that the fact that the power has been turned on can be recognized by the volume, and suitable volume control can be implemented.

A gaming machine S2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set to a volume lower than the lowest volume setting set by the volume setting means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the gaming machine S2 has the effect of reducing noise in the gaming establishment when all the players are turned on at the same time, since in the second state the volume is set to a volume lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means. In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the output control means continues to set the second state until the performance execution means finishes the execution of one performance. In the gaming machine S3, the output control means continues to set the second state until the performance execution means finishes the execution of one performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine S1 or S2, gaming machine S3 has the effect that the second state is continuously set until the execution of effect 1 is completed, so that even if the power is turned on during a period when no effect is being executed, the volume of effect 1 that is executed later makes it possible to recognize that the effect was executed after the power was turned on.

Gaming machine S4 is characterized in that it has an initial state setting means for setting the state of the gaming machine to an initial state when the power is turned on to the gaming machine in any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, provided that a predetermined external operation has been performed, and the sound output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at maximum volume when the gaming machine is set to the initial state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the gaming machine S4 has the effect of allowing the player to confirm that the machine has been reset to its initial state by an alarm sound, making it possible to quickly discover fraudulent attempts to initialize the gaming machine.

<Feature T group> (Reserved pattern display area variable control)
a game machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information showing a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, the game machine T1 having a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means, and a pattern display area varying means for varying the display mode of the area in which the pattern is displayed on the pattern display means in accordance with the number of the information stored in the storage means.

Pachinko machines have been known in which a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the starting hole, and a variable effect or a big win effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period in which a variable effect is executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on a display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, the display area in which reserved ball information is displayed is difficult to understand when the reserved ball information is not displayed, and a gaming machine that displays reserved ball information in an easy-to-understand manner has been demanded. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand.

According to gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the patterns are displayed is changed depending on the amount of information stored in the storage means, so that the display mode of the display area in which the patterns are displayed makes it easy to recognize the amount of information stored, providing an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

Gaming machine T2 is characterized in that in gaming machine T1, the pattern display means displays area information indicating that the area is where the pattern is to be displayed even when the pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display area varying means varies and displays the area information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine T1, gaming machine T2 has the effect of displaying variable area information depending on the number of stored pieces of information, making it easier to understand by displaying area information that matches the number of patterns to be displayed.

Gaming machine T3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information that can identify the upper limit number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines T1 and T2, gaming machine T3 has the effect of being able to recognize the upper limit number using the identification information, and being able to prevent playing in a way that would exceed the upper limit number and thus satisfy the acquisition condition.

Gaming machine T4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine T3, the identification information is set to not be displayed when the symbols that are the upper limit number are displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine T3, gaming machine T4 has the effect of making the patterns easier to identify by suppressing interference with the display of the patterns, since the identification information is hidden when the upper limit number of patterns is displayed.

A gaming machine T5 is characterized in that it has a period determination means for determining a period during which a predetermined number of the acquisition conditions are met, and a rule change means for changing a display rule that changes the display mode of the area in which the pattern is displayed, depending on the period determined by the period determination means, in any one of the gaming machines T1 to T4.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, gaming machine T5 changes the display rules for changing the display mode of the area in which the patterns are displayed depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are met, so that the period until the acquisition conditions are met can be recognized by the way in which the display mode is changed, and this has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine T6 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area changing means displays a first display mode until a first number of symbols are displayed, and when the first number is exceeded, changes the display mode to a second display mode different from the first display mode.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines T1 to T5, gaming machine T6 displays the first display mode until the first number is displayed, which increases the player's motivation to achieve the acquisition conditions until the first number is exceeded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature U group> (Remove reserved number display)
a game machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific judgment result is displayed statically on the display means, the game machine U1 being characterized in having a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means, and a display mode changing means for changing the display mode displayed on the pattern display means based on the period during which a predetermined number of the information is acquired by the acquisition means.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on the liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period when a variable effect is being executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is changed depending on the time it takes for the predetermined amount of information to be acquired, which has the effect of making the player interested in the time it takes for the predetermined amount of information to be acquired, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine U2 is characterized in that in gaming machine U1, the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area in which the pattern is displayed based on the period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine U1, gaming machine U2 has the effect of changing the display mode of the display area in which the patterns are displayed based on the period, allowing the player to recognize the period while checking the display of the patterns.

A gaming machine U3 is characterized in that in the display area in which the pattern is displayed in the pattern display means, a suggestive mode that suggests that the pattern is to be displayed in the area is displayed even during periods when the pattern is not displayed in the display area of the gaming machine U1 or U2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines U1 and U2, gaming machine U3 has the effect of allowing players to quickly confirm that information has been acquired by displaying suggestive patterns even during periods when no symbols are displayed.

Gaming machine U4 is characterized in that in gaming machine U3, the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode in response to the period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine U3, gaming machine U4 has the effect of being able to check the frequency at which information is stored by the suggested mode, since the suggested mode is variable in response to the period required to store a predetermined amount of information.

Gaming machine U5 is characterized in that in gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is displayed by regularly varying based on the number of the symbols displayed, and the display mode varying means varies and displays the suggestion mode to a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of the symbols displayed based on the period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines U3 and U4, gaming machine U5 has the effect of allowing players to check the frequency of information acquisition through a special suggestion mode, and allowing them to enjoy playing games while experiencing both regular and irregular changes in the suggestion mode.

<Feature V Group> (Hold Navi)
A gaming machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fulfillment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific judgment result is displayed statically on the display means, wherein the gaming machine V1 is characterized in that the storage means has an effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the information before being judged by the judgment means being stored a predetermined number of times or more.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on the liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period when a variable effect is being executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to gaming machine V1, a specific effect is executed when a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored in the storage means, so it is possible to make the player interested not only in the judgment result but also in the number of pieces of information stored, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine V2, characterized in that in the gaming machine V1, a pre-determination means executes a determination on the information stored in the storage means before the determination is made by the determination means, and the performance execution means includes a performance determination means capable of determining the type of the specific performance based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine V1, gaming machine V2 determines the type of specific effect based on the results of a preliminary judgment, making it possible to suggest the judgment results of information stored before the identification information is dynamically displayed by the specific effect, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine V3 characterized in that in the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means.

According to gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine V2, the type of specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored in the storage means, so there is an advantage in that it is possible to identify the frequency at which information is stored by the specific effect.

A gaming machine V4 is characterized in that it has a history information storage means for storing game history information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, and the type of the specific performance is determined based on the history information stored in the history information storage means.

With gaming machine V4, the type of specific effect is determined based on the effect of any of gaming machines V1 to V3, as well as on game history information, so it is possible to change the type of specific effect as the game continues, which has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine V5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific performance continues to be executed until the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means falls below a specific number.

According to gaming machine V5, in any of gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific presentation continues until the number of stored information falls below the specific number, which has the effect of motivating the player to play so that the number of stored information does not fall below the specific number.

A gaming machine V6 is characterized in that it is any one of gaming machines V1 to V5, and has a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each piece of information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and a pattern display area changing means for changing the display mode of the area in which the pattern is displayed on the pattern display means in accordance with the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, gaming machine V6 has the effect of making it easy to identify the number of pieces of information stored, since the display mode of the area in which the patterns are displayed is variable according to the number of pieces of information stored.

<Characteristic W Group> (Lucky Number)
a game machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, the game machine having: a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before the judgment by the judgment means; a number information storage means for storing, when the information is stored in the storage means, number information corresponding to the number of pieces of the information before the judgment by the judgment means that was stored in the storage means at the time the information was stored, and an effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the number information stored in the number information storage means.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on the liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period when a variable effect is being executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

When information is stored with gaming machine W1, quantity information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored at the time the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and a specific performance based on the quantity information is executed, which has the effect of further increasing interest when information is stored.

Gaming machine W2 is characterized in that in gaming machine W1, the specific performance is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W1, gaming machine W2 performs a specific effect based on the number information stored for the information determined to be a specific judgment result, which has the effect of making the player interested in the number information at the time the information determined to be a specific judgment result is stored, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine W3 is characterized in that the specific performance is executed in a manner that indicates an area in which the pattern corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific judgment result is displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W2, gaming machine W3 has the effect that when a pattern is displayed, the number information stored for the information previously determined to be a specific judgment result can be confirmed by a specific presentation, and the player can play the game in the hope that a pattern will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific presentation.

Gaming machine W4 is any one of gaming machines W1 to W3, characterized in that the symbols are provided with suggestive features corresponding to the number information.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines W1 to W3, gaming machine W4 has the effect that the symbols are given a suggestive pattern corresponding to the number information, so that even if the number of pieces of information before the judgment increases or decreases, the number information at the time of storage can be recognized by the suggestive pattern.

Gaming machine W5 is characterized in that it is any one of gaming machines W1 to W4, and has a type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, and a notification means for notifying suggestive information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed based on the information being stored in the memory number corresponding to the quantity information of the specific effect when the bonus game is being executed.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines W1 to W4, gaming machine W5 stores information up to a memory number corresponding to a specific presentation, and provides suggestive information that suggests the type of bonus game being played. This allows the player to store information even during bonus play, which has the effect of increasing the efficiency of play.

Gaming machine W6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine W5, the identification information for indicating the specific judgment result is configured to make it difficult to identify the type of bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W5, gaming machine W6 has the effect of increasing the value of the indication information by making it difficult to identify the type of bonus game from the identification information.

<X group> (Charge performance derivative)
a first ball entry means through which a game ball can always enter the ball; a second ball entry means which can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state which is more difficult to enter than the first state; an acquisition means which can acquire first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and can acquire second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means; a storage means which stores the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means; a judgment means which makes a judgment based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means; and a dynamic display means which dynamically displays on a display means an identification information for showing a judgment result by the judgment means. and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information showing a specific judgment result is stopped and displayed on the display means. The gaming machine X1 is characterized in having a discrimination means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition that changes the second ball entry means from the second state to the second state, a presentation means for executing a presentation to show the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a presentation determination means for determining a specific presentation as the presentation to be executed by the presentation means when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific condition is established.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery results. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a movable member such as a wing shape is arranged in association with the starting hole, which restricts the entry of balls into the starting hole and releases the restriction when the opening condition is met to make it easier for the game ball to enter (Patent Document: JP 2011-229733 A). In the above-mentioned pachinko machine, even if the opening condition is simply met and the movable member is movable, there is a risk of a problem that the player will get bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a game machine that can suppress the problem of the player getting bored with the game early on.

The gaming machine X1 allows the player to easily determine that a specific condition has been met by a specific effect, and allows the player to play in anticipation of not only a specific judgment result but also the execution of a specific effect, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine X2 is characterized in that it has a prohibition means for prohibiting the effect determination means from determining a specific effect when an avoidance condition is met in gaming machine X1.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine X1, gaming machine X2 has the effect of preventing the specific performance from being determined when the avoidance condition is met, thereby preventing the specific performance from being executed indiscriminately.

Gaming machine X3, which is a gaming machine X1 or X2, has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more likely to change from the second state to the first state than the normal state, and the avoidance condition is set as at least one condition based on the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means and the normal state being set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine X1 or X2, gaming machine X3 has the effect of suppressing the malfunction of excessive balls entering the second ball entry means by making it easier to establish the avoidance condition, since there is a high possibility that a large amount of second information is stored in the storage means at the time when the special state is set to the normal state.

Gaming machine X4, characterized in that in gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition is set as at least one condition that when the state setting means sets the normal state from the state in which the special state is set, the second information is stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine X3, gaming machine X4 has the effect of suppressing the problem of excessive storage of second information.

Any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, the gaming machine X5 is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball by varying the launching force based on the operation of the player, a first flow path configured to allow a gaming ball launched by the launching means with a first launching force to flow down, and a second flow path configured to allow a gaming ball launched with a second launching force different from the first launching force to flow down, the first ball entry means being arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means being arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is established, the gaming machine X5 is characterized in that it notifies the player of suggestion information suggesting that the gaming ball should be allowed to flow down the first flow path.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, the gaming machine X5 has the effect of suppressing the malfunction of the player causing the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state, because suggestion information is provided to cause the gaming ball to flow down the first flow path when the avoidance condition is met.

<Y group> (Button pop-out control)
A gaming machine Y1 has an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player, a movement means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an action control means for controlling the operation of the movement means, wherein the movement means is configured to be capable of executing a first action of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a first movement manner and a second action of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a second movement manner different from the first movement manner, and the action control means controls the operation of the movement means so as to execute the first action when a first condition is satisfied, and to execute the second action when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects that give the player a sense of expectation and effects that increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a gaming machine has been proposed that is equipped with an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player, and is configured so that the content of the variable effect being executed can be changed or the type of background can be changed by the player operating the operating means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game if he or she simply operates the operating means. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y1, the operation surface of the operation means can be moved in different movement patterns by the motion control means, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the operation means. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect using the operation means, and increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that in gaming machine Y1, the moving means moves the operating surface of the operating means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to gaming machine Y2, the movement pattern of the operation surface of the operation means until it is moved to a specific operation position can be varied by the operation control means, so that the player can be interested in the process in which the operation surface of the operation means moves.

Gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that in gaming machine Y2, the moving means moves the operation surface of the operation means so that the movement period in the second action is longer than the movement period in the first action.

With gaming machine Y3, the movement period can be varied depending on the control content of the operation control means, making it possible to make the player more interested in the process in which the operating surface of the operating means moves.

In gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means is composed of a driving means that generates a driving force to move the operation surface of the operation means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, and the operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls on the driving means and differs the operation content of the moving means depending on the content of the drive control executed. Gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine Y4, the operation of the moving means can be varied by varying the drive control of the drive means. This simplifies the control of the operation control means.

In the gaming machine Y4, the driving means generates the driving force by a rotational motion, the motion control means is capable of executing a first drive control that rotates the driving means in a first direction and a second drive control that rotates the driving means in a second direction different from the first direction as the multiple drive controls, and the moving means executes the first motion when the first drive control is executed by the control means, and executes the second motion when the second drive control is executed. Gaming machine Y5.

According to the gaming machine Y5, the moving means performs different operations by rotating the drive means in different directions, so the movement pattern for moving the operating surface of the operating means can be easily changed.

Gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that it has a speed varying means that can vary the rotation speed of the drive means in the gaming machine Y5.

According to the gaming machine Y6, the rotation speed can be varied by the speed varying means, so that the manner in which the operating surface of the operating means is moved can be easily diversified, and the presentation effect of the presentation using the operating means can be enhanced.

In gaming machine Y6, gaming machine Y7 is characterized in that the second movement mode is to move the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position in accordance with the rotation speed of the drive means varied by the speed variation means.

Gaming machine Y8 has a discrimination means for executing a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established among the gaming machines Y1 to Y7, a bonus granting means for granting a beneficial bonus to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect to suggest that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, the movement means operates as the suggestive effect, and the operation control means determines the content of the operation control according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

According to gaming machine Y8, the movement of the operation surface of the operating means executed can suggest the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, so the player will pay close attention to the movement of the operation surface of the operating means. This can enhance the presentation effect of the presentation using the operating means.

<Feature Z> (Prevents the button from jumping out)
A gaming machine having an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined movement condition is satisfied, a movement means capable of moving the operation surface of the operation means from a stored position to a protruding position when the predetermined movement condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, a movement control means for controlling the movement means, and an effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined operation being performed on the operation means, wherein the movement means is configured to be capable of executing a first action for moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position and a second action for moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position, and the movement control means executes the first action when the predetermined operation is performed by the operation means and the effect can be executed by the effect execution means.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects that give the player a sense of expectation and effects that increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a gaming machine has been proposed that is equipped with an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player, and is configured so that the content of the variable effect being executed can be changed or the type of background can be changed by the player operating the operating means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game if he or she simply operates the operating means. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to gaming machine Z1, the motion control means causes the moving means to perform the first motion regardless of whether the operation surface of the operating means is moved or not, so it is possible to prevent the player from noticing in advance that the operation surface of the operating means will move by knowing whether the moving means will operate or not, and this has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, performing the first action can have the effect of making the player expect that the second action will be executed.

In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means is composed of a driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operation means by a rotational operation, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, the movement control means is capable of executing a first drive control that rotates the drive means in a first direction and a second drive control that rotates the drive means in a second direction different from the first direction as the multiple movement controls, and the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and executes the second operation when the second drive control is executed. In the gaming machine Z2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Z1, gaming machine Z2 can be configured so that the operating surface of the operating means does not move even when the driving means is driven, and has the effect of being able to change the position of the driving means according to the situation without the operating surface moving.

A gaming machine Z3 has a restricting means that can be changed between a restricting state that restricts the movement of the operation surface of the operation means by the moving means and a release state that releases the restriction, and the first action that the moving means executes in response to the control content of the movement control means is an action for changing the restricting means to the release state, and the second action is an action for moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position.

According to gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the restricting means. The moving means is operated so as to vary the state of the restricting means according to the control contents executed by the operation control means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operating surface of the operating means moves.

In gaming machine Z3, the transmission means has a rotating member that can rotate in synchronization with the rotational movement of the drive means, and an action member that is connected to the operation means and on which the rotational movement of the rotating member acts, the rotating member has a protruding portion that can abut against the action member, and the regulating means is a gaming machine Z4 that is characterized in that it changes to the released state by rotating the drive means in the first direction to abut the protruding portion against the action member.

Gaming machine Z5 is characterized in that in gaming machine Z4, the regulating means does not change to the released state when the drive means is rotated in the second direction and the protrusion is brought into contact with the action member.

A gaming machine Z6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine Z5, the position at which the protrusion stops is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed.

A gaming machine Z7 is characterized in that it has a discrimination means for making a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established among the gaming machines Z1 to Z6, a bonus granting means for granting a beneficial bonus to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect to suggest that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the predetermined movement condition is established according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

<Feature α group> (Over-winning during big wins)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the reversal means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means; and a determination means for determining, as the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, either a first bonus game in which a first bonus that is advantageous to the player is awarded, or a second bonus game in which a second bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus is awarded; and wherein the gaming machine α1 is characterized in that, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, it has a type determination means for determining from a plurality of types a notification type for notifying the player of notification information that notifies the player of type information of the bonus game being executed.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on an LCD screen according to the lottery results. In these effects, various patterns of effects are implemented, such as effects that create a sense of expectation in the player and effects that increase the player's desire to participate in the game, in order to increase the interest of the game (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). There has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of this type of gaming machine. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has the purpose of providing a gaming machine that increases the interest of the game.

When a bonus game is being played with the gaming machine α1, the notification type for suggesting the type of bonus game is determined from a number of types, so that a variety of notification types can be implemented, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine α2 has a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the open state, and a variable control means that changes the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means as the bonus game, and the notification types include at least a first notification type that notifies the notification information based on the fact that more than the predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine α1, gaming machine α2 can increase the value of having more than a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine α3 is characterized in that the bonus game in the gaming machine α2 involves executing the opening game multiple times, and has a notification type switching means that switches to another notification type when the first notification type has been determined based on the opening game being executed a predetermined number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine α2, gaming machine α3 has the effect of being able to switch to another notification type during bonus play even when the first notification type has been determined, making it possible to switch to notifying notification information even when it is difficult to score more than the predetermined number of game balls.

Gaming machine α4 is characterized in that in gaming machine α3, the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine α3, gaming machine α4 has the effect of suppressing the problem of duplicate notifications because the notification type can be switched on the condition that specific notification information has not been notified.

<Feature β group> (Normal hits are transformed into special hits)
a game machine β1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific judgment result is displayed statically on the display means, characterized in that the game machine β1 also has a pre-judgment execution means for executing a judgment before the judgment means based on the information stored in the storage means, and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means if the information stored in the storage means is determined to be the specific judgment result.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on an LCD screen according to the lottery results. In these effects, various patterns of effects are implemented, such as effects that create a sense of expectation in the player and effects that increase the player's desire to participate in the game, in order to increase the interest of the game (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). There has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of this type of gaming machine. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has the purpose of providing a gaming machine that increases the interest of the game.

With gaming machine β1, when a bonus game is executed, if it is further determined that a bonus game will be executed after that, a special effect is executed, so that the player can look forward to the special effect being executed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine β2 is characterized in that the bonus games in the gaming machine β1 include at least a first bonus game in which a normal gaming state is set after execution, and a second bonus game in which a special gaming state is set in which the player has a higher probability of being judged as having the specific judgment result than in the normal gaming state after execution, and the specific presentation is configured in a manner that suggests that the special gaming state has been set.

In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second bonus game will be executed, and when the identification information for which the first bonus game will be executed is dynamically displayed, if the information determined to be the specific judgment result is stored, the gaming machine β3 is characterized in having a stop display switching means that can display the identification information in the specific stop display mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine β2, gaming machine β has the effect of making the player feel as if the second bonus game is being played, since the game is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode even when the first bonus game is being played.

In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means switches to the specific stop display mode when the identification information for which the first bonus game is to be executed is dynamically displayed, based on the information determined to be the specific judgment result not being stored, and the information determined to be the specific judgment result being stored during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine β4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine β3, gaming machine β4 has the effect of increasing the opportunities for a specific stop mode to be displayed, since the stop mode can be switched even after dynamic display has begun.

<Feature AA group> (Reset BGM when power recovery state ends)
Gaming machine AA1 having a power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, an alarm means capable of executing an alarm to indicate that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect after the alarm executed by the alarm means is completed, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio based on audio data for a predetermined period of time, characterized in that the audio output means outputs the audio from the start position of the audio data during the alarm period in which the alarm is executed by the alarm means, and outputs the audio from the predetermined position of the audio data when the effect is executed by the effect execution means.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success after a predetermined variable time, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there are some gaming machines that stop subtracting the variable time if the power goes out during the predetermined variable time, and when the power is turned on, a return screen is displayed and the subtraction of the stopped variable time is resumed (for example, JP 2016-005505 A). In such gaming machines, the return screen is displayed to clearly inform the player that the power has been turned on, but there is a problem that the return of the power is emphasized and the subtraction of the variable time is resumed cannot be clearly informed. The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can inform the player of the game situation when the power is restored in a more clear manner.

The gaming machine AA1 is configured so that the sound that is output during the period when a specified effect is being executed can be output even while the notification to indicate that power has been supplied is being executed, which has the effect of making it possible to correlate the period in which the notification to indicate that power has been supplied with the period thereafter. In addition, since the machine is configured so that when the notification to indicate that power has been supplied ends and the specified effect begins, sound based on the sound data for the specified period is output from a specific position in the sound data, it is possible to output sound with content that corresponds to the effect that is executed after the period in which the notification to indicate that power has been supplied ends. This has the effect of making it possible to output sound without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When using the gaming machine AA1 described above, it is preferable to further provide a discrimination means for discriminating whether or not a special pattern change is being performed at the time the power is cut off, and a storage means capable of storing the discrimination result for a predetermined period during which the power is cut off, and configure the device to output the background music that is output during the special pattern change during the notification period that notifies the player that power has been supplied if it is determined that the power has been cut off during the special pattern change when power is supplied. This makes it possible to notify the player by voice that a special pattern change is being performed while the notification to indicate that power has been supplied is being executed. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

It is also preferable to configure the period for notifying that power has been supplied to the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10 so that it continues until the start-up process is completed. By configuring in this way, the period for notifying that power has been supplied can be shortened. If the power is cut off during the special chart change, or if the special chart change starts during the period for notifying that power has been supplied, the special chart change may cross over the timing when the period for notifying that power has been supplied ends and the normal display screen appears. In this case, it is preferable to determine the period from the time the normal display screen is displayed to the end of the ongoing special chart change, and set a change effect (a remaining change time corresponding effect) based on the determination result. This makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special chart change in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

If the result of the remaining variation time determination is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is advisable to configure the timing of the end of the presentation that notifies the player that power has been supplied to be delayed by a predetermined time (1 second). This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a presentation that corresponds to the remaining variation time for only a short period of time, which would be difficult for the player to distinguish, and therefore provides a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

<Features Group AB> (The timing of the background change is varied according to the speed of the pattern change when the button is pressed)
a game machine AB1 comprising: a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period of time; a bonus granting means for granting a bonus on the basis that the identification state dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by a player; an operation discrimination means for discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; a presentation mode varying means for varying a presentation mode on the basis of a discrimination result of the operation discrimination means; a presentation execution means for executing a presentation corresponding to the presentation mode changed by the presentation mode varying means; and a variable timing setting means for setting the timing at which the presentation mode is changed, based on the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation discrimination means that the predetermined operation has been performed.

In the past, when a game ball entered a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery was held to determine whether the game would be a success or failure, and if the lottery result was a success after a predetermined time period, a bonus game that was advantageous to the player was executed. In addition, some gaming machines were provided with an operation means that the player could operate, and various effects were set based on the operation content of the player on the operation means (for example, JP 2016-18274 A). In such gaming machines, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed depending on the operation result of whether the player operates the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means, that is, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. However, when the player participates in the game (when the player operates the operation means in the operation effect), the effect modes executed are limited, so it was desired to be able to set a wider variety of effect modes and to enhance the effect of the effect.

According to the gaming machine AB, the presentation mode can be varied according to the speed at which the identification information changes at the timing when the player operates the operating means, so that a variety of presentations can be provided. In the gaming machine AB described above, the presentation mode that can be varied by the presentation mode varying means can be, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to vary the timing at which the background mode is variably set according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set when the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, i.e., immediately before the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped and displayed.

It is also advisable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the current identification information. This allows the player to determine whether or not the presentation mode will change immediately after operating the operation means to change the presentation mode. Furthermore, if the period from when the player operates the operation means to change the presentation mode until the presentation mode changes is longer than a predetermined period, it is advisable to configure the device to display a comment informing the player that the presentation mode will change after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the gaming company to easily know whether or not the gaming machine has accepted an operation to change the presentation mode when that operation is performed.

Furthermore, if an interval of at least a predetermined period is provided between the operation of the operating means and the change of the presentation mode, it is preferable to configure it so that the above-mentioned predetermined period is the time until the next special chart change is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the presentation mode in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the result of the special chart lottery is not being executed.

<Feature AC Group> (The performance changes depending on the timing and number of button presses)
a game machine AC1 having an operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, an operation timing determination means capable of determining the timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed, an operation count measurement means capable of measuring the number of times that the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed, a presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means and the measurement result of the operation count measurement means, and a presentation execution means for executing a presentation according to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.

In the past, when a gaming ball entered a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery was held to determine whether the game would be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result was a win after a specified variable time, a bonus game that was advantageous to the player was executed. Furthermore, some gaming machines were provided with an operating means that the player could operate, and various effects were set based on the operation content of the player on the operating means (for example, JP 2016-18274 A). In such gaming machines, the performance mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations on the operating means. In gaming machines configured in this way, it was difficult to set a variety of performance modes according to the operation content of the operating means, and although it was possible to enhance the performance effect, a gaming machine that could set a wider variety of performance modes was desired.

The gaming machine AC1 can vary the presentation style based on both the operation timing and the number of operations on the operating means, allowing for a wider variety of presentations to be set, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in a gaming machine having the configuration of gaming machine AC1, it is preferable to configure it so that a continuous operation presentation in which the presentation mode is variable in response to multiple operations on the operating means can be executed, and the timing for varying the presentation mode of subsequent continuous operation presentations can be set according to the timing of a predetermined number of operations during the period in which the continuous operation presentation is being executed. Specifically, it is preferable to configure it so that the ease with which the presentation mode is changed in response to second and subsequent operations on the operating means is varied based on the timing of the first operation on the operating means during the period in which the continuous operation presentation is being executed. By configuring it in this way, various presentation modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in this case, it is advisable to set the presentation mode for the first operation of the operating means to be the same regardless of the timing of the first operation of the operating means. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the timing of the first operation of the operating means.

In addition, the presentation mode executed after the continuous operation presentation may be changed according to the presentation mode of the continuous operation presentation displayed when the continuous operation presentation has ended. This allows players to participate in the continuous operation presentation with enthusiasm. Also, the continuous operation presentation may be configured to be executable based on the special chart change, and the presentation mode executed after the continuous operation presentation may be set based on the presentation result of the continuous operation presentation and the lottery result of the special chart change, or the presentation mode change conditions of the continuous operation presentation (number of times the operating means is operated, operation method, etc.) may be set based on the lottery result of the special chart change and the operation timing of a predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation presentation period.

<Feature AD group> (The reserved number display on the LCD can be synchronized with the actual reserved ball number or not)
a display mode display means for displaying a display mode indicating the predetermined number, the display mode display means being configured to display, on a display means, a first mode indicating the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means when a first condition is satisfied, and a second mode indicating the number of times the effect is executed by the effect execution means when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, the right to execute the lottery is configured to be able to be stored in a plurality of units, so that the game can be played efficiently. In addition, in a gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of units (reservations) to execute the lottery, there is a machine that displays a reserved pattern to show the player the number of reserved units stored. (For example, JP 2016-18274 A). In such a gaming machine, the player can easily grasp the current number of reserved units, so that the game content can be determined based on the number of reserved units, and an efficient game can be played. In addition, there is a machine that has a function of determining the lottery result in advance for the reserved units stored before the actual lottery is executed, and when the number of reserved units stored reaches a specific number, a series of effects (continuous effects) is executed using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of reserved units is executed. In such a continuous performance, the results of the advance determination for multiple reserved balls can be executed using a series of performances, so that the possibility of a winning ball being included in the target lottery is higher than in a performance based on the result of a single lottery, and the player can pay attention to the performance. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new reserved ball is acquired during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, the reserved pattern corresponding to the new reserved ball is additionally displayed in addition to the reserved pattern indicating the reserved ball that is the target of the continuous performance, so that it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved patterns are the target of the continuous performance, and the performance effect is reduced. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily notify the player of the reserved patterns that are the target of the performance in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to gaming machine AD1, the display mode showing the number of memories displayed on the display means can be variably set to either show the number of memories stored in the storage means or show information showing the number of effects depending on the conditions that are met, providing players with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine having the configuration of gaming machine AD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the number of memories stored in the memory means, separate from the display means. This makes it possible to reliably notify the player of the number of memories in the memory means that affects the outcome of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emission mode of a light-emitting means such as an LED.

The second display means may be configured to display the number of times stored in the storage means during the period when the information indicating the number of effects is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, the second display means may be configured to be less noticeable than the display means. This configuration allows the player to focus on the display mode displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the effect of the effects.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of effects, it may be configured to display the number of times stored in the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations performed during the effect period, or to display based on the length of the effect period (for example, one display per 30 seconds). Also, a display indicating the number of times the third symbol stops (including temporary stops) during the effect period may be used.
<Feature AE group> (Preview effect executed only when the background is changed)
The gaming machine AE1 has an operation means operable by a player, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating that a prescribed operation has been performed on the operation means, a presentation mode varying means for varying a presentation mode based on a discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, a presentation execution means for executing a presentation according to the presentation mode varied by the presentation mode varying means, and a special presentation execution means for executing a special presentation when a variable timing at which the presentation mode is varied by the presentation mode varying means satisfies a specific condition.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball in a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, some machines execute suggestive effects to make the player play while expecting that the lottery result will be a success. In order to increase the variety of the suggestive effects, some machines are configured to change the mode in which the suggestive effects are executed (for example, JP 2010-213999 A). Furthermore, some machines change the mode (background) in which the suggestive effects are executed based on the player's operation of the operating means. In such gaming machines, a dedicated suggestive effect is executed according to the set mode, providing the player with a variety of effects and enhancing the effect of the effects. However, there is a problem in that after seeing the dedicated effects corresponding to each mode, the player's willingness to operate the operating means and change the mode decreases. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to voluntarily change modes.

The gaming machine AE1 is configured to be able to execute special effects when the presentation mode is changed, so that it is possible to execute effects at the mode switching timing that would not be experienced even if the player played for a long period of time during the period in which each mode is set. This makes it possible to motivate players who wish to experience various presentations to operate the operating means.

<Feature AF group> (A period during which the current mode is notified and a period during which the current mode is not notified are provided, and even during the non-notification periods, the current mode can be known by button operation.)
A gaming machine AF1 has a mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of presentation modes, a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation corresponding to the presentation mode set by the mode setting means, a presentation mode notification means capable of notifying the presentation mode set by the mode setting means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the presentation mode notification means notifies information indicating the presentation mode set by the mode setting means when the operation determination means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. According to the gaming machine AF1, a period during which the presentation mode is notified and a period during which the presentation mode is not notified are set, and the presentation mode can be notified based on the operation on the operation means even during the period during which the presentation mode is not notified. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means in order to understand the presentation mode. In this case, when the second period is not being operated on the operation means, it is preferable to configure the display device to notify other information related to the game, for example, to notify the dynamic display speed of the identification information or suggestive information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. In this way, during the second period, the player can select the game information he or she desires based on the player's operation on the operation means.

<Feature AG group> (Step up the button vibration)
The gaming machine AG1 is characterized by having an operating means operable by a player, an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, a vibration means capable of vibrating the operating means, a vibration amount varying means capable of varying the amount of vibration with which the operating means is vibrated to different vibration amounts, a period setting means for setting a variable period during which the vibration amount varying means can vary the amount of vibration based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable period has been set by the period setting means. According to the gaming machine AG1, a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the amount of vibration of the operating means is variable, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

<Feature AH Group> (The color of the button indicates the speed of the pattern change)
A gaming machine AH1 comprising: a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operation means operable by a player, an operation discrimination means for discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, an operation performance execution means for discriminating that a predetermined performance has been executed based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a mode changing means for changing the mode of the operation means, wherein the mode changing means changes the mode when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. According to the gaming machine AH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped from the mode of the operation means.

<Feature AI Group> (The background changes depending on the combination of the stopping symbols)
A gaming machine AI1 having a discrimination means for performing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying an identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, a stop display means for displaying the identification information in a specific display mode when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means, the stop display means being capable of displaying a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, a performance mode changing means for changing a performance mode based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means, and a performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode changed by the performance mode changing means. According to the gaming machine A11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode. In this case, it is preferable to configure the stop display mode so that the player can select the stop display mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop display mode. Specifically, it is preferable that the player can select one of a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operating means that the player can operate.

<Feature AJ group> (Prevention of early detection during preparatory drive of role operation)
A gaming machine AJ1 comprising a display means for executing a predetermined presentation display, a presentation display control means for making the display means execute the presentation display based on a predetermined presentation scenario, a moving means for executing a predetermined presentation operation, a presentation operation control means for making the moving means execute the presentation operation based on the predetermined presentation scenario, and a presentation scenario setting means for setting one presentation scenario from a plurality of presentation scenarios as the presentation scenario, the moving means being configured to be movable at least from a first position to a second position different from the first position, a preparation movement control means for executing a preparation movement for moving the moving means to an initial position of the presentation operation, and the preparation movement control means executing the preparation movement before the presentation display is executed by the presentation display control means based on the presentation scenario. According to the gaming machine AJ1, by performing the preparation movement in advance, a presentation based on the presentation scenario can be reliably executed. Furthermore, since the preparation movement control is configured to be performed separately from the presentation operation based on the presentation scenario, the preparation movement can be performed in either case of the presentation operation being executed or not executed, so that even if the moving means performs the preparation movement, it is difficult for the player to know whether the presentation operation will be executed or not.

<Feature AK group> (Replace the look-ahead results according to the operation status of the reels)
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the determination made by the determination means; and a bonus being awarded when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the gaming machine comprising: an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a determination means for executing a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the determination made by the determination means; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number until the determination is made on the information; a pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the storage means before dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started; a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of a specific performance based on a result of the pre-determination made by the pre-determination means; a specific performance execution means for executing the specific performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means at a specific timing; and a performance mode replacement means for setting a replacement performance mode different from the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means as the performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means when a specific condition is established at a timing when the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance. According to the gaming machine AK1, the performance mode set based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means can be replaced with a replacement performance mode, so that a performance according to the situation can be executed and the performance effect can be improved. In this case, it is preferable to use the movable mode of the movable means capable of moving within a predetermined range as the performance mode that can be set by the performance mode setting means, and to replace the performance mode by the performance mode replacement means based on the position information of the movable means. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means is obtained as a position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, it is preferable to configure the performance mode replacement means to set a performance mode that does not use the movable means, for example, a performance mode that uses only the display means, as the replacement performance mode. In addition, by providing a movement control means that moves the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate, and using the above-mentioned technical idea in a gaming machine with improved performance effect, the effect of the performance mode replacement means is more prominent.

<Feature AL group> (Setting the timing of the demo operation valid period varies depending on the game state)
a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which a first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and a second game state in which a second period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the game state setting means being capable of setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is established in a state in which the dynamic display execution means is not executing dynamic display of the identification information; The gaming machine AL1 has an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on a stage, an operation performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period during which the operation discrimination means can effectively discriminate that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the valid period setting means sets a start timing of the valid period so that the period from when the standby state is set to when the valid period is set is longer when the second period is set by the game state setting means than when the first period is set. According to the gaming machine AL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for effectively discriminating an operation on the operation means can be made different depending on the set game state, so that it is possible to prevent an operation from being carelessly performed. In addition, when a notification means for notifying a player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to prevent the notification means from being frequently notified. In addition, it is preferable to configure the determination by the discrimination means to be easily performed while the second game state is set. This makes it possible to make the second game state a more advantageous game state than the first game state. In this case, even if a standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be ended in a short period of time.

Among the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, which is equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine uses balls as a gaming medium, and is configured to require a predetermined number of balls when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-217766 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises an operating means that can be operated by a player, an operation discrimination means that can discern that a specified operation has been performed on the operating means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operating means, a vibration amount varying means that can vary the amount of vibration with which the operating means is vibrated to different vibration amounts, a period setting means that sets a variable period during which the vibration amount varying means can vary the vibration amount based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a suggestive effect execution means that executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable period has been set by the period setting means.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine has an operating means that can be operated by a player, an operation discrimination means that can discern that a specified operation has been performed on the operating means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operating means, a vibration amount varying means that can vary the amount of vibration with which the operating means is vibrated to different vibration amounts, a period setting means that sets a variable period during which the vibration amount varying means can vary the vibration amount based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a suggestive effect execution means that executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable period has been set by the period setting means.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

10 Pachinko machines (amusement machines)

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area;
A first ball entry means through which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball;
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether a game has been completed based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
a means for generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result;
A second ball entry means, which is different from the first ball entry means, and which allows the game balls launched by the launching means to enter the ball entry means;
a displacement means capable of displacing between a first position where it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first position;
a displacement control means capable of at least executing a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the first position to the second position;
the displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control;
The gaming machine includes:
When a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be capable of generating at least a first mode based on the judgment being executed by the judgment means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

Images